M and e Specification

PACKAGE 3
PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY, PAKISTAN
PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONSULTANT
VOL III C & D

AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(C & A – 3, DECEMBER 2010)
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORKS
TENDER 16 Nov 2009
PRINCIPAL CONSULTANTS
ASSOCIATE CONSULTANTS
Arcop (Pvt) Ltd
6C, Sunset Commercial Street No. 4
Phase IV, D.H.A. Karachi, Pakistan
Mushtaq & Bilal Consulting Engineers

304, Noor Estate, Sharae Faisal,
Karachi-75350, Pakistan
S. Mehboob & Company Consulting Engineers

th
Suite #5, 4 Floor, Dean Arcade
Clifton, Block 8, Karachi-75600, Pakistan
BENAZIR BHUTTO INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT
Package 3 - Passenger Terminal Building
Volume III (C & D)
AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORKS (C & A - 3)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SUMMARY OF AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
a) MECHANICAL WORKS
b) ELECTRICAL WORKS
c) CODES & STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS (APPENDIX A)
2. AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - MECHANICAL WORKS

(SUBSTITUTED PAGES)
3. AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL WORKS

(SUBSTITUTED PAGES)
PACKAGE 3 - PTB
VOL III C & D
SUMMARY OF AMENDMENTS TO
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(C & A - 3, December 2010)
Benazir Bhutto International Airport
Mechanical
S/No Reference Description
Specification
1. Content pages are changed Content Page /1 is replaced with Content Page /1 (C&A-3).
Content Page /2 is replaced with Content Page /2 (C&A-3).
2. Amended in specification. Section 14400: Lift
 page no. MTS/144000/1 to MTS/144000/23 replaced
with MTS/144000/1 (C&A-3) to MTS/144000/24 (C&A-
3)
3. Amended in specification. Section 221319:Sanitary waste piping specialties
 page no. MTS/221319/1 is replaced with
MTS/221319/1 (C&A-3)
MTS/221319/2 (C&A-3)
4. Amended in specification. Section 220573: Facility Drainage Manholes

MTS/220573/1 (C&A-3)
MTS/220573/2 (C&A-3)
5. Amended in specification. Section 213000: Fire Pump

MTS/213000/1 (C&A-3).
MTS/213000/2 (C&A-3).
MTS/213000/3 (C&A-3).
MTS/213000/4 (C&A-3).
MTS/213000/5 (C&A-3).
MTS/213000/6 (C&A-3)
6. Amended in specification. Section 210500: Common work Result For Fire Suppression
MTS/210500/1 (C&A-3).
MTS/210500/2 (C&A-3).
MTS/210500/3 (C&A-3).
MTS/210500/4 (C&A-3).
C&A-3/ME/1
7. Amended in specification. Section 220700: Plumbing Insulation
MTS/220700/1 (C&A-3).
MTS/220700/2 (C&A-3).
8. Amended in specification. Section220548: Vibration and Seismic Controls For Plumbing

piping and Equipment
 page no.MTS/220548/1 to MTS/220548/8 are
replaced with MTS/220548/1 (C&A-3) to
MTS/220548/5 (C&A-3).
9. Amended in specification. SECTION 210553: Identification For Fire Suppression Piping

and Equipment
MTS/210553/11 (C&A-3).
10. Amended in specification. SECTION 220140: Identification For Fire Suppression Piping
and Equipment
 page no.MTS/220140/1 (C&A-1) is replaced with
MTS/220140/1 (C&A-3) .
 page no.MTS/220140/2 is replaced with
MTS/220140/2 (C&A-3) .
MTS/220140/3 (C&A-3) .
MTS/220140/4 (C&A-3) .

11. Amended in specification. SECTION 220516: Expansion Fittings and Loops For Plumbing
piping
 page no.MTS/220516/1 (C&A-1) is replaced with
MTS/220516/1 (C&A-3) .
MTS/220516/2 (C&A-3) .
MTS/220516/3 (C&A-3) .
MTS/220516/4 (C&A-3) .
13. Amended in specification. SECTION 223300: Electric Domestic water heater

MTS/223300/1 (C&A-3)
MTS/223300/2 (C&A-3)
14. Amended in specification SECTION 233413: Axial HVAC Fans

 The whole volume is replaced as (C&A-3)
C&A-3/ME/2
15. Amended in specification SECTION 233416: Centrifugal HVAC Fans
16. Amended in specification SECTION 237313: AHU

17. Amended in specification SECTION 238123: CRAC

18. Amended in specification SECTION 143100: Escalator

MTS/143100/17 (C&A-3)
19. Amended in specification SECTION 143200: Moving Walk

MTS/143200/17 (C&A-3)
20. Amended in specification SECTION 236513: Cooling Tower

MTS/236513/6 (C&A-3)
21. Amended in specification SECTION 235233: Hot Water Boiler

22. Amended in specification SECTION 236416: Centrifugal Water Chiller

 page no.MTS/236416/1 (C&A-2) to MTS/236416/17
(C&A2) are replaced with MTS/236416/1 (C&A-3) to
MTS/236416/17 (C&A-3)
23. New added specification SECTION 235719:Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger
 page no.MTS/235719/1 (C&A-3) to MTS/235719/1
(C&A-3)
24. Amendment in specification SECTION 231123: Facility Natural –Gas piping

MTS/231123/9 (C&A-3)
25. Amendment in specification SECTION 233516: Smoke Venting System

MTS/233516/9 (C&A-3)
26. Amendment in specification SECT 23 05 00 - Common Work Results For HVAC

C&A-3/ME/3
27. Amendment in specification SECT 23 36 16 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS
Drawings :
1. C&A-3 drawings shall supersede all previous issued drawings. Contractor shall use C&A-3 drawings
for the submission of the tender price.
Bill of Quantities :
1. C&A-3 Bill of Quantities shall supersede all previous issued Bill of Quantities. Contractor shall use
C&A-3 Bill of Quantities for the submission of the tender price.
C&A-3/ME/4
Summary of Changes for C&A-3

Electrical
S/No Reference Description
Specification
1. Content pages are changed Content Page /1 is replaced with Content Page /1(C&A-3).
Content Page /2 is replaced with Content Page /2(C&A-3).
2. Section 018926: Site Electrical Utilities Performance
Amended in specification. Requirements
 page no. ETS/018926/1 is replaced with
ETS/018926/1(C&A-3)
ETS/018926/11(C&A-3)
ETS/018926/20(C&A-3)
3. Section 260513 - 12kv Underground Power Cables, Auxiliary
Cables And Accessories
Amended in specification.
ETS/260513/3(C&A-3)
ETS/260513/26(C&A-3)
4. Section 260519: Low Tension Main cables, Submain and
Final distribution cable
The specification for Busducts is
added
ETS/260519/3(C&A-3), ETS/260519/4(C&A-3),
ETS/260519/5(C&A-3) and ETS/260519/6(C&A-3)
5. Section 261213: Silicon Oil-Filled Medium Voltage
Transformer
Amended in specification.  page no. ETS/261213/1 is replaced with
ETS/261213/1(C&A-3).

ETS/261213/4(C&A-3).

ETS/261213/5(C&A-3).
6. Section 261313: 12kv Medium Voltage Switchgear And
Accessories
ETS/261313/1(C&A-3).

ETS/261313/3(C&A-3).
The specification for Execution  page no. ETS/261313/5 is replaced with

is added ETS/261313/5(C&A-3).
C&A3/EE/1
ETS/261313/26(C&A-3), ETS/261313/27(C&A-3),
ETS/261313/28(C&A-3), ETS/261313/29(C&A-3) and
ETS/261313/30(C&A-3).
7. Section 262400: Low Tension Switchboard And Distribution

Board
ETS/262400/4(C&A-3).

ETS/262400/10(C&A-3).
8. Section263323: Central Battery Equipment
ETS/263323/2(C&A-3).

ETS/263323/3(C&A-3).

ETS/263323/4(C&A-3).
9. Section 265100: Interior Lighting

ETS/265100/2(C&A-3).
Adding the specification for
Luminaire Type L22, L23 & L24.  page no. ETS/265100/13, ETS/265100/14 and
ETS/265100/15 is replaced with ETS/265100/13(C&A-
3), ETS/265100/14(C&A-3), ETS/265100/15(C&A-3)
and ETS/265100/16(C&A-3).
10. Section 27I000: Structured Cable Network
Amended in specification.  page no. ETS/271000/1 to page no. ETS/271000/77 is
replaced with page no. ETS/271000/1(C&A-3) to
page no. ETS/271000/74(C&A-3).
11. Section 337983: Site Grounding Conductors

ETS/337983/1(C&A-3).

ETS/337983/2(C&A-3).
12. Section 481126: Standby Diesel Generating Set
ETS/481126/1(C&A-3).

ETS/481126/2(C&A-3).

ETS/481126/7(C&A-3).
C&A3/EE/2
ETS/481126/8(C&A-3).

ETS/481126/17(C&A-3).

ETS/481126/19(C&A-3).

ETS/481126/22(C&A-3).

ETS/481126/24(C&A-3).

ETS/481126/29(C&A-3).

ETS/481126/34(C&A-3).
13. Amendment to Codes & Refer to Appendix A.
Standards in Tender
Specification.
Drawings :
1. C&A-3 drawings shall supersede all previous issued drawings. Contractor shall use C&A-3
drawings for the submission of the tender price.
Bill of Quantities :
1. C&A-3 Bill of Quantities shall supersede all previous issued Bill of Quantities. Contractor shall
use C&A-3 Bill of Quantities for the submission of the tender price.
C&A3/EE/3
Appendix A
Amendment to Codes & Standards in Tender Specification
A Section 260513 - 12 KV Underground Power Cables, Auxiliary cables and Accessories
Existing standard in C&A 2 Standard to be replaced in C&A 3 Remarks
1 Rated voltage of HV Rated voltage of HV cables is The rated voltage of
cables is 12KV 15KV MV cables shall be
15KV as in according to
WAPDA requirement.
2 IEC-502 IEC-60502
B Section 260519 - Low Tension Main Cables, Submain and Final Distribution Cables
1 IEC 331 IEC 60331
2 IEC 332 IEC 60332-3
3 IEC 754 IEC 60754
4 IEC 228 IEC 60228
5 Phase conductor cable Phase conductor cable colour
colour code is Red, Yellow code shall be Brown, Black and
and Blue Grey as accordance to
BS7671:2008
C Section 260533 - Cables Trunking and Conduits

1 BS 7671:2001 BS 7671:2008
D Section 260536 - Cable Tray and Cable Ladder

1 BS 7671:2001 BS 7671:2008
E Section 260539 - Underfloor Trunking System

1 BS 7671:2001 BS 7671:2008
F Section 261313 - 12KV Medium Voltage Switch Gear and Accessories

1 IEC 60056-1 to IEC 60056-6 IEC 62271-100
2 IEC 60129 IEC 62271-102
G Section 262400 - Low Tension Switchboard and Distribution Board

1 IEC 898 IEC 60898
2 IEC 947 IEC 60947
3 IEC 439 IEC 60439
4 IEC 251 IEC 60051
5 IEC 1000 IEC 61000
6 IEC 255 IEC 60255
7 IEC 529 IEC 60529
C&A3/EE/4
Appendix A
Amendment to Codes & Standards in Tender Specification
H Section 264613 - Lightning Protection System

1 BS 6651 BS EN 62305
C&A3/EE/5
PACKAGE 3 - PTB
VOL III C
AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(C & A - 3, December 2010)
MECHANICAL WORKS
THE CONSTRUCTION OF BENAZIR BHUTTO INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
PROJECT
Content Page
Scope of Works
Technical Specifications
Section 018919 Site Plumbing Utilities Performance Requirements MTS/018919/1 -

MTS/018919/8
Section 018923 Site HVAC Utilities Performance Requirements MTS/018923/1 -

MTS/018923/8
Section 143100 Escalators MTS/143100/1 -

MTS/143100/16
(C&A-3)
Section 143200 Moving Walks MTS/143200/1 -
MTS/143200/17
(C&A-3)
Section 144000 Lifts MTS/144000/1 -
MTS/144000/23
(C&A-3)
Section 210500 Common Work Results For Fire Suppression MTS/210500/1 -
MTS/210500/4
(C&A-3)
Section 210553 Identification For Fire-Suppression Piping And Equipment MTS/210553/1 -
MTS/210553/6
(C&A-3 )
Section 211226 Fire-Suppression Valve And Hose Cabinets MTS/211226/1 -
MTS/211226/2
Section 211300 Fire-Suppression Sprinkler System MTS/211300/1 -

MTS/211300/3
Section 212000 Fire Extinguishing Systems MTS/212000/1 -

MTS/212000/1
Section 212200 Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems MTS/212200/1 -

MTS/212200/12
Section 213000 Fire Pumps MTS/213000/1 -

MTS/213000/6
(C&A-3)
Section 220140 Operation and Maintenance Of Plumbing Equipment MTS/220140/1 -
MTS/220140/4
(C&A-3)
Section 220500 Common Work Results For Plumbing MTS/220500/1 -
MTS/220500/3
(C&A-3)
Section 220516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping MTS/220516/1 -
MTS/220516/4
(C&A-3)
Section 220523 General-Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping MTS/220523/1 -
1 (C&A-3)
MTS/220523/2
Section 220529 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping Equipment MTS/220529/1 -
MTS/220529/2
Section 220548 Vibration And Seismic Controls For Plumbing Piping And MTS/220548/1 -
Equipment MTS/220548/7
(C&A-3)
Section 220553 Identification For Plumbing Piping and Equipment MTS/220553/1 -

MTS/220553/2
Section 220573 Facility Drainage Manholes MTS/220573/1 -

MTS/220573/2
(C&A-3)
Section 220576 Facility Drainage Piping Cleanouts MTS/220576/1 -
MTS/220576/2
Section 220700 Plumbing Insulation MTS/220700/1 -

MTS/220700/2
(C&A-3)
Section 220800 Commissioning Of Plumbing MTS/220800/1 -
MTS/220800/4
Section 221123 Domestic Water Pumps MTS/221123/1 -

MTS/221123/5
Section 221316 Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping MTS/221316/1 -

MTS/221316/1
Section 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties MTS/221319/1 -

MTS/221319/2
(C&A-3)
Section 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping MTS/221413/1 -
MTS/221413/1
Section 221426 Facility Storm Drains MTS/221416/1 -

MTS/221416/1
Section 221429 Sump Pumps MTS/221429/1 -

MTS/221429/2
Section 223300 Electric Domestic Water Heaters MTS/223300/1 -

MTS/223300/2
(C&A-3)
Section 230500 Common Work Result for HVAC MTS/230500/1 -
MTS/230500/24
(C&A-1)
Section 230516 Expansion Fittings And Loops For HVAC Piping MTS/230516/1 -
MTS/230516/4
(C&A-1)
Section 230519 Meters And Gages For HVAC Piping MTS/230519/1 -
MTS/230519/4
Section 230523 General Duty Valves For HVAC Piping MTS/230523/1 -

MTS/230523/4
2 (C&A-3)
Section 230548 Vibration & Seismic Control MTS/230548/1 -
MTS/230548/7
Section 230553 Identification For HVAC Piping And Equipment MTS/230553/1 -

MTS/230553/1
MTS/230593/1 -
Section 230593 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC MTS/230593/7
Section 230913 Instrumentation And Control Device For HVAC MTS/230913/1 -

MTS/230913/3
Section 230933 Electric And Electronic Control System For HVAC MTS/230933/1 -
MTS/230933/8
Section 231123 Facility Natural-Gas

Electric Piping Control System For HVAC
And Electronic MTS/231123/1 -MTS/230
MTS/231123/8 MTS/230
(C&A-3)
Section 232113 Hydronic Piping MTS/230933/1 -
MTS/230933/10
Section 232123 Hydronic Pumps MTS/232123/1 -

MTS/232123/4
Section 232500 HVAC Water Treatment MTS/232500/1 -

MTS/232500/10
Section 233113 Rectangular Duct MTS/233113/1 -

MTS/233113/11
Section 233200 Air Plenums And Chases MTS/233200/1 -

MTS/233200/1
Section 233313 Dampers MTS/233313/1 -

MTS/233313/2
Section 233413 Axial HAVC Fans MTS/233413/1 -

MTS/233313/3
(C&A-3)
Section 233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans MTS/233416/1 -
MTS/233316/2
(C&A-3)
Section 233516 Smoke Venting System MTS/233516/1 -
MTS/233516/9
(C&A-3)
Section 233616 Variable Air Volume Units MTS/233616/1 -

MTS/233616/2
Section 233713 Diffusers, Registers And Grilles MTS/233713/1 -

MTS/233713/4
Section 233813 Commercial – Kitchen Hoods MTS/233813/1 -
3 (C&A-3)
MTS/233813/1
Section 234116 Renewable – Media Air Filters MTS/234116/1 -

MTS/234116/3
Section 234119 Washable Air Filters MTS/234119/1 -

MTS/234119/4
Section 234123 Extended Surface Filters MTS/234123/1 -

MTS/234123/4
Section 234133 High – Efficiency Particulate Filtration MTS/234133/1 -

MTS/234133/3
Section 236223 Package Water-Cooled Refrigerant Compressor And MTS/236223/1 -

Condenser Units MTS/236223/3
Section 236413 Direct-Fired Absorption Water Chiller (Superseded) MTS/236413/1 -

MTS/236413/2
Section 236513 Cooling Tower MTS/236513/1 -

MTS/236513/6
(C&A-3)
Section 237313 AHU MTS/237313/1 -
MTS/237313/5
(C&A-3)
Section 238123 CRAC MTS/238123/1 -
MTS/238123/10
(C&A-3)
Section 238219 Fan Coil Units MTS/2382191 -
MTS/238219/5
Section 255000 Integrated Building Management System MTS/255000/1 -

MTS/255000/62
Section 235233 Hot Water Boiler MTS/235233/1

(C&A-3) -
MTS/235233/
13(C&A-3)
Section 236416 Centrifugal Water Chillers MTS/236416/1

(C&A-3) -
MTS/236416/
17(C&A-3)
Section 235719 Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers MTS/235719/1-

MTS/235719/3
(C&A-3)
4 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 14: CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 143100 ESCALATORS
SECTION 143100 – ESCALATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
i) Read and conform to all Electrical Sections of these specifications. The

general instructions for Electrical Division, Section 018926 apply to and
form part of all Electrical Sections.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
i) Conform to the requirements specified elsewhere in these documents.
ii) Submit shop drawings for all equipment supplied under this Division,
including dimension layouts, schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams for
components for Employer approval.
iii) Provide additional copies of shop drawings at the Employer's request, for
other Divisions or Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
iv) Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the materials and equipment being
supplied, details of construction, finish, accurate dimensions, capacities
all performance. Drawings shall be certified correct and „For Construction‟
by the manufacturer before submission.
v) Check and sign all copies of each shop drawing before submission,
indicating that it conforms to the requirements of the specifications and
drawings, and that it has been properly coordinated with related
equipment, whether supplied under this or other Divisions. Indicate
comments, corrections and changes in green.
vi) Each shop drawing for non-catalogue items shall be prepared specifically
for this work. Brochures submitted for catalogue items shall be
accompanied by a 'parts list', detailing all items proposed to be used, and
be marked to specifically indicate the items to be supplied.
vii) Unless specific written permission is given, do not begin fabrication or
installation, until shop drawings are approved.
viii) Shop drawings shall be provided in the form of one (1) reproducible copy
and four (4) prints for review. Three (3) additional prints shall be provided
once comments have been made for record. The drawings shall have
sufficient space in the front for all Employers' and Contractors' "review"
stamps.
ix) All shop drawings shall be produced on AutoCAD 2007 or later.
x) All drawings are to be prepared in ample time for review and

implementation. Failure to do so, and any problems that arise, shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor.
MTS/143100/1 (C&A-3)
1.3 SCOPE OF WORKS
i) The scope of work shall cover the design of equipment, supply,

manufacture, testing in the factory, packing, insurance, delivery to site,
unloading, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance during
defect liability period of all components with all the necessary
accessories in accordance with this technical specification.
ii) Earthquake control, fire alarm and interfacing of escalators with lift
management system shall be provided.
iii) Coordinate with Architectural contractor for architectural work and ensure
quality compliance to avoid problem during escalator installation.
iv) Coordinate with Civil contractor for structural & civil works and ensure
quality compliance to avoid problem during escalator installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Standard dimension – Escalator 3 flat steps
 Use : Passenger.
 Capacity : 6750 persons / hr.
 Speed : 30 mpm.
 Angle of inclination : 30 degree
 Vertical rise : 6000 mm.
 Walkway Concrete Opening: 15672 mm.
 Balustrade : Transparent tempered glass.
 Handrail color : Black
 Handrail light : Nil.
 Handrail guide : Hairline stainless steel.
 Deck & Skirt panel : Hairline stainless steel.
 Operation system : Key switch reversible operation system.
 Step treads board : Hairline stainless steel.
 Comb & Floor plate : Etched stainless steel.
 Flat Step : 3 top & bottom.
 Pit depth : 1100 mm
 Step width : 800 mm.
 Step color : Black.
 Power source : AC 380/415V – 3 phase 50 Hz.
 Lighting : AC 220V – 1 phase 50 Hz.
Standard dimension – Escalator 3 flat steps
 Capacity : 9000 persons / hr.
 Speed : 30 mpm.
MTS/143100/2 (C&A-3)

 Vertical rise : 6000 mm.
 Walkway Concrete Opening: 15672 mm.
 Balustrade : Transparent tempered glass.
 Handrail color : Black
 Handrail guide : Hairline stainless steel.
 Deck & Skirt panel : Hairline stainless steel.
 Operation system : Key switches reversible operation
system.
 Step treads board : Hairline stainless steel.
 Comb & Floor plate : Etched stainless steel.
 Flat Step : 3 top & bottom.
 Step width : 1000 mm.
 Step color : Black.
SAFETY DEVICE
 Start switch.
 Emergency stop switch
 Broken drive chain switch
 Skirt switch
 Handrails guide switch
 Broken step chain (Link) switch
 Step up thrust switch
 Over and under speed control
 Under step lighting
 Step demarcation line (Yellow synthetic resin insets)
 Disconnect switch
 Comb plate switch
 Magnetic Brake
 Auto stop and start (PLC & Sensor)
Maintenance Period: 12 months from the date of acceptance by the

owner
2.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. Manufacturer/Supplier: Shall provide escalators manufactured by

a firm with a minimum of ten (10) years of experience in
fabrication of escalators equivalent to those specified.
b. Installation: Escalators shall be installed by the manufacturer/

supplier.
c. Regulatory Requirements: Design and installation of escalators

system shall comply with the latest version of ASME A17.1 all
applicable local codes, EN_115.
MTS/143100/3 (C&A-3)
d. Permits and Inspections: The supplier shall provide all licenses

and permits and perform required inspections and tests to meet
all the requirements of the Building Authority in Islamabad.
e. Country of Origin: No Local components of any type shall be

acceptable at any stage of the project. The Country of Origin shall
be as listed in these specifications.
2.1.3 SUBMITTALS
i. Product Data. Submit manufacturer's product data for each

system proposed for use, including the following:
a. Electrical characteristics.
b. Opening and suspension holes for installation escalators
c. Building works for escalators
d. Building Safety Facilities.
ii Type and model of escalators, shop drawings, layout and detailed

drawings shall be submitted for Employer‟s approval.
iii Operation & maintenance Manuals: Provide 3 sets of

manufacturer‟s standard operation & maintenance Manuals.
iv Country of Origin Certificates
v Test reports including testing and commissioning of escalators at

site.
2.2 PRODUCTS
2.2.1 i) Acceptable Manufacturers
KONE, Thysseen, Schindler, Mitsubishi, Sigma, Hyundai or approved

equivalent
ii) Country of Origin
Japan, Western Europe and USA with acceptable manufacturers.
2.3 DESIGNS
2.3.1 Escalator design shall be such that no major repairs shall be necessary for a
period of 10 years or 100,000 hours from the date of acceptance assuming that
inspection and maintenance are carried out as necessary. Major repairs shall
consist of repairs due to causes other than those attributable to normal wear,
tear or ageing.
2.3.2 Escalator design shall give consideration to fire prevention, elimination of dust
trapping configurations and access for routine maintenance.
MTS/143100/4 (C&A-3)
2.3.3 In the case adjacent escalators, it shall be possible to remove or replace all
components of an escalator, without stopping or interfering with the operation of
the adjacent unit
2.3.4 All escalator components subject to corrosion shall be adequately protected

against corrosion by primed with anti-rust primer and painted. Drip pans on
interior or aerial escalators shall be designed to collect and drain off water or oil
which may enter through the landings, floor plates, and exposed portions of
escalators or from fire suppression systems.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
2.4.1 Each escalator shall be a self-contained unit consisting of truss, tracks, step
drive units, steps, step chains, comb plates, handrails, landing deck covers,
driving machine, controller, safety devices, balustrades and all other parts
required to provide a complete escalator.
2.4.2 In the installation of the escalators, allowance must be made for the structural
movements (expansion and contraction) of the building. The movements (mainly
contraction) may be as much as 50mm and the Sub-Contractor shall ensure that
these movements will not cause any deformation on any parts of the escalators.
2.4.3 Loads
 Rated Load. The rated load shall be based on a live load of 290 kg/m 2 of the
loading area, i.e. ( effective width of the escalator ) x (distance between
supports)
 Structural Load. For structural design purposes the calculation shall be based
on the dead weight of the escalator and a live load of 290 kg/m2.
The deflection of the escalator truss shall not be greater than 1/1000 of the
distance between supports.
 Step Load. Each individual step shall be designed to support a static load of
580 kg/m2.
2.5 TRUSS AND TRACKS
2.5.1 The truss shall be of structural steel lattice - type construction for easy inspection
of the interior of the escalator. It shall be designed for rigidity and be of ample
strength to carry the passenger loads, the mechanism of the escalator, the
balustrades and the weight of exterior covering. The upper section of the truss or
the center truss shall contain the drive machine and shall be provided with a trap
door.
2.5.2 The truss shall be supported at both ends and at intermediate supports from the
building structure on resilient supports and bearing plates. The provision of
bearing plates and resilient supports shall be included in this work. Distance
between the centre of the outermost intermediate supports and the edge of the
machinery spaces shall be at least 150mm. Support shall comprise bearing
plates and resilient supports design for static and dynamic loading as well as
prevention of transmission of noise and vibration to the building structure.
MTS/143100/5 (C&A-3)
2.5.3 The tracks shall be constructed of steel of proper rigidity
2.6 STEPS AND STEP CHAINS
2.6.1 The surface of the steps shall be horizontal at all positions exposed to the
passengers. The step frames shall be suitably reinforced and braced to carry the
step treads and the maximum load per step under eccentric loading condition
without distortion. The step frames and treads shall be non–flammable material
and preferably aluminum casting or stainless steel. The step riser shall be
smooth, and have a low coefficient of friction, or provided with vertical grooves.
Each step is provided with two rollers of minimum 75mm diameter with encased,
sealed-for-life ball bearings. The steps are interchangeable against each other.
They can easily be replaced without removal of skirt panels.
2.6.2 The step treads shall be of wear resistant with closely spaced cleats and black-
powder coated or black painted grooves designed to provide a secure foothold
and comfortable standing surface, especially for narrow heels.
2.6.3 The left and right edges and the rear sides of each step shall be marked with
yellow demarcation cleats to assist passengers in riding the moving sidewalks
correctly and safely. Approved skirt brushes side shall be provided.
2.6.4 The step chains shall be of the endless roller type located on each side of the
steps. The chains shall be made of high grade steel with hardened pins and
accurate rollers designed to accurately engage the drive sprockets to ensure
smooth operation. The step chain shall be provided with an automatic
tensioning device to maintain proper tension of the step chains under varying
load conditions. The chain tensioning device is easily accessible at the lower end
of the escalator after lifting off the landing plates. The tensioning shaft is kept
parallel by ball-prismatic guides. In case of excessive elongation or breaking of
the step chains, the escalator is automatically stopped by safety switches. Those
switches are provided with a mechanical lock.
2.6.5 To enhance safety and environmental protection the escalators shall be

equipped with a step chain which eliminates the need of regular lubrication
(lubrication free type). The step chain axles, pins and bushes shall be lifetime
lubricated and suitably protected and sealed against ingress of dust, dirt etc. to
achieve a lifetime of minimum 8 years.
2.6.6 Three flat steps shall be provided at each end of the escalators.
2.7 COMBPLATES
2.7.1 A non-flammable etched stainless steel comb plate of the sectional type with
plastic comb edges shall be provided at the top and bottom landings of each
escalator. The comb plate teeth shall properly mesh with the cleats on the step
treads. It shall be made in sections so that a section can be easily replaced
without the use of special tools.
2.7.2 A safety device shall be provided which is individually actuated by each

individual comb segment and shall stop the escalator if any foreign bodies jam
between the tread grooves and the comb segment.
MTS/143100/6 (C&A-3)
2.8 LANDING PLATES
The portion of landing at each end of the escalator immediately above any
mechanism shall be provided with removable landing etched stainless steel plate
with anti slip pattern to give access to the driving mechanism for maintenance
purposes. These landing plates shall cover the entire area of the landings within
the confines of the escalator truss arranged to receive the finished flooring and
shall be supported on the truss. Landing plates shall harmonize with the comb
plates. Landing plate‟s frame shall be stainless steel. These landing plates shall
be constructed of fire resistant materials.
2.9 BALUSTRADES
2.9.1 Balustrades of the extended newel type shall be provided on each side of the
steps. It is an all glass balustrade with vertically arranged panels, without supports.
The height of the balustrade is 950 mm over the entire length of the escalator. The
glass panels are separated into various sections which are assembled so as to be
impact and vibration-free. The individual panels neatly meet each other without
cover strips. The joints are arranged vertically to the handrails. The balustrade
cladding (inner and outer decking near the skirting) is made of stainless steel
profiles with minimum 1.5mm thickness.
2.9.2 The balustrades shall consist of deck-boards, inner panelling, skirt panels, lighting
materials and finish as hereinafter specified.
 Deck boards :stainless steel, hairline finished
 Inner Paneling : toughened safety glass, thickness 10 mm
 Skirt Panels : stainless steel, hairline finished
 Exterior panels: stainless steel cladding to Architectural Details
2.9.3 The skirt panel shall be designed to reduce the risk of entrapment and the material
shall be scratch and impact resistant and shall have extremely low coefficient of
friction. The clearance on either side of the steps between the steps and the
skirting shall not be more than 4mm and the sum of the clearances on both sides
shall not be more than 7mm.
2.9.4 For the safety of the passenger, safety strips shall be mounted on the skirting on
the both sides of the steps to prevent shoes or other materials from being caught
within the clearance between the skirting and the steps. The safety strip shall
protrude outwards from the skirting by not less than 25mm. It shall be mounted in
easily replaceable sections to form a continuous strip at 10mm above the noseline
of the steps. The strip shall be in form of soft fibred durable brushes which is
aesthetically pleasant.
2.10 HANDRAILS
2.10.1 Each balustrade shall be provided with a smooth and continuous handrail
moving in the same direction and at the same speed as the steps.
MTS/143100/7 (C&A-3)
2.10.2 The handrails shall be of the slim line traction type and provided with a tension
device. The handrail shall be free of elongation so that frequent re-tensioning will
not be necessary.
2.10.3 The handrails shall be constructed of rubber covered canvas suitably reinforced
and made endless with smoothly vulcanized joints. The handrails shall specially
formed guides except when in contact driving sheaves.
2.10.4 Hand or finger guards shall be provided at the point where the handrail enters the
balustrade.
2.10.5 Color of handrails shall be to Employer‟s approval.
2.11 DRIVE MACHINE, MOTOR AND CONTROLLER
2.11.1 Each escalator shall be independently driven.
2.11.2 The machine shall be designed to meet the most severe conditions of escalator
service. The drive system with variable speed drive unit shall be of high
efficiency and designed especially for escalator operation. It shall be located
within the escalator step band, at the upper end of the escalator or centre truss.
The chain sprockets of the step band and the handrail driving wheels are
directly driven by special designed escalator gear with an electric motor, flange
mounted at the gearbox. The motor torque is directly transmitted by a high
efficient reduction gear (min. approx. 95% efficiency). The protection class of
the electric motor shall be IP 55. The gear oil change intervals shall be at least
30,000 hr. The motor shall be of ample capacity and rated to continuously
operate the escalator efficiently, quietly and smoothly under all conditions of
load as specified. Motor shall be drip proof with Class 'F' insulation.
2.11.3 Power factor correction capacitors shall be included in all the equipment supplied
to achieve at the operating point a power factor of not less than 0.85. The Sub-
Contractor shall provide all the relevant test equipment to test the power factor as
specified above to the satisfaction of the Employer‟s for that equipment which
does not have power factor indicators.
2.11.4 All motors shall be of high efficiency type with a minimum efficiency of 95% for the
running speed range of 50% to 100% full load speed of the motor. The motor
shall have a high power factor in the range of 0.85 to 1.0 for all operating points.
2.11.5 The machine shall be capable of being removed intact from the truss
2.11.6 Each escalator shall be provided with braking compiling to local code that is
spring actuated and electrically held off. The brake shall automatically bring
the escalator to a halt at very constant retardation whenever the power is
interrupted, a stop button is pressed, or any of the safety devices operate. The
brake stopping distance shall be long enough to prevent persons from falling or
being thrown to the floor.
2.11.7 The springs used to apply brake shoes shall be in compression and adequately
supported.
2.11.8 The starting current shall be limited to 3 times the nominal current. Starting
must take place with a “soft start” device.
MTS/143100/8 (C&A-3)
2.11.9 The escalator must be designed in such a manner that it can be operated at 2
different speeds:
 Contract Speed : 0.5 m/s

 Standby Speed : 0.2 m/s
2.11.10 The escalators shall be equipped with an energy saving device which allows
to operate the escalator at a slower stand-by speed (0.2m/s) when not used
by passengers. The escalator shall accelerate to nominal speed (0.65m/s) as
soon as passengers are detected by means of sensors. Sensors shall be
located on the ceiling or in the newel ends or at the landing plates. These
shall be subjected to the Employer‟s approval. The control system shall be
design such that the standby speed can be varied.
2.11.11 Each controller shall be provided to control the starting direction and stopping
of the escalator motor and to bring the escalator to rest in the event of the
operation of any of the safety devices or should the power fails from any
cause or through normal shutdown.
2.11.12 Controllers shall be totally enclosed in drip proof metal cabinets with hinged
doors; lock and door interlocked mains isolators and neatly finished in gloss
enamel. The cabinet shall be removable from the top machine room for
service and maintenance purposes. Non combustible material shall be used
for controller panels and their support frame.
2.11.13 Fusible cut-out shall be so placed and constructed that the bowling of a fuse
shall not cause short circuit between adjacent conductors. Control circuits
shall be protected by fuses or equivalent means independent of the
protection for the main circuits.
2.11.14 No control system shall depend upon the completion or maintenance of an

electric circuit for the interruption of the power supply to the driving machinery
or brake.
2.11.15 All control circuits shall be designed to fail to safety.
2.11.16 Electrical interlocking shall be provided where necessary to ensure that

relays and contactors operate in proper sequence.
2.11.17 The insulation of the controller wiring shall be of flame retardant type.
2.11.18 All wires shall be terminated by soldering or clamping in such a way that the
wires are not damaged.
2.11.19 Accessible terminals, suitably marked, shall be provided for connection of

incoming and outgoing cables.
2.12 SAFETY FACTORS
2.12.1 The factor of safety used in the design of the escalator trusses shall be not less
than 3. The truss shall be designed that it will retain the steps and running gear if
the track systems fail to support them. Provision shall be made to retain all tension
weights in the truss if they become loose.
MTS/143100/9 (C&A-3)
2.12.2 Tracks shall be so arranged as to prevent displacement of the steps and running
gear if a step chain breaks. The factor of safety of tracks and step frames shall not
be less than 3
2.12.3 The factor of safety for driving machinery shall not be less than 8 for steel and
bronze parts, and 10 for cast iron parts.
2.12.4 Chains for the steps and chains or belts for transmission shall have a factor of
safety of not less 8, based on the loading of 290 kg / m2. Chains whose material of
construction is such that they would require periodical heat treatment shall not be
used.
2.13 OPERATION AND SAFETY SWITCHES
Operating and safety devices shall be provided conforming to the following

requirements:-
2.13.1 Starting Switches
Starting switches shall be provided at both ends of the escalator and shall be of
the key- operated spring off type. These switches shall be positioned so as to
enable the operator, when using the key, to see the escalator steps
These switches shall start or reverse the direction of travel of the escalator.
Running directions shall be clearly indicated on the switches.
There shall be no other means of starting provided.
2.13.2 Service switch
A main disconnect switch and fuses shall be provided within the top machinery
space. The switch shall be conspicuously and permanently marked, MAIN
SWITCH and shall be so located that it can be switched without passing over or
reaching over any part of the machinery. The opening of this switch shall cause
the electrical supply to be disconnected from the driving machine and operation
of the brake.
2.13.3 Emergency stop switches
Momentary pressure emergency stop switches having red buttons shall be

located in conspicuous and accessible positions at or near the top and bottom
landings of each escalator and shall be protected against accidental operation.
The operation of these switches shall interrupt the power to the driving machine
and activate the brake. It shall not be possible to start the driving machine by
these buttons.
2.13.4 Speed governor
A speed governor shall be provided which will cause the interruption of power to
the driving machine and cause the brake to be operated should the speed of the
steps exceed the rated speed by more 20%.
MTS/143100/10 (C&A-3)
The over speed governor is not required where the slip of the alternating current
squirrel cage induction driving motor, if used, does not exceed 10% and the
motor is directly connected to the driving machine.
2.13.5 Broken Step Chain and Drive Chain (if required)safety device
This device shall be incorporated as part of the tension carriage and will be
provided with switches, one for each chain. These safety switches easily
accessible, shall cause the interruption of electrical power to the driving machine
and shall cause the brake to be operated if a step chain or drive chain breaks, or
if the tension on either chain drops below or exceeds a predetermined value, or if
the motion chain is interrupted.
2.13.6 Non-reversing device
A device shall be incorporated to bring the escalator to rest automatically should

the direction of travel accidentally reversed whilst the escalator is operating in
the ascending direction.
2.13.7 Handrail safety switches
Micro switches shall be provided behind handrail safety guards where the
handrails enter the escalator newels to' interrupt the power supply to the
escalators in the event of an object entering the opening.
2.13.8 Step and skirt safety switches
Four micro switches in the skirting panels on each side of the escalator shall be
provided. These shall be located close to the upper and lower comb plate tips
and on the track system at the upper and lower landing curves. The escalator
shall stop should anyone of these switches be tripped. The switches shall be the
self-resetting type, but, if for any reason resetting is prevented after tripping, it
shall be impossible to start the escalator by the starting switch until the
obstructing medium is removed and resetting of the switch is permitted.
2.13.9 Comb plate safety device
A comb plate safety device shall be incorporated each at the upper and lower
comb plates which will cause the escalator to stop should any object become
wedged within the small clearance between the comb and the step.
2.13.10 Step Lowering Device
Should step lowers due to excessive load or breakage the step lowering device
shall be actuated. Two such contacts shall be provided near the top and bottom
reversing station so that the lowered step stops in front of the comb to prevent
further damage occurring.
2.13.11Broken Drive Device (if required)
Where the driving machine is connected to the main drive shaft by chains, a
device shall be provided which will cause the electrical supply to the motor to be
MTS/143100/11 (C&A-3)
disconnected and shall cause the normal brake, as well as the additional brake,
to be operated if the driving chains should fail.
2.14 MACHINERY SPACE
There shall be a permanent light, suitably protected, in every machinery space at

both the top and bottom of the escalator which can be switched without passing
over or reaching over any part of the machinery. A 3-pin socket outlet shall be
fitted adjacent to each of the light switch. Since all machinery space shall be
protected by sprinkler, all electrical components and equipment must be of water
resistant type complying with IP55.
2.15 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND WIRING
2.15.1 All, cables, trunking, conduit and conduit fittings necessary for the power, control
and lighting circuits shall be installed in accordance with the local code.
2.15.2 Each escalator truss, machine, motor and all other non-current carrying metal
parts and components of equipment shall be effectively earthed.
2.15.3 All electrical safety switches and controllers shall be enclosed to protect against
accidental contact.
2.16 LIGHTING
2.16.1 Circuits for footlights and machinery lighting and socket outlets shall be
independent of the power supply so that in the event of interruption of the power
supply the lighting circuits will remain alive. They shall be controlled by a
separate main switch and fuses.
2.16.2 Continuous Skirt Lighting, under step lighting at embarkation and disembarkation
location to illuminates step joints shall be provided.
2.16.3 Traffic flow light display mounted on the outer decking or newel shall provide
clear indication to passenger the escalator running direction.
2.17 NOISE AND VIBRATION
2.17.1 All equipment shall be designed to operate quietly and smoothly.
2.17.2 Admissible sound levels one meter from the contour of each escalator shall not
exceed 55 dB (A).
2.17.3 Acoustic treatment such as the provision of sound insulation and sound
absorption materials, where necessary, to meet the requirements of this
specification shall also be provided by the Contractor.
2.17.4 The vibration levels of the escalators at the landings shall not exceed 50% of the
clearly perceptible zone of the human of the human vibration sensitivity curves for
frequency range between 10 and 100 Hz.
2.18 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
2.18.1 Tests shall include:
MTS/143100/12 (C&A-3)
a) Insulation to Earth Test
500 volts d c voltage shall be applied for the measurement of insulation

resistance. The insulation resistance to earth shall not be than one (1) mega
ohm
b) Earthing
Tests shall be carried out to confirm that the earthing of all conduit, trunking,
switch casings and similar metal work is continuous and does not exceed 0.5
ohms impedance.
c) One hour run test
Each escalator shall be run unladen, thirty minutes in the up direction

followed immediately by thirty minutes in the down direction. The driving
motor current and running speed shall be recorded. During this time the
complete escalator shall be checked for excessive vibrations, safety and
insufficiencies in performance.
d) Noise
Noise level one meter from the escalator contour shall be measured and
recorded.
e) Safety device tests
The operation of the safety devices shall be demonstrated by simulating the

conditions required to operate particular safety devices.
f) Electrical protection tests
Tests shall be made to check the effective operation of magnetic/thermal

overload, fuses, single phasing and similar protective devices.
g) Speed governor or over speed test
The speed of the escalator machine shall be gradually increased until

governor operation causes interruption of the power supply.
h) Brake test or emergency stop test
The escalator shall be tested to ensure that all brake operations will occur in
the event of operation of safety devices or normal shut down.
i) Temperature rise test
Tests shall be made to ensure that the temperature rise of motor does not
exceed those stated in the Technical Data Schedule for Escalators.
2.18.2 In all tests as detailed above and in any other tests that the Employer‟s may
require, the supply of all suitable meters, indicating and measuring devices and
MTS/143100/13 (C&A-3)
skilled personnel to assist in the tests shall be provided by the, Sub-Contractor.

All costs for carrying out the necessary tests shall be borne by the contractor.
2.18.3 Factory acceptance test shall be witnessed by 3 representatives of Engineer and

Employer. Contractor shall inform the representatives of Engineer and Employer
one month prior to the factory test. Contractor shall include all expenses for this
factory test in his tender price and no further claims to Employer shall be
entertained.
2.18.4 All defects such as insufficiencies in performance, safety, reliability, finish and
appearance shall be corrected before final approval at no cost to the Employer‟s.
2.18.5 The Sub-Contractor shall furnish three certified copies of test certificates to the
Employer‟s prior to the date of completion. Test certificates shall include the
results of all tests after installation and shall comply with the latest version of
ASME A17.1 all applicable local codes, EN_115.
2.19 TRAINING
Contractor shall provide free technical training to Employer‟s staff.
MTS/143100/14 (C&A-3)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Take field dimensions and examine condition of substrates, supports,

and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the escalators
equipment on the agreed upon date, the General contractor shall be
responsible for providing a proper and suitable storage area on or off the
premises.
Should the storage area be off site and the equipment not yet delivered,
the escalators contractor, upon notification from the General contractor,
at no cost to the escalators subcontractor, shall divert the escalators
equipment to the storage area. If the escalators equipment has already
been delivered to the site, the General contractor shall be responsible for
transporting the escalators equipment to the storage area. The escalators
equipment shall be stored and removed from storage to the job site in a
timely manner at no cost to the escalators contractor.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Install all escalators components except as specifically provided for

elsewhere.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
ESCALATORS
The escalator contractor shall make a final check of each escalator

operation with the Employer or Employer‟s representative present prior to
turning on each escalator over for use. The escalator contractor shall
determine the control systems and operating devices are functioning
properly.
The contractor should provide properly framed opening in the floor,

necessary supports for the truss per the manufacturer‟s drawings and
information. The enclosure, well way railing, baffles and barricades
around the well way as required. Coordination with the escalator
contractor for the location and installation of the steel member required
for truss attachment prior to the pouring of the concrete supports.
The material used will be fire resistant as required as required by the
applying code and will weigh not more than 25kgs/sqm for millennium
escalator and 50 kgs/sqm for modular and H-series escalator.
Floor opening for escalator shall be protected against the passage of

flame, heat and/smoke in accordance with the provisions of building
code.
MTS/143100/15 (C&A-3)
Soft guard should be provided at the intersecting angle of the outside

deck and ceiling.
3.5 WARRANTY
The escalators contractor guarantees the materials and workmanship of

the apparatus furnished under these specifications. The escalators
contractor shall make good any defects which may develop within one
(1) year from the date of acceptance of each escalator not due to
ordinary wear and tear, vandalism, improper or insufficient maintenance
by others, abuse, misuse, neglect or any other cause beyond the control
of the escalators contractor.
3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
a. A quality maintenance service consisting of regular examination,

adjustments, and lubrication of the escalators equipment shall be
provided by the escalators contractor for a period of twelve (12)
months after the escalators has been turned over for customer use
b. This service shall not be subcontracted but shall be performed by the

authorized local agents. All work shall be performed by competent
employees during regular working hours of regular working days and
shall include 24_hour emergency call backs.
c. This service shall not include adjustments, repairs, or replacement of

parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse, or accidents caused by
persons other than the escalators contractor. Only genuine parts and
supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of the original
equipment shall be provided.
MTS/143100/16 (C&A-3)
SPARE PARTS
PART ONE GENERAL
REFERENCE
i) Conform to Specifications provided.
ii) The Contractor shall supply spare parts required for two years of operation as
recommend by manufacturer.
iii) The Contractor shall supply 2 sets of spare tools for the escalators in purpose made
tool box.
PART TWO PRODUCT
MATERIAL
The Contractor shall supply spare parts as specified by the Manufacturer of the
Escalators and a list is to be submitted with the tender.
PART THREE EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
i) The spares shall be supplied in factory packed boxes/crates suitable for storing the
equipment so that it is not damaged.
ii) Each box/crate shall be clearly marked/tagged stating the contents of the box/crate
and for what equipment it is intended.
MTS/143100/17 (C&A-3)
SECTION 143200 MOVING WALKS
SECTION 143200 – MOVING WALKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
stamps.

MTS/143200/1 (C&A-3)
1.3 SCOPE OF WORKS

ii) Earthquake control, fire alarm and interfacing of moving sidewalks with lift
quality compliance to avoid problem during moving sidewalks installation.
quality compliance to avoid problem during moving sidewalks installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Standard dimension – Horizontal Moving Sidewalks
 Capacity : 9,000 persons / hr.
 Speed of pallet : 30 mpm.
 Angle of inclination : 0
 Pallet width : 1000 mm
 Pullets : Top & bottom pallets are 3 flat steps.
 Glass panel : Transparent Tempered Glass.
 Handrail : Black
 Handrail guide : Aluminum.
 Skirt panel : Hairline stainless steel.
 Comb & Floor plate: Etched stainless steel.
 Operation system : Key switches reversible operation system.
 Pallet (Steps) : Hairline stainless steel (Black Color).
Standard dimension – Inclined Moving Sidewalks
 Capacity : 9,000 persons / hr.
 Speed of pallet : 30 mpm.
 Vertical rise : 6000 mm
 Pallet width : 1000 mm
 Pullets : Top & bottom pallets are 3 flat steps.
MTS/143200/2 (C&A-3)
 Glass panel : Transparent Tempered Glass.

 Handrail : Black
 Handrail guide : Aluminum.
 Skirt panel : Hairline stainless steel.
 Comb & Floor plate: Etched stainless steel.
 Operation system : Key switches reversible operation system.
 Pallet (Steps) : Hairline stainless steel (Black Color).
SAFETY DEVICE
 Inter mediate support beam: To be locally supplied.

 Start switch.
 Emergency stop switch
 Broken drive chain switch
 Skirt switch
 Handrails guide switch
 Broken step chain (Link) switch
 Step up thrust switch
 Over and under speed control
 Under step lighting
 Step demarcation line
 Disconnect switch
 Comb plate switch
 Magnetic Brake
 Auto stop and start (PLC & Sensor)

owner
a. Manufacturer/Supplier: Shall provide moving sidewalks

manufactured by a firm with a minimum of ten (10) years of
experience in fabrication of moving sidewalks equivalent to those
specified.
b. Installation: Moving sidewalks shall be installed by the

manufacturer/ supplier.
c. Regulatory Requirements: Design and installation of moving

sidewalks system shall comply with the latest version of ASME
A17.1 all applicable local codes, EN_115.

e. Country of Origin: Intermediate support beam is allowed to be

locally procured. The Country of Origin shall be as listed in these
specifications and approved by the Employer.
MTS/143200/3 (C&A-3)
2.1.3 SUBMITTALS
i. Product Data. Submit manufacturer's product data for each

a. Electrical characteristics.
b. Opening and suspension holes for installation moving
sidewalks
c. Building works for moving sidewalks
d. Building Safety Facilities.
ii Type and model of moving sidewalks, shop drawings, layout and

detailed drawings shall be submitted for Employer‟s approval.
iii Operation & maintenance Manuals: Provide 3 sets of

iv Country of Origin Certificates
v Test reports including testing and commissioning of moving

sidewalks at site.
2.2 PRODUCTS

equivalent
Japan, Korea, Western Europe and USA with acceptable manufacturers.
2.3 DESIGNS
2.3.1 Moving sidewalks design shall be such that no major repairs shall be necessary
for a period of 10 years or 100,000 hours from the date of acceptance assuming
that inspection and maintenance are carried out as necessary. Major repairs
shall consist of repairs due to causes other than those attributable to normal
wear, tear or ageing.
2.3.2 Moving sidewalks design shall give consideration to fire prevention, elimination of
dust trapping configurations and access for routine maintenance.
2.3.3 In the case adjacent moving sidewalks, it shall be possible to remove or replace
all components of an moving sidewalks, without stopping or interfering with the
operation of the adjacent unit
2.3.4 All moving sidewalks components subject to corrosion shall be adequately

protected against corrosion by primed with anti-rust primer and painted. Drip pans
on interior or aerial escalators shall be designed to collect and drain off water or
MTS/143200/4 (C&A-3)
oil which may enter through the landings, floor plates, and exposed portions of
escalators or from fire suppression systems.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
2.4.1 Each moving sidewalks shall be a self-contained unit consisting of truss, tracks,
pallet drive units, pallets, pallet chains, comb plates, handrails, landing deck
covers, driving machine, controller, safety devices, balustrades and all other
parts required to provide a complete moving sidewalks.
2.4.2 In the installation of the moving sidewalks, allowance must be made for the
structural movements (expansion and contraction) of the building. The movements
(mainly contraction) may be as much as 50mm and the Sub-Contractor shall
ensure that these movements will not cause any deformation on any parts of the
moving sidewalks.
2.4.3 Loads
 Rated Load. The rated load shall be based on a live load of 290 kg/m 2 of the
loading area, i.e. ( effective width of the moving sidewalks ) x (distance
between supports)
 Structural Load. For structural design purposes the calculation shall be based
on the dead weight of the moving sidewalks and a live load of 290 kg/m2.
The deflection of the moving sidewalks truss shall not be greater than 1/1000
of the distance between supports.
 Pallet Load. Each individual pallet shall be designed to support a static load of
580 kg/m2.
2.5 TRUSS AND TRACKS
2.5.1 The truss shall be of structural steel lattice - type construction for easy inspection
of the interior of the moving sidewalk. It shall be designed for rigidity and be of
ample strength to carry the passenger loads, the mechanism of the moving
sidewalk, the balustrades and the weight of exterior covering. The drive machine
may be at either end of the truss or within the centre truss. All machinery spaces
shall however be provided with a trap door.
2.5.2 The truss shall be supported at both ends and at intermediate supports from the
building structure on resilient supports and bearing plates. The provision of
bearing plates and resilient supports shall be included in this work. Distance
between the centre of the outermost intermediate supports and the edge of the
machinery spaces shall be at least 150mm. Support shall comprise bearing
plates and resilient supports design for static and dynamic loading as well as
prevention of transmission of noise and vibration to the building structure.
2.5.3 The tracks shall be constructed of steel of proper rigidity
2.6 PALLETS AND PALLETS CHAINS
2.6.1 The surface of the pallets shall be horizontal at all positions exposed to the
passengers. The pallet frames shall be suitably reinforced and braced to carry
MTS/143200/5 (C&A-3)
the pallet treads and the maximum load per pallet under eccentric loading
condition without distortion. The pallet frames and treads shall be non–
flammable material hairless stainless steel. The pallet riser shall be smooth, and
have a low coefficient of friction, or provided with vertical grooves. Each pallet is
provided with two rollers of minimum 75mm diameter with encased, sealed-for-
life ball bearings. The pallets are interchangeable against each other. They can
easily be replaced without removal of skirt panels.
2.6.2 The pallet treads shall be of wear resistant with closely spaced cleats and black-
powder coated or black painted grooves designed to provide a secure foothold
and comfortable standing surface, especially for narrow heels.
2.6.3 The left and right edges sides of each pallet shall be marked with yellow
demarcation cleats to assist passengers in riding the moving sidewalks correctly
and safely. Approved skirt brushes side shall be provided.
2.6.4 The pallet chains shall be of the endless roller type located on each side of the
pallets. The chains shall be made of high grade steel with hardened pins and
accurate rollers designed to accurately engage the drive sprockets to ensure
smooth operation. The pallet chain shall be provided with an automatic
tensioning device to maintain proper tension of the pallet chains under varying
load conditions. The chain-tensioning device is easily accessible at the lower
end of the moving sidewalks after lifting off the landing plates. The tensioning
shaft is kept parallel by ball-prismatic guides. In case of excessive elongation or
breaking of the step chains, the moving sidewalk is automatically stopped by
safety switches. Those switches are provided with a mechanical lock.
2.6.5 To enhance safety and environmental protection the moving sidewalks shall be
equipped with a pallet chain which eliminates the need of regular lubrication
(lubrication free type). The pallet chain axles, pins and bushes shall be lifetime
lubricated and suitably protected and sealed against ingress of dust, dirt etc. to
achieve a lifetime of minimum 8 years.
2.7 COMBPLATES
2.7.1 A non-flammable stainless steel comb plate of the sectional type with comb edges
shall be provided at the top and bottom landings of each moving sidewalk. The
comb plate teeth shall properly mesh with the cleats on the step treads. It shall
be made in sections so that a section can be easily replaced without the use of
special tools.
2.7.2 A safety device shall be provided which is individually actuated by each individual
comb segment and shall stop the moving sidewalk if any foreign bodies jam
between the tread grooves and the comb segment.
2.8 LANDING PLATES
The portion of landing at each end of the moving sidewalk immediately above any
mechanism shall be provided with removable landing stainless steel plate with
anti slip pattern to give access to the driving mechanism for maintenance
purposes. These landing plates shall cover the entire area of the landings within
the confines of the moving sidewalk truss arranged to receive the finished flooring
and shall be supported on the truss. Landing plates shall harmonize with the
MTS/143200/6 (C&A-3)
comb plates. Landing plate‟s frame shall be die cast aluminum. These landing
plates shall be constructed of fire resistant materials.
2.9 BALUSTRADES
2.9.1 Balustrades of the extended newel type shall be provided on each side of the
pallets. It is an all glass balustrade with vertically arranged panels, without supports.
The height of the balustrade is 950 mm over the entire length of the moving
sidewalk. The glass panels are separated into various sections which are
assembled so as to be impact and vibration-free. The individual panels neatly
meet each other without cover strips. The joints are arranged vertically to the
handrails. The balustrade cladding (inner and outer decking near the skirting) is
made of stainless steel profiles with minimum 1.5mm thickness.
2.9.2 The balustrades shall consist of deck-boards, inner panelling, skirt panels, lighting
materials and finish as hereinafter specified.
 Deck boards :stainless steel, hairline finished
 Inner Paneling : toughened safety glass, thickness 10 mm
 Skirt Panels : stainless steel, hairline finished
 Exterior panels: stainless steel cladding to Architectural Details
2.9.3 The skirt panel shall be designed to reduce the risk of entrapment and the material
shall be scratch and impact resistant and shall have extremely low coefficient of
friction. The clearance on either side of the pallets between the pallets and the
skirting shall not be more than 5mm and the sum of the clearances on both sides
shall not be more than 6.5mm.
2.9.4 For the safety of the passenger, safety strips shall be mounted on the skirting on
the both sides of the steps to prevent shoes or other materials from being caught
within the clearance between the skirting and the pallets. The safety strip shall
protrude outwards from the skirting by not less than 25mm. It shall be mounted in
easily replaceable sections to form a continuous strip at 10mm above the nose
line of the pallets. The strip shall be in form of soft fibred durable brushes which is
aesthetically pleasant.
2.10 HANDRAILS
2.10.1 Each balustrade shall be provided with a smooth and continuous handrail
moving in the same direction and at the same speed as the pallets.
2.10.2 The handrails shall be of the slim line traction type and provided with a tension
device. The handrail shall be free of elongation so that frequent re-tensioning will
not be necessary.
2.10.3 The handrails shall be constructed of rubber covered canvas suitably reinforced
and made endless with smoothly vulcanized joints. The handrails shall specially
formed guides except when in contact driving sheaves.
2.10.4 Hand or finger guards shall be provided at the point where the handrail enters the
balustrade.
MTS/143200/7 (C&A-3)
2.10.5 Color of handrails shall be to Employer‟s approval.
2.11 DRIVE MACHINE, MOTOR AND CONTROLLER
2.11.1 Each moving sidewalk shall be independently driven.
2.11.2 The machine shall be designed to meet the most severe conditions of moving
sidewalk service. The drive system with variable speed drive unit shall be of
high efficiency and designed especially for moving sidewalk operation. It shall
be located within the moving sidewalk pallet band, at the upper end or centre
truss of the moving sidewalk. The chain sprockets of the pallet band and the
handrail driving wheels are directly driven by special designed moving sidewalk
gear with an electric motor, flange mounted at the gearbox. The motor torque is
directly transmitted by a high efficient reduction gear (min. approx. 95%
efficiency). The protection class of the electric motor shall be IP 55. The gear
oil change intervals shall be at least 30,000 hr. The motor shall be of ample
capacity and rated to continuously operate the moving sidewalk efficiently,
quietly and smoothly under all conditions of load as specified. Motor shall be
drip proof with Class 'F' insulation.
2.11.3 Power factor correction capacitors shall be included in all the equipment supplied
to achieve at the operating point a power factor of not less than 0.85. The Sub-
Contractor shall provide all the relevant test equipment to test the power factor as
specified above to the satisfaction of the Employer‟s for that equipment which
does not have power factor indicators.
2.11.4 All motors shall be of high efficiency type with a minimum efficiency of 95% for the
running speed range of 50% to 100% full load speed of the motor. The motor
shall have a high power factor in the range of 0.85 to 1.0 for all operating points.
2.11.5 The machine shall be capable of being removed intact from the truss
2.11.6 Each moving sidewalk shall be provided with braking compiling to local code
that is spring actuated and electrically held off. The brake shall automatically
bring the moving sidewalk to a halt at very constant retardation whenever the
power is interrupted, a stop button is pressed, or any of the safety devices
operate. The brake stopping distance shall be long enough to prevent persons
from falling or being thrown to the floor.
2.11.7 The springs used to apply brake shoes shall be in compression and adequately
supported.
2.11.8 The starting current shall be limited to 3 times the nominal current. Starting must
take place with a “soft start” device.
2.11.9 The controller shall be provided to control the starting direction and stopping the
moving sidewalk motor and bring the moving sidewalk to rest in the event of
the operation if any of the safety devices or should the power fails from any
cause or through normal shut down.
2.11.10 Each controller shall incorporate non-self resetting magnetic/thermal overload,

inherent no-volt release, and single phasing and earth leakage protection.
MTS/143200/8 (C&A-3)
2.11.11 Controllers shall be totally enclosed in drip proof metal cabinets with hinged
doors; lock and door interlocked mains isolators and neatly finished in gloss
enamel. The cabinet shall be removable from the top machine room for service
and maintenance purposes. Non combustible material shall be used for
controller panels and their support frame.
2.11.12 Fusible cut-out shall be so placed and constructed that the bowling of a fuse
shall not cause short circuit between adjacent conductors. Control circuits shall
be protected by fuses or equivalent means independent of the protection for
the main circuits.
2.11.13 No control system shall depend upon the completion or maintenance of an

electric circuit for the interruption of the power supply to the driving machinery
or brake.
2.11.14 All control circuits shall be designed to fail to safety.
2.11.15 Electrical interlocking shall be provided where necessary to ensure that relays
and contactors operate in proper sequence.
2.11.16 The insulation of the controller wiring shall be of flame retardant type.
2.11.17 All wires shall be terminated by soldering or clamping in such a way that the
wires are not damaged.
2.11.18 Accessible terminals, suitably marked, shall be provided for connection of

incoming and outgoing cables.
2.12 SAFETY FACTORS
2.12.1 The factor of safety used in the design of the moving sidewalk trusses shall be not
less than 3. The truss shall be designed that it will retain the steps and running gear
if the track systems fail to support them. Provision shall be made to retain all
tension weights in the truss if they become loose.
2.12.2 Tracks shall be so arranged as to prevent displacement of the pallet and running
gear if a pallet chain breaks. The factor of safety of tracks and pallet frames shall
not be less than 3
2.12.3 The factor of safety for driving machinery shall not be less than 8 for steel and
bronze parts, and 10 for cast iron parts.
2.12.4 Chains for the pallets and chains or belts for transmission shall have a factor of
safety of not less 8, based on the loading of 290 kg / m2. Chains whose material of
construction is such that they would require periodical heat treatment shall not be
used.
2.13 OPERATION AND SAFETY SWITCHES
Operating and safety devices shall be provided conforming to the following

requirements:-
2.13.1 Starting Switches
MTS/143200/9 (C&A-3)
Starting switches shall be provided at both ends of the moving sidewalk and shall
be of the key- operated spring off type. These switches shall be positioned so as
to enable the operator, when using the key, to see the moving sidewalk steps
These switches shall start or reverse the direction of travel of the moving
sidewalk. Running directions shall be clearly indicated on the switches.
There shall be no other means of starting provided.
2.13.2 Service switch
A main disconnect switch and fuses shall be provided within the top machinery
space. The switch shall be conspicuously and permanently marked, MAIN
SWITCH and shall be so located that it can be switched without passing over or
reaching over any part of the machinery. The opening of this switch shall cause
the electrical supply to be disconnected from the driving machine and operation
of the brake.
2.13.3 Emergency stop switches
Momentary pressure emergency stop switches having red buttons shall be

located in conspicuous and accessible positions at or near the top and bottom
landings of each moving sidewalk and shall be protected against accidental
operation. The operation of these switches shall interrupt the power to the
driving machine and activate the brake. It shall not be possible to start the
driving machine by these buttons.
2.13.4 Speed governor
A speed governor shall be provided which will cause the interruption of power to
the driving machine and cause the brake to be operated should the speed of the
steps exceed the rated speed by more 20%.
The over speed governor is not required where the slip of the alternating current
squirrel cage induction driving motor, if used, does not exceed 10% and the
motor is directly connected to the driving machine.
2.13.5 Broken Step Chain and Drive Chain (if required)safety device
This device shall be incorporated as part of the tension carriage and will be
provided with switches, one for each chain. These safety switches easily
accessible, shall cause the interruption of electrical power to the driving machine
and shall cause the brake to be operated if a pallet chain or drive chain breaks,
or if the tension on either chain drops below or exceeds a predetermined value,
or if the motion chain is interrupted.
2.13.6 Non-reversing device
A device shall be incorporated to bring the moving sidewalk to rest automatically

should the direction of travel accidentally reversed whilst the moving sidewalk is
operating in the ascending direction.
2.13.7 Handrail safety switches
MTS/143200/10 (C&A-3)
Micro switches shall be provided behind handrail safety guards where the
handrails enter the moving sidewalk newels to' interrupt the power supply to the
moving sidewalk in the event of an object entering the opening.
2.13.8 Pallet and skirt safety switches
Four micro switches in the skirting panels on each side of the moving sidewalk
shall be provided. These shall be located close to the upper and lower comb
plate tips and on the track system at the upper and lower landing curves. The
moving sidewalk shall stop should anyone of these switches be tripped. The
switches shall be the self-resetting type, but, if for any reason resetting is
prevented after tripping, it shall be impossible to start the moving sidewalk by the
starting switch until the obstructing medium is removed and resetting of the
switch is permitted.
2.13.9 Comb plate safety device
A comb plate safety device shall be incorporated each at the upper and lower
comb plates which will cause the moving sidewalk to stop should any object
become wedged within the small clearance between the comb and the pallet.
2.13.10 Step Lowering Device
Should step lowers due to excessive load or breakage the step lowering device
shall be actuated. Two such contacts shall be provided near the top and bottom
reversing station so that the lowered step stops in front of the comb to prevent
further damage occurring.
2.13.11Broken Drive Device (if required)
Where the driving machine is connected to the main drive shaft by chains, a
device shall be provided which will cause the electrical supply to the motor to be
disconnected and shall cause the normal brake, as well as the additional brake,
to be operated if the driving chains should fail.
2.14 MACHINERY SPACE
There shall be a permanent light, suitably protected, in every machinery space at

both the top and bottom of the moving sidewalk which can be switched without
passing over or reaching over any part of the machinery. A 3-pin socket outlet
shall be fitted adjacent to each of the light switch. Since all machinery space
shall be protected by sprinkler, all electrical components and equipment must be
of water resistant type complying with IP55.
2.15 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND WIRING
2.15.1 All, cables, trunking, conduit and conduit fittings necessary for the power, control
and lighting circuits shall be installed in accordance with the local code.
2.15.2 Each moving sidewalk truss, machine, motor and all other non-current carrying
metal parts and components of equipment shall be effectively earthed.
2.15.3 All electrical safety switches and controllers shall be enclosed to protect against
accidental contact.
MTS/143200/11 (C&A-3)
2.16 LIGHTING
2.16.1 Circuits for footlights and machinery lighting and socket outlets shall be
independent of the power supply so that in the event of interruption of the power
supply the lighting circuits will remain alive. They shall be controlled by a
separate main switch and fuses.
2.16.2 Continuous Skirt Lighting, under step lighting at embarkation and disembarkation
location to illuminates step joints shall be provided.
2.16.3 Traffic flow light display mounted on the outer decking or newel shall provide
clear indication to passenger the moving sidewalk running direction.
2.17 NOISE AND VIBRATION
2.17.1 All equipment shall be designed to operate quietly and smoothly.
2.17.2 Admissible sound levels one meter from the contour of each moving sidewalk
shall not exceed 55 dB (A).
2.17.3 Acoustic treatment such as the provision of sound insulation and sound
absorption materials, where necessary, to meet the requirements of this
specification shall also be provided by the Contractor.
2.17.4 The vibration levels of the escalators at the landings shall not exceed 50% of the
clearly perceptible zone of the human of the human vibration sensitivity curves for
frequency range between 10 and 100 Hz.
2.18 OPERATION
2.18.1 The operating panels shall be installed at both landings of the moving sidewalk and
shall consist the following items:
i) Emergency stop button with a tamperproof cover (one of this buttons shall also
be installed at the midpoint of the moving sidewalk)
ii) Lighting ON/OFF key switch
iii) Auto/Manual operation key switch
iv) Forward /Stop /Reverse key switch
v) ON/ OFF Buzzer key switch
2.18.2 Sensors shall be located on the ceiling or in the newel ends or at the landing
plates and shall be put into operation when the key switch is turned to the Auto
mode. These shall be subjected to the Employer‟s approval. The automatic
operation of the moving sidewalk shall be as follows:
i) A signal shall be sent to light up at all times the signboards provided by others
to inform the passengers that the moving sidewalk is in the automatic mode
and the direction of the moving sidewalks.
MTS/143200/12 (C&A-3)
ii) When passengers come near to the landing, the photo cell detector shall detect
the presence of passengers and start the moving sidewalk.
iii) When 5 minutes (adjustable) has passed after the last passengers get off the
moving sidewalk, the moving sidewalk shall stop and standby for next
passenger.
2.18.3 The system shall be incorporated with the safety protection:-
i) If the detector detects the passenger coming from the opposite landing against
the predetermined direction, the buzzer shall be activated and the moving
sidewalk shall operate in the predetermined direction for about 10 seconds
(adjustable) and stop.
ii) Isolation switches shall be provided in the machinery spaces to deactivate the
operating panels located at both landings to prevent accidental activation of the
moving sidewalk during maintenance or repair
2.19.1 Tests shall include:
a) Insulation to Earth Test
500 volts d c voltage shall be applied for the measurement of insulation

resistance. The insulation resistance to earth shall not be than one (1) mega
ohm
b) Earthing
Tests shall be carried out to confirm that the earthing of all conduit, trunking,
switch casings and similar metal work is continuous and does not exceed 0.5
ohms impedance.
c) One hour run test
Each moving sidewalk shall be run unladen, thirty minutes in the up direction
followed immediately by thirty minutes in the down direction. The driving
motor current and running speed shall be recorded. During this time the
complete escalator shall be checked for excessive vibrations, safety and
insufficiencies in performance.
d) Noise
Noise level one meter from the moving sidewalk contour shall be measured
and recorded.
e) Safety device tests
The operation of the safety devices shall be demonstrated by simulating the

conditions required to operate particular safety devices.
f) Electrical protection tests
MTS/143200/13 (C&A-3)
Tests shall be made to check the effective operation of magnetic/thermal

overload, fuses, single phasing and similar protective devices.
g) Speed governor or over speed test
The speed of the moving sidewalk machine shall be gradually increased until
governor operation causes interruption of the power supply.
h) Brake test or emergency stop test
The moving sidewalk shall be tested to ensure that all brake operations will
occur in the event of operation of safety devices or normal shut down.
i) Temperature rise test
Tests shall be made to ensure that the temperature rise of motor does not
exceed those stated in the Technical Data Schedule for moving sidewalk.
2.19.2 In all tests as detailed above and in any other tests that the Employer‟s may
require, the supply of all suitable meters, indicating and measuring devices and
skilled personnel to assist in the tests shall be provided by the, Sub-Contractor.
All costs for carrying out the necessary tests shall be borne by the contractor.
2.19.3 Factory acceptance test shall be witnessed by 3 representatives of Engineer and

Employer. Contractor shall inform the representatives of Engineer and Employer
one month prior to the factory test. Contractor shall include all expenses for this
factory test in his tender price and no further claims to Employer shall be
entertained.
2.19.4 All defects such as insufficiencies in performance, safety, reliability, finish and
appearance shall be corrected before final approval at no cost to the Employer‟s.
2.19.5 The Sub-Contractor shall furnish three certified copies of test certificates to the
Employer‟s prior to the date of completion. Test certificates shall include the
results of all tests after installation and shall comply with the latest version of
ASME A17.1 all applicable local codes, EN_115.
2.20 TRAINING
MTS/143200/14 (C&A-3)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION

Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the moving
sidewalks equipment on the agreed upon date, the General contractor
shall be responsible for providing a proper and suitable storage area on
or off the premises.
the moving sidewalks contractor, upon notification from the General
contractor, at no cost to the moving sidewalks subcontractor, shall divert
the moving sidewalks equipment to the storage area. If the moving
sidewalks equipment has already been delivered to the site, the General
contractor shall be responsible for transporting the moving sidewalks
equipment to the storage area. The moving sidewalks equipment shall be
stored and removed from storage to the job site in a timely manner at no
cost to the moving sidewalks contractor.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Install all moving sidewalks components except as specifically provided

for elsewhere.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
MOVING SIDEWALKS
The moving sidewalk contractor shall make a final check of each moving
sidewalk operation with the Employer or Employer‟s representative
present prior to turning on each moving sidewalk over for use. The
moving sidewalk contractor shall determine the control systems and
operating devices are functioning properly.
The contractor should provide properly framed opening in the floor,

necessary supports for the truss per the manufacturer‟s drawings and
information. The enclosure, well way railing, baffles and barricades
around the well way as required. Coordination with the moving sidewalks
contractor for the location and installation of the steel member required
for truss attachment prior to the pouring of the concrete supports.
Floor opening for moving sidewalks shall be protected against the

passage of flame, heat and/smoke in accordance with the provisions of
building code.
Soft guard should be provided at the intersecting angle of the outside

deck and ceiling.
MTS/143200/15 (C&A-3)
3.5 WARRANTY
The moving sidewalks contractor guarantees the materials and

workmanship of the apparatus furnished under these specifications. The
moving sidewalks contractor shall make good any defects which may
develop within one (1) year from the date of acceptance of each moving
sidewalk not due to ordinary wear and tear, vandalism, improper or
insufficient maintenance by others, abuse, misuse, neglect or any other
cause beyond the control of the moving sidewalks contractor.

adjustments, and lubrication of the moving sidewalks equipment shall
be provided by the moving sidewalks contractor for a period of twelve
(12) months after the moving sidewalks has been turned over for
customer use


persons other than the moving sidewalks contractor. Only genuine
parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of the
original equipment shall be provided.
MTS/143200/16 (C&A-3)
SPARE PARTS
PART ONE GENERAL
REFERENCE
iii) The Contractor shall supply 2 sets of spare tools for the moving sidewalks in
purpose made tool box.
PART TWO PRODUCT
MATERIAL
The Contractor shall supply spare parts as specified by the Manufacturer of the Moving
Sidewalks and a list is to be submitted with the tender.
INSTALLATION
MTS/143200/17 (C&A-3)
SECTION 144000 LIFTS
SECTION 144000 - LIFTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
stamps.

MTS/144000/1 (C&A-3)
1.3 SCOPE OF WORKS

ii) Emergency power supply for emergency light, fan, voice guidance
system, earthquake control, fire alarm and interfacing of lifts with lift
quality compliance to avoid problem during lifts installation.
quality compliance to avoid problem during lifts installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.0 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR
2.1 GENERAL
Standard dimension – Lift/Elevators
Capacity: 11 Persons
Type: Passenger-front observation machine room less
 Operation: One car
 Door Type: Centre Opening (Automatic)
 Speed : 60 mpm
 Weight: 825 kg
(Rated Capacity is calculated at 75kg per person based on EN81-1
and GB code)
 Car dimension:
Internal 1350 mm (W) X1400 mm (D)
 Car height: 2200mm
 Hoist way: 2100 mm (W) X 1800 mm (D)
 Pit depth: 1500 mm
 Overhead: 4000 mm
MTS/144000/2 (C&A-3)
Type: Passenger-front observation machine room less
 Operation: Group Control
 Speed: 60 mpm
 Weight: 1275 kg
and GB code)
 Car dimension:
Internal 2000 mm (W) X 1400 mm (D)
Type: Service Lift
 Operation: One car
 Speed : 60 mpm
 Weight: 2000 kg
and GB code)
 Car dimension:
Internal 2100 mm (W) X 1950 mm (D)
MTS/144000/3 (C&A-3)
 Machine Room: 4250 mm (W) X 3600 mm (D)
Power supply: AC 380/415V, 3 Phase, 50 Hertz
Lighting Power Supply: AC220 Volts, 1 Phase, 50 Hertz
Facility: Public address speaker, intercom, CCTV camera
Signal Fixtures: Manufacturer‟s standard flush style as specified below.

owner
Note: The elevator must meet the hoist way dimensions as shown above.
The car dimensions may be adjusted to meet the design of the elevator
manufacturer
a. Manufacturer/Supplier: Shall provide elevators manufactured by a

firm with a minimum of ten (10) years of experience in fabrication
of elevators equivalent to those specified.
b. Installation: Elevators shall be installed by the manufacturer

/supplier.
c. Regulatory Requirements: Design and installation of elevator

system shall comply with the latest version of ASME A17.1 all
applicable local codes, EN 81 and ISO 4190.1

e. Country of Origin: No Local components of any type shall be

acceptable at any stage of the project. The Country of Origin shall
be as listed in these specifications.
2.1.3 SUBMITTALS
i) Product Data. Submit manufacturer's product data for each

a. Cab design, dimensions and layout.

b. Hoist way door and frame details.
c. Electrical characteristics.
d. Color schedule and selection chart for cab and entrance
features.
MTS/144000/4 (C&A-3)
ii) Type and model of elevators, shop drawings, layout and detailed
drawings shall be submitted for Employer‟s approval with product
literature including the following:
Car, guide rails, buffers, and other components on hoist way
a. Required rail bracket spacing.
b. Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load

transfer to building structure.
c. Loads on hoisting beams.
d. Clearances and travel for car.
e. Net vertical load from the elevator system, including total car
weight and rated load any structural supports clear inside
hoist way and pit dimensions.
f. Location and sizes of access doors, doors, and frames.
iii) Operation & maintenance Manuals: Provide 3 sets of

iv) Country of Origin Certificates
v) Test reports including testing and commissioning of elevators at

site.
2.2 PRODUCTS

equivalent
Japan, Western Europe and USA with acceptable manufacturers.
2.2.2 MATERIALS
i) Steel
a) Sheet Steel for Exposed Work: Stretcher leveled, cold rolled,

commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366,
matte finish.
b) Sheet Steel for Unexposed Work: Hot rolled, commercial quality

carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569.
c) Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36 and AISI 1018.
MTS/144000/5 (C&A-3)
ii) Stainless Steel: Type 304 with #4 ((brushed)) or #8 (polished) finishes

stainless steel panels, with standard tempers and hardness required for
fabrication, strength and durability to comply with ASTM A167.
a) Supply with mechanical finish on fabricated work in the location

shown or specified with texture and reflectivity required (Federal
and NAAMM nomenclature). Protect with adhesive plastic film or
paper covering.
iii) Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.
iv) Plastic Laminate: ASTM E48 Class A and NEMA LD3, 0.050_inch (1.3
mm) up to 1/16_ inch (1.6mm) nominal thickness.
a) Exposed surfaces to have color selected by architect from

manufacturer's standard selection.
v) Fire Retardant Treated Particleboard Panels: Minimum 1/2_inch (13 mm)

thick backup for plastic laminate veneered panels, provided with suitable
anti_warp backing; to meet ASTM E84 Class "A" rating with flame spread
rating of 25 or less.
iv) Paint
a) Unexposed Steel and/or Iron: Clean metal of oil, grease, scale

and other foreign matter and paint one shop coat of
manufacturer's standard rust resistant primer. Galvanized metal
need not be painted.
b) Exposed Steel: Clean exposed metal of oil, grease, scale and

other foreign matter. Eliminate any dents, scratches, or other
defects that would affect the final finish. For material delivered
with primer coat only, apply manufacturer's standard enamel
primer. For material delivered with a finish coat apply two coats of
manufacturer's standard enamel of a color selected by the
architect from the manufacturer's standard color selection.
2.2.3 EQUIPMENT
2.2.3.1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
i) General
The elevator shall incorporate all necessary standard components

(motors, brake, counterweights, buffers, safety gear and governor,
controller, controls, buttons, rails, wiring as required by NFPA 70,
devices, and indicators.) required for such application all in accordance
with applicable code(s).
The Hoisting Machine shall be A.C. gearless type including an axial

synchronous drive motor, direct current electro mechanical brake and
integral traction drive sheave, mounted on a base or bedplate.
MTS/144000/6 (C&A-3)
The Hoisting Machine shall be equipped with an electric drive motor

especially designed for elevator service, developing high starting torque
with low starting current. The motor shall be suitable for use with a
variable voltage variable frequency type system and shall meet ANSI 519
requirements for electric harmonic distortion.
Motor horsepower shall be in accordance with the duty specified.
The machine brake shall be electrically released and spring applied. The
drive sheave shall be accurately turned and grooved for the quantity and
size of Hoist Ropes applicable to this service.
Traction steel hoist ropes, of size and number appropriate to insure

proper wearing qualities, shall be provided. As a minimum, the number
and size of ropes shall comply with the factor of safety requirements of
the ASME/ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators.
The Elevator System shall include a car frame, car safety gear, over
speed governor and pit buffers for both car and counterweight; all
integrated into this system in accordance with application criteria.
ii) Hoisting Machine
The hoisting machine shall be located within the hoist way and mounted
on the car guide rail furnished by the elevator contractor.
Mounting of the Hoisting Machine shall incorporate isolation to minimize

the transmission of noise and/or vibration to the building structure.
Counterweight: Each elevator shall be suitably counterbalanced with

adequate weights contained in a structural steel frame. This
Counterweight shall be equal to the weight of the complete elevator car
plus a percentage of the capacity load.
Counterweight Guard: A Counterweight Guard of the appropriate design

and size shall be provided in place at the bottom of the hoist way.
iii) Additional Equipment.
Guide Rails: Elevator car and counterweight guide rails shall be

provided, erected plumb, and securely fastened to the hoist way framing.
Design and provision of hoist way framing shall be of adequate strength
and properly positioned to withstand loads applied in conjunction with
data provided by the elevator contractor.
Guide shoes: Guide shoes shall be provided and mounted to the top and
bottom of both the car and counterweight frame. Each guide shoe
assembly shall be arranged to maintain constant contact on the rail
surfaces.
iv) Buffers and Buffer Supports
Buffers for both car and counterweight shall be oil or spring type and
adequately sized.
MTS/144000/7 (C&A-3)
Buffer supports shall be provided to achieve the required height above

the pit floor. Access ladders and working platforms, if required, shall be
provided by others.
Safety switch on oil buffers shall prevent car operation when the buffer is
compressed. (Provide the safety switch according to the applied
codes/regulations.)
2.2.3.2 POWER AND OPERATIONAL CONTROLS
i) Power Control
The elevator power control system shall be a digital, solid state based
control system. The power control system shall provide smooth, accurate
speed regulation and efficient operation. The power control system shall
interface with the microcomputer elevator logic providing closed loop
position control.
The power control system shall be designed to vary the alternating

current power supply to the A.C. hoist motor providing smooth
acceleration and deceleration regardless of elevator load, and shall use
I.G.B.T. technology in the power stage in order to deliver power to the
motor in a quiet mode, minimizing the need for external power filters for
quiet operation.
Solid state load/torque balancing circuitry shall be incorporated to

automatically monitor car load prior to start and adjust the hoist motor
torque to assure smooth car start-up.
The power control shall be fully factory preset, minimizing the need for
field adjustment. Computer inputs shall tailor the power control to the
specific elevator design parameters. Provision shall be made for minor
field adjustment. Such adjustments shall generally be none interacting.
That is, adjustment of one characteristic shall not necessarily affect the
adjustment of another.
ii) Elevator Operation
Group Control: The (microcomputer) system control manager shall

direct the cars to serve traffic demands established by registered car and
hall calls as well as load weighing data. The group controller shall
automatically assign calls and dispatch cars to provide optimum overall
elevator service. The group control shall automatically sense changing
elevator demand conditions and continuously adjust elevator operation to
be responsive to such demand.
a) The system control manager shall monitor all the operational

features described for the individual car controllers and shall also
connect to field diagnostic/service tools.
b) Individual car and hall operating devices shall be as described

separately under the heading “Signal Fixtures.”
MTS/144000/8 (C&A-3)
c) The operation of each elevator, from within the car, shall be such
that momentary pressure on one or more car pushbuttons shall
send that car to the designated landing(s) in the order in which
the landings are reached by the car, irrespective of the sequence
in which the buttons were pressed, provided that the hoist way
door interlock and car door switch circuits are completed. During
the car response to these car calls, the cars shall also answer hall
calls registered at individual landings in accordance with demand
assignments received from the group controller.
d) The flight time to travel a nominal floor distance, which is

dependent on acceleration and deceleration rate, shall be preset.
Door operating speeds shall be based upon center opening
doors.
e) Load weighing shall be accomplished by feedback of an inductive

proximity sensor under the platform.
f) The operation of the elevators specified shall be accomplished

utilizing microprocessor computer logic group software. The group
elevator control program shall be contained in a non-volatile,
programmable, read-only memory. Group control shall be
constructed such that future alterations in elevator group
operation may readily be accomplished by altering the read-only
memory.
g) The system shall monitor group elevator traffic conditions and

cause the selection of the appropriate operating mode based
upon Specific Traffic Pattern Intensity.
h) The following operating modes shall be provided:

 Light Traffic Pattern Mode
 Normal (Balanced) Traffic Pattern Mode
Up-Fall Protection: Provide a system, which monitors for unintended

upward movement of the elevator system. In the event unintended
upward movement occurs the system shall engage a braking system to
stop a car with up to 125% of rated capacity. The main car brake, rope
brakes and sheave wedges are not acceptable alternatives.
iii) Emergency Power Operation:
In the event of cessation of normal building power, the elevator(s) shall

brake to an emergency stop. After a predetermined time interval,
emergency power shall be provided to the elevator(s) through the normal
disconnect switch(s). The elevator shall start and return non-stop to the
emergency power recall floor where it will stop and automatically open its
doors. If there is more than one elevator in the bank, each elevator, one
at a time, shall also return to the emergency power recall floor and park
with its doors open until all cars have returned to that floor. When all cars
have returned, a pre-selected car shall continue to run under emergency
power.
MTS/144000/9 (C&A-3)
iv) Auxiliary Operations and Controls include the following [select optional
operations from list]:
a) Independent Service
b) Independent Service with separate hall push button stations
c) Hospital Emergency Service [Specify floors required]
d) Medical Emergency Service
e) Fireman‟s Control Phase I and Phase II
f) Zoned Access at bottom floor
g) Zoned access at top floor
h) Sequence starting (under emergency power)
i) Floor key switch lockouts [Specify floors required]
j) Car key switch lockouts [Specify floors required]
k) Card Reader security interface
l) E-Link Building Monitoring and Command system
2.2.3.3 SIGNAL FIXTURES
i) Car Operation Station:
Each elevator shall be equipped with a Main Car Operating Station,

located integrally in a vertical swing panel and containing call registration
buttons in accordance with the logic operation specified. The Main Car
Operating Station shall also include an emergency stop switch, alarm
button, tactile plates, and light switch, as well as any other device(s)
required by applicable code and/or as explained within this Part.
Each Car Operating Station shall be equipped with illuminating

pushbuttons which, when pressed, shall signal the car passenger that the
call has been registered. The button shall remain illuminated until the call
has been answered.
All devices operable by the general public and mounted in the car
operating panel(s) shall be identified with Braille and/or tactile symbols.
The car operating panel(s) and hall pushbutton stations shall be located
(vertically) in accordance with code requirements to assist the
handicapped. As a minimum, all Braille indicators shall meet the
requirements with the EN 81, ISO/TR 11071 or relevant international
standard.
ii) Car Position Indicator:
A car position indicator(s) consisting of a red Dot Matrix display shall be

provided in the car. The position of the car shall be indicated by single or
dual numeral and/or letter floor designations along with an arrow
indicating direction of car travel. The position indicator shall be located
above the Car Operating Station.
iii) Hall Pushbutton Stations:
Hall pushbutton stations shall be provided at each landing served by the

elevator system proposed. The number of hall stations per landing shall
be1. Illuminating pushbuttons shall be provided in each hall pushbutton
station which, when pressed, shall signal the waiting passenger that the
MTS/144000/10 (C&A-3)
call has been registered. The button shall remain illuminated until the call
has been answered. 2 pushbuttons, 1 for up and 1 for down travel shall
be provided.
iv) Hall Position Indicator
Hall position indicators shall be provided which shall indicate the position
of the car in the hoist way with single or dual numeral and/or letter floor
designations along with an arrow corresponding to the direction of car
travel. This shall be located in the elevator lobby on all floors.
v) Hall Lanterns
Hall lanterns, including audible signals, shall be provided. As soon as the

car has reached a predetermined distance from a landing and is set to
stop at that landing, the hall lantern corresponding to the direction the car
travel shall be illuminated and the audible signal shall sound once for up
and twice for down. The lantern shall remain illuminated until the doors
have closed. Single lanterns shall be furnished at terminal landings and
Up/Down lanterns shall be furnished at intermediate landings.
vi) Signal Fixture Finishes
All metal used on exterior surfaces of the signal fixtures shall be #4

brushed stainless steel an inspector's operating station shall be provided
on top of the elevator car consisting of up and down constant pressure
buttons and an emergency stop switch. This device shall also contain a
light with guard and switch and a duplex, 220 VAC out let. A light with
guard and switch and a duplex, 220 VAC out let shall be provided under
the car. An emergency stop switch shall be provided in the elevator pit,
designed to cut off current supply to motor and bring the car to rest
independent of the regular operating devices. An electric alarm bell shall
be provided in or adjacent to the elevator hoist way. This bell shall be
connected to the alarm button in the car operating panel.
2.2.3.4 PASSENGER CAB ENCLOSURE
i) The elevator cab(s) shall meet the requirements of the ASMEI A17.1
Elevator Code, and all Elevator Code Supplements issued to date,
including Code restrictions pertaining to flame spread and smoke
generation.
ii) Cab features shall include:
a) Rear Walls to be made of transparent tempered glass panels to

conform to European Norms of Safety for Glass bodied elevators.
b) Car Interior Side Walls & Exterior Walls to be baked enamel color
panels as selected from the elevator contractor‟s submitted
standards.
c) The drop ceiling shall be composed of a removable, translucent,
closed cell, vinyl grid panel and supported with an aluminum
frame. Fluorescent light fixtures shall be provided above the drop
MTS/144000/11 (C&A-3)
ceiling. Fixtures shall be provided in sufficient number to meet

minimum code requirements.
d) Finished flooring (supply and installation) to be made of granite
(China or locally available), to match floor finish adjoining lifts.
Total thickness of flooring, including substrate, shall not exceed
1/2”< 1‟-1/8” (12.7<28.57 mm) in depth, and finished flooring
weight may not exceed 70 lbs. (31.75 kg) or < 12 lbs./ ft2.
e) Handrails: Stainless steel, cylindrical profile.
f) Ventilation: 2 speed blower mounted above ceiling, with grille.
g) Emergency light with battery and charger.
i) Emergency exit(s) in ceiling and/or side wall(s) as required.
j) The clear height under the integral ceiling shall be 7”-9”.
k) Canopy: baked enamel color
iii) Car door panel(s) shall be
 Transparent tempered glass panels to conform to European Norms of

Safety for Glass bodied elevators.
iv) Car sill(s) shall be extruded aluminum.
v) Location of control panel and equipment shall locate within the hoist way.
2.2.3.5 PASSENGER TYPE HOISTWAY ENTRANCES (UL "B" LABELED):
i) Hollow metal, horizontal sliding hoist way entrances shall be provided.
ii) Entrance type and clear opening entrance size shall be in accordance
with data at the beginning of these specifications. Sills, struts, headers
and unit frames shall be erected by the elevator contractor and set in
proper relation to the car guide rails. Such erection is to be accomplished
prior to construction of rough walls. Door panels shall be installed by the
elevator contractor after the wall erection is completed.
iii) Entrances shall include unit frames, flush design door panels, sills, and
strut angles, headers, fascia plates, toe guards, dust covers, and
necessary hardware. Necessary support for entrance sills shall be
included.
iv) Material and finish for fascia, toe guards, dust covers and structural
members shall be fabricated and finished in accordance with the elevator
contractor standards.
v) Entrance Frames: Hoist way entrance frames shall be finished in
 #4 (brushed) stainless steel
vi) Door Panels: Hoist way door panels shall be finished in
 Transparent tempered glass panels to conform to European Norms of

Safety for Glass bodied elevators.
MTS/144000/12 (C&A-3)
2.2.3.6 DOOR OPERATOR EQUIPMENT
i) Door Operator: A closed loop permanent magnet PWM high-performance

door operator shall be provided to open and close the car and hoist way
doors simultaneously. Door movement shall be cushioned at both limits
of travel. Electro-mechanical interlock shall be provided at each hoist way
entrance to prevent operation of the elevator unless all doors are closed
and locked. An electric contact shall be provided on the car at each car
entrance to prevent the operation of the elevator unless the car door is
closed.
ii) The door operator shall be arranged so that, in case of interruption or

failure of electric power, the doors can be readily opened by hand from
within the car, in accordance with applicable code. Emergency devices
and keys for opening doors from the landing shall be provided as
required by the local code.
iii) Doors shall open automatically when the car has arrived at or is leveling
at the respective landings. Doors shall close after a predetermined time
interval or immediately upon pressing of a car button. A door open button
shall be provided in the car. Momentary pressing of this button shall
reopen the doors and reset the time interval.
iv) The car door shall be provided with a protective device extending the full
height. This device shall be designed to sense an obstruction in its path
while the doors are closing and automatically cause the car and hoist
way door to return to the open position. The doors shall remain open until
the expiration of a time interval; the doors will then close automatically.
v) Door hangers and tracks shall be provided for each car and hoist way
door. Tracks shall be contoured to match the hanger sheaves. The
hangers shall be designed for power operation with provisions for vertical
and lateral adjustment. Hanger sheaves shall have polyurethane tires
and pre-lubricated sealed-for-life bearings.
2.2.3.7 ELECTRONIC DOOR SAFETY DEVICE
The elevator car shall be equipped with an electronic protective device

extending the full height of the car door. When activated, this sensor shall
prevent the doors from closing or cause them to stop and reopen if they
are in the process of closing. The doors shall remain open as long as the
flow of traffic continues and shall close shortly after the last person
passes through the door opening.
2.2.3.8 SAFETY DEVICE
GENERAL
The safety equipment shall include but not limited to overspeed governors,
safety gear, electrical protective devices, interlocks and control, emergency
power operation etc.
MTS/144000/13 (C&A-3)
i) Overspeed Governor
A centrifugal type overspeed governor shall be provided for each lift with a
tripping speed set in accordance with British Standard 5655 or approved
code. The electric safety device actuated by the overspeed action of the
governor shall cut off electricity supply to the traction machine prior to the
mechanical tripping of the governor.
Overspeed governors shall be type tested.
ii) Car and Counterweight Safety Gear

Lift car shall be provided with instantaneous or flexible guide clamp type
safety gears. The safety gear shall be installed in accordance with the gear
manufacturer‟s recommendation. Safety gears shall be type tested.
Safety gears shall be provided for counterweight where the space below the
hoistway is used as a passageway or usable space or if required in the
Schedule of Equipment. All safety gears provided shall be type tested.
iii) Earthquake emergency return

Upon activation of primary and/or secondary wave seismic sensors, all
cars stop at the nearest floor, and park there with the doors open to
facilitate safe evacuation of passengers.
2.2.4 LIFT PIT

The following shall be provided by the Subcontractor in the lift pits:
a) An emergency stop switch shall be located in the pit accessible from

the pit access door for each lift;
b) A metal clad surface-mounted 13A socket outlet;
c) The lighting level shall be not less than 100 lux.
Power supply shall be taken from the lift machine room.
Counterweights shall be guarded by means of rigid screen extending from a

position 300 millimetres above the lift pit floor to a height of 2100
millimetres.
Buffers shall be type tested.
2.2.5 INTER-COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

The lift inter-communication system shall have two-way communication
between lift car, machine room, Fire Command Centre (FCC) and Airport
Facilities Monitoring and Control Centre (AFMCC) at 1st Level. The Sub-
Contractor shall provide intercom system which consist of a master station,
sub-master stations and slave stations arrange as follows: -
i) To provide a link from the intercom system to the lift monitoring system
ii) A master station in the FCC for communication with slave stations in the lift
cars and sub-master system in the lift motor and AFMCC.
MTS/144000/14 (C&A-3)
iii) The master station and sub-master station intercom shall be push-button
hand phone type comprising of a receiver set, transmitter set and selector
buttons for communication with slave station.
iv) A slave station shall be provided in each lift for communication with the
master and sub-master stations. A slave station shall consist of a speaker
set and a transmitter set.
Multi-way communication system shall allow communication between

control panels located at respective lift machine rooms /lift cars and
combination group indicator/control panel located in the FCC and AFMCC.
Communication may be initiated either from lift car by pushing the
Interphone or Alarm button on the car operating panel, or from Fire
Command Centre, supervisory room or machine room by pushing SELECT
button on the master unit after picking up the handset.
When the master or sub master is receiving a call, it will indicated by a

visible call light lamp (light to indicate which car is calling) and an audible
buzzer. Call lamp should continue to illuminate until the handset is returned
back to the housing.
The system shall be equipped with back-up battery.
2.2.6 LIFT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The lift management system shall enable switching of lift operation modes
by command entry at the command terminal via a keyboard. This system
shall also have the ability to drive a printer to allow a permanent record of
lift-related events. The system shall be installed in the FCC and AFMCC
Room unless specified otherwise. The lift management system shall also
provide monitoring and control points as indicated.
The lift management system shall be provided with high level interface
(compatible to BACNET) to future IBMS in the FCC and AFMCC room and
the server for the system shall be configured as a distributed server to
future IBMS server. The server shall, during any object-triggered events,
allow the alarm graphics, data and objects that are displayed in the local
terminal to be sent to future IBMS display terminal.
The System shall have the capabilities of displaying floor-plan screen

(horizontal section of the building) and hoistway screens (vertical screen) to
satisfy building specifications and requirements. The floor-plan screen shall
display lifts, escalators and travellators locations in the building using
precise graphics. The hoistway screen shall show movement of the lifts,
hall and car call registrations, etc. and shall separately provide for each
individual lift and each group of lifts. It shall be able to display real time
status of the escalators.
In addition to the monitoring capabilities, it shall have a user-friendly menu

driven command capabilities to facilitate the system user to perform a
variety of signal transfers or command functions to each lift or each group
of lifts, escalators or travellators from the easy touch of the keyboard. It
shall also have the ability to drive a printer to allow print-outs of various
information for easier and faster access to the operation records.
MTS/144000/15 (C&A-3)
The Lift Management System shall consist of the following facilities:
a Controller (Monitoring and Command/Monitoring Systems)
High-speed microcomputers to process various signals to and from lifts and

escalators thus achieving real-time communication.
b Colour Graphic Monitor (Monitoring and Command/Monitoring Systems)
High-resolution monitor of screen size not less than 21-inch to display the
operation status of each lifts and escalators in floor plan screens or
hoistway screens. The screen patterns shall provide all necessary
information in letters and colours to facilitate the user supervision of building
security, operation or instructions in case of emergencies. The following
items shall be monitored:
(i) Group Status;

(ii) Floor Name;
(iii) Floor Lockout;
(iv) Registered Hall Call;
(v) Allocated Hall Call;
(vi) Car Designation number;
(vii) Car Position;
(viii) Car Call;
(ix) Car Status (e.g. operation modes);
(x) Door Status;
(xi) Travelling Direction;
(xii) Load Bypass; and
(xiii) Alarm etc.
(xiv) Escalators and Travellators status: power supply, trip alarm, maintenance
mode and emergency stop
c Screen Change-over Switch Box (Monitoring and Command/Monitoring

Systems)
A screen change-over switch box to facilitate selection of screens; floor plan

screens and hoistway screens.
d Command Terminal (Command/Monitoring System)
Command inputs shall be guided by user-friendly menus and help

messages on a high-resolution 21-inch colour CRT display. A keyboard
shall be provided for easy entry of commands, in addition to screen
selection. Commands and functions shall be divided into the following:
(i) Group Commands
Commands that issued to Group Controller to operate the group functions.
(ii) Lift, Escalators and Travellators Commands
MTS/144000/16 (C&A-3)
Commands that issued to particular lifts, escalators and travellators to

operate the lift functions.
(iii) System Commands.
Auxiliary commands to control the system itself which include:
- Schedule Group commands Date and Time;

- Set System Date and Time;
- Set Screen Cycling Speed;
- Automatic Log-out Time Setting;
- Show Commands in Effect;
- Show Scheduled Commands;
- Set Operator Password;
- Cancel Commands in Effect;
- Cancel Scheduled Commands and
- Printer Output On/Off etc.
- Fire alarm reset
e Printer (Command/Monitoring System)
The system shall has the ability to drive the printer to allow a permanent
operation record of lift-related events such as information about the lift
system, signals transfer or commands to each car, etc., if required for later
inspection.
f Backup battery shall be provided. The battery shall have capacity of 72

hours operation.
g Service Floors Suspension Function (if required)
This function if activated by command entry at the Command Terminals

shall suspend lift service to selected floors.
2.2.7 LIFT SUPERVISORY PANEL
A supervisory panel shall be provided at the FCC and AFMCS (Airport

Facilities Monitoring and Control System) Room. It shall provide the
following information:
a) Lift car position

b) Mode of service for lifts, escalators and travellators
c) Source of Power for lifts, escalators and travellators
d) Failure/Tripping for lifts, escalators and travellators
e) Status of Fireman's switch
f) Status of Emergency Battery
g) Fire alarm reset key switch
h) Other requirements of Local Relevant Fire Authority
i) Commands that issued to particular lifts to operate the lifts and stop
command for the escalator and travellator.
An audio alarm shall be incorporated in the supervisory panels. The lift

supervisory panel shall be subject to the approval of Local Relevant Fire
Authority.
MTS/144000/17 (C&A-3)
2.2.8 FIRE REQUIREMENTS
2.2.8.1 FIRE SWITCH
Every lift designated as fire lift shall be provided with a fire lift switch toggle
type, clearly marked "ON" and "OFF", at the designated level for the
exclusive use of firemen in an emergency.
The switch shall operate a control whereby firemen can obtain the use of
the lift without interference from the landing call points.
2.2.8.2 LANDING DOORS
The landing doors at each landing shall be Local Fire Authority approved.
The fins shall effectively seal the entrance to prevent ingress of smoke
when the doors are closed.
The fins shall be so arranged that the operating mechanism of the doors is
unimpaired.
2.2.8.3 WATER PROTECTION FOR FIRE LIFT
The upper and side surfaces of electrical control equipment and

accessories within the lift hoist way, including those mounted on the lift car,
shall be protected against falling water (e.g. from seepage under the lift
landing doors), for example, the provision of waterproof covers or diverting
canopies that shall be so arranged that falling water is diverted away from
other control equipment.
2.2.8.4 FIRE LIFT OPERATION
When the fire lift switch is turned on, the fire lift shall operate as follows:
i) It shall be disconnected from its normal operation mode. Once the doors
are closed, the lift shall proceed to the designated floor without stopping for
car or hall calls. The fire lift switch shall override all control switches except
emergency switch or other safety circuits.
ii) It shall not respond to any car or hall calls.
iii) It shall, if going in the opposite direction of the designated floor, stop at the
next available landing and reverse without opening its doors and return to
the designated floor without stopping for car or hall calls.
iv) It shall, if going in the direction of the designated floor, continue to go to the
designated floor without stopping for car or hall calls.
v) Lift stopping at floors other than the designated floor shall close their doors
and return to the designated floor without stopping for car or hall calls.
MTS/144000/18 (C&A-3)
vi) The lift shall park at the designated floor with its door open and
automatically switch to Emergency Fire's Service.
2.2.8.5 SIGN
A sign with the wordings “IN CASE OF FIRE DO NOT USE LIFTS” shall be
permanently displayed at each lift landing.
The design and finishes of the notice and font of the lettering shall subject
to Employer's approval.
2.2.9 HANDICAP REQUIREMENTS

Where required, lift shall incorporate handicap facilities in accordance with
the EN 81, ISO/TR 11071 or relevant international standard. These
features shall include the following:
a Car operating panel mounted horizontally on the side of the lift car. It shall
be mounted between 900 millimetres and 1200 millimetres from the finished
floor level. Where a secondary car operating panel is required, it will be
replaced by the handicap car operating panel.
b In addition to the normal set of hall call button at each lift landing, an
additional set of handicap hall call buttons shall be installed below the
'normal' hall call buttons at a height between 900 millimetres and 1200
millimetres from the lift landing finished floor level.
c Grab bars shall be provided on both sides and the rear of the lift car and
positioned at a height of 900 millimetres from the car floor level with a
space of 40 millimetres to 50 millimetres from the walls.
d An international symbol of access for the disabled shall be permanently and

conspicuously displayed at each and every lift landing next to the lift
entrance and in the lift car. The symbol shall be made of a 60 millimetres x
60 millimetres x 6 millimetres thick stainless steel plate with a white logo on
blue background.
e Braille notations indicating the floor levels shall be incorporated next to

each button at the handicap COP and the handicap hall call buttons.
f The lift car door opening shall have a width not less than 900 millimetres.
g The closing of the lift car doors shall also be controlled by a photoelectric
cell in addition to the normal requirements stipulated in the section on 'Door
Safety Devices'.
h A taped voice system shall be provided for announcing the car position,
opening/closing of doors, direction of travel and messages shall be
provided. This voice system shall be rendered operative when the
handicap car operating panel is activated.
2.2.10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
MTS/144000/19 (C&A-3)
2.2.10.1 GENERAL
All lifts shall be tested thoroughly before and after the installation. For site
testing, this shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer or his
representative and subject to the approval of the local Authorities. The
Sub-Contractor shall provide all the required testing equipment and
labour at his own expenses. Each and every test shall be recorded and 3
copies each of the test reports shall be submitted to the Employer.
All defects such as insufficiencies in performance, safety, reliability, finish
and appearance shall be corrected before final approval at no cost to the
Employer.
2.2.10.2 FACTORY TESTING ON LIFTS
Factory acceptance test shall be witnessed by 3 representatives of

Engineer and Employer. Contractor shall inform the representatives of
Engineer and Employer one month prior to the factory test. Contractor shall
include all expenses for this factory test in his tender price and no further
claims to Employer shall be entertained.
Factory testing at the manufacturing plants shall include but not limit to
the following:
Complete functional tests on the Lift Car Controllers, Traction machine,

general test for governor and safety device and other tests as per
manufacturer QC procedures.
2.2.10.3 LIFT SITE COMMISSIONING TEST
The minimum site tests to be carried out shall comply latest version of
ASME A17.1 all applicable local codes, EN 81, ISO 4190.1 & BS 5655
(All Parts) for installation, operation and maintenance of electric
passenger and good lift and shall include the following if not covered in
the above code:
a Electrical Insulation Resistance and Earth Continuity Test for all electrical
installation to comply fully with the international standard or local relevant
authority requirement.
b Tests to determine all the safety devices of the lifts at the specified
contract loads, including over speed tests and safety catch test.
c Tests on the specified contract speed.
d Complete functional tests on motors, brakes, control equipment, door

locking devices etc.
e Floor leveling accuracy under full-load, half-load, no-load and any other
load as required by the Employer.
f Complete functional tests on the Emergency Battery Operated Power

Supply System.
MTS/144000/20 (C&A-3)
g Tests on Emergency Power and Fire Operation.
h Complete tests on Car/Hall Position and Directional Indicators and all

functions incorporated in the Car Operational Panel, Including the
Intercom System.
i Temperature readings of machine room and equipment every fifteen

minutes for at least 2 hours or the duration of the test whichever is
longer.
2.2.11 TRAINING
MTS/144000/21 (C&A-3)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION

Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator
equipment on the agreed upon date, the General contractor shall be
responsible for providing a proper and suitable storage area on or off the
premises.
the elevator contractor, upon notification from the General contractor, at
no cost to the elevator subcontractor, shall divert the elevator equipment
to the storage area. If the elevator equipment has already been delivered
to the site, the General contractor shall be responsible for transporting
the elevator equipment to the storage area. The elevator equipment shall
be stored and removed from storage to the job site in a timely manner at
no cost to the elevator contractor.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with ASME A17.1, manufacturer‟s instructions and

applicable codes.
Install all the elevator systems components, coordinate installation of

hoist way wall construction, and adjust equipment to comply with required
performance levels.
Before permitting either temporary or permanent use of elevators,

perform tests required by ASME A17.2 and governing agencies or
regulations.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
The elevator contractor shall make a final check of each elevator

operation with the owner or owner‟s representative present prior to
turning each elevator over for use. The elevator contractor shall
determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning
properly.
3.5 WARRANTY
The elevator contractor guarantees the materials and workmanship of the

apparatus furnished under these specifications. The elevator contractor
shall make good any defects which may develop within one (1) year from
the date of acceptance of each elevator not due to ordinary wear and
tear, vandalism, improper or insufficient maintenance by others, abuse,
MTS/144000/22 (C&A-3)
misuse, neglect or any other cause beyond the control of the elevator
contractor.

adjustments, and lubrication of the elevator equipment shall be
provided by the elevator contractor for a period of twelve (12) months
after the elevator has been turned over for customer use


persons other than the elevator contractor. Only genuine parts and
supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of the original
equipment shall be provided.
MTS/144000/23 (C&A-3)
SPARE PARTS
PART ONE GENERAL
REFERENCE
iii) The Contractor shall supply 2 sets of spare tools for the lifts in purpose made tool
box.
PART TWO PRODUCT
MATERIAL
The Contractor shall supply spare parts as specified by the Manufacturer of Elevators
and a list is to be submitted with the tender.
INSTALLATION
MTS/144000/24 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 21: FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 210500 COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESION
SECTION 210500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
i) The Fire Protection System shall be in accordance with the requirements,

regulations and By-laws of authorities having jurisdiction, NFPA and the
requirements of Associated Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Companies.
ii) The fire protection Contractor shall be experienced in the design and
installation of fire protection systems to NFPA standards, and shall be an
approved company by CIVIL DEFENCE DEPARTMENT / LOCAL
AUTHORITIES.
iii) Design Criteria of Automatic Sprinkler System
NFPA Standard 13: Ordinary Hazard (Group II)

Area of Operation – 372 sq-m
Water Discharge Density – 6.1 mm/min
(This will precede the design criteria stated in Notes and Legend Drawing of
Fire Protection System)
1.2 GENERAL
i) Mentioned herein or indicated on the drawings, of articles, products

operations or methods, requires that the Contractor{s) provide each item
mentioned or indicated, of quality or subject to qualifications stated, each
operation prescribed and provide therefore all labour, products, equipment
and services to complete the fire protection systems.
ii) Materials construction and installation methods of all piping, fittings and
valves shall conform to the current acceptable standards of the authorities
having jurisdiction. All components used shall be UL or ULC listed and FM
approved.
iii) All components of the automatic sprinkler system shall be from one
manufacturer unless specifically stated otherwise. The fire protection
contractor shall maintain an Engineer, on site from the manufacturer for the
duration of the project who shall supervise the complete installation. The
manufacturer shall issue a certificate upon completion of the project stating
that the complete system has been installed, tested and commissioned as
per the specifications, drawings, NFPA and Civil Defense requirements. The
Fire Protection Contractor shall then maintain the complete installation in
accordance with NFPA requirements for a period of one year after the
Taking-over Certificate is issued.
MTS/210500/1 (C&A-3)
iv) Shop Drawings shall give hydraulic reference points to be designated by

letter or -number and to correspond to the comparable reference point
shown on the hydraulic calculation sheets the contractor shall submit
complete hydraulic calculating including graph summary and detailed
worksheets.
v) Type and location of hangers, pipe sizes and locations, details of alarm
valve and trim, control valves, and all additional information required for
approval by the Authorities and Factory Mutual shall be shown on the shop
drawings.
vi) Five (5) hard copies and three (3) soft copies of complete shop drawings
and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to the employer bearing the
stamp of a fire protection professional Engineer prior to the installation
works.
vii) The Contractor shall comply with any new or additional requirement for Civil
Defence / Local Fire Authority on his own expenses.
viii) The tender drawings show the locations of the sprinklers. The Contractor
shall follow the locations closely, especially the exposed layer of sprinklers
at the ceiling, which had be coordinated in the Reflected Ceiling Plan (RCP).
Additional sprinklers are also required below air-conditioned ducts, baggage
conveyors, electrical trays, etc. as according to the NFPA and FM
requirements. The Contractor shall design and provide all additional
sprinklers and piping to fully meet the NFPA and FM requirements without
additional cost.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
i) The scope of work shall include, but is not limited to the following:
a. Supply and installation of fire pumps, one Electric one Diesel and
one jockey pump, all piping, valves, fire hose cabinets and all
accessories, appurtenances etc required to provide complete fire
protection system. Pumps shall be in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA, UL and FM.
ii) It is the responsibility of the contractor to make a detailed review of all

drawings during the tender period, in order to fully comprehend the extent of
the work to be completed.
iii) The design drawings have been prepared based on the architectural
elements and as per the requirements of all relevant standards. It is none
the less the contractors responsibility to meet the minimum requirements of
the fire protection systems. Obstructions to pipe: routing and obstructions to
the location of sprinkler heads are not shown on these drawings. It is this
contractor's responsibility to locate and detail these obstructions as part of
the scope of work. In addition it is this contractor's responsibility to acquaint
himself with all the drawings from the other disciplines architectural
structural, electrical, and mechanical, during the tender phase, so that any
conflicts omission can be appreciated at the time of tender. No additional
compensation will be given for conditions that were known at the time of
tender.
MTS/210500/2 (C&A-3)
iv) During the construction phase the contractor will coordinate between all
trades and obstructions, and if any, and provide coordinate shop drawings
for the approval of the consultant. Shop drawing shall take into consideration
to headroom clearances, head ceiling type’s patterns, and follow sprinkler
head locations as far as possible.
v) It is the contractor’s responsibility to verify pump head requirements and

submit the calculations to the employer prior to order the pumps. No
additional compensation will be given for increase in pump requirements due
to compliance with NFPA, FM and UL and to meet additional pressure due
to co-ordination of the pipe work with other services and building elements.
vi) The contractor shall allow a min. of 3 weeks for the return of reviewed shop
drawings.
1.4 STAND PIPE SYSTEM DESIGN
i) Hydraulic calculations and shall conform to NFPA-13 and NFPA-14, latest

edition for a standpipe system to the requirements specified herein and to
Civil Defence requirements / Local Authorities.
ii) Hydraulic calculations shall be performed taking into account the following
parameters:
a. The velocity in overhead piping and fittings shall not exceed 3

meters per second. This includes riser nipples.
b. Velocity in cross mains shall not exceed 3.8 meters per second.
c. The velocity in the immediate area of the sprinkler system alarm

check valve shall not exceed 4 meters per second.
d. Velocities shall be shown on calculations.
e. Friction losses in pipe shall be calculated in accordance with the

Hazen and Williams’s formula with 'C' value of 120 for above ground
steel pipe and 100 for underground pipe.
iii) The Hydraulic calculation shall include and identify the pressure drop from
the water tank to the pump and through the loop main to the risers, in
addition to the overhead piping.
MTS/210500/3 (C&A-3)
1.5 WARRANTY
i) The contractor shall provide warranty in accordance with the General

Conditions
ii) This warranty shall further provide that in the event of the failure of any
system or its component equipment items or the improper functioning
thereof, during the period of the warranty, the Contractor shall available
within six hours or less, competent service personnel for the restoration of
all systems and equipment for complete operation. Should the nature of
the failure be' such as to presently an emergency in the opinion of the
Owner, such personnel shall be promptly available. Irrespective of timing
should the failure be such as fall under this warranty, the cost of the
services shall be borne by the Contractor.
iii) If service personnel are not promptly available "on call" within six hours or
less, the Owner may, employ such personnel as are available to him at the
expense of the Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION
i) The fire protection contractor shall be responsible to coordinate his work with
all other Trades and shall be completely familiar with and shall make
allowance for conditions which effect the sprinkler installation.
ii) The installation of the fire protection systems shall be carried out with due
regard for the space limitations of the false ceiling voids and for the space
requirements of other services. All pumps, sprinklers etc. shall be installed as
per manufacturer’s recommendations, and in accordance with all relevant
codes and standards, and any requirements of local authorities having
justification.
MTS/210500/4 (C&A-3)
SECTION 210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 210553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
i) Conform to General Instructions for Mechanical Division, unless

otherwise stated.
ii) Conform to fire protection -general requirements, 210500.
iii) All materials shall be UL listed and FM approved and shall be

approved by Civil Defence dept / Local Authorities
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
i) For working pressures below 2000 kPa.
a. Where working pressure in the piping is below 2000 kP pipes

shall be seamless ASTM A53 grade B, M.S. schedule 40 for
sprinkler system and seamless ASTM A53 grade B,
Galvanized steel schedule 40 for wet rising and hosereel
system.
b. Fittings for piping 50mm and smaller shall be UL listed and

FM approved threaded factory galvanized cast iron fitting,
class 250 to ANSI B16.4.
c. Fittings for piping larger than 50mm shall be joined using

factory galvanized mechanical roll grooved fittings and
mechanical joints. Fittings, gaskets and mechanical couplings
shall be UL listed and FM approved. The fitting shall be rated
to meet the system pressure requirements.
d. Galvanizing shall be on the inside and outside of pipe and

fittings.
ii) For working pressures of 2000 kPa and above
a. Where working pressures in the piping is 2000 kPa and

above, pipes shall be seamless factory M.S. steel to ASTM
A53, grade B, schedule 80 for sprinkler system and seamless
factory galvanized steel to ASTM A53, grade B, schedule 80
for wet rising and hosereel system.
b. Fittings for 50mm and smaller shall be UL listed and FM

approved threaded factory galvanized malleable iron fittings,
class 300 to ANSI B 16.3.
c. Fittings for piping larger then 50mm shall be extra heavy UL

listed and FM approved flanged and weld galvanized wrought
steel fittings class 300 to ANSI B16.9.
MTS/210553/1(C&A-3 )
d. Galvanizing shall be on the inside and outside of pipe and

fittings.
iii) Welding
a. Shop welding and galvanizing of piping will be permitted in

lieu of screwed or flanged connections. Joining of sections of
welded piping in the field shall be by screwed, flanged or
mechanical joints as specified. Field welding will not be
permitted.
b. Welding fittings shall be in compliance with ANSI standard for

factory made wrought steel buttweld fittings ANSI No. B16.9,
ANSI standard buttwelding ends or pipe, valves, flanges and
fittings ANSI No. B16.25 and ASTM Standard, Specifications
for piping fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy steel for
moderate and elevated temperatures ASTM No. A-234.
c. Tee connections in welded piping shall be made with a

factory fabricated butt welding tee or with welded of butt,
socket or threaded type. When welded are used, the branch
connections shall be one half the diameter of the main or
less. Scarf welding or direct butt welding of side connections
shall not be permitted. Tees fabricated from pipe shall not be
permitted.
d. Long radius, welding elbow shall, wherever possible, be used

in changing pipe directions of welded pipe lines. Mitered
joints shall not be accepted.
e. Welders shall be certified as being qualified for welding in

compliance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vesse1 Code, Section 'IX Qualification Standard for
Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders Brazers, and
Welding and Brazing Operators, latest Edition.
iv) Hangers and Supports
a. Piping hangers, supports and sway braces shall be fabricated

in accordance with NFPA-13. The hangers, rods supports and
supporting devices and accessories shall be capable of
supporting at least twice the live loads of the product being
supported. All hangers, supports and accessories shall be UL
listed and FM approved.
b. Clevis hangers shall be adjustable of yoke and lower U strap

design with cross bolt and manufactured from galvanized
steel. Cross bolt shall have a double locking nut. Vertical
adjustable supporting rod shall have a load nut below the
yoke and a locking a nut above the yoke. Vertical inserts
installed using power activated gun will not be accepted.
c. Concrete inserts shall be factory made galvanized malleable

iron, poured in place type, screwed or toggle style.
d. Concrete anchors shall be factory made cadmium plated

MTS/210553/2(C&A-3 )
malleable iron or alloy steel expansion shield type.
e. Welded steel brackets for supporting loads up to maximum of

390 kg shall be galvanized steel and designed to accept
standard hanger rods and pipe supporting devices.
f. Riser clamps shall be galvanized steel bands shaped to

tightly fit O;D. of pipe, secured with bolts.
2.2 ALARM CHECK VALVES
i) Alarm valves shall be complete with electric alarm gong, all required
auxiliary valves and drains and with pressure switch for wiring into
building electric alarm system.
ii) Locate alarm gong on exterior of building above Siamese connection

(two locations) 2500 mm above grade.
iii) Alarm valves shall be UL listed, FM approved.
iv) Alarm check valves shall be UL listed, FM approved, iron body,

bronze trim, for 1206 kPa working pressure complete with electric
pressure switches, test and alarm bell connections, pressure gauges,
low pressure switch and all other appurtenances for a complete wet
pipe system. Grinnell model F20 / 200 or approved equal. Use class
300 valves where required.
2.3 FLOW ALARM SWITCHES
i) Flow alarm switch shall be UL listed and FM approved for the size of
pipe in which it is installed as a paddle type water flow indicator.
ii) Each flow switch shall be completed with, supervised shut-off valve,
drain valve and test valve and with sight glass.
iii) Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell VSR-F (or approved equivalent).
2.4 FIRE DEPARTMENT BREECHING INLET CONNECTION
i) Breeching Inlet connections shall be by an acceptable manufacturer.

The unit shall be complete with two 65mm threaded connections to
suit type of thread on hose used by local fire department and a
common 150mm outlet pipe complete with check valve. Connections
shall be completed with threaded caps, chained to body. All parts
including valve body, chain and caps shall be polished and-chrome
plated bronze.
ii) Breeching Inlets shall be as shown on drawings with wording in Urdu

and English as specified below, cast into face plate.
iii) Breeching Inlet connected to the combined automatic

sprinkler/standpipe system shall bear the wording.
“Combined Sprinklers/Standpipe Fire Department Inlet”
MTS/210553/3(C&A-3 )
iv) Fire department inlet breeching connections shall be installed in

accordance with Civil Defence and NFPA requirements and as
shown on drawings. Provide one check valve for each connection.
2.5 CONTROL VALVES
i) All zone control valves shall be UL listed and FM approved gate or

butterfly valves with supervisory switches built into the valve
operation Grinell Gruylock Series 7700 or equal.
ii) Except where special features are required or unless otherwise

noted all valves shall be of one manufacturer with the manufacturer's
name and the pressure rating clearly marked on the outside of the
valve body.
2.6 PRESSURE GAUGES
i) All pressure gauges shall be UL or ULC listed spring pressure

gauges with 90mm dial. Each gauge shall be controlled by a valve
having arrangement for draining.
ii) Install gauges on the suction and discharge side of all pumps, on
incoming water services and at the highest point of all sprinkler
risers.
2.7 INSPECTOR TEST CONNECTIONS AND DRAINS
i) Provide Inspector's test connections, riser drains and low point drains
as required in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Drains and test connections
shall be piped to drain risers in locations acceptable to the Engineer.
Provide sprinkler zone valve cabinets, wherever zone control valves
are shown on drawings, to house all valves and accessories.
ii) Sprinkler zone cabinets shall be suitable for recess or surface

mounting.
iii) Sprinkler zone cabinets shall be provided with the following

equipment and accessories:
iv) Tub: Constructed from 16 gauge galvanized steel, treated for

corrosion resistance and prime coated; interior to be finished in
baked white enamel; of sufficient size to contain the accessories
shown on the drawing.
v) Door: Flat door constructed from 12 gauge galvanized steel with

prime coated finish, red enamel finish, 6.3mm full plate panel,
concealed hinge which shall permit door to travel through full 180O;
corbin latch.
MTS/210553/4(C&A-3 )
vi) Flush or recessed cabinets shall have adjustable flat trim frame
constructed from same material and finish as door.
vii) Support of sprinkler zone cabinets shall be the responsibility of this

section.
viii) Cabinet to bear the wording:
ix) Sprinkler zone No. or floor being served.
2.8 IDENTIFICATIONS TAGS
i) Properly lettered polished brass or bronze metal tags conforming to

NFPA 13 shall be attached to each valve and alarm device.
2.9 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
i) All valves controlling the sprinkler system shall be electrically

supervised open or closed as required.
ii) Switches shall be UL listed as manufactured by Potter, Crane or

approved equivalent.
iii) The “Normally Open” (N.O) contacts shall include trouble on the firm
alarm control panel without sounding an alarm.
iv) Monitoring switches for supervisory valves on the sprinkler and stand
pipes system shall be supplied and installed by the contractor.
v) All electrical service wiring for monitoring switches shall be supplied

and installed by Division 16.
vi) Monitoring switches shall be arranged to initiate an alarm condition

on the fire alarm control panel if the valve is closed or open (as
applicable) or tampered with.
2.10 TESTING
i) The contractor shall pressure tests all fire protection piping included
in the contract. Tests shall be made after all sprinkler heads and
water flow switches are installed, but before piping is painted,
covered or concealed. All labour and equipment required for testing
is part of the contractors responsibility.
ii) Testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA.
iii) The consultant shall be notified one week in advance of any testing
so that the tests can be witnessed.
iv) Defects that develop during the tests shall be promptly remedied and
testing shall be reapplied to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
MTS/210553/5(C&A-3 )
2.11 PAINTING
i) All fire protection piping shall be painted red in accordance with Civil
Defence requirements. Refer to painting section for paint
specifications.
2.12 SPRINKLERS
i) All Sprinklers shall be in accordance with sprinkler schedule and be

UL listed and FM approved.
ii) Sprinkler head in unfinished ceiling areas shall be upright type

heads, Wire mesh guards shall be provided on head in the
parking areas. Sprinklers in ceiling areas shall generally be
concealed unless otherwise noted.
o
iii) Provide normal 141 C sprinkler heads in kitchen, and generator
o
room. All other area shall be provided with 68 C sprinkler heads .
iv) Sprinklers shall be Grinell, Reliance, Viking or of an equivalent

acceptable manufacturer.
2.13 CANISTER EXTINGUISHERS
i) In all small electrical rooms or telephone rooms, provide automatic

spot gaseous protection system using horizontal or vertical mount
multi-purpose ABC chemical extinguishers with attached auto
discharge head, adequately sized to serve the room. Provide multiple
cylinders as necessary. Provide connection to fire alarm system.
ii) Canister extinguishers shall be of a suitable manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation carefully inspect installed Work of other trades, whether
pre-existing or part of this Project, and verify that such work is complete to
the point where installation of sprinkler system may start.
B. Notify the Employer should conditions exist, not resulting from Work of this
Project, that prohibits the installation from conforming to referenced codes,
regulations, standards and approved design.
C. Install materials and equipment that are free of moisture, scale, corrosion, dirt
and other foreign materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION
D. General:
1. Install system in accordance with NFPA 13.
MTS/210553/6(C&A-3 )
2. Do not locate sprinkler heads closer than 300mm to supply air
registers.
3. Visually examine pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories to

ensure they are clean and free of burrs, cracks and other imperfections
before installation. Clean pipe interiors by flushing.
4. Verify dimensions in field.
5. Drawings show only approximate building outlines and interior

construction details as an aid in understanding the scope of Work.
Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting the Work and
arrange Work accordingly, providing such sprinkler heads, fittings,
traps, draining valves, piping, and accessories as required to meet such
conditions. Show relevant structural details on Drawings.
6. Do not render inoperative any system without the prior approval of the
Employer. Coordinate necessary shutdowns of existing systems (if
required) by notifying Employer a minimum of 7 working days before
rendering such systems inoperative.
7. Coordinate sprinkler piping, sprinkler heads and associated equipment

with existing ceiling or roof materials, lighting, ductwork, conduit, piping,
suspended equipment, structural and other building components.
8. Dispose of equipment removed for completion of this Project as

directed by the Employer.
9. Provide access openings in areas where concealed sprinkler piping is

installed.
E. Piping:
1. Mark and identify sprinkler piping in accordance with Section 22 0554

Identification for Plumbing, HVAC, and Fire Piping and Equipment.
2. Conceal sprinkler piping in areas with suspended ceilings. Install piping

in exposed areas as high as possible using necessary fittings and
auxiliary drains. Keep sprinkler piping a minimum of 2300mm above
finish floor. Where not possible, run piping at same elevation as
existing piping and ducts. Obtain prior approval from the Employer.
3. Install Inspector's Test piping at the hydraulically most remote point of

automatic sprinkler system and discharge to the exterior of building.
Also install inspector’s test piping for each water flow switch. Where
possible, conceal test piping in wall and provide access panels for valve
and sightglass and protect from freezing. Locate Inspector's Test
Station in an easily accessible location approved by the Employer.
4. Diamond core drill or sleeve concrete penetrations, then grout and seal
with fire-resistive material, securely held in place. Use Listed/ through
penetration fire stop system assemblies for piping penetrating fire
resistance rated construction.
MTS/210553/7(C&A-3 )
F. Hanging, Bracing and Restraint of System Piping:
1. Install pipe hangers for pipe supports inside buildings in accordance

with NFPA 13.
2. Install the seismic protection of the system piping, including sway

bracing, as indicated and in accordance with the version of NFPA 13
indicated. Include the required features indentified therein that are
applicable to the specific piping system.
3. Install concrete anchors as indicated and in accordance with Division 3

sections on post-installed anchors.
4. Do not hang other piping or equipment from sprinkler pipe.
G. Welding:
1. Shop weld pipe and fittings using approved welding fittings. Comply
with NFPA 13 for welding methods.
2. Provide a blind flange or grooved cap at each end of welded headers.
3. Comply with Offsite Welding and Joining Requirements and Onsite

Welding and Joining Requirements.
H. Alarm Valve: Set plumb and unobstructed. Provide minimum clear distances
from walls to centerline of alarm valve as follows:
1. Rear – 300mm
2. Sides – 500mm
3. Front – 950mm
I. System Riser: Install riser from underground so that no joint or fitting occurs
within the bearing zone of foundation structures or occurs at least 1600mm
from any foundation structure.
J. Control Valves: Provide Listed OS&Y fire protection control valves. Installed
so open or closed status can be readily seen from finish floor.
1. Install control valves on supply lines (outside protected area) into

elevator shaft and elevator equipment room, computer rooms, and
identified special protection areas. Control valves to be accessible from
floor level. Provide valve with tamper supervision switches.
MTS/210553/8(C&A-3 )
K. Sprinklers and Accessories:
1. Provide upright sprinklers on exposed piping below ceiling. Pendent

sprinklers may be used where necessary due to spacing, location and
position requirements.
2. Provide chrome plated pendent, recessed, or flush mounted sprinklers

below finish ceilings as directed by Employer. Route supply piping
above ceiling.
3. Align sprinklers below ceiling parallel to ceiling features and walls, and
locate as close to center as possible in halls and corridors.
4. Provide chrome-plated escutcheons where exposed piping passes

through finished floors, walls, partitions and ceilings. Secure to pipe
with set screws or spring clips.
5. Protect sprinklers subject to mechanical injury with guards as follows:
a. Provide guards in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical

equipment rooms, janitor's closets, and storage areas where
distance from sprinkler deflector to finish floor is less than 15 feet.
b. In all other areas, provide guards where distance from sprinkler

deflector to finish floor is less than 2150mm.
6. To prevent freezing, extend dry pendent sprinklers a minimum of 6

inches into heated area before connection to wet sprinkler piping.
7. Provide one spare sprinkler cabinet, complete with sprinklers of

assorted temperature ratings of the type necessary and in use
throughout the installation, at each main riser valve. Equip each
cabinet per NFPA 13.
L. Signs:
1. Install as required by NFPA 13.
2. Post indicator valves (PIVs) shall be provided with a permanent

weatherproof placard identifying the building or area protected by the
sprinkler system for which the PIV controls the water supply.
3. Provide a sign attached in the vicinity of control valves to antifreeze

systems designating the type of antifreeze installed in the system.
4. Provide a permanent, weatherproof sign noting “BACKFLOW TEST

CONNECTION” located on the exterior of the building in the immediate
vicinity of the backflow test connection valves.
M. Painting:
Paint sprinkler risers, unfinished pumper connection piping, exposed

sprinkler piping in stairwells, and sprinkler piping in all equipment rooms with
MTS/210553/9(C&A-3 )
2 coats of Fire Protection Red. Apply one coat of primer and one coat of
paint to match background, on new exposed piping in occupied spaces. Do
not paint sprinkler heads. Any sprinkler heads receiving paint require
replacement. Unsupervised Water Supplies: Install approved water flow
detection device on underground water supplies entering buildings when fire
protection riser is more than 3050 lineal mm from exterior of building.
N. Water Supply Control Valve: Where not otherwise provided for, provide water
supply control valve(s) conforming to the requirements of NFPA 24.
1. Provide UL Listed or FM valves, with Listed indicating post. Post

Indicator Valves (PIVs) shall be located at minimum of 12 meter from
building in accordance with NFPA 24. PIVs may be located closer than
12 meter from building providing they are located outside the collapse
area of the building’s walls. Fire hydrants and PIVs proposed to be
located closer than 12 meter away from a building shall receive prior
approval.
2. When a PIV is located less than 6 meter from building, or when a wall
PIV is provided, the wall 3 meter in all directions of the valve shall be
blank masonry or one-hour fire-resistance-rated construction.
3. PIVs shall be set so that the top of the post is 890mm to 1000mm
above the final grade.
4. PIVs shall be protected against mechanical damage (e.g., bollards).
O. Special Tools and Devices:
Provide one complete set of special tools or special devices required for
operation, testing and/or maintenance of equipment furnished under this
Section.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
P. Install devices or equipment not specifically covered by these Specifications

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS
Q. Final connection of new systems to existing underground piping systems will

be made by the Subcontractor.
R. Final connection of new systems to other existing systems above grade shall
be done by the contractor. Do all final connections of this type with only one
outage per existing system.
MTS/210553/10(C&A-3 )
STERILIZATION
S. Sterilize sprinkler system underground piping upstream of alarm valve in

accordance with” Disinfection of Potable Water Piping”.
T. Do not sterilize sprinkler system downstream of alarm valve.
TESTING
U. Hydrostatically test piping in accordance with NFPA 13.
V. Flush system with water in accordance with NFPA 13 and 24.
W. Comply with the discharge requirements “Water Discharge Requirements”.
X. Notify Employer’s representative at least 7 working days in advance to

witness all system tests.
INSPECTION
Y. Inspect new fire protection system in accordance with NFPA 13 and 24, in
the presence of the Employer. Give advance notice, as specified below, to
the STR prior to any tests.
1. Notify the Employer upon completion of installation of all materials and

equipment. Employer will schedule inspection of installation within 7
working days after contractor notification.
2. Correct deficiencies noted during this inspection and correct prior to

further testing.
MTS/210553/11(C&A-3 )
SECTION 213000 FIRE PUMPS
SECTION 213000 – FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
i) Conform to General Instructions for Mechanical Division.
1.2 PUMP HEAD
i) The pump head shown on the drawing schedule is an estimated. The

contractor shall select a pump head to satisfy the fire protection
system requirements based on the actual site installed pipe routing
and full system hydraulic calculations and it will be reviewed during
execution stage. The contractor shall submit 5 hard copies and 3 soft
copies of full hydraulic calculation to Employer for review.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i) Fire pumps shall be UL or ULC listed and FM approved and as

manufactured by Bell and Gossett, Fairbanks Morse or approved
equal.
ii) Each pump shall have a capacity as shown in Pump Schedule,

adjusted as necessary to suit the hydraulic calculations.
iii) The pumping unit shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories lnc.,

and shall be fully , approved by the Associated Factory Mutual Fire
Insurance Companies, and shall meet all requirements of the NFPA
20.
iv) The pumps shaft also deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at
a pressure of not less that 65% of rated pressure. The shutoff
pressure shall not exceed 140% of the rated pressure at rated
capacity.
v) Each fire pump shall be of horizontal split case centrifugal single

stage or multistage construction, specifically labeled for fire service.
The pump shall be connected to the combined sprinkler/standpipe
system. The suction supply for the fire pump shall be from a storage
tank at a maximum pressure of 20 kPa and a minimum pressure of 0
kPa. The pump casing shall be cast iron and rated to withstand twice
the working pressure.
vi) The Fire and Sprinkler Pumps shall include the following minimum
accessories, as required by NFPA standards:
a. One ventilation type flow metering device shall be provided

for each pump, or as shown on the drawings.
b. Necessary valves with supervisory switches.
c. Air release valve and fittings.

MTS/213000/1( C&A-3 )
d. Discharge pressure gauge.
e. Main relief valve, pilot operated, enclosed relief valve

overflow cone and discharge tee with elbow for the diesel
drive only.
f. Main relief valve with discharge piped to storage water tank.
g. Pump casing relief valve.
vii) Electric motors shall be a horizontal, open drip-proof type, wound for
400 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz ( cycle ) current. Motor shall be of such
capacity that 115% of the full-load ampere rating shall not be
exceeded at any condition of the pump load for a UL ambient
temperature Listed fire pump.
viii) At 50°C maximum ambient temperature, the motor shall be designed

for a temperature rise not exceeding 60°C when carrying fully rated-
load continuously, and shall be capable of operating continuously
with an overload of 15% without stress or excessive rise in
temperature. The locked rotor current shall not exceed the values
specified in NFPA 20.
ix) Bearings shall be anti friction ball or roller type.
x) The Fire Pump motor control equipment shall be UL Listed , and FM

Approved. It shall be completely assembled, wired and tested by the
control manufacturer before shipment from factory, and shall be LON
compliant. The controller shall be located as close as practical and
within sight of the motor and shall be so located or protected that it
will not be injured by water escaping from the pump or connection.
The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic auto
transformer type, and shall be complete with:
a. Disconnect switch -externally operable, quick-break type.
b. Circuit breaker -time delay type with trips in all phases set for
300% of the motor full-load current.
c. Motor starter, capable of being energized automatically

through the pressure switch or manually by means of an
extremely operable handle.
d. Pressure switch, of adjustable type.
e. Running period timer -set to keep motor in operation, when

started -automatically, for a minimum period of one minute for
each 10 HP motor rating, but not to exceed 7 minutes.
f. Pilot lamp -to indicate circuit breaker closed and power

available.
g. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
h. Alarm relay to energize an audible or visible alarm through an

independent source of power to indicate circuit breaker open
or power failure.
MTS/213000/2( C&A-3 )
i. Manual selection station -a two position station shall be provided on the enclosure
marked "Automatic" and "Manual".
j. Means shall be provided on the Controller to operate an

alarm signal continuously while the pump is running.
k. Provision for power supply at 230V for diesel pump battery

chargers.
l. Control equipment shall meet all requirement of NFPA 20.
m. Electronic water level indicator shall provide remote reading

of water level. The LON compliant fire pump control panel
shall have means for tank low water level input signal to
IBMS.
xi) The jockey pump capacity and pressure shall be as indicated in the
pump schedule on the drawings. The Pump shall be 3000rpm close
coupled, centrifugal, electric, complete with pressure relief valve.
a. Pump controller shall be factory pre-wired and tested.

Pressure switch shall sense 1ow pressure in the fire pump
system. Set cutin pressure 5 psi above main fire pump cut-in
pressure. Set cutout pressure at system pressure. Provide
minimum run timer to operate the pump for a minimum of 3
minutes.
b. Across the line start, H-O-A selector switch shall be integral to

the control panel along with a fusib1e 3-pole disconnect
switch, magnetic motor , contractor and thermal overload
relays with external reset.
xii) The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked,

stand-alone, distributed and integrated control system, to fulfill this
intent the FMCS requires the incorporation of LonWorks
Technologies using Free Topology Transceivers (FTT-10), and
specific conformance to the LONMARK Inguidelines in all systems,
equipment and related devices. The system specified in this section
shall comply with this requirement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION
i) The fire pumps shall be provided with a supervised isolating valve,

flowmeter and throttling valve on the test piping. Test piping shall discharge
water to the fire water tank through a galvanized steel diffuser pipe.
ii) Each fire pump shall be complete with suction and discharge pressure
gauges, circulation relief valve, closed relief cone, automatic air release
valve, drain valves coupling guard.
MTS/213000/3( C&A-3 )
iii) There shall be one control panel for the entire fire pump set.
iv) A remote annunciation for each pump shall be located in the security office
and shall provide the following features, diesel and electric pump status
indicating lights and trouble light for each pump. Wiring between control
panel and remote control panel shall be by Division 15 installed in conduit as
described in Division 16.
v) Batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge condition, with electrolyte liquid

in a separate container. Electrolyte shall be added and the battery given a
conditioning at the time that the engine is put into service. Batteries shall be
located so as to readily accessible for servicing and at least 300mm above
floor level.
vi) The electric motor driven unit shall have the pump, electric motor and control
panel mounted on a common base. The entire unit will be factory tested
prior to shipping.
vii) The integrated control panel for the electric diesel and firing pumps
automatic engine control panel and the electric motor driven unit control
panel shall be specifically designed for fire pump service. All wiring between
each pump, pump devices and controller shall be factory wired and tested.
Wiring between controller and the building fire alarm system shall be by
Division 16. Power wiring for the electric fire pump will be by Division 16.
viii) The control panels shall be securely mounted in an enclosure which will
protect the equipment against mechanical injury and falling drops of water.
All switches required to keep the controller in the "automatic" position shall
be within the locked cabinet. Emergency access to the switch shall be by
breaking the glass panels.
ix) A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached to the inside of
the each enclosure showing exact wiring for the controller, including a
legend of identifying numbers of individual components. All wiring terminals
shall be plainly marked to correspond with the wiring diagram furnished.
x) Wiring elements of the controllers shall be designed on a continuous-duty

basis. All wiring leading from the panel to the engine and to the batteries
shall have adequate carrying capacity. Such wiring shall be protected
against mechanical injury by metal conduit.
xi) Each operating component of the controllers shall be marked to plainly

indicate an identifying number referenced to the wiring diagram. The
markings shall be located so as to be visible after installation.
xii) Complete instructions covering the operation of the controllers shall be

provided and conspicuously mounted on the controllers.
MTS/213000/4( C&A-3 )
xiii) Prior to shipment pumps and control panels shall be thoroughly shop-tested
as a unit by the pump manufacturer. A characteristic curve showing the
pump performance based upon the results of the shop test shall be
submitted to the Consultant prior to shipment, and shall include the
performance of the pump and engine at the set-governors speed. Absence
of these test reports, indicating that the complete unit has been tested in the
factory by the driver, will be ample grounds for the rejection of the
equipment. The contractor shall include in his price the cost and expenses of
having one representative of the Owner witness the complete factory test
prior to shipment.
xiv) The sequence of operation shall be as follows:
a. The electric fire pump shall be the lead fire pump. The diesel pump
shall be backup fire pump and will only operate if the lead fire pump
cannot maintain system pressure.
b. The jockey pump shall maintain system pressure.
xv) Field Acceptance tests results shall be deemed to be as good as the

manufacturer's -certified shop test characteristic curve for the pump
being tested within the accuracy limits of the test equipment and shall
include test to demonstrate:
xvi) The pumps shall operate at peak load conditions without objectionable
heating of the bearings or of the prime mover. The operating pump speed
shall be the speed at which the pumping unit would be expected to operate
during a fire.
xvii) The engine shall not show signs of overload or stress and its governor
shall properly regulate the speed.
a. Controller:
b. The automatic controller shall be put through not less than ten
automatic and ten manual operations.
c. A running interval of at least five minutes at full speed shall be

allowed before repeating the starting cycle.
xviii) Automatic operation of the controller shall start the pump from all the
provided starting features, such as pressure switches, valves, etc.
xix) The pump shall be in operation not less than one hour (total time) during
the foregoing tests.
MTS/213000/5( C&A-3 )
xx) The pump, driver, and all controls and necessary attachments, specified
herein, shall be purchased under a single contract. Field wiring of remote
panels, installation and wiring of water level indicators and fuel piping and
wiring from the main storage tank to the local tank shall be provided by the
Contractor. The pump manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility and
shall provide the services of a qualified Engineer to supervise the installation
and alignment of equipment. Field tests shall be conducted in the field to
satisfy Local Authorities having jurisdiction of satisfactory operation of pump,
driver and controller. The pump manufacturer's engineer shall be at the job
site, supervising the test. The control manufacturer shall have their
representative at the job site to train operators in the use of the controls.
xxi) Spare parts and tools necessary for two years operation, as recommended
by the manufacturer, shall be provided as a part of the contract for the
engine. A list of these spares shall be included in the offer.
xxii) The contractor shall :
a. Provide and install water relief valve and test discharge piping and all
discharging water back to the fire water tank.
b. Provide and install all water cooling piping valves, controls for the
engine, silencer and gear box cooling heat exchangers.
xxiii) Provide exact head calculations based on shop drawings before final -
selection of pumps.
xxiv) Approved manufacturers are:
a. Fire pumps : Bell & Gossett, Crane, Armstrong, KSB or or Reddy

Buffalo
b. Diesel pump : Lister, Lombardini or Reddy Buffalo
MTS/213000/6( C&A-3 )
DIVISION 22: PLUMBING
SECTION 220140 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 220140 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
i) Conform to Section 220500 & Section 230500.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i) Plumbing fixtures shall be Ideal Standard, Kohler, TOTO Plumbing brass

shall be Ideal Standard, Grohetec, American Standard, or Crane.
ii) Plumbing fixtures shall be as indicated on the drawings and as specified

herein-after with the required supports, accessories and all drainage, vent
and water connections to make the fixtures complete. Fixtures shall be
"Water Saver" type, all fixtures shall be of color approved by Consultant with
seals unless specified otherwise.
iii) Valves, fittings, escutcheons, trim, etc., at each fixture shall be polished
chrome-plated brass unless otherwise specified.
iv) Carriers shall be furnished for all wall-hung water closets, urinals and
lavatories. Carriers shall be floor-mounted and suitable for each particular
fixture and wall type. Carrier shall be by Ancon, Wade, Enpoco, Zurn or
approved equal custom made carrier will not be accepted.
v) Flush valves shall have non-syphon by-pass.
vi) Fixtures shall be as per fixture schedules on drawings.
vii) Gate valves upto 50mm dia shall be bronze pattern with threaded ends
screw gun metal wedge disc, high quality packing and gland, solid wedge
disc for rising stem type and hollow disc for non rising stem. Gate valves
above 50mm dia. shall be flanged bronze, bronze trim wedge disc type
complete with hand wheels, bolted bonnet and stuffing box. Valve stem shall
be manganese bronze and seats shall have shouldered seal rings of bronze
screwed into the valve body.
viii) Globe valves upto 50mm dia shall have threaded ends with bronze body and
trim screwed (renewable seat and disc), screwed bonnet suitable for re-
packing under pressure. Globe valves 80mm and larger shall be bronze
body, bronze trim flanged, outside screw and yoke, renewable seat and disc.
Plug globe valves used for circuit regulation shall have characterized discs.
MTS/220140/1( C&A-3 )
ix) Check valves upto 50mm dia. shall be threaded bronze pattern swing type
with renewable leather disc and screw-in cap. Above 50mm dia. shall be
flanged bronze swing type with renewable seat and disc components.
x) Pressure reducing valves shall be of brass construction with spring chamber

and regulating handles fitted with integral strainer. A pressure gauge shall
be fitted where specified or shown on drawings.
xi) Stopcocks shall be fitted to each sanitary fitting or groups of fittings as

shown on the drawings.
xii) Strainer shall be suitable for withstanding the maximum operating

temperature and pressure of the pipeline in which they are installed.
xiii) Butterfly Valves shall be Kitemarked to BS5155 (or equal). Valves shall have
two high strength, low friction bearings for upper and lower shafts restrain
shaft deflection, ensuring effective stem sealing Nitrile Rubber Liner (WRC
approved) shall be bonded to the body by the transfer moulding process.
xiv) Open and close limit Supervisory switches to be mounted on Butterfly valves
where shown on drawings.
xv) Valves shall be suitable for the following working pressures:
a. Boosted cold-water services / Water Transfer ± 2070 kPa
b. Hot and cold-water services - 1725 kPa preceding the PRV / gravity
feed grreater than 60 m vertical riser
c. Hot and cold water services -860 kPa after the PRV / gravity feed up
to 60 m vertical riser
d. For fire fighting and transfer water risers, valves shell be suitable for
28 bar service.
xiii) Acceptable valve manufacturers are:
Jenkins
Nibco
Kennedy
Hattersley
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION
Provide the necessary plates, brackets, cleats, supports etc., for rigidly
securing fixtures in place. All roughing-in shall be accurately laid out No
offset will be accepted.
MTS/220140/2( C&A-3 )
i) All fixtures shall be free of defects. Any fixture which, in the opinion of the
Consultant, is damaged shall be removed and replaced. Clean and polish all
fixtures and trim upon completion.
ii) Wall-mounted fixtures with a back water connection shall have an adjacent
access door, unless the pipe space is accessible and is sufficiently wide to
allow the water connection to be made from within the pipe space. For this
pipe space shall be 200mm minimum clear width.
iii) Supply pipe to flush valve shall be anchored inside wall or pipe space to
prevent- movement of flush valve when open rated.
iv) Wherever shown on the drawings and in all public toilets provide chrome-
plated, trigger operated cleansing hose (AB) 1200mm long with suitable wall
hanger in the proximity of each toilet.
3.2 INSTALLATION
i) The contractor shall make all reasonable attempts to ensure the

manufacture of valves is consistent throughout the whole of the installation
in order to minimize stock holding of spares.
ii) Valves shall be provided to isolate each item of plant and each main branch.
iii) Valves and cocks of any tank or vessel not within a secure building shall be
lockable.
iv) Any valves and cocks exposed to public view, shall be of the easy clean
pattern and have a polished finish.
v) Valves in plant room, tank rooms, etc., shall be of the handwheel pattern.
vi) Control valves shall be located so as to provide easy access for manual
operation and servicing Control valves shall normally be installed in
horizontal lines with stems vertical.
vii) Ball, Globe and oblique valves shall be used on service pipelines where
regulation is required, and shall be supplied and fitted in positions indicated
on the Contract Drawings. Valves shall be of the same nominal bore as the
pipeline in which they are indicated.
viii) Valves shall always be installed in accessible locations to permit easy
operation and maintenance.
ix) Special care must be exercised in the installation of screwed valves to avoid
straining their bodies, and preventing the gate or seat from closing tight. The
wrench shall always be applied to the side being attached to the valve.
When attaching pipe to a valve already in place, a second wrench shall be
used to hold the valve while the pipe is being tightened. A pipe shall not be
screwed so far into a valve as to damage the seat.
MTS/220140/3( C&A-3 )
x) The strainers shall be complete with cast iron body and cap Steel screen
rods and standard perforated stainless steel screens unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings or elsewhere herein. Connections shall be as
described elsewhere herein.
xi) Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to
allow servicing, maintenance and equipment removal without system
shutdown.
xii) Contractor must provide and install valves compatible with each type of
piping material specified for various services.
MTS/220140/4( C&A-3 )
RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
i) The plumbing and drainage systems shall be in accordance with the relevant
standards. The Work shall conform in all respects to local Authorities having
jurisdiction.
ii) The fire standpipe and fire protection systems shall be in accordance with
the requirements of the Civil Defence Department and National Fire
Protection Association .(NFPA).
iii) These specifications are supplementary to the requirements above. All

required approvals of shop drawings and materials shall be obtained by the
Contractor from the appropriate authorities before proceeding with work on
site.
iv) All Buried pipework shall be done in accordance with Local Authorities
Specifications.
v) All connections to/from points of utilities supply/discharge shall be the

mechanical contractor’s responsibility.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
i) Valve boxes located in walls, shall be concealed types for use in public and
private areas. Valves boxes shall be of wrought stainless steel with satinface
and spring cover for automatic opening when unlocked and pressure
assisted closure. Boxes shall have 20mm dia inlet connections. Cores shall
be vandal proof, boxes shall be Jay R Smith, Josam or Wade.
ii) Irrigation valve boxes located in landscaped areas shall be cast bronze, yard
hydrant type with, satinfinish nickalloy box, hinged latching cover, Neoprene
plunger, removable bronze operating parts and straight inlet with standard
hose connection.
Boxes shall be Jay R Smith, Josam or Wade.
iii) Material for painting shall be high grade products of well known
manufacturer, and when approved, shall be delivered the site in original
unbroken packages, bearing the maker's name and brand. Paints of
approved colour only shall be used for each application.
iv) The Contractor shall provide manufacturer's application directions,

performance guarantee and literatures.
MTS/220500/1( C&A-3 )
v) The bidder shall include the price of a complete set of spare parts for all
items required for two years operation. The cost of Spare parts shall be
included in the cost of the item. These 2 years operation parts shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer and include the following equipment:
a. Starters
b. Pumps
vi) The bidder shall furnish quantity and item wise prices of each spare parts for
two years operation /maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer at
the time of submitting tender.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
i) Coordinate layouts with all other trades, structure and landscaping works.
ii) The Contractor shall paint all plants, equipment, ducting, piping, hangers,
bracing and other surfaces exposed to air as specified and he shall also be
responsible for all finish painting. The minimum number of coats are
specified herein under but sufficient coats shall be given to achieve desired
finish.
iii) All surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from dust at the time any coating is
applied.
iv) Interior painting shall not be done when temperature is below 32OF (0OC).
Enamel shall not be applied when temperature is below 70OF (21.1OC).
Exterior painting shall not be done in frosty, foggy or damp weather, or
when the temperature is below 50OF (10OC).
v) All plants, equipments, pumps and motors shall be provided with three
coats of enamel paint in the factory and shall be carefully cleaned and oiled
after installation. In case the original paint has been damaged, fresh coats
of enamel paint to match the original shall be given.
vi) All steel pipework, duct bracing angles or other steel equipment specified to
be insulated, shall be thoroughly wire-brushed and have one coat of black
asphaltum paint before insulation is applied.
vii) All pipe and duct hangers and duct angle bracing, which are located in
concealed spaces, shall be given a heavy coat of aluminium paint before
being concealed.
viii) The interior of all ducts and outlet boxes at the back of air grilles, registers
and diffusers shall be painted with two coats of dull black paint.
MTS/220500/2( C&A-3 )
ix) All black steel ducting, piping and other equipment required to be insulated,
shall be thoroughly wire-brushed and applied with one coat of black asphalt
paint before insulation is fixed.
x) All 8 oz. weight canvas jacketed insulated ducting and piping, in plant rooms
or visible in the occupied areas, shall be given one coat of polyvinyl acetate
with water repellent emulsion and finished with two coats of synthetic
enamel paint.
xi) Paint shall be applied as per manufacturer’s printed application directions.

Paint colour scheme shall be specified at the time of painting or earlier.
xii) The ducting and piping shall be painted according to the colour code based
on American standard "Scheme for identification of piping systems.” And
used for finish painting. All colour codes and scheme shall be approved by
the Project Manager.
xiii) The Contractor shall stencil, near each valve on the pipe, the name of the
fluid. Also an arrow should be painted next to the legend, indicating the
direction of flow in pipe.
MTS/220500/3( C&A-3 )
SECTION 220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS
AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i) Pipe and fittings shall be in conformance with the following unless specified
otherwise by local authorities. Obtain and submit approvals by local
authorities for all piping before ordering of materials.
a. All pipe sizes for drainage and venting shown on plans are O.D. and
for all other series are nominal (not OD) ± contractor to supply pipe
size based on fixture connection size, temperature and pressure
requirements, and life of 50 years for plastic piping.
ii) Domestic Hot and Cold Water
a. Water supply transfer piping shall be Galvanized (inside and outside)

Steel pipe schedule 40 ERW to ASTM A53 with rolled groove
victaulic or approved equal galvanized pipe fittings and EPDM
gaskets.
b. Domestic cold and hot water pipe and fittings shall be PP-R Type 3
manufactured in accordance with DIN 8077 and 8087. Pipes and
fitting shall be PN 20 rated, suitable for use under 10 bar pressure at
65oC fluid temperature (service life 50 years), and resistant to UV
rays.
iii) External Drainage Pipe Work
a. a. Drainage pipework outside the buildings under non driveways

shall be uPVC pipes and fittings joined by push fit socket
incorporating rubber sealing gaskets, all to BS 4660 and 5481.
Drainage pipework outside the buildings under driveways shall be
HDPE pipes. The Contractor shall store the pipework, either in the
manufacture’s packs, withdrawing the pipes from the centre of each
row and working alternatively towards each side of the pack, or if
stacked by hand, the stack should be placed on a level surface, with
the bottom layer firmly for stability.
MTS/220516/1( C&A-3 )
iv) Internal Drainage Pipework (inside and under Building)
a. Drainage pipework inside buildings shall be uPVC to BSEN ±1329

and BS5255 - 1989. Pipework shall carry the following
PDUNV__QRPLQDO_VL]H__PDQXIDFWXUHU¶V_QDPH_DQG_
WUDGH_PDUN_DQG_
BS number. Provide a complete system of sanitary drainage piping
for plumbing fixtures. Kitchen wastes, and the like which can be
connected to the city drainage scheme.
v) Vent piping shall be uPVC class D.
vi) Subsoil and Storm Water Drainage
a. Provide and install a subsoil drainage system and a storm water

drainage system as shown on the drawings. The systems shall be
complete in all respects with clear out, manholes , gravel bed etc all
as shown on the drawings . The subsoil pipe shall be uPVC class D
with perforations. The free area of the perforations shall not exceed
45% of the pipe surface. Wherever subsoil / pipe passes through
ceilings / shafts / or is not embedded in soil ± it shall not have any
perforations. Storm water drainage pipe shall be uPVC class D.
vii) Drainage Pressure Breakers
a. Provide and install. Drainage pressure Breakers in vertical soil, waste

and Rainwater piping where shown on the drawings. These shall be
of the aerator type made of HDPE and manufactured in accordance
with DIN 8075, and totally compatible to DIN 19535 and 8076
system. They shall have rubber ring joint to suit HDPE and PVC pipe.
They shall be of a design to accommodate expansion, prevent
formation of a plug of water in the stack and not require butt welding
to the riser pipe.
viii) Acceptable piping manufacturers are Hepworth, George Fischer, and

approved equal.
PART 3 EXEXUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
i) The contractor shall ensure that joints are clean, undamaged and are
adequately lubricated. Where pipework has to be cut to length, the
Contractor shall use care to remove any sharp edges before making a
joint. Connections to the above ground pipework shall be through
purpose made adapters.
ii) The Contractor shall execute trenches of sufficient width to allow adequate
working space for pipe joints and inspection. The pipework shall be laid on a
well compacted bedding. Backfilling to trenches shall be carried out only
after the drains have been tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where
the pipework has 1m cover, or it is run under footpaths.
MTS/220516/2( C&A-3 )
iii) Where pipes are laid under roadways access areas, with 1m or less cover
they should be encased in a concrete surround (min. 150 mm thick), with
flexible joints ( 13 mm thick fiberboard, or polystyrene) at 5mm maximum
centres.
iv) All drains shall be kept free of sand, and other obstructions during
constructions.
v) All changes of directions shall be gradual and not abrupt, 45 degree fitting
shall be of the long sweep. All unnecessary turns and off sets shall be
carefully avoided, and run as directly as possible from the sanitary fixtures to
the vertical stacks.
vi) Sufficient and suitable access shall be provided to enable pipework to be
tested and maintained effectively. The access cover plugs or caps shall be
so to facilitate the insertion of testing apparatus and of equipment for
cleaning and /or for the removable of blockages. Their use shall not be
impeded by the structure of other services. Extra support may be required
for the plugs or caps to withstand the head of water, especially at the lower
floors.
vii) Vertical rainwater pipework shall be provided with the means of access at or
near the foot of stack.
viii) Vertical rainwater pipework shall be provided with means of access near to,
but above the spill-over level of the pipework likely to be affected by a
blockage. Where no sanitary fittings are connected on a floor to a stack, the
means of access shall be provided at or near floor level.
ix) Branch discharge pipes serving ranges of sanitary fittings shall be provided
with the means of access at the head of branch and at the connection to the
stack.
x) Means of access shall be provided at bends in vertical and in the horizontal

plane in long runs.
xi) All joints made in pipework and joints of pipework to appliances shall be
airtight and watertight and shall be taken to ensure that no jointing material
projects inside the bore of the pipe.
xii) Provision shall be made in the assembly of pipework to accommodate and

control thermal movement.
xiii) Joints of plastic pipe shall be made in accordance with the

PDQXIDFWXUHU¶V_LQVWUXFWLRQV_
xiv) Storm drainage : Provide a complete system of storm drainage piping for all
roots, set-back areas and canopies.
xv) Take special care in setting roof drains to ensure that they are at an
elevation which will preclude formation of puddles.
MTS/220516/3( C&A-3 )
xvi) Install connections to roof drains in conjunction with the roofing specified
under civil works, so that the building is adequately protected during
construction from damage by storm water.
xvii) Balcony drains and rain water outlets in areas accessible to general public
shall be of flat grate type fitting flushed with the floor.
xviii) Run building drains at a grade of 2% pitch and 1% minimum unless

otherwise noted. Run branch connections to stack from fixtures at 2% where
possible.
xix) Provide all the required appurtenances to make the drainage system
complete in compliance with code requirements including traps, pipe fitting
and the like.
xx) The cost of all service connections required for the plumbing and drainage
system shall, be the responsibility of the contractor. This includes the supply
and installation of the water meter and all associated fitting, piping, etc.
xxi) The contractor shall arrange and pay Local Authorities fees for all service
connections.
xxii) Make any adjustments to piping systems necessary to suit the local
requirements.
xxiii) Coordinate routing and final points of connection with the Local Authorities
and layout of municipal services and manholes and make amendments to
drawings to the satisfaction of authorities having jurisdiction. Manholes and
covers shall be installed to the municipality requirements.
xxiv) Install water meters in meter cabinets and isolation valves to the local
authorities standards.
xxv) Where service connections are to be made with a developers utility interface
point, the contractor shall obtain, in addition to Local Authorities approvals,
all developer and/or any other authority having jurisdiction.
MTS/220516/4( C&A-3 )
SECTION 220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIP
SECTION 220548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
ii) It is the intent of this specification to provide Seismic Restraints for

RESTRAINT MANUAL - February 1998 and as shown in the
drawings. The Contractor will be required to detail the restraints and
space them as per guidelines. Restraints shall be provided for both
pipe and ductwork.
iii) Adequately isolate all equipment to maintain acceptable noise levels

in the occupied areas of the building as specified below. Take noise
measurements over the complete audible frequency range in each of
the occupied zones under, above and beside mechanical equipment
rooms and where indicated by the Engineer. Submit a report,
compete with resultant sound curves to the Engineer substantiating
that all equipment has been adequately isolated and that acceptable
noise levels exist in the occupied zones. Refer to the following
acceptable room criteria neutral levels:
Location RC (N) Approx. dBA

Equivalent
Offices 30-40 47
Kitchens 50approx. 57
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i) All vibration isolation devices, factory built silencers and acoustic

plenums shall be provided by an approved manufacturer equal to
Mason, Weico, Christie & Grey Acoustic Air Treatment or equal
approved.
ii) Retain the services of an independent Acoustical Consultant to

select the noise and vibration attenuating devices. This company
shall be independent from the material supplier.
iii) Provide acoustical calculations for all spaces (Occupied areas, Plant
rooms etc.) done on standard software to determine noise abatement
measures required to comply with RC (N) levels above.
MTS/220548/1( C&A-3 )
iv) Expansion joints shall be supplied which shall conform to the
following specifications.
v) Expansion joints shall be suitable for water 1.7ºC to 121ºC, designed

for 862 kPa. Operating pressure, with traverse capacity to relieve all
stresses due to expansion or contraction of pipe at its operating
temperature, using a base temperature of 26.7ºC.
vi) Expansion compensators shall consist of bellow with protective

shrouds. Expansion compensators for iron and steel pipes shall
have corrosion resisting steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds,
internal guides, and shall be provided with threaded ends up to 50
mm and flanged ends for larger size. Gasket or other means of
sealing will not be permitted. When double compensators are used,
they shall be provided with bases.
vii) Flexible connectors shall be constructed of rubber,

tetrafluoroethylene resin, or corrosion resisting steel, bronze,
monel or galvanized steel. The material used and the configuration
shall be suitable for pressure, vacuum, temperature and circulation
medium. The flexible section may have threaded welding, soldering,
flanged or socket ends and shall be suitable for service intended.
The flexible section may be reinforced with metal retaining rings, with
built-in reinforcement and restriction bolts or with wire braid cover
suitable for the service intended. Flanged assemblies shall be
equipped with limit bolts to restrict maximum travel to within limits
standard wit the manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on the
drawings, the length of the flexible connectors shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended. Internal
sleeves or liners shall be provided when recommended by the
manufacturer. Covers to protect the bellow will be provided where
necessary or directed. Flexible connectors shall be designed for 862
kPa service and 127 º C
viii) Flexible connectors for fire fighting and water transfer pumps shall be
suitable for 28 bar pressure service.
ix) Flexible connectors and expansion joints shall be Tozen, Kingsun or

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION
i) Provide, to the Vibration and Noise Control Manufacturer, one copy

of all shop drawings of equipment to be isolated.
ii) Supply shop drawings of the Vibration and Noise Control Equipment
being supplied.
iii) On system start-up, inspect the complete installation and report in

writing.
MTS/220548/2( C&A-3 )
3.2 SUPPORT OF PIPING
i) Suspend all piping in mechanical rooms on resilient hangers. Where

piping is supported from the floor, weld brackets to the piping and
support on floor mountings.
ii) For piping connected to vibration isolated equipment pipe supports

within10 pipe diameters of the equipment shall have a static
deflection of twice the deflection of the vibration-isolated equipment.
All other piping supports shall have a static deflection of 25mm
minimum.
iii) Where specific supports (Seismic or other) are detailed on drawings

or specified elsewhere these shall be checked by the specialist
consultant retained by the contractor, and any adjustments changes
required to these supports shall be carried out after the Engineers
approval at no extra cost.
3.3 FLOOR-MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS LARGER THAN 3 HP
i) Mount each pump with motor on spring supported steel and concrete
inertia base reinforced if necessary, of thickness as follows,
Pumps up to 5 hp -150mmPumps 7-1/2 to 25 hp -250mmPumps >25
to 50 hp -400mmPump >50 to 100 hp -600mm
ii) Each base for horizontally split pumps shall include supports for base
elbows for the discharge and suction connections and for vertically
split pumps shall include support for base elbow for suction
connection. Bolt and grout base elbows to the steel and concrete
pump base.
iii) Mount the steel and concrete base on spring mountings. Where the
concrete base is 'T' shaped or other than rectangular, locate the
spring mountings under the projections as well as the main body of
the base. Spring mountings shall be self-contained concrete inserts
with flush openings on the side of the base for spring adjustment or
removal. Pour bases 'on roofing felt and elevate 50mm with mounting
adjustment bolts after the pumps are grouted to the base.
Alternatively, the bases may be constructed as specified for Floor-
Mounted Centrifugal Fans. No damping or snubbing materials shall
be used spring deflection shall be at least 25mm and all mountings
shall have 6mm thick neoprene vibration Isolation pads at the
bottom.
a. Pump and motor shall be on one-piece base. Base of two or

more sections welded or bolted together is not acceptable.
iv) F1oor-Mounted Centrifugal Pumps 3 hp or less:
a. Bolt and grout each pump to neoprene-in-shear supported

reinforced concrete base which is a minimum of 150mm thick.
Neoprene-in-shear mountings shall have a minimum static
deflection of 6 mm. All metal surfaces shall have friction
neoprene pads both top and bottom so they need not be
bolted to the base or the floor.
MTS/220548/3( C&A-3 )
3.4 BASEMENT FLOOR-MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
i) Bolt and grout each pump to a steel and concrete base supported on
25mm 15mm thick neoprene-steel-neoprene pads. The neoprene-
steelneoprene pads shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions for the size and weight distribution of the pump
supported. The minimum concrete base thickness shall be:
Pumps less than 5 hp -150mm

Pumps 7-1/2 to 25 hp -200mm
Pumps >25 to 50 hp -400mm
Pump >50 to 100 hp -600mm
3.5 INSTALLATION
i) Provide flexible connectors at all pumps.
ii) Install units as per manufacturers printed installations instructions.
iii) Support pipe and equipment such that Connector carries no weight.
iv) Provide Expansion Joints/Flexible Pipe connectors at all building

Expansion Joints.
3.6 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
i) All steel spring isolators should include a neoprene pad at least

10mm thick mounted next to and in series with the spring.
ii) Seismic restraints should be employed in all steel spring isolators to

limit movement of the equipment in the vertical and horizontal
directions. These restraints shall not bypass the isolation under
normal operating conditions.
iii) The neoprene used in isolation (unless otherwise stated) should

have a durometer between 30 and 70.
iv) All rubber isolators should be double acting with no through-bolted

connections.
v) There shall be at least a 50mm air space between the bottom of the
isolated equipment and the floor slab.
3.7 PIPING/ ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL

EQUIPMENT
i) All electrical connections should be made via flexible cable with

enough length to create a slack, looped connection.
ii) All piping connections to equipment should incorporate flexible

rubber expansion joints close to the equipment.
iii) The first three pipe supports outside the expansion joints should
incorporate steel spring isolators with a static deflection of at least
equal to the equipment isolator static deflection.
MTS/220548/4( C&A-3 )
iv) The first three isolators should be of the pre-compressed type to

avoid excessive loading on the piping.
v) Vibration isolation hangers should be installed with spring as close to

ceiling as possible.
vi) Penetrations of walls or floors should allow for a 25mm clearance

around the pipe. The gap should be stuffed with glass fibre insulation
and sealed with non-hardening, caulking.
vii) The pipe should not be allowed to rest on the side of the hole.
MTS/220548/5( C&A-3 )
SECTION 220573 FACILITY
DRAINAGE MANHOLES
SECTION 220573 – FACILITY DRAINAGE MANHOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
ii) Outdoor catch basins, manholes and gully-traps shall be provided in

accordance with the requirements of the municipality and as shown
on the drawings. Contractor shall obtain typical details from Drainage
Department for manholes and external gully-traps.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 MATERIAL
i) The nominated sub contractor shall supply and fix cast iron manhole
covers and frames bitumen coated as follows :
Situation Grade of Specification Clear

Cover Opening
(BS 497)
Road, car A2 Single seats air tight solid 600x600

parks, public top heavy duty
footpaths
Private C Single seat air tight solid 600x600

footpaths top heavy duty
Inside C Double seat double cover 600x600

building air tight recess top screw
down tight duty
ii) The invert channels shall be smooth and accurately shaped to a

semicircular bottom conforming to the inside of the adjacent sewer
section. Inverts shall be formed directly in the concrete of the
manhole base. Steep slopes outside the invert channels shall be
avoided. Changes in size and grade shall be made gradually and
evenly. Changes in direction of the sewer and entering branches or
branch shall have true curves of as large a radius as the size of the
manholes will permit.
MTS/220573/1( C&A-3 )
SECTION 220573 FACILITY
DRAINAGE MANHOLES
iii) Manholes shall be provided with built-in steps of galvanized, wrought

iron. The rungs shall be not less than 250mm in width and spaced
approximately 300mm apart, and alternate rungs shall be staggered
or offset 150mm. Bars or rods when used for steps shall not be less
than 25mm diameter.
iv) Manhole frames and covers shall be in accordance with the

requirements shown on the drawings and as per DM regulations
provided in accordance with details shown on architectural drawings.
The manhole frames and covers shall be so set that the top of the
cover will be flush with the finished grade.
iv) Concrete foundations for manholes shall be constructed of 1000 kg

concrete, proportioned 1 cubic meter cement, 2 cubic meter sand,
3½ cubic meter stone, not less than 22 bags of cement per cubic
metre of concrete in place and maximum water content of 90
litres/m³ (quantity includes water in aggregates). The manhole walls
shall be constructed from 200mm thick concrete internally rendered
on a 200 concrete base.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
i) Install systems to the approval of the local Drainage Department
ii) Manholes and gully-traps shall be vented in accordance with local

authorities requirements.
Approved manufacturers: Stanton, Brick house or MPI.
MTS/220573/2( C&A-3 )
SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i) All cements and adhesives shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer of the insulation. Insulation shall be fire retardant with a
flame spread rating not greater than 25 and a smoke developed rating
not greater than 50 when tested in accordance with Standard E84 of the
ASTM.
ii) All hot and cold water piping shall be insulated with 25mm thick,
elastomeric foam insulation with an insulating valve of not less than
0.038W/mK. Valves, fittings and all other appurtenances through which
water passes shall be insulated with mitred sections of preformed
insulation of a thickness equal to the insulation on the adjoining pipe.
Permeability factor shall be greater than or equal to 7000. Density shall
be between 65 to 80 kg/m3. Fire rating per BS Part 7 shall be minimum
Class 1, surface spread of flame shall be to BS 476 Part 5- Class P and
fire propagation shall be to BS 476 Part 6 -Class 0. Water vapour
permeability shall be maximum 0.09 microgram/N.h.
iii) Acoustic insulation or soil rain water pipes shall be applied to all
horizontal piping occurring in the ceiling of occupied spaces upto the
point with the vertical pipe. The acoustic insulation shall be a composite
of 25mm thick glass wool blanket, loaded vinyl sheeting and reflective
foil, laminated together to from a roll/sheet product with a minimum
density of 4.5 kg/m³. Flame Spread fire rating etc. shall be at least as
good as specified fro HW/ CW pipe insulation.
iv) The Condensate drains pipe from fan coil units and air handling units and
1 meter above and 3 meter below the connection points of the stack pipe
connected shall be insulated.
MTS/220700/1( C&A-3 )
SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
v) Insulation shall be by Aroflex, Goflex insulation solution (for acoustic) or

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
i) Insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipe only.
ii) No insulation shall be applied unless the piping or apparatus to be

covered has been tested according to specifications.
iii) Insulation shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed

installation instructions.
iv) All insulation shall be finished smooth. The outline of pipe insulation shall
be true circular and concentric in shape. The outline of fitting insulation
shall be shaped to blend with adjacent covering.
v) All piping insulation installed outdoors, on the service floors and plant
room in the parking lot shall be covered with 0.8mm aluminum jacketing
and sealed water tight.
vi) Pipes to be installed embedded in concrete wall or slabs, are to be

wrapped in corrosion resistive tape (i.e. Denso or equivalent) prior to
installation.
vii) Insulation supplier / manufactures shall supervise the installation of all

insulation and shall provide a written grantee against faulty installation
practices that shall be effected for a minimum of 5 years from the date of
hand-over.
MTS/220700/2( C&A-3 )
SECTION 221319 SANITARY
WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 221319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
ii) Of sizes shown on drawings
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 MATERIALS
i) Floor drain manufacturers shall be: Jay R Smith, Wade, Frost & Josam or as
per Architectural specification or Approved equivalent.
ii) Floor drains for private toilets (if any) shall be Josam Series 30000-C or per
Architectural specification or Approved equivalent. Coated cast iron body
with two piece body and double flange, invertible non-puncturing flashing
collar, bottom outlet inside caulk connection, and adjustable satin nikalloy
round strainer with sediment bucket. Top shall be buff polished finished.
iii) Floor drain for public area (toilets) same as (ii) above. Additionally, these
shall be vandal proof.
iv) Corridor and equipment room drains shall be Josam Series 30000-A or
approved equivalent coated cast iron body with two piece body and double
flange, invertible non-puncturing flashing collar, bottom outlet inside caulk
connection, and adjustable satin nikalloy round strainer. Top shall be buff
polished finished.
v) Equipment plant room floor drain shall be similar to Jay R smith model No
2005 Y-L--flashing collar, adjustable, reinforced nickel bronze strainer head
and speedy gasket. ASTM A112.21.1M-1991.
vi) Parking floor drains shall be similar to Jay R smith 2250 Series or
equivalent. Duco cast iron body, and flashing collar with cast iron tractor
grate and slotted sediment bucket. Vandal proof type.
PART 3 EXECUTEION
3.1 INSTALLATION
i) Provide traps at each floor drain to stop seepage of sewer gases into
occupied spaces. Provide trap seal primers for all floor drains and funnel
drain traps and extend to nearest plumbing fixture. All floor drains shall have
12mm Trap Primer Tapping.
ii) Provide transition pieces with mechanical joint connectors to couple drains
to pipes specified.
MTS/221319/1( C&A-3 )
SECTION 221319 SANITARY
WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
iii) All Floor drains shall be vented to local authority requirements or as shown
on the drawings, whichever is the more stringent requirement.
iv) Refer to drawings for drain sizes. Sizes indicated on drawings refers to the
outlet pipe size of drain.
MTS/221319/2( C&A-3 )
SECTION 223300 ELECTRIC
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
SECTION 223300 – ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
Conform to Section 220500
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i) Electric Hot Water Storage Heater
The contractor shall provide and install electric water heaters of the
type and capacity as:
a) Hot water heaters shall be either horizontal or vertical type

depending upon the space availability.
b) Heaters shall be fitted with immersion heaters to give the

maximum output kW.
c) The inner cylinder to be enameled with further protection from

corrosion by magnesium anode and outer casting is made
from powder coasted steel with sides of durable plastic and
glass lining. The tank to be rated for a maximum working
pressure of 8 bar. The insulation should be provided by 20 mm
thick CFC free flame resistant, die cast polyurethane foam
without joints for good thermal insulation. The water heaters
should be suitable for vertical or horizontal installation
depending on the site conditions.
d) The heating elements shall be of the special sheathed type

which can be changed without draining down the heater and
shall have a 5 year guarantee. The heating elements shall be
suitable for 220 volts, single phase, 50 Hz, electric supply.
e) Copper piping shall be used for connections to and from the

water heaters.
Approved manufacturers: FISMAR or approved equivalent.
MTS/223300/1( C&A-3 )
SECTION 223300 ELECTRIC
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
i) Water heaters located in the washrooms shall be mounted in ceiling

space.
ii) Pipe pressure and temperature relief valve to drain.
iii) Maximum tank temperature setting shall be 60C.
MTS/223300/2( C&A-3 )
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 230500: COMMON
WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 230500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
DESIGN CONDITIONS AND DESIGN BRIEF
Summer Outdoor Indoor Indoor

Cooling
(General Space) (Comm-Equipment Rooms)
(Telecoms Tech Rooms)
(Equipment Rooms)
Dry Bulb 43.0 deg C Dry Bulb 24.0 deg C Dry Bulb 21.0 deg C
Wet Bulb 27.0 deg C RH ≤ 60 ±5% RH ≤ 50±5%
Winter Dry Bulb 4.0 deg C Dry Bulb 21.0 deg C Dry Bulb 21.0 deg C
Heating
Wet Bulb 2.0 deg C RH ≤ 50±5% RH ≤ 50±5%
The HVAC system for Passenger Terminal Building is designed to provide cooling for
summer months and heating for winter months. The central chiller plant at M&E
Outhouse consists of Electric Centrifugal Chillers, cooling towers and associated
pumps, Direct fired Hot Water Boilers, heat exchangers and associated pumps as
indicated in drawings and equipment schedules.
There are two (2) chilled water distribution system named as system-1 and system-2
respectively to distribute the chilled water from central plant to Terminal building where
AHU, FCU and CRAC units are located. System-1 will serve airside equipments which
are serving peripheral zones and system-2 will serve that of internal zones. The load
analysis indicates that heating is required for peripheral zones served by system-1
during winter months but cooling and heating for this zone is not occur at the same time.
Therefore, AHU are provided with single coils that will be used for both cooling and
heating. Chilled water distribution system-1 will serve chilled water during summer and it
will serve hot water during winter. The system-2 will serve chilled water at all time.
The contractor shall provide HVAC control system inclusive of chilled water modulating
valves, VAV controllers & boxes, space temperature sensors, chiller plant management
system and IBMS system which shall meet the design’s requirement.
MTS/230500/1(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
i) Compliance with sections of Division 1, General Requirements.
ii) This section 230500 forms an integral part of each section of Division 23,
HVAC.
iii) Labour, materials, equipment and services to complete the work of the
Mechanical Division as further specified and as shown on the Drawings.
iv) The manufacture, supply, delivery, erection, testing, adjustment and

commissioning of the complete air, conditioning, Heating, ventilation,
piping, drainage and IBMS interfacing.
v) All of the material to provide a complete and operational installation to the

satisfaction of the employer. All incidental components and appurtenance
necessary for the proper operation of the system shall be provided and
installed as required whether or not they were specifically mentioned in
the Contract Documents.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
i) Reviewed: Reviewed by the employer; normally a design or piece of

equipment must be shown to have operated successfully for not less than
two years under conditions generally similar to those required by this
Contract. Facilities shall be given at the tender stage, if required by the
employer, to enable him to evaluate the equipment's features and
performance. The review of a design or piece of equipment shall be
without prejudice to the acceptance tests required after installation.
ii) Size: When related to pipe work means nominal diameter size which
generally approximates to the bore of steel tubes and the outside
diameter of plastic tubes. When related to duct work means length, width
of rectangular duct or diameter of circular duct.
iii) "Complete installation" shall mean not only the major items of plant and
equipment conveyed by this specification, but all the incidental sundry
components necessary for the complete execution of the works and for
the proper operation of the system installed, with their labour charges,
whether or not these sundry components are mentioned in detail in the
tender documents issued in connection with the contract.
iv) "As indicated", "where indicated", and "unless otherwise indicated", refer
to items or requirements which are, or may be given elsewhere in the
tender documents issued in connection with the contract, (e.g. on a
drawing, in a supplementary specification or in a schedule to this
specification).
v) Provide: Supply, deliver, install and test inclusive of labour cost.
MTS/230500/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
vi) Remove: Remove complete with all ancillary devices and equipment.
Dispose of off-site in an environmentally safe manner. Ensure that
equipment is completely isolated properly from any energy sources or
connected subsystem prior to removal. All piping and wiring shall be
removed back to the nearest isolating point with proper termination.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
i) Provide delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of complete

HVAC system shown on drawings and as per specifications inclusive of
Employer’ operation requirements and airport trails tests. The scope of
work shall cover all HVAC equipments and supporting sub-systems,
chillers, Boilers, Cooling Towers, pumps, chiller plant management
system, season changeover controls, air handling units, Fan coil units,
Computer room air-conditioning, Fans, associated control panels,
interfacing to BMS, chilled water and hot water distribution system,
thermostat, VAV boxes and its power supply as shown in installation
detail drawings, necessary ceiling access panels for maintenance, etc.
ii) Provide design, supply and installation of seismic supports, restraints,

expansion joints, loops and associated hangers.
iii) Provide water proofing as per approved detail, intumescent sleeves, fire
proof sealants, fire proof compound, packing material around all pipes,
ducts, cable trays, trunkings, conduits passing through fire rated walls,
normal wall and partition, floor slabs and roof.
iv) Make good to affected finishes, ceiling, walls, partitions, roof and floor
slabs, etc.
1.4 REGULATIONS
i) The Work shall accord strictly with all rules, regulations, By-laws and
requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
ii) Drawings and specifications should not conflict with the above
regulations but where there are apparent discrepancies; the Contractor
shall notify the Employer in writing and obtain clarification before
proceeding with the works.
1.5 GOVERNING STANDARDS
i) The installation shall comply with all relevant statutory instruments and
regulations and in particular with the following:
Air Moving and Conditioning Assoc. Inc (AMCA)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
MTS/230500/3(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
The IEE regulations for electrical equipment in buildings.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Local Regulations for Utility and Electricity.
The Local Fire Safety regulations of Fire Safety Department.
Local Health and Safety at Work Regulations.
Local Control of Pollution Regulations.
SMACNA standards for ductwork installation.

ARI standards.
NFPA standards.
Applicable British and European Standards.
ii) The Tender shall be based on latest regulations and current version of
standards and codes on the date of return of tenders. If these regulations
are amended or new regulations are enacted after that date, the
employer shall be notified immediately.
iii) The materials, equipment and installations detailed in this specification

are based on the standards and codes of practice indicated in the
Contract Documents. In the event of a contradiction between this
specification and any applicable standard or Code of Practice, this
specification shall govern and the employer shall be notified immediately.
iv) Where material and equipment are specified under a particular standard
and supplied under an equivalent standard, a certificate of compliance
shall be provided to the employer request.
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS
i) Generally, the following abbreviations may used in this Division;
AMCA : Air Moving and Conditioning Assoc. Inc.
ANSI : American National Standards Institute
AS : Australian Standard
ASHRAE : American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers.
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
AWWA : American Water Works Association
bhp : boiler horsepower or brake horsepower
BS : British Standard
Btu/hr : British thermal units per hour
BWG : British Wire Gauge
ft/min : cubic feet per minute
CMH : cubic meter per hour
c.i : cast iron
cm : centimeter
CSA : Canadian Standards Association
MTS/230500/4(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
db : dry bulb
dB : decibel
°C : degree Celsius
D/L : diameter
EEMAC : The Electrical and Electronics Manufacturers'
Association of Canada
hp : high pressure or motor horsepower
kg : kilogram
Pa : Pascals
kPa : Kilopascals
l : Litre
I/s : Litre per second
m : Metre
mm : Millimetre
ml : millilitre
NBS : National Bureau of Standards
N.C. : noise criterion as defined by graph in ASHRAE .
NFPA : National Fire Protection Association
NPSH : Net positive Suction Head
No. : Number
o.s. and y : outside screw and yoke
pH : hydrogen ion concentration
p/m : parts per million
RC (N) : room criterion (neutral) as defined by ASHRAE
rpm : revolutions per minute
SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association
ss : Stainless steel
UL : Underwriters’ Laboratories
ULC : Underwriter’s Laboratories of Canada
W : Watts
kW : kilowatts
wb : wet bulb
w.g. : water gauge
w.p. : working pressure
1.7 PERMITS, FEES INSPECTION

i) Obtain all required permits from the Local Utility department and
authorities to complete your work. Make all submissions in a timely
fashion with due regard for the requirements of the construction
schedule.
ii) Pay all fees and charges levied by the authorities having jurisdiction.
Arrange and pay for any permits, inspections and certificates and work
carried out by the Municipality or Utilities department in connection with
your work.
iii) Perform all tests required by the governing authorities, codes and
standard including those tests specified under this Division, and submit a
copy of the final approved inspection certificate for the approval of the
employer before taking over Certificate. All costs for testing to be borne
by the Contractor.
MTS/230500/5(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
iv) It is the contractors’ responsibility to provide a comprehensive list of

standards applicable to each municipality and / or utility company
approval after soliciting this information from the concerned authority, and
to provide compliance statements with standards before making
submittals to authorities. Any calculations sketches drawings or
information required shall be produced and provided by the contractor at
no extra cost.
1.8 EXAMINATION OF SITE

i) Before submitting tenders, each trade shall examine the site to determine
the conditions which may affect the proposed work. No claims for extra
payment will be considered, because of failure to fulfill this condition.
ii) Determine in consultation with the Municipality, Utilities department, fire

safety department and building control authority the location of all existing
underground services at the site.
iii) Any comments and suggestion by the Tenderer on the efficiency of the
design, the availability of plant, materials and labour and the time
required for the completion of the work shall be made and included when
the tender is returned.
1.9 EXISTING UNDERGROUND SERVICES

i) The Contractor is responsible for the detection, isolation, disconnection,
rerouting, reconnection, re-commissioning and removal of all the existing
underground pipes, sewer lines, cables, communication cables, ducts,
etc. when necessary to facilitate the entire works.
1.10 DRAWINGS, CHANGES AND INSTALLATION

i) The drawings shall be considered to show the general character and
scope of the work and not the exact details of the installation. The
installation shall be complete with all accessories required for a complete
and operative installation.
ii) The location, arrangement and connection of equipment and material as

shown on the drawings represent a close approximation to the intent and
requirements of the Contract. The right is reserved by the employer to
make reasonable changes required to accommodate conditions arising
during the progress of the work, at no extra cost to the Contract.
iii) All piping and duct work in finished areas shall be concealed in ceiling
spaces and shafts or chased into walls. No exposed piping or duct work
shall be installed in such areas unless specifically accepted by the
employer.
iv) Vent pipes, exhaust hoods or other mechanical equipment mounted on

roof, or housing for such equipment, shall not be closer to the edge of
roof than a distance equal to the height of the pipe, hood or equipment;
unless specifically accepted by the Employer’s Engineer.
v) The actual location of thermostats, switches, etc., shall be reviewed by

the employer before installation.
MTS/230500/6(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
vi) The location and size of existing services shown on the drawings are
based on the best available information. The actual location of existing
services shall be verified in the field before work is commenced.
vii) Changes and modifications necessary to ensure coordination and to

avoid interference and conflicts with other trades, or to accommodate
existing conditions, shall be made at no extra cost to the Contract.
viii) The Contractor shall ensure that all plant to be supplied by him (or by the
owner) can be installed in the available space and that there is adequate
access to admit all plant to its position and enable maintenance to be
carried out on the plant without difficulty.
xi) Special care shall be taken in areas where pour-gaps take place.
Coordinate the work schedule with the Contractor.
1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS

i) The Contractor shall clearly mark, as the job progresses, all changes and
deviations from that shown on contract drawings on two sets of prints.
After inspection and acceptance of service lines in trenches, the
Contractor shall take 'as-built' measurements, including all depths, prior
to commencement of backfilling operations. It will not be sufficient to
check off line locations. Definite measurements shall be taken for each
service line. The location of buried piping shall be shown on the drawings
and dimensioned from fixed points. Drawings shall be kept up-to-date
during construction and in addition to field measurements shall include
variation orders, field instructions and all other changes. On completion
of the building, the Contractor shall forward to the employer three sets of
drawings and one reproducible set of drawings indicating all such
changes and deviations. This contractor shall include all existing
information on the final record drawings.
1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS

i) Ensure that HVAC service is coordinated with mechanical, electrical,
structural and architectural layout and reflected ceiling plan and with all
applicable trades is complete before submitting drawings for Employer’s
review.
ii) Installation of any equipment shall not be commenced until the shop
drawings have been reviewed and given approval by the employer.
iii) When requested, shop drawings shall be supplemented by data

explaining the theory of operation. The employer may also request that
this information be added to the maintenance and operating manual.
iv) Shop drawings shall be incompliance with the requirements of “General

Notes” drawing for each. Shop Drawings shall indicate clearly all services
and the materials and/or equipment actually being supplied, all details of
construction, accurate dimensions, capacity operating characteristics and
performance.
v) Each shop drawings for non-catalogue items shall be prepared

specifically for this project. Material submissions and brochures for
MTS/230500/7(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
catalogue items shall be marked clearly to show the Items being

proposed and will be supplied.
vi) The contractor shall prepare all shop drawings related to the particular
material submittal and shall submit both the shop drawings and the
material submittal simultaneously. HVAC, Mechanical trades such as
piping (plumbing, drainage, chilled water etc.) and equipments and duct
work under this contract shall be shown in double line.
vii) A coordinated plan and section (running the entire length) for each shaft
shall be prepared and submitted as part of shop drawings for approved.
viii) A coordinated plan and sections (to a scale of 1:50) for each area deem
to be critical shall be submitted as part of shop drawings for approval.
1.13 DRAWING SUBMISSIONS

i) Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall provide the following
drawings:
ii) Five (5) sets of prints and 3 sets of electronic copy on CD/DVD disk of
general layout drawings for such as duct works, VAV, Thermostat and
diffuser layout, pipe works, drainage, electrical supply and control, BMS
control, etc (to a scale of 1:100).
iii) Five (5) sets of prints and 3 sets of electronic copy on CD/DVD disk of
detailed equipment and plant room layout drawings (to a scale of 1:50).
iv) Five (5) sets of prints and 3 sets of electronic copy on CD/DVD disk of
detailed purpose-made diagrams detailing separately all the composite
electrical circuit, control and wiring layouts (to a scale of 1:50).
v) Five (5) sets of prints and 3 sets of electronic copy on CD/DVD disk of
drawings or any variations to the design suggested by or agreed with the
employer to above detail for the scale of the drawings.
Three sets of prints, one set of reproducible vellum and one electronic
copy on disk of ''as installed" drawings, upon completion of the work and
as a condition precedent to the certification by the employer that the work
is complete.
vii) The drawings shall show fully dimensioned, air foundation, bases plinths,
sumps, holes and sleeves details required and the overall size and
weights of the plant concerned.
viii) With the agreement of the employer, smaller holes, built-in fixings, etc.,
other than in plant rooms, may be marked out on site prior to concreting
and finishing works instead of shown on the drawings.
ix) Fully dimensionized plant room drawings shall detail for each plant room
the location of each unit, pipe routes and connections with valves and
fittings, duct routes and connection with accessories, drain connections,
electrical connections and controls. All drawings shall include explanatory
notes and shall show the required sizes of pipes and ducts with and
MTS/230500/8(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
without insulation as applicable.
x) If abbreviations are employed for the designation of components, an

integral schedule shall be provided on the drawings to explain the
meanings of the abbreviations.
xi) Individual equipment drawings from the various manufacturers will not be
accepted in lieu of these composite plant room drawings.
All drawings shall be produced on the latest version of AutoCAD available.
1.14 COORDINATION, INSTALLATION, INTERFERENCE AND SETTING

DRAWINGS
i) Coordination, Installation, interference and setting drawings dimensioned
and to scale, shall be submitted for the employer’s review to make clear
the work intended and to, show its relation to adjacent work and to the
work of other trades. Three copies of such drawings shall be submitted
for review, of which one will be retained by the employer.
ii) The drawings must be comprehensive showing all details, dimensions,

equipment, supports for services and sections through critical areas to
properly coordinate all services and work of other trades. Unless
accepted by the Employer, all drawings must be scaled to clause 1.13.
iv) Drawings shall be prepared with due regard to the construction schedule
and shall be submitted to the Employer, allowing reasonable time for
examination and review.
v) Work shall not proceed in areas involved until after final approval of all
such drawings has been obtained.
vi) These drawings shall include all existing information.
1.15 CONTRACTOR'S TECHNICAL RESPONSIBILITIES

i) This Contractor shall provide detailed calculations for flow and head and
electrical noise abatement and vibration control for all equipment
including FCU’s, AHU's, Fans, Pumps, Chillers, Boilers, Cooling towers,
Heat exchangers, etc. whether these are supplied by him or the
Employer. These calculations shall be done prior to ordering the
equipment and shall be submitted to the Employer for review prior to
ordering such equipment. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for
the final equipment sizing and selection at no additional cost to Employer.
ii) This contractor shall provide detailed seismic restraints and supports
design for all equipment piping, duct work, etc. by engaging a specialist
for this purpose. The supply and installation of all seismic restraints
supports and hangars is part of the contractors’ scope of work.
MTS/230500/9(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
i) Excavation in soil - excavate the final 150mm depth of all trenches for
underground mechanical service lines. Excavation shall be carried down
to correct inverts. Excavation carried below the correct inverts shall be
backfilled with 20 MPa concrete to the underside of the pipe lines, unless
otherwise directed in writing.
ii) Excavation in rock shall be 150mm minimum below the pipe invert.
Backfill to the invert using 20 MPa concrete.
iii) Backfill pipe trenches with granular fill to a depth 300mm above the pipe.
The fill shall be thoroughly tamped around and over the pipes in 150mm
layers.
iv) Refer to, and comply with, the Excavation and grading specified
elsewhere in addition to the requirements in this section.
v) Compaction shall be to at least 95% Modified Proctor Density.
vi) Contractor shall excavate the entire trench length before installing any
piping or other services. The Contractor shall then verify any interference
with existing services and inform the Employer before any new piping or
services installation can proceed. The Contractor shall be responsible for
any modifications required as a result of not complying with this
requirement.
vii) All piping shall be encased in concrete with 150mm cover on all sides
where required by local authorities. Provide thrust blocks at every change
in direction. Thrust blocks shall be of 20 MPa concrete poured against
undisturbed soil. Provide polyethylene bond breaker between concrete
and pipe.
viii) Unless indicated otherwise, all piping with less than 1meter cover shall
be encased in concrete with 150mm cover on all sides, as described
above.
ix) Install piping in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions

and recommendations.
x) Allow for expansion, contraction and movement of all piping as required.

Provide expansion joints in -concrete encasement of pipes at all flexible
pipe joints. Wrap all piping to be encased in concrete polyethylene
sheets.
2.2 MATERIALS
i) Manufacturer and quality standard of materials used in the construction
of this Project shall be subject to the review of the Employer.
ii) Materials and equipment supplied by this Division shall be new and free
MTS/230500/10(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
from defects and shall be equivalent in physical characteristics and

performance in all respect to that specified by the manufacturer's name
and catalogue reference.
iii) Where two or more manufacturers are named for a specific item, the
choice of manufacturer shall rest with the bidder unless indicated
otherwise.
iv) Where a certain manufacturer’s equipment has been specified by name

or model number, the contractor shall be responsible for an alternate
manufacturer’s equipment that is used and that piping, duct and electrical
connections can be made at no extra cost.
v) The products of the specified manufacturers, even when model numbers

are indicated, are acceptable only when the products comply with or are
modified as necessary to comply with the requirements of the contract
documents.
vi) Where manufacturer’s model numbers are indicated, these are only
intended to be a guide for equipment selection. The choice of
manufacturer shall rest with the bidder based on the named
manufacturers and the performance specification.
vii) All materials to be used shall be suitable for installation in a corrosive

environment, all screws, bolts, washers, etc., in non-conditioned areas
shall be stainless steel.
viii) Local manufacturers will not be acceptable unless a credit is provided to

the acceptance of the engineer, and the local manufactured products
comply fully with the specifications.
ix) Materials used on this project shall not be purchased by the Contractor
before receipt of approval from the Employer.
x) Similar materials used on this project shall be purchased from the same
manufacturer.
2.3 VARIATION FROM MATERIALS SPECIFIED
i) Materials and products specified by the name of the manufacturer, the

brand or trade name, or catalogue reference, shall be the basis of the
tender price. These shall be provided under the Contract unless
substitutions are proposed and accepted, in writing by the Employer, in
accordance with contract conditions provided elsewhere substitutions
and the following procedure:
a) Substitution may be proposed only when the clause or other

approved manufacturer is used in the specification. Any substitute shall
comply with the base bid specifications.
b) The proposed substitution shall be listed under 'Variation from

Materials Specified' on the tender proposal form.
c) The proposed substitution shall show product name and complete
MTS/230500/11(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
description and also what difference, if any, will be made in the amount of
the tender price for each substitution, should it be accepted.
d) All additional costs resulting from the use of substituted items

shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.4 CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, AND ESCUTCHEONS
i) The Contractor shall leave chases and openings in walls and floors as
required by the Mechanical Division for piping and accessories. These
chases and openings shall not, be cut larger than necessary to
accommodate the equipment passing through.
ii) The cost, location and sizing of all cutting and patching required for the
work of Mechanical Division shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical
Division, Cutting and patching shall be performed by trades specializing
in the materials to be cut and patched.
iii) The Contractor shall be advised in regard to this work before the
concrete is poured and the walls are built, and when required, shall be
given location for all holes and pipes, convectors and accessories. All
necessary and sleeves and inserts shall be supplied by the Mechanical
Division. Cutting of structural member shall not be permitted without
specific written acceptance from the Employer.
iv) All drilling for hangers, rod inserts and work of similar nature shall be
done by the Mechanical Division.
v) Escutcheons shall be provided at all penetrations of piping into finished

areas. For insulated pipes the escutcheons shall be large enough to fit
around the insulation. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated polished cast
brass with set screw and of size sufficient to conceal openings in building
construction.
vi) It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Division to supply the

Contractor with anchor bolts and base diagrams of equipment showing
exact location of anchor bolts.
vii) Pipes, ducts and conduits shall have galvanized steel sleeves where they
pass through walls, floors, ceilings and partitions. Clearance shall be
12mm minimum. Sleeves shall be sized to clear insulated pipes and
ducts which have a vapour barrier.
viii) Where pipes pass through exterior foundation walls, allowance shall be
made for differential settlement between the pipe and the wall. A 6mm
thick galvanized steel sleeve of inside diameter not less than 75mm
greater than the outside diameter of the pipe shall be used. The annular
space between the sleeve and pipe shall be packed with oakum and
sealed with mastic to provide a waterproof seal. A concrete bridge shall
be installed between the wall and the adjacent undisturbed soil. Any
penetration through a waterproofing membrane shall be co-ordinated with
and reviewed by the waterproofing manufacturer and the Employer to
ensure a water tight installation.
MTS/230500/12(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
ix) Galvanized steel sleeves not less than schedule 40 pipe or of 6mm thick
steel shall be provided for pipes passing through walls and floors. In
kitchens, and similar rooms, and, in mechanical rooms and pipe spaces
above basement floor, sleeves shall extend 100 mm above the floor. In
floors with a damp proof/ waterproof membrane, sleeves shall, have a
50mm wide collar welded all around, at membrane level. Sleeves
passing, 1. Through stud partitions shall be No.22 U.S. steel. Where
pipes are to be insulated. Sleeves shall be sized to accommodate the
outside diameter of the insulation.
x) The annular space between the sleeve and the pipe or pipe insulation
shall be sealed with mastic for cold pipes and lead wool for hot pipes to
isolate an air plenum or prevent sound transmission.
xi) Where duct work passes through an opening other than where a fire
damper is required, pack the opening around the duct with glass fibre
and seal with Mastic.
xii) Here pipes or ducts pass through fire separations, pack space between
duct or pipe and sleeve with UL listed, non corrosive, fire barrier
penetration sealant. For PVC and plastic piping use "DONUT" type
INTUMEX #RS-10",plastic pipe fire stop closure system. Provide UL
listed fire dampers within the ducts passing through fire walls. All pipe
and duct penetrations shall have UL listed fire barrier assemblies.
2.5 CONCEALMENT OF PIPING

i) All pipes shall be concealed inside walls, and/or furred spaces unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
ii) Carry out, without cost, all alterations necessary in the arrangement of
work which has been installed without proper study and approval in order to
make such work come within finished lines of walls, ceilings and floors or to
allow the installation of the work of others.
2.6 PIPING INSTALLATION

i) Before installing piping, check mechanical drawings with architectural
and electrical drawings. Make an accurate layout of piping. Interference
may appear and departures from indicated arrangements are required
due to changed locations and elevations of piping, obtain written
permission for proposed changes from the Employer.
ii) Verify all invert elevations required for sewer and drain connections prior
to commencing installation and connections to ensure that these
connections can be made with sufficient slope for drainage.
iii) Arrange and install piping to obtain maximum head room, avoiding
structural interference. Where piping is to be furred in, or concealed, this
contractor shall co-ordinate the work to maintain his lines and levels.
iv) Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated. Install piping

parallel to building. Cut all pipes accurately to measurements taken at the
site and install without springing or forcing. Make all changes in direction
with fittings. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spacing them
MTS/230500/13(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
at such a distance so as to permit the application of insulation. Pipes

transporting hot fluids shall be installed at least 6" (150mm) away from
pipes transporting cold fluids.
v) The inside of all pipe, fittings, traps, valves and other equipment shall be
smooth, clean and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand and dirt when
erected. When work is suspended during construction, or whenever there
is danger of depositing foreign matters in the pipes, protect the open
ends by using temporary plugs or caps.
vi) The slope of the line shall be uniform between established elevations
without pockets.
vii) All reductions in pipe size shall be made by using reducing fittings,
installed to permit easy drainage of pipe system and to avoid air pockets.
viii) Where piping of dissimilar metals, including copper piping and ferrous
materials, are joined provide dielectric couplings.
ix) Install piping serving all equipment in such a manner that only small
sections need be removed to permit removal, cleaning or inspection (as
applicable) of the unit itself, or coils, tube bundles or heat exchangers
contained therein.
x) Provide flanged or union connections for ready disconnection of piping at

equipment. Victaulic couplings may be used in lieu of unions or flanges
where permitted by the Engineer. Do not place any union or flanged
connection in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the
building. For piping up to and including 2 inch (50mm), and where
indicated on the drawings, install a union on each side of each control
valve, regulator, etc. on one side of each check valve, and at all pieces of
equipment without flanged connections such as pumps, air coils, tanks,
etc., in order that such equipment may be readily be disconnected. Use
flanged connections on piping over 2 inches (50mm) where indicated on
the drawings. Where flanged, valves, regulators, etc., do not permit to
removal of flange bolts, separate two such devices by a spool. Always
use a spool to separate equipment to be isolated by a butterfly valve.
xi) Where raised face flanges are to be mated with flat face equipment or
valve flanges, the raised face of line flanges shall be removed. Bolt holes
shall straddle centrelines. Steel flanges to be bolted to cast iron valves of
equipment nozzles shall be flat faced, with full gaskets.
xii) In piping material classes permitting use of both welding neck and slip-on
flanges, use of welding and fitting butterfly valve.
xiii) Locate all valves for easy access.
xiv) Piping and pipe sizes not indicated on the drawings shall be of size as
specified or as recommended by the equipment manufactures and in
accordance of the authorities having jurisdiction. Pipe runs shall be
subject to the review of the Employer.
xv) Use long radius type elbows where space permits.
MTS/230500/14(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
xvi) Pipe all relief valves, backflow preventers and drain valves to nearest
floor drain. These may or may not be shown on drawings.
xvii) Steel piping installed in inaccessible locations shall have welded joints.
xviii) Apply two coats of asphalt paint to all pipes laid in concrete or passing
through concrete.
xix) Provide drip pans below at all water, or drain piping located in electrical
rooms and transformer rooms. Pans shall be constructed of 18 gauge
galvanized or stainless steel, cross-broken to prevent "oil-canning". Each
pan shall have a 1" high lip and all corners shall be welded, brazed or
soldered to be water tight. A pipe nipple of material matching the pan
itself, shall be provided at the pan low point and piping shall direct the
drainage to the nearest floor drain.
xx) All pipes shall be concealed inside walls, and/ or furred spaces unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
xxi) Carry out, without cost, all alterations necessary in the arrangement of
work which has been installed without proper study and approval in order
to make such work come within finished lines of walls, ceilings and floors
or to allow the installation of the work of others.
2.7 HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

i) Piping and equipment provided under the Mechanical Division shall be
complete with all necessary supports and hangers required for a safe and
workmanlike installation. Pipe hangers shall be to MSS-SP-58. Auxiliary
structural members shall be provided under the Mechanical Section concerned
where piping, ducts or equipment must be suspended between beams or joists
of the structure. ii) Depending on type of structure, hangers shall be:
a) Clamped to steel beams or joists.
b) Attached to approved concrete inserts.
c) For precast concrete construction hanger rods shall pass between

slabs to be supported above by a 100 x 100 x 3mm steel plate welded to
the hanger rod. A lock nut threaded to the hanger rod together with
50mm minimum diameter, washer shall be applied to undersurface of the
deck to prevent rising of the hanger.
iii) Approved type expansion shields and bolts may be used for pipe up to
100mm diameter, where the presetting of concrete inserts is not practical.
Submit material for review by the Employer.
iv) Suspension from metal deck shall not be allowed unless specifically
accepted by the Engineer. Drawings of the proposed method of
suspension must be submitted for approval.
v) Other means of support shall be as shown or as specified hereunder.
vi) In addition, provide a hanger within 600mm of each side of a valve, elbow
or tee where the building structure will not accept the weight of pipe, insulation
MTS/230500/15(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
and contents, at maximum space shown, the Contractor shall reduce the hanger
spacing as required, by the Employer.
vii) Horizontal runs of plastic pipe shall have at least one support at / on each
joint support spacing shall not exceed 1m.
viii) All horizontal piping except otherwise required shall be supported by

adjustable galvanized wrought iron clevis c -type hangers. Provide lock nut at
clevis on all size hangers. For copper piping hangers shall be plastic coated if
hanger is in contact with the pipe.
ix) Suspending one hanger from another shall not be permitted.
2.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND POWER SUPPLY

i) All apparatus, materials and wiring shall be suitable for use with a 3-
phase, 4-wire, 400 volt 50Hz earthed neutral power supply, or 1 phase,
230 V, 50 Hz.
ii) The Contractor shall provide and install all electrical equipment and
wiring required for the installation including control circuit wiring except
that power wiring from the points of supply to the control gear for electric
motors, heaters, etc. will be carried out under the, Electrical Division
Installation Section. Multicore control wiring from remote control panels to
items of plant is specified in the Electrical Installation Section. The
Contractor shall provide fully detailed wiring diagrams of all connections.
iii) All electrically operated equipment shall comply in all aspects with the
relevant Government Ministry Standards including dimensional standards
where these exist except where the specification or drawings show
otherwise. All equipment not visible from its isolator must have a
separate and additional lock-off stop button or isolator either on the
equipment or immediately adjacent to the equipment.
iv) All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will

continue to function without damage if the voltages frequency vary within
the following tolerances:
Voltage: plus or minus TEN per cent (10%).
Frequency: plus or minus SIX per cent (6%).
v) The maximum operating temperature of the standards specified shall be

observed. Allowance shall be made by reducing the permitted rises of
temperature above ambient.
vi) All electrical equipment and control panels must be tropicalized, comply
with indicated Standards and shall be suitable for use in ambient
temperature up to 60°C (140 deg. F) and 90% R.H. Sun shades, or other
means approved by the Engineer, shall be provided for electrical and
control panels to prevent exposure to direct sunlight.
MTS/230500/16(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
vii) All starters provided by this Division must comply with the electrical
specifications. Starters above 5 HP size shall be of reduced voltage type.
2.9 ELECTRIC MOTORS

i) Electric motors for all driven equipment supplied under the Mechanical
Division shall be provided and installed under this Division.
ii) All motors shall be high efficiency squirrel cage induction type with
standard drip proof enclosure. Motors installed exposed to the outside
shall have IP65 rating and shall be totally enclosed fan cooled motors. All
motors in non-air-conditioned space shall be suitable for 60°C operation.
iii) Generally, all motors shall have starting current-torque characteristics in

accordance with EEMAC design B unless specified otherwise or unless
load characteristics require a higher starting torque, each motor shall
have sufficient starting torque to start the driven equipment and to
accelerate it to full speed within 10 seconds.
iv) Unless noted otherwise, all motors (except those motors exposed to
weather) provided shall be of Class ‘F” Insulation and IP55 protection. It
shall be designed for continuous operation at 60°C. Motors with drip-
proof enclosure shall have 1.15 service factor, totally enclosed fan cooled
motors shall have 1.0 service factor.
v) Motor connection boxes shall be located on side of motor most easily

accessible for maintenance and remote from belts, gears or driven
equipment, If boxes are located on, wrong side of motor they shall be
relocated.
vi) Each multi-speed motor and associated switching device shall be

circuited such that the overload device in the starter protects the motor
on each step of the multi-speed switch. As an alternative to this
requirement the motor may have integral overload protection,
vii) Material submissions for all electric motors shall be in accordance with
the section and article 'Shop drawings' and shall also incorporate the
following information.
Horsepower
Voltage
Frequency
Speed
Starting Current and Torque Characteristics
Full Load Current
Class of Insulation
Enclosure Type
Service Factor
Ambient Temperature Reference
Type of Bearings
Locations of Connection Box
Manufacturer
MTS/230500/17(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
viii) Motors 15 hp and larger shall have heat detector protection embedded in
the windings for connection into the motor control circuit. Protection shall be
Siemens Thermistor: 3UN7 or approved equal. Motors up to 1 hp shall have
integral thermal overload protection.
ix) Each electric motor shall be complete with a lamacoid name plate
securely fastened in a conspicus place on the motor. The name plate shall be
2.5mm thick laminated phenolic plastic 90mm long x 40mm wide with black face
and white centre, 5.5mm high letters shall be engraved through to the white
lamination with the following:
Motor No.
Mechanical Equipment Driven
Circuit No.
Panel No.
Panel Location.
x) Drive between any motor and driven equipment shall be provided with a
guard, except where casing acts as a guard. Guards for belt-driven equipment
shall have a hole for tachometer reading on each shaft. Design of belt guards
shall comply with local municipal safety standards and cods.
Maximum starting current shall be:
3-7.5 hp: Five times full load current.
7.5 to 50 hp: Two times full load current.
50 hp and above: 1.5 times full load current.
xii) Where an external control voltage is wired into a starter, provide a

warning nameplate and mylar barriers or a door switch to interrupt the control
circuit.
xiii) Starters and control devices shall be of one manufacturer (for equipment
where starters are part of the package).
xiv) Select overload relays according to the codes and the recommendations
of the manufacturer, based on motor full load current.
xv) Select overload relays with characteristics to permit accelerating the load
to full speed without unnecessary tripping.
xvii) Motors for use with variable frequency drives shall be designed to meet
the requirements of NEMA MG1-1993.
xviii) Motors for rotating equipment shall be selected for a non-overloading

condition.
MTS/230500/18(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
xix) Motors for pump shall be supplied by: brooks Cromption, US Electric, GE
or approved equal.
2.10 NAME PLATES

i) Each piece of mechanical equipment. Shall be complete with a. lamecoid
nameplate securely fastened in a conspicuous place on the equipment.
ii) The nameplate shall be 2.5mm thick laminated phenolic plastic 90mm
wide x 40mm high with black face and white centre, 5.5mm high lettering shall
be engraved through to the white lamination with the following:
a) Equipment type and No. e.g. fan No. 1 pump No. 2, Etc.
b) Service and Area or Zone of building the Zone of building served

e.g. south Zone, chilled water primar, consider water, etc.
2.11 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESSIBILITY

i) All parts of the installation requiring periodic maintenance shall be
accessible. Wherever valves, dampers, etc. are concealed by building
construction; access doors or panels shall be furnished by this section
and installed under the respective trade sections (i.e. Masonry, Plaster,
Gypsum Board Tile, etc.). The Mechanical Division shall be responsible
for their proper location. Wall-mounted plumbing fixtures with back water
connection shall have an adjacent access panel.
ii) Access panels shall be LeHage, SMS, Zurn, Ruskin or other approved
manufacturer, with 12 U.S. ga. stainless steel panel, rust resistant
concealed hinges and positive locking and self-opening screwdriver
operated lock. Frame shall be suitable for the wall in which it is being
installed and shall have integral keys for plaster walls.
iii) Panels in tile wall shall suit tile pattern. Minimum size of panels shall be
300 x 450mm. Where equipment is larger, the access panel shall be
sized to suit. Where access doors are installed in fire rated walls or
ceilings, the access doors shall have the appropriate, fire resistance
ratings and shall be equipped with closure and hardware as required.
Access doors and hardware shall have the appropriate UL listing.
iv) Provide access to all fire dampers and control dampers.
v) Submit each type of access panel to the Engineer for their review prior to
installation. Access panel surfaces must be of a compatible finish to the
adjacent finished surface, rl unless specified otherwise.
vi) Each access panel shall be installed to provide complete access to

equipment for maintenance and servicing.
vii) All access doors shall be shown on record drawings. Notations adjacent
to each access, door shown on the drawings shall indicate the frequency
of maintenance required or item or items above or behind the door.
MTS/230500/19(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
2.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

i) Clean thoroughly all fixtures and equipment from grease, dirt, plaster or
any other foreign material. Chrome-plated fittings, piping and trimmings shall be
polished upon completion.
ii) Any dirt, rubbish or grease on walls, floors or fixtures accumulated from
the work of the Mechanical Division shall be removed promptly from the
premises by this Division.
iii) Fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected from damage during
the construction period and shall be clean and polished in accordance with
manufacturer's directions. Motors and equipment bearings shall, be protected
with plastic sheets, tied or taped in place, Aluminum fin heating or cooling
elements shall be protected with cardboard covers.
iv) Any unpainted steel surfaces, shall be prime coated under this Division.
v) All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before start-up and again

before handover.
2.13 TAGS AND CHARTS

i) Valves shall be provided with brass tags, other then valves on fan coil
units and valves on plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 40 mm diameter numbered
with 12 mm high stamped letters and fastened securely with brass 'S' Hooks or
chains. Provide charts, indicating location, service and zone of each valve.
Charts shall be set in finished, wood or metal picture frames with clear glass or
Lucite front and fastened securely where directed by the Engineer. This work
shall be coordinated between the, various Mechanical Sections to prevent
overlapping of numbering systems.
2.14 PAINTING
i) Material for painting shall be high grade products of well known
manufacturer, and when approved, shall be delivered the site in
original unbroken packages, bearing the maker's name and brand.
Paints of approved colour only shall be used for each application.
ii) The Contractor shall provide manufacturer's application directions,

performance guarantee and literatures.
iii) Paint shall be applied as per manufacturer’s printed application

directions. Paint colour scheme shall be specified at the time of
painting or earlier.
iv) The ducting and piping shall be painted according to the colour code
based on American standard "Scheme for identification of piping
systems.” and used for finish painting. All colour codes and scheme
shall be approved by the Project Manager.
MTS/230500/20(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
v) All finish painting will be done, except where such pieces of equipment
or material are specified to be shop painted or finished by the
manufacturer. Clean and leave surfaces ready for Painting.
vi) Where equipment is delivered with the final paint or finish applied by
the manufacturer, repaint or refinish surfaces damaged during erection
of shipment, so as to match the original surface and be unobtrusive.
vii) Prepainted equipment by manufacturer shall be to colours selected by

the Engineer from standard finishes. All fire protection piping shall be
painted red to the approval of Civil Defence Authorities.
viii) All structural steel including hangers, brackets, supports and other
ferrous metals shall be shop or factory prime painted. Wherever
structural steel including brackets, supports, and other ferrous metal
cannot be shop or factory prime painted, wire brush to remove all
traces or rust, clean off air traces of dirt, oil and grease, apply one coat
of an approved rust inhibiting primer and leave ready to receive finish
paint.
ix) All galvanized black iron steel pipe work and steel fittings shall be
delivered to site undamaged and free from. dirt and rust, and protected
by factory applied varnish, lacquer or shop/factory applied prime paint.
x) Touch up all bolt heads, nuts, threads and previously unpainted

connections. Touch up all damaged and abraded areas on pipe work
and steel after erection, and wire brush all welds and cut ends. Apply
one coat of approved rust inhibiting primer and leave ready to receive
finish paint.
xi) Do not prime paint galvanized steel except in visible locations. Treat all
damaged and unprotected surfaces of galvanized steel with a zinc rich
paint to a minimum of 50 micron thickness.
xii) Equipment items, including pumps, air moving units, uninsulated

pressure vessels, unit ventilators and convectors, shall have prime and
final paint factory applied. Heat resistant paint shall be used where the
conditions require this.
2.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

i) Five (5) hard and Three(3) soft copies of complete operating and
maintenance instructions for all HVAC equipments, piping, ducting, control
system and other associated subsystem, bound in hard covered manuals, shall
be supplied
ii) Operating instructions shall include:
a) A general description of the system. Equipment included, and

control operation.
b) Instructions on how to start and stop the plant, noting any safety
and/or, sequencing arrangements.
MTS/230500/21(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
c) A 'trouble-shooting' table, showing where to look for trouble under

various conditions of malfunction.
Operating temperatures at critical points in the systems.
iii) Maintenance schedule shall include:
a) A list of all bearings with type and period of lubrication.
b) Equipment manufacturer's printed data of care and maintenance

of bearings.
iv) System wiring and control diagrams and detailed descriptions of the
operation of control systems.
v) The Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be handed to the

Engineer not later than at the end of the commissioning period.
vi) A list of spare parts and consumables as recommended by the

equipment supplier to cover an operation period of two years shall be submitted
listing the following:
vii) Catalogue number, characteristics, quantity and price of each item, and
validity
viii) Source and alternative sources of supply
ix) Details of required maintenance with suggested frequency of actions.
x) Details of all lubricating oils and greases required, and filter

replacements.
xi) Details of each item of plant including the name and address of the
manufacturer, type and model serial number, duty and rating.
i) Indicate on list items that should be stocked by the Owner due to a long
delivery.
2.16 PIPING AND DUCT WORK IDENTIFICATION

i) After completion of insulation and/or painting, all piping and ductwork
shall be marked in English to show the service and direction of flow
ii) Marking shall be placed at each side of any wall, partition or floor, at 10m
intervals on all exposed piping and ductwork and at each access panel or
door. Marking shall be located so as to be in full view.
iii) Marking shall be stenciled. Use black stencils on light coloured surfaces,
yellow stencils on dark coloured surfaces except where fire lines which
shall be stenciled in accordance with Civil Defence requirements.
Stencils shall have distinct edges. Blurred stencils are not acceptable.
The name of the service shall be stenciled fully or with abbreviations
standard to the industry. Non standard abbreviations are not acceptable.
Letters shall be a minimum of 50mm high for ducts and for pipes 75mm
MTS/230500/22(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
or larger to outside of insulation. Letters for smaller pipes shall be 20mm

high. All markings shall be clearly legible from 1.5m above the adjacent
floor or platform.
iv) Access doors for fire dampers shall be clearly identified.
v) As an alternate to stencil approved type markers by Industrial Safety

Supply Co. or approved equivalent shall be acceptable subject to review
by the employer
2.17 CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS

i) Particular attention must be paid to the proximity of electrical conduit and
cable to mechanical piping and equipment.
ii) Pipes transporting hot fluids shall be installed at least 150mm away from
pipes carrying fluids.
iii) Electrical conduits shall not touch or be supported on pipe or duct walls.
iv) Each section shall confine itself to installing all materials in the spaces
shown without encroaching upon space for materials installed under
other Sections or Divisions where the space allotted to another Section or
Division is encroached upon, the materials shall be relocated to their
proper space allotments in such a manner to complete the work using
space allotted to the vanous sections and divisions Relocation of
materials and work involved shall be paid for by the section responsible
for the encroachment at no extra cost to the Contract.
v) All wiring and starters for devices supplied by the Mechanical Division
shall be provided by the Mechanical Division except where shown and
specified under the Electrical Division.
a) All wiring and starters provided by the Mechanical Division shall

comply with the requirements of the Electrical Division of the
specification. Electrical panels, switch gear, starters, etc., in sprinklered
areas shall be to IP 54. Panels installed outdoors shall be to IP 65.
b) Reference to Electrical Drawings and specification for work

provided under that Division.
vi) In general, concrete work on grade or cast integrally with a floor is

provided by the concrete section. Concrete bases on springs or other
vibration isolation materials are provided by the Mechanical Division.
2.18 OPERATING LIMITS

i) No plant, equipment, valves, piping fittings etc. shall be installed under
this contract if they will be operating outside the manufacturer's stated
pressure and temperature operating limits.
MTS/230500/23(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
2.19 TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT

i) Where the Contractor has been granted permission to use mechanical
systems for his benefit during construction, he shall maintain the systems
and equipment in proper operating condition.
ii) Before any area of the building is turned over to the Owner for
acceptance and for beginning of maintenance/guarantee period, the
systems and equipment shall be returned to the initial new condition by
replacing used air filters with new air filters, cleaning the air side of all
coils in the air handling systems, replacing used belts in belt rives with
new belts, lubricating bearings according to manufacturer's factory
standards and adjusting the thermostatic control system according to
specifications and/or to suit the employer.
2.20 EXISTING SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT

i) All changes and connections to existing services shall be made only in a
manner and at a time accepted by the Employer, so as to avoid any
interruption of such services during, normal working hours. Connections
to existing services may be made outside of normal working hour at no
extra cost to this Contract.
ii) Whenever existing services are to be removed, all piping for such
services or equipment shall be removed from any area where it is
exposed, if no longer required , and securely capped or plugged in an
acceptable manner.
iii) If necessary to facilitate installation of new work, any existing services

and equipment shall be removed and then replaced by the Contractor, at
no extra cost to this Contract.
iv) Whenever it becomes necessary to relocate existing piping equipment to

make possible installation of the work under this contract, such relocation
shall be done by the Contractor at no extra cost to this Contract.
v) Where connections are made to existing services existing services within

1 m (3 ft). of the connection shall be made good under this contract.
2.21 TRAINING
i) The Contractor shall be responsible to train adequate number of
Operators or Maintenance Staff deputed by the Owner. They shall be
trained in correct and careful operation, safety devices, control and
maintenance of all air conditioning and associated services provided
under the contract before the works are handed over to the Owner. The
training shall be carried out by the qualified commissioning staff of the
Contractor, for each particular service and shall continue till the operators
or maintenance staffs are fully conversant with all aspects of operations.
ii) If a Caretaker is appointed prior to completion and final testing, he shall

be given assistance in familiarizing himself with the installation and shall
MTS/230500/24(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
be given instructions in the use and care of the plant. If the Caretaker is
not available up to the time of handover, the Contractor shall return to
site when requested for the instructions to be given. The Contractor shall
conduct periodic services for all equipment at least once a month until the
end of the maintenance period.
2.22 GUARANTEE
i) The Contractor shall maintain the whole of the works for a period of
twelve Calendar Months from the date of the Taking-over Certificate, and
shall make good free of cost any faults arising from defective goods or
materials or from incorrect or negligent workmanship on the part of his
own Employees, Suppliers or Sub-contractors.
ii) A Taking-over Certificate shall be issued by the Engineer on satisfactory

completion of the commissioning tests. The maintenance guarantee
period shall start at the date of the Taking-over Certificate and shall
continue for a period of one year. Final maintenance certificate will be
issued at the end of the maintenance period.
iii) This Contractor shall be aware that the warranty period will be extended
if faults are found with the installation or manufacture of the equipment.
This warranty period will be extended by a minimum of 8 months from the
date of final rectification.
MTS/230500/25(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
SECTION 231123 GAS SYSTEM
SECTION 231123 – FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
This section includes all works involved in the supply, delivery,

installation, inspection, testing and commissioning of the natural gas
supply system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
The pipe size shown on the plan drawing is only indicative as the
pressure of the gas supply would affect the pipe sizing. However, the
contractor shall be solely responsible to co-ordinate with infrastructure
contractor to determine the required pressure system available at the
connection point. Base on this information, if there is any deviation of the
pipe size from the drawings, contractor is required to review and submit
to employer for approval prior to work commencement. This deviation
work shall be included into tender package and no further claim shall be
entertained.
Building gas piping system (above grade) downstream of Infrastructure

gas distribution network as indicated in drawings and tenancy work
interfacing.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
Contractor shall submit 5 hard copies and 3 soft copies of the following in
accordance with the project submittal procedure;
a) Catalogue data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, earthquake

valve, pipe coating and detail of accessories.
b) Certification of welders and qualified welding procedure.
c) Proof documents of being a Licensed GAS service Contractor of

SNGPL
d) Shop drawings, as-built drawings, testing records, certificates,

and O&M manual.
e) Company name, mailing address, email, phone number of

material & accessories supplier, contractor, local service agent
and dealers.
MTS/231123/1 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
1.3 STANDARDS
The gas reticulation system shall be executed by a licensed gas service

contractor of SNGPL and in accordance with following standards,
requirements and regulations,
i) Local Gas Authority (SNGPL)
ii) All other local authorities having jurisdiction over the installation
iii) National Fuel Gas Code ( NFPA)
iv) American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
v) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
vi) International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
vii) Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry, Inc.
viii) American Society for Testing and Materials International
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder certification and Qualified Procedure Standards

Interior Steel Pipe: Section IX of ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel code
B. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 54
MTS/231123/2 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe: GALVANISED steel, ASTM A53, Schedule 40 GRADE A.

B. Nipples: GALVANISED steel, ASTM A733, Schedule 40 GRADE A.
C. FITTINGS (TEE, ELBOW, SOCKET, REDUCERS, ENLARGER,
BRANCH –OFF, ETC):
1. GALVANISED Steel Welded Schedule 40
a. Up to 100 mm (4 inch), ANSI B16.11, Socket welded.
b. Over 100 mm (4 inch), ANSI B16.9, Butt welded.
2. Malleable Iron, Threaded: ANSI B16.3. (Only allowed to use
pipe size below diameter of 50mm within the kitchen area)
i) For gas pipe running above false ceiling, cladding or concealed space,
the pipe shall be fully enclosed all round externally in an air-tight
enclosure with the beginning and end of the entire length of the pipe
exhaust to the external of the building or to below ceiling level in kitchens.
All gas valves, threaded joints, fittings and controls shall be installed
below the ceiling space.
ii) A line diagram with Perspex covers shall be provided at a suitable

location indicating the gas pipe work and isolation valves.
iii) While fitting is in progress and pending completion, pipe ends shall be
capped or plugged with the appropriate pipe fittings.
iv) Bends shall be used when turning corners and square elbow shall not be
used. The bore of an installation pipe shall not be restricted by kinks,
burrs, foreign matter or in any other way.
v) All vertical and horizontal piping shall be supported by steel pipe brackets
approved by the local authority.
vi) Pipe works running inside air-conditioned areas shall be adequately

lagged with insulating material of approved type to prevent excessive
condensation.
vii) Gate valves shall be suitable for gas application & approved by Local
Authority.
viii) Condensate drain pipes complete with isolation valves shall be proposed
and installed by the contractor.
ix) All ductile iron-pipes shall be fully wrapped with a polyethylene sleeve.
The sleeve shall be pulled over the pipe, then folded tightly round the
pipe taped securely.
MTS/231123/3 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
x) Inspection panels/openings shall be provided at appropriate locations to

facilitate future inspection of gas pipes.
xi) All gas valves, threaded joints, fittings and controls shall be installed
below ceiling space of the building.
2.2 RISERS
i) Every riser shall be supported at its base by a duckfoot or similar flanged

device capable of supporting the total weight of the riser. A plutted tee for
empty condensate shall be provided at the base of each riser.
ii) Where the riser passes through a floor, the floor shall be haunched up
around the riser to ensure that water does not accumulate at the point
where the riser is in contact with the floor.
2.3 STRAINERS
i) Provide on high pressure side of pressure reducing valves, on suction

side of pumps, on inlet side of indicating and control instruments and
equipment subject to sediment damage and where shown on drawings.
Strainer element shall be removable without disconnection of piping.
ii) Gas Lines: "Y" type with removable mesh lined brass strainer sleeve.
iii) Body: Smaller than 80 mm (3 inches), brass or bronze; 80 mm (3 inches)

and larger, cast iron or semi-steel.
2.4 PLUG VALVES
Valve body shall be Iron body, flanged ends to suit piping, plug style and
withstanding minimum pressure of 150 psig.
2.5 GAS EQUIPMENT CONNECTORS
i) Flexible connectors with Teflon core interlocked galvanized steel

protective casing approved by the local authority.
2.6 GAS METER
Gas meter shall be diaphragm type comply with local Gas authorities
requirement. It shall be made of Die-cast aluminum case, consist of Oil-
impregnated, self-lubricating bushings and Molded, convoluted
diaphragms for smooth operation and long life. It shall consist of Rigid
reinforced flag rods for positive alignment for sustain accuracy and
Graphite-filled phenolic valves to minimize wear It shall be provided with
Long-life, low friction, grommet seals and single coat polyester primer
with high solids polyurethane top coat Security seals that indicate
tempering.
MTS/231123/4 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
2.7 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

i) The leak detector shall comply with BS 6020:latest edition of Instruments
for the detection of combustible gases Part 1 "Specification for general
requirements and test methods", and Part 4 'Specification for
performance requirements for Group II instruments reading up to 100%
lower explosive limit" or approved equal.
ii) All leak detectors shall be explosion-proof and shall be interlinked with
the solenoid valves serving the areas and interface with ventilation
system.
2.8 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

i) Solenoid Valve
a) A direct-acting solenoid valve with manual reset or similar device

shall be installed at suitable location. All solenoid valves used shall
be explosion-proof to comply with requirement of Local Authorities.
The solenoid valves shall have an indicator to show whether it is in
the open or closed mode.
b) The solenoid valve shall be interlinked with the mechanical ventilation

system serving the particular area. The valve will be in the open
position when the ventilation system is functioning. This solenoid
valve shall automatically shut off the gas supply whenever the
ventilation fan is switched off or failed to operate. The valve shall
remain shut after the fault condition is rectified until it is manually
reset.
ii) Earthquake Valve
It is intended to close in the event of an earthquake to prevent gas flow

into a structure where earthquake damage may have occurred. It shall
reduce the potential for fire or explosion due to the release of natural gas
into a structure where gas lines, gas fixtures, or gas appliances.
The valve shall not use any source of internal or external electrical
power. It shall be designed to remain closed until manually reset. It shall
be mounted in the gas line upstream or downstream of the gas-line
pressure regulator and gas meter outside the structure
It shall consist of a swing check valve arrangement with an acceleration-

sensitive triggering mechanism. The trip mechanism consists of a steel
ball resting on a tapered cup-shaped support. The horizontal motion of an
earthquake causes the ball shall move from the center of the support.
Springs shall be provided to assist the valve- flapper to close and gas
pressure assists in holding the valve disc in the closed position. The trip
mechanism shall be factory set and sealed. A sight glass shall be
provided so that the Open or Closed indicator can be seen, and the trip
mechanism status of the valve can be easily determined.
The integrated interfacing facilities to interface with building fire alarm

system shall be provided, otherwise the contractor shall provide
additional solenoid shut of valve interfaced with fire alarm system at
downstream of earthquake valve at no additional cost to employer.
MTS/231123/5 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
2.9 PAINTING
All gas piping shall be painted and labelled with arrow sign in accordance
with Local Authorities requirements or employer’s satisfactory.
i) The work to be painted shall include all equipment, piping, fittings, valves,
hangers, supports etc. For protection against corrosion or required by
relevant code of practice. In addition, all work exposed to view shall also
be painted. All paints, enamel, etc. shall be approved brand of best
quality and shall be delivered to the site in the maker's containers with
seal, etc., unbroken and are clearly marked with the maker's name or
trademark and a description of the contents and colour.
ii) The paints used in the works must be suitable for use in tropical climates,
with an addition of anti-fungus nature.
iii) All materials for multiple coat work e.g. primers, undercoatings and
finishing coats, shall be obtained from the same manufacturer and shall
be those recommended by the manufacturer as suitable for application
together and for the type and duty of surfaces concerned.
iv) No painting on exterior work to be done during wet weather, or upon

surfaces that are not thoroughly clean and dry.
v) During the execution of Painter's work the Contractor is held responsible

for taking all precautions necessary for the health and safety of his
workmen.
vi) The paint shall be kept stirred during use and when more than one coat
is specified, subsequent coats shall not be applied until preceding coats
have thoroughly hardened.
vii) All painting shall be carried out within seven (7) days of delivery and
erection on site. This requirement shall be strictly complied with.
viii) All polished or chromium plated iron or steel work shall have at least one
coat of protective finish at the manufacturers works and the Contractor
shall maintain this preservation until the work is finally painted or put into
use.
ix) The following items shall be painted to colours and identification sign
approved by the employer:
a) Sleeves and sheet metal casings

b) All pipe work including pipe fittings
c) All metalwork, hangers, conduits
d) Screw heads and means of fixing
e) Galvanized steel and all other exposed works
x) Before any painting is carried out the Contractor shall ensure that the
surface to be painted is clean, free of grease and rust as recommended
by the paint manufacturer. If necessary, degreasing and de-rusting shall
be employed.
MTS/231123/6 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
xi) Each coat of paint shall be applied by brush and when thoroughly dry,
smoothed with suitable abrasive paper or cloth before the next coat is
applied.
xii) No painting or drying should be carried out in direct sunlight and due care
shall be taken during dusty or wet conditions.
xiii) Should any corrosion, or signs of faulty painting techniques become

apparent during the maintenance period, the Contractor will be required
to remove the defective paint work or component part at his own cost and
retreat and/or repaint it as directed and to the satisfaction of the
Superintending Officer.
xiv) All floors, ceilings, walls, fittings etc shall be protected by proper painters'
sheet and all paint spots and splashes be removed.
xv) The painting shall be carried out as follows:
a) All pipework and associated hangers, brackets, supports, sleeves,

etc shall be painted as follows :
1 - Degreasing coat
1 - Primer coat
1 - Undercoat
2 - Top coat hard matt finish paint
The first finishing coat shall be of a lighter shade of the final

finishing coat.
b) The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow stenciled in

black/white paint on the pipe.
c) All screw heads, wing nuts and other means of fixing shall be
painted at the time of installation and re-finished after the final
testing and commissioning is completed.
d) All manufactured items that are delivered in a painted condition

whether under or finish coated shall be prepared as mentioned
above and the re-painted as before.
e) All cut ends of galvanised steel or sheet metal work shall be

prepared as mentioned above and painted two coats of zinc
chromate paint.
f) All items that are considered liable to oil or grease splashes shall
be finished painted using two coats of the appropriate oil proof
paint.
MTS/231123/7 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Furnish and install, testing and commissioning of entire

gas piping in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code, Uniform Mechanical
Code, and NFPA 54 as applicable and as follow;
i) Install branch piping for fuel gas and connect to all fixtures, valves, cocks,
outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those furnished by the
Government or specified in other sections.
ii) Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools.
Pipe, except for plastic and glass, shall be reamed to full size after cutting.
iii) All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other works.
iv) Install valves with stem in horizontal position whenever possible. All valves
shall be easily accessible.
v) Install union and shut-off valve on pressure piping at connections to

equipment.
vi) Pipe Hangers, Supports and Accessories:
a. All piping shall be supported per of the National Standard Plumbing

Code, Chapter No. 8.
b. Shop Painting and Plating: Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and

accessories used for Pipe supports shall be shop coated with local
authority’s requirements. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and
accessories may be used with copper tubing.
c. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers:
1) Solid or split unplated cast iron.

2) All plates shall be provided with set screws.
3) Pipe Hangers: Height adjustable clevis type.
4) Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges: Steel.
5) Concrete Inserts: "Universal" or continuous slotted type.
6) Hanger Rods: Mild, low carbon steel, fully threaded or Threaded

at each end with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and
hanger and locking each in place.
7) Riser Clamps: Malleable iron or steel.

8) Rollers: Cast iron.
9) Hangers and supports utilized with insulated pipe and tubing shall
have 180 degree (min.) metal protection shield Centered on and welded
MTS/231123/8 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23
to the hanger and support. The shield shall be 100mm in length and be
16 gauge steel. The shield shall be sized for the insulation.
Vii) Install cast escutcheon with set screw at each wall, floor and ceiling
penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and
millwork.
viii) Penetrations:
a. Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls,
smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective
barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Completely fill and
seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stopping
materials.
b. Waterproofing: At floor penetrations, completely seal clearances

around the pipe and make watertight with sealant.
xii) Paint outside gas regulator piping, valves and appurtenances above ground
to match building exterior
xiii) All pipes shall be installed with a fall of 1:120 towards the meter or service.
If it is impossible to achieve the required slope, a syphon leg shall be
installed at a suitable location.
i) All pipes and fittings within building shall be with 100%-welded joints.
These joints shall be subjected to full circumferential 100% radiography
test complying with the requirements of local authorities. The results shall
be interpreted by qualified personnel from a laboratory accredited by
local authority.
ii) Full circumferential radiography tests in accordance with requirements of

Local Authorities shall be carried out to verify the pipe joints are sound.
The result of radiography test shall be endorsed and certified by a
Professional Engineer.
iii) All installation requiring progressive or final testing by any authorities

having jurisdiction over the installation shall be tested in the present of
employer. The Contractor shall make arrangement with the appropriate
authority and provide all equipment, instruments, and labour and test
records for conducting of these tests and at no additional cost. A copy of
the test record shall be given to the employer.
iv) The system shall be tested and commissioned to the satisfaction of the
employer to the completion of the project. The contractor shall plan to
ensure that the schedule of works allowed for the duration and facilities
needed for testing and commissioning.
v) All test results shall be submitted to employer for record and another set
will be bind in O&M manual submission.
MTS/231123/9 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 233413 AXIAL HVAC FANS
SECTION 233413 – AXIAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works shall cover the supply, design, delivery, installation,
testing and commissioning of all the necessary components of axial HVAC
fans including vibration isolation supports, flexible connections, silencers,
electrical control panels and wiring, interfacing works to IBMS and fire alarm
system.
1.1 STANDARDS
Fans shall deliver the specified flowrates and pressures when tested to B.S.
848 Pt. 1, latest edition or AMCA standard 210-74 or approved equivalent
standard. Sound Power Levels shall be measured in accordance with B.S.
848 Pt 2: latest edition or AMCA standard 300 or approved equivalent
standard to within one standard deviation of 3 dB. The design and
manufacture of fans and quality control standards used shall comply with B.S.
5750 Quality Systems or approved equivalent standard.
The totally enclosed, cage-induction type motor shall be rated for continuous
operation in ambient temperatures up to 60°C, performance and rating being
generally to B.S. 5000 Pt. 99: latest edition and IEC 34-1 or approved
equivalent standards with enclosure protection to IEC 34-5, IP54 or approved
equivalent standard. Insulation shall be to Class F specification of B.S. 2757
or approved equivalent standard. For smoke extract, purging, high
temperature duties, the motor shall be rated at 250°C for two hours
continuous operation. Insulation shall be Class H and shall include special
varnish impregnation or a particular type of wire enamel that has been shown
to have superior high temperature endurance. Single-phase motors are to be
of the Capacitor Start-and-Run type while three-phase units shall be suitable
for Direct-On-Line starting up to 4 kW and Star-Delta starting above 4 kW.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
The fans to be installed in the ducted systems shall be of axial-flow type, with
aerofoil shaped blades directly coupled to a purpose design motor fitted with
ball bearings of generous size to permit mounting of the fan in any position
through 360°. The fans shall have non-overloading characteristics. The
aerofoil blades shall be of die-cast aluminium-silicon alloy or PVC (Size 305
mm and smaller) and their pitch angle adjustable in their impeller hub. The
fan casing shall cover the impeller and motor, fitted with an external terminal
box and sight port which is closed with a rubber moulding. The casing and
MTS/233413/1(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
terminal box are to be hot dipped galvanised. External lubricators are to be

fitted where applicable.
Fans fitted with foot-mounted type motor on a pedestal frame welded within
the casing and with terminal box integral with the motor carcass, thus
obstructing airflow and increasing noise level are not acceptable. The fan
motor (not serving the smoke control fan) shall be of totally enclosed type
provided with class” F” insulation and IP55 protection grade.
Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball bearings (L-10,100,000
hrs life) with lubrication fittings.
Manufacturer recommended type anti-vibration isolators and flexible

connectors shall be provided to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the
adjacent duct sections and structure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
The fans shall be factory tested and assembled with motor and the
necessary accessories together prior delivering to site. The tenderer shall
produce the necessary testing certificates to prove the fans are correctly
balanced and tested to specifications in the factory prior packaging.
The package requirements for the fans shall be in an air-tight enclosure to

protect against humidity environment and be provided with the necessary
access for ease of fan removal (from the enclosure) and regular servicing.
3.2 BALANCING TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
i) Testing Apparatus:
Refer to Specification 23 25 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
ii) Regulation and Performance Test
iii) Fans
Fans shall be checked over to ensure filters are clean and all in position, and
that no air is being 'by-passed'.
MTS/233413/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
Each ventilation fan and each air handling unit shall be checked for RPM, air
volume, temperatures and pressure drops; these figures shall be recorded
and submitted in duplicate to the SO. Outside air dampers shall be balanced
to meet the design requirement to within 10% of the designed air quantity. For
modulating outside air dampers, balancing shall be carried out with the
dampers set in a fully open position to ensure that the peak designs outside
air quantities are achieved.
iv) Control Equipment
The contractor shall connect and test all the wiring and for the control and
feedback, where applicable, of the damper operation to the IBMS.
MTS/233413/3(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
SECTION 233416 – CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works shall cover the design, supply, delivery, installation,
testing and commissioning of all the necessary components of centrifugal
fans inclusive of vibration isolation supports, flexible connections, silencers,
electrical control panels and wiring, interfacing to IBMS and Fire alarm
system.
1.1 STANDARDS
The fan provided shall be compatible with the air to be handled and suitable
for operations up to 60°C ambient temperature. Fan performance shall be
tested in accordance with BS 848 Pt 1, latest edition or approved equivalent
standard.
Impeller shall be manufactured from mild steel and be fitted to the fan shaft by
a taper bush, parallel key and keyway. The blades shall be straight backward
inclined or backward curved, flanged and rivetted/plug welded to the backplate
and shroud. Impellers shall be dynamically balanced to ISO 1940: latest
edition and BS 5265 Grade G6.3 or approved equivalent standard.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Fan casing shall be of mild sheet steel construction, with the scroll plate seam
welded to the volute sides. Discharge shall be flanged and bolting holes
provided. Side plates shall be of mild steel fabricated construction bolted to
permit assembly to any standard discharge angle. A venturi shaped inlet shall
be provided and an inlet spigot fitted. Inspection door shall also be provided.
Silencers shall be provided where indicated in the tender drawings. Anti-

vibration isolators shall be of the floor mounting type offering over 90%
isolation efficiencies at the operating speed. Non-skid ribbed pads/mats shall
be attached to the base of such isolators. Flexible connectors of suitable
materials shall be used to minimise vibration and noise transmission to
adjacent equipment/duct sections and areas.
Bearings shall be Self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings of
L-10,100,000 hrs life with lubrication fittings. The motor shall be totally
enclosed fan cooled type with class “F” insulation and IP55 protection.
MTS/233416/1(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Motor manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions

shall be submitted prior to commissioning of the fan.
Motor and steel frame attached to the unit shall be kept out of contact with
fumes which may give rise to corrosion formation. In mildly corrosive
environment, metal surfaces of motor and steel frame shall be given a
protective coating of chlorinated rubber paint. The fan unit shall be mounted
away from direct radiant heat which might cause excessive heating of the
casing. Prior to installation, the manufacturer's installation and commissioning
instructions shall be submitted for reference.
The contractor shall provide safety guards to the pulleys and belts to
completely provide accidental contact from external as well as meeting the
local safety standards.
ii) Regulation and Performance Test
iii) Fans
Fans shall be checked over to ensure filters are clean and all in position, and
that no air is being 'by-passed'.
Each ventilation fan and each air handling unit shall be checked for RPM, air
volume, temperatures and pressure drops; these figures shall be recorded
and submitted in duplicate to the Employer. Outside air dampers shall be
balanced to meet the design requirement to within 10% of the designed air
quantity. For modulating outside air dampers, balancing shall be carried out
with the dampers set in a fully open position to ensure that the peak designs
outside air quantities are achieved.
iv) Control Equipment
The contractor shall connect and test the interfacing provision with IBMS
system and fire alarm system.
MTS/233416/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 233516 SMOKE VENTING SYSTEM
SECTION 233516 – SMOKE VENTING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
The work to be performed under this contract comprises the submission of

design to local authority for approval, design, supply, delivery, installation,
testing & commissioning of the engineered smoke ventilator windows system
complete with heavy duty chain type actuators, controllers, master control
panels, zone control panels, repeater panel, fire alarm interface panels, UPS
power supply complete with batteries, cables and cable supports and
associated works detailed in this specification, as shown in drawings and
submission to local authority for approval and submission of CFD analysis
report.
- Heavy Duty Chain Type Actuators which provide minimum 800mm

stroke length
- Master Multi zones Smoke ventilator Control Panels and Power units
- Break Glass, Fire Man Override Switches and Building addressable Fire
Alarm system interfacing
- Sub control panels and wiring works to open-able window panels
indicated in Architecture drawings, maintenance access and platform to
test and inspect the system regularly
- Necessary UPS and Battery backup power supply for 72 hours of entire
system operation
- Only one point of electrical power supply will be provided inside the
control room and the contractor shall supply and install sub-distribution of
electrical power as required by proposed smoke ventilation system.
- All necessary electrical and controls associated with the above as
specified.
1.1 DESIGN AND COMPLIANCE
i) Engineered smoke ventilator system shall be designed to comply

with NFPA Fire Code or equivalent international standards with the
approval of local Fire Safety Authority.
ii) Alternatively, the engineered smoke ventilator system can also be

designed based on Fire Performance Engineering with the approval
of local Fire Safety Authority.
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
The following standards are adopted for the design of smoke ventilator
system:
- NFPA 204 Standard for Smoke and Heat Venting (latest edition)
MTS/233516/1 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
- NFPA 92B Guide of Smoke Management Systems in Mall, Atria and

Large Areas (latest edition)
- NFPA 92A Recommended Practice for Smoke Control System (latest

edition)
- Building Research Establishment Report BR258 - “Design Approaches for

Smoke Control in Atrium Buildings (latest edition).
- Building Research Establishment Report BR186 - “Design Principles for

Smoke Ventilation in Enclosed Shopping Centers (latest edition).
- Current British Standards or Codes of Practice
- Current Applicable Pakistan Standard or Codes of Practice
1.3 FIRE PERFORMANCE ENGINEERING
If the method of Fire Performance Engineering is applied, the following

general design criteria shall be met:
- The prime criterion of smoke control system shall be to protect lives

during the fire.
- The supplemental criterion of smoke control system shall be to minimize

the damage of building properties
1.4 BASIC DESIGN CRITERIA
For any design, the following design parameters shall be established:
- Layout of smoke contained areas

- Type of detector and specific characteristics(if any)
- A design interval time following detection for maintaining a clear layer
- Total vent area per zone
- Distribution of individual vents/ open able windows
- An air inlet area (if applicable)
1.5 QUALIFICATION FOR CONTRACTING
i) Quality Management System Complying to BS EN ISO 9001:2000
The manufacturer of the engineered smoke control system equipment

shall be an ISO 9001 certified firm with the BSI for the scope of
registration:
- The Design and Manufacture of Air and Fire Ventilation Equipment,

Smoke Control Equipment, Electrical and Electro Pneumatic Control
Equipment, Dampers, actuators, Louvers and Air Moving Equipment
MTS/233516/2 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
- The Design, Installation and Commissioning of Smoke Extract

Systems, Smoke Control Systems, Smoke venting Systems,
Natural Ventilations Systems, Powered Ventilations Systems and
Louvre Systems. Certificate of Registration shall be submitted for
review.
ii) The engineered smoke control system shall be designed, supplied and
commissioned entirely by an established specialist who has to provide
evidence of job references in smoke control projects in the past 10 years.
iii) All the selections of the basic design parameters shall not interfere with
the architectural design concept and shall get the concurrence from the
principal consultant of the terminal building.
iv) Both the positions and quantities of the smoke control/ open able window
complete with actuators on the tender drawings must be adhered to unless
tenderers can demonstrate a workable design scheme at the time of tender
submission through a Computational Fluid Dynamics Simulation report.
Upon award, any additional quantities are deemed to be included in the
contract without any additional costs to the Employer.
v) The tenderer shall submit their Smoke Control Strategy Reports and CFD
analysis report including the following design information:
 fire sizes used for design calculations

 smoke flow diagrams for all fire scenarios
 smoke control equipment/ actuator and open abler window
panels location
 zoning schematic and control equipment locations
 power requirements and details for the system
 wiring routings on plans
 installation details of the smoke control equipment/ actuators
 design parameters and objectives
 evacuation plans
vi) For areas where alternative solution is required to resolve site or

installation restrictions, the specialist shall submit a Fire Safety Engineering
Design Brief with the following contents:
 project scope
 performance based issue to be addressed
 building characteristics
 occupant characteristics
 fire hazards / fire scenarios
 trial designs
 method of evaluation
 design parameter
 notes of discussion / consultations
MTS/233516/3 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
 references
 credentials and endorsement of fire safety engineer
Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) simulation and calculation should

also be submitted for the following purpose:
i. for verification of the effectiveness of design in a fire
scenario.
ii. to justify the empirical calculations when there are
limitations.
iii. for submission to authority
The programme(s) used must have a proven track record in the design of
smoke control system similar in performance. Lists of CFD project
references in Asia for the last 5 years and CFD simulation catalogues
shall be submitted with the tender for assessment and approval. Project
references are to be furnished in the tender bid.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MASTER MULTIZONE CONTROL PANEL
i) General Description
The master control panel shall include Input and out/ put interface modules for
interfacing with building addressable fire alarm system, break glass call points,
72 hour battery back up on mains failure with Sealed Lead Acid Batteries. It
shall be of IP65 steel enclosure. It shall consist of Auto cut off function to
protect batteries. Relays to provide volt free fault indications to BMS system
and open circuit cable detection function (issues a coded fault signal).
Auto-Reset Test –key switch at front panel shall be provided to enables the
system to be reset after smoke activation, activation by building fire alarm
system or testing of the opening & closing of all actuators/vents connected.
Zone controller for each zone shall be provided with Input for:
 Break glass call points
 Smoke detectors and building Fire Alarm volt free contacts
 Fire man override switches
 Alternatively, a zone can be set as a slave to open or close when any

master zone is triggered
The master control panel shall be housed at 4th floor automatic smoke
ventilator control room and the system must be fully flexible, re-configurable
and user friendly control system that has been optimized and tested for fail-
MTS/233516/4 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
safe operation with built in mechanical and electrical diagnostics. A LCD

screen must be incorporated for display of system status and settings,
diagnostics and fault reporting and parameter setting, capable to display at
least 80 characters.
Different fault warning lamps must be provided for individual equipment; eg.
Fire Signal (red), Control Fault (amber), Vent Fault (amber), Battery fault (red),
charger fault (red) and Supply Healthy (green).
ii) System Design Flexibility & Re-configurability
If the system requires a change to the zoning, the cause and effect mapping,
prioritizing of events, environmental control parameters, and indeed an
extension to the plant - the system must be easily re-configured using a
windows based (or similar) tool that requires no knowledge of computer
programming. The addition of further fireman override units should be simply
achieved with minimal wiring via a network.
iii) System Diagnostics
Any mechanical, electrical or electronic faults in the ventilator should result in

a local visible indication on the underside to easily identify the faulty ventilator.
Any such fault should trigger an alarm at the control panel to alert the occupier.
The exact fault and location should be displayed on a display and logged in an
event log. An optional MODEM interface should enable this fault information to
be relayed off-site to a Service Company etc.
iv) Safety
The control system shall incorporate the following extensive safety features:
- This energy store should be continually charged. It shall provide 72

hours operation of entire system after main incoming power is lost. If this
charging input is lost the battery unit in each ventilator should be able to
operate the motor for about 70 open / close cycles. If this charging input
is lost an alarm should be raised at the main control panels and FCC
room via building addressable fire alarm system.
- If communication to the window actuator is lost the window actuator

should signal an error and fail-safe within a set time limit of 30 seconds.
It should either fail-safe close or open depending on the ventilator set up.
- Thermal fusible devices should be incorporated into the main controls in

such a way as to force a pre-determined fail-safe operation of the
ventilators before the controls melt / heat up and react in an un-
predictable manner.
MTS/233516/5 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
- Any microprocessors within the system should be kept healthy by a

watchdog device. This should force an appropriate reset upon any
deviation from the healthy operation.
v) Test Certification
- The control system should have been subjected to exhaustive tests to

prove the mechanical and electrical performance that the system has
been designed to meet. Full BS7346 testing should have been
successfully completed that covers such areas as lifecycle tests, fire
tests, heat rise tests, and weathering tests. Soak tests should be carried
out on the local energy source to provide long term confidence. The
system should be designed and tested to meet the relevant EC
Directives - in particularly the Low Voltage (LVD) and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC).
2.2 WINDOW ACTUATORS
The actuators shall be heavy duty type with a powerful 400N thrust and
strong, double link stainless steel chain ideal for heavy windows or windows
requiring large opening for smoke control or natural ventilation. The
protection class of the actuator shall not be less than IP20. Opening or
closing time of the window shall not be longer than 20 mm per second. It
shall have very high speed and noiseless operation. It shall provide safe
operation with push button. It shall be operated with 24V DC supply from
main control panel with minimum 800 mm stroke.
The operation shall be by polarity inversion and shall be capable of parallel

connection. End stroke position signal (fully opened/ fully closed) shall be
provided and it shall reflect at Main Multi zone Control Panel at control room.
Electronic safety stop and Micro switches shall be provided as Limit Stop.
Reset after activation by building fire alarm system shall be manually done at
master control panel by mean of key switches. The reset manually at window
actuators is not acceptable.
2.3 AUTOMATIC SMOKE VENTILATOR WINDOWS
i) Design Requirements
The single or double flap smoke ventilator shall be designed to be

suitable for high quality commercial and public buildings, where both
external and internal appearances of all major elements are important. It
shall be rated non-combustible as defined in latest edition of BS476 Part
4: 19. It shall also be fully compliant with latest edition of BS EN 12101-2
designed, manufactured and commissioned solely by an ISO 9001
registered firm.
The unit shall be supplied with a rigidly clamped aluminium outer frame,
with flanges suitable for fixing into prepared openings. The outer frame
MTS/233516/6 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
shall be sealed with moulded silicone gaskets and secured with

Monobolts. The inner frame shall be formed from mitred extrusions and
the joints weather sealed with air curing silicone mastic. External
surfaces of all extrusions shall be finished in Polyester Powder in the
standard RAL range with Project Architect approved colour finishing. All
aluminium extrusions are of Grade 5251 H22 BS 1470.
The opaque flap shall be constructed of 1.2mm thick single wall

aluminium. These arrangements are to be incorporated nylon pile
carrier and 14mm deep pile weatherseal, silicone treated to repel water.
Each window is to be operated by a 24 VDC operated heavy duty

stainless steel chain type actuator which shall prevent the windows from
closing due to severe wind pressure during activation and shall ensure
fail-safe operations.
Please refer to Architectural specification for further detail of the window

panels, frames, hinges, finishing colour and type of glass to be used.
ii) Performance requirements and classification
The unit must be fail-safe and conformed to the following specifications:

a. BS EN 12101 Part 2: latest edition, Clause 7.1.1
Reliability Classification
b. BS EN 12101 Part 2: latest edition, Clause 7.1.2
Reliability Performance
i. Reliability / Accelerated life cycle tested to 30,000
operations which gives 1-year guarantee
coverage.
c. BS EN 12101 Part 2: latest edition, Clause 7.4 Wind load
d. BS EN 12101 Part 2: latest edition, Clause 7.5
Resistance to heat
i) Tested to 600oC without failing i.e. still
maintaining structural integrity.
iii) Evaluation of conformity
The compliance of smoke ventilator windows system with the

requirements of this specification shall be demonstrated by
 Type testing certification

 Factory production control (FPC) compliance
iv) Identification / Marking
The smoke ventilator windows and actuators shall be marked with the
following:
MTS/233516/7 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
 The name or trade mark of the supplier an/or

manufacturer; and
 The type and model; and
 The year of manufacture; and
 Technical characteristics of the external energy supply
(e.g. power, current, voltage, pressure); Temperature of
the thermal initiation device (if fitted); and
 The aerodynamic free area in square meters; and
 The classes for wind load, snow load, low ambient
temperature, reliability and heat exposure temperature;
and
 The number and year of this European Standard, i.e.
EN12101-2: latest edition.
 Suitable for wall mounting with wind sensitive control
system only
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
i) Installation information
The Installation, testing and commissioning of the entire system shall be

carried out by full trained and qualified personnel. The supplier shall provide
appropriate installation information, which shall include the following:
 fixing information
 Connection information to external services (e.g. electrical
system and interfacing with building fire alarm system).
ii) Maintenance information
The contractor shall provide comprehensive DLP maintenance service

for 1 year and all servicing activities shall be witnessed by Employer
and the servicing records and check list shall be submitted to Employer.
The appropriate maintenance information for the smoke ventilator
windows, control panels and actuators shall be provided for
subsequence maintenance program by Employer, which shall include
but not limiting to the following:
 inspection and maintenance procedure;

 recommended frequency of operational checks;
 recommended checks for the effects of electrical connections.
 recommended checks for the effects of chain movement.
 recommended checks for the Master Multi zones control panels.
 recommended checks for the battery power.
 recommended checks for the individual zone controller function.
MTS/233516/8 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 233616 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS
SECTION 233616 – VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
testing and commissioning of all the necessary components of the Variable
Air Volume Units. The Variable Air Volume Units are serving summer cooling
and winter heating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BOX CONSTRUCTION
The VAV box shall be of pressure independent type complete with factory
mounted DDC control, protective shroud to enclose the control components,
built-in flow sensor, air regulation damper, discharge sound attenuator, a
rectangular flanged outlet or multiple outlet adaptor, volume setting dials and
an access panel. The box shall be factory assembled, calibrated and tested.
The DDC controllers and space temperature sensors shall be able to serve
both cooling and heating purpose. They shall be provided with 2 different
mode of operation such as summer mode and winter mode. Each season
mode shall have occupied and unoccupied mode. The controller shall be
addressable and networked to BMS for AHU airflow control and for centralized
monitoring, adjustment and control. The electrical supply comprising of cable,
truncking/conduit, transformer etc to the VAV box motorised damper and DDC
controller shall be provided by the contractor. The supply for the DDC
controller shall not be looped together with other devices and it shall be taken
from serving AHU power supply panel.
The casing shall be of at least 22 gauge thick galvanized steel and fully
insulated inside and surface coated to prevent erosion. It shall be able to
supply cooled air or hot air and shall resist to sudden change of the supply air
temperature. The discharge sound attentuator shall be of same construction
as casing regarding material and insulation. The internal and external
insulation shall be accordance with the Section 233113 Metal Duct.
The air regulation damper shall be of heavy gauge metal construction, with its
shaft rotating in stainless steel self-lubricating bearings. The damper shall
close against a neoprene seal to prevent air leakage during shut-off. In the
fully closed position, air leakage rate shall be as per VDI 3803/DIN24-194
class II. The access panel shall be of the quick opening type to give easy and
quick access to the volume regulator.
One thermostat shall be provided for each box and it shall be able to identify
the mode of operation such as summer or winter. The thermostat shall be
MTS/233616/1 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
capable of site recalibration and maintain the desired room temperature within
+ 1 oC. An external occupancy switch shall be provided for VAV boxes
installed in the non open-plan areas to force the controller into Unoccupied
Mode to set the damper for minimum flow.
Integral step down transformer shall be provided for each box to provide
proper power supply for the control system/components.
The tubing for the cross flow shall be hidden as to prevent loose connection or
improper connection during site installation. Access door shall be provided.
The flow sensor shall either be pressure differential type or electronic hot wire
type. The sensor shall measure the actual flowrate to an accuracy of + 15%.
The static pressure drop across the box shall not exceed 35 Pa at the design
flow rate. The sound power level in each octave band 2 through 6 (ie at
centre frequency 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, 2000 Hz) when measure
at 125 Pa static pressure across the terminal unit shall not exceed:
a. casing radiated sound - 40 dB(A)

b. discharge sound - 40 dB(A)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VAV BOX PERFORMANCE TEST
All VAV boxes shall be calibrated, tested and certified to satisfy the following
requirements before delivery to site:
a Air Flow Accuracy
Within + 15% of the set airflow to establish the accuracy of the controller after
it was calibrated to the characteristic of the flow sensor.
b Pressure Independent Test
At minimum and maximum design airflow, the controller shall maintain same
flow accuracy at 3 different static pressure settings.
c Leakage Test
Within + 2% of rated airflow when overriding the box to fully closed damper
position.
d Damper Actuator Functional Test
Actuator shall rotate at clockwise and anti-clockwise directions in the load

testing on the actuator handle to simulate an actual static pressure acting on
the damper.
MTS/233616/2 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
3.2 INSTALLATION
The VAV box & space temperature sensors locations and its rated capacity
(maximum air flow/ current set air flow) shall be shown on HVAC drawing.
The VAV box shall not be located directly above the walls, partitions, basin
counters, escalators, elevators, staircases and other equipments. The ceiling
access panels and other mean of access shall be provided for calibration
and maintenance.
All VAV boxes under same serving AHU shall be group together in a network
under the name of AHU by graphical interface, so as identification is easier
and group reset, on and off can be done quickly.
The electrical wiring works shall comply with electrical specifications issued
to this project.
Each VAV box shall be tested for interfacing with BMS at fully open, fully
closed, occupied and unoccupied, summer or winter mode. The actual air
flow across the VAV box shall be measured and recorded in the testing
forms. All test records shall be submitted to Employer for verification and
approval.
MTS/233616/3 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
SECTION 235233 HOT WATER BOILER
SECTION 235233 – HOT WATER BOILER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of work shall cover all regardless of whether items mentioned
below are shown or not shown on the drawings and schedule.
It shall include supply, deliver, install and testing & commission of 2
numbers of each with minimum capacity of 1410kW direct fired hot water
boilers dual burners complete with, circulation pumps, feed water treatment
system, feed water tanks and heater, feed water pumps, water softener
system, blow down system, deaerators, condensate return unit complete
with small pump and tank, condensate drain, expansion tanks, safety
devise, heat exchangers, fuel piping and fully automatic control system.
Provisions shall be provided to interface and integrate with chiller plant
management and control systems. Extent of hot water boiler is indicated by
requirements of this section. Types of hot water boilers specified in this
section include the following:
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Pakistan Building and Industrial Code

Boilers shall comply with all relative sections of the latest edition.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Compliance

The boiler shall be designed, constructed, and hydrostatically tested in
accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code requirements.
National Testing Approval

The boiler shall be wired in accordance with the rules of the National
Electric Code and local approved standard. All electrical equipment shall be
in conformity with the Underwriter's Laboratories' requirements.
The complete boiler–burner package shall be approved by Underwriter's
Laboratories and shall bear a UL label.
The boiler shall be built to comply with the following insurances

 Factory Mutual,
 Industrial Risk
 Insurers, ASME CSD–1
MST/235233/1(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
1.2 SUBMITTAL
Product Data
Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected model clearly indicated, weights (shipping, installed, and operating),
furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.
Submittal Drawings
Submit manufacturer drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, and
required clearances for installation, operation, maintenance and methods of
assembly of components.
Wiring Diagrams
Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required for
final installation of hot water boilers and controls. Clearly differentiate between
portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
The ladder type wiring diagram shall include all internal unit wiring, external
connections, safety devises and power supply requirements. The manufacturer
shall supply a copy of the authorized inspection report, to the contractor, upon
completion of manufacturing and prior to shipment of the boilers.
Maintenance Data
Manufacturer shall submit maintenance/operational manuals, and parts list for
each hot water boiler, circulation pump, heat exchangers, control, and
accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include current
service/repair/overhaul manuals. Furnish to owner any updated or newly
released related materials when available during the first five years of service.
1.3 BOILER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Provide five (5) bound final installation, training, operation, maintenance and
repair manuals to be turned over to the Owner's Representative and approved
for content by the Engineer prior to acceptance of substantial completion.
Manuals provided must be of sufficient detail to enable maintenance staff to
install, calibrate, train, operate, maintain service and repair every system,
subsystem, and/or piece of equipment installed on or as part of this contract.
Manual must contain the followings;
 Project Title
 Project number
 Location
 Dates of submittals
MST/235233/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
 Names of Engineers, Contractors, and Contractor's Sub-contractors

 Phone numbers and addresses for Contractor and Sub-contractors
 An Equipment Index that includes vendor’s name, address, and
telephone number for all equipment purchased on the project.
 Emergency instructions with phone numbers and names of contact
persons on warranty items
All manuals in binders shall be original copies provided by the manufacturer. At

minimum these binders must include:
 Installation manuals
 Calibration manuals
 Training manuals
 Operation manuals
 Service Manual and Repair manuals
 Parts list, Wire list
 Reviewed and submittals records.
 Certification that owner is to receive all published service, repair and
overhaul manuals by being placed on the current mailing list. Submit
copies of all inspection forms, findings and guarantee certificates.
 Copies of all manufacturers' warranties as filed for all equipment
provided and/ or installed.
Manuals
Bound in hard cover three (3) ring (D-type) binder, 1", 1.5" or 2" maximum,
white vinyl, presentation type with clear vinyl view cover on front, back and
spine and with pockets on front and back. Contents shall be indexed in CSI
format, tabbed (4,5,8 or 16th cut), with no more than 80% binder fill. All drawing
size shall be A1 and in binder shall be folded A4 size and shall be hole
punched and reinforcements added. Top of all drawings shall be at top or spine
side of the manual. Complete drawings must be viewed without opening rings.
If the binder includes manuals from any one vendor covering several different
model numbers, the model used on the project must be highlighted.
Required Submittals
The following sample chart is supplied for the benefit of the Employer, Engineer
and Contractors to assure a complete submission of required information. It is a
one reference listing of documents required by the specifications under this
section.
ITEM SHOP DWG. O&M PARTS LIST CERTIFICATION

MANUAL
Boiler* x x x x
*Provide wiring diagrams
MST/235233/3(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.0 GENERAL
The boiler shall be a water tube type hot water boiler with all steel
membrane walls.
The boiler shall be a three pass type boiler mounted on a heavy duty steel
frame. The boiler shall have an integral forced draft burners and burner
controls. The boiler shall be a product of approved manufacturers supported
by local service agent. It shall be with dual burner suitable to operate with oil
and gas type available at project location.
A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
 AESYS Technologies, Inc.
 Ajax Boiler, Inc.
 Burnham Commercial
 Cleaver-Brooks, Inc.
 Easco Boiler Corporation
 Johnston Boiler Company
 Miura Boiler
 Vapor Power International LLC
B. COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
USA, WESTERN EUROPE AND JAPAN
2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

The boiler shall be designed in accordance with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Code Section IV.
The boiler shall be designed for minimum 150 psig and shall be able to
provide load side supply hot water temperature at 60°C, and the return
water temperature at 55 °C. The minimum operating temperature of the
boiler shall be 77°C.
Each boiler shall be designed for a minimum output capacity of 1410 kW

(144 bhp) with efficiency not less than 90%.
The feed water tank and feed pump shown on drawing is indicative only.
The contractor shall counter check and sizes the required feed water tank,
feed pump, heat exchangers and boiler circulation pumps complete with
fully automatic control system interfaced with IBMS system and chiller plant
management system. Detail sizing and selection of boilers, circulation
pumps, feed water tank, feed water pumps and feed water treatment
system shall be submitted to Employer for approval prior to procurement
and delivery to site.
The maximum sound level shall not exceed 75 dBA measured 1 meter in
front of the boiler.
MST/235233/4(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
2.2 PRODUCT DESIGN
2.2.1 Pressure Vessel

The upper drum shall have a minimum 508mm OD, manufactured from SA–
53 Gr. B seamless pipe or from approved equivalent, with a minimum wall
thickness of 9.6mm.
The lower drum shall have a minimum 219mm OD, manufactured from SA–
53 Gr. B seamless pipe or from approved equivalent, with a minimum wall
thickness of 8.5mm.
The generating tubes shall be 50mm OD, manufactured from SA–178 Gr. or
from approved equivalent Tubing with a minimum wall thickness of 25mm.
The boiler shall have two down comers, located at the rear of the boiler, and
be totally insulated from the generating tubes. These shall be a minimum of
65mm OD, manufactured from SA–178 Gr or from approved equivalent
tubing with a minimum wall thickness of 3mm.
The upper drum shall have an inspection opening, located at the rear of the
unit, to allow internal inspection, and shall be a minimum of
100mmx150mm.
The lower drum shall have inspection openings, located at the front of the
unit, to allow internal inspection, and shall be a minimum of recommended
by manufacturer.
The boiler shall have inspection openings in the convection area.
The hot water outlet shall be located on the top centerline of the boiler and
the return water connection shall be located at the rear of the lower drum.
The design of the boiler shall provide jet induced circulation which shall mix
the return water and the hot water within the boiler.
A dip tube shall be included as an integral part of the hot water outlet. An air
vent tapping shall be located on the top centerline of the boiler for
connection to an expansion tank.
A 100mm Dia" drain connection with isolation valve shall be located in the
lower drum.
2.2.2 Refractory
Refractory shall be limited to the furnace floor to insulate the lower drum,
and to the burner throat tile. High temperature insulation shall be installed
on the front wall of the furnace.
2.2.3 Insulation and Casing

The boiler insulation shall be a minimum of 50mm fiberglass, and shall
cover the entire pressure vessel. The insulation shall be covered with a
corrugated metal lagging.
The metal lagging and insulation shall be arranged for easy removal and
installation if required.
MST/235233/5(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
The front head (windbox) shall be attached with a davit arm, gasket sealed,
and bolted. The front head shall swing open to provide full access to the
furnace chamber and burner throat tile.
Observation ports shall be provided at each end of the boiler for visual
inspection of the pilot and main flame conditions. Two lifting eyes shall be
located on top of the boiler. The exhaust gases shall vent at the rear of the
boiler, on the top centerline.
The water column shall be the probe type and shall be located on the top
centerline of the boiler. It shall be wired into the burner control circuit
preventing burner operation if the boiler water level falls below the
designated safe level.
A pressure gauge and a temperature gauge shall be located at the front end
of the boiler.
Water relief valves shall be provided of a size and type to comply with
ASME Code requirements. The relief valve set pressure shall be as
recommended by boiler manufacturer with taking into consideration of field
piping losses and available distribution pump’s pressure.
A high limit temperature control shall be provided. It shall be a manual reset
type and shall be wired to prevent burner operation and lockout if excessive
water temperature occurs.
An operating limit control shall be provided. It shall be wired to provide on–
off control of the burner at operating set points. The sensing element shall
be located adjacent to the outlet connection.
A firing rate control shall be provided. It shall control the firing rate of the
burner based on the boiler load. The sensing element shall be located
adjacent to the outlet connection.
The hot water circulating pump and associated heat exchangers with
capacity shown in the drawing shall be mounted between the supply and
return connections. This pump will blend the supply and the system return
water. It will ensure a minimum continuous circulation at all times to a level
of ten boiler water changes per hour. A stack thermometer shall be shipped
loose for field installation.
2.2.4 Soot Cleaning

Soot washer lances shall be provided in the convection area of the boiler
measuring the full length of the pressure vessel.
Each lance shall be provided with a shutoff valve and the assembly shall be
capable of rotating 360 degrees. This shall ensure complete washing of the
convection zone while the boiler is operating in the low fire mode.
Soot washer troughs shall be provided at the bottom of the boiler. These
shall be furnished for each convection side and shall measure the full length
of the boiler.
The soot washer troughs shall be provided with 50mm drain connections at
the rear of the boiler, and shall have inspection/ cleanout openings at the
front of the boiler.
MST/235233/6(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
2.3 BURNER DESIGN
GENERAL
The burner shall be integral to the front head (windbox). All air for
combustion shall be supplied by a forced draft blower mounted in the front
head (windbox), above the burner, to minimize noise and vibration level.
The blower motor shall be an open drip proof type with a minimum service
factor of 1.15.
The impeller shall be an enclosed centrifugal fan type, properly balanced,
and directly connected to the blower motor shaft. The combustion air
damper shall be integral to the front head (windbox) and shall be operated
by a single damper motor. The burner shall remain in the low fire position
during ignition and until main flame has been established.
2.3.1 Burner Design – Gas and Oil

The burner shall be the high radiant multi–port type for gas and shall be the
pressure atomizing for oil. The burner must be approved for operation with
either gas or commercial grade oil available at project location.
The burner shall operate on the low–high–low principle, and must return to
the low fire position prior to ignition. The burner shall remain in the low fire
position during ignition and until main flame has been proven.
Automatic electric ignition of the premix gas pilot shall be furnished. An
electric scanner, of the UV principle, shall monitor the pilot, preventing the
primary fuel valve from opening until the pilot flame has been established.
The single combustion air damper motor shall operate the low and high fire
oil valves and the gas butterfly valve. The damper motor shall regulate the
fire according to system demand in response to the firing rate control.
2.3.2 Natural Gas Main Train

The gas burner piping shall include a primary gas shutoff valve. It shall be
controlled by the programming relay to start or stop the burner and to close
automatically in the event of power failure, flame failure, or a low water
condition.
A manual shutoff valve shall be located ahead of the primary gas valve.
A plugged leakage test connection and a second manual shutoff valve shall
be provided as a means for a tightness check of the primary shutoff valve.
A gas pressure regulator shall be factory mounted and piped for pressure
regulation to the burner.
MST/235233/7(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
2.3.3 Gas Train Components – Standard (UL)

The primary gas shutoff valve shall be motorized with a proof of closure
switch. A second gas safety shutoff valve and an additional plugged
leakage test cock shall be provided. High and low gas pressure switches
shall be provided.
2.3.4 Gas Train Components – Factory Mutual Insurance (FM)

switch. A second gas safety shutoff valve and an additional plugged
leakage test cock shall be provided. High and low gas pressure switches
shall be provided.
2.3.5 Gas Train Components – Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI)

switch. A second gas motorized shutoff valve and an additional plugged
leakage test cock shall be provided. A vent valve shall be located between
the primary and secondary gas shutoff valves. High and low gas pressure
switches shall be provided.
2.3.6 Natural Gas Pilot Train

A pilot gas pressure regulator shall be factory mounted and piped for
pressure regulation of the pilot gas to the burner. The pilot gas train shall
include a safety shutoff valve. It shall be controlled by the programming
relay to start the burner. A manual shutoff valve shall be located ahead of
the pilot gas pressure regulator.
2.3.7 Oil System

An oil pump shall be provided. The oil pump, integral with the burner, shall
include a built–in relief valve and self–cleaning strainer.
The oil pump shall be belt driven from the blower motor.
The fuel oil system shall include supply and return tubing to a terminal
block, an oil pressure gauge, shutoff cock, and four solenoid oil shutoff
valves. These items shall be factory mounted and piped on the front head
(windbox).
MST/235233/8(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
2.4 BURNER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
2.4.1 Control Panels

The control panel shall be a NEMA 1 rated panel and have a key lock.
The control panel shall be mounted on the front head of the boiler and shall
be conveniently located for the boiler operator.
The panel shall contain the blower motor starter, control circuit fuses, control
circuit transformer, and control switches. A damper selector switch shall be
provided to permit selection of automatic or manual selection of low or high
firing.
A terminal board shall be provided to which all wires entering or leaving the
panel shall be connected.
The panel shall include four indicating lights to show operating conditions of:
red = low water; red = flame failure; white = load demand; and white = fuel
valve open. The lights and switches shall be located on the panel switch
ledge.
The panel shall include a low fire hold timer wired to hold the boiler in a low
firing mode, for a minimum of ten minutes, each time the boiler cycles on.
This low fire hold timer ensures gradual boiler warm–up.
All electrical service connections shall be made to an electrical entrance box
to be mounted on the side of the boiler which can be accessible easily.
All electrical wiring shall be oil, heat, and moisture resistant and shall be
number coded.
2.4.2 Combustion Safeguard Control

A combustion safeguard control (program relay) shall be provided to control
ignition, starting, and stopping of the burner. It shall provide pre-combustion
and post-combustion purge periods and shall stop burner operation in the
event of ignition, pilot, or main flame failure. Trial for ignition shall be limited
to 10 seconds.
The boiler shall be provided with a combustion safeguard controller that
provides technology and functions equal to the Cleaver Brooks Model
CB100.
The combustion safeguard control shall be microprocessor based, with self–
diagnostics, non–volatile memory, and a message center with a vocabulary
of 42 different messages. Messages shall scroll across an alpha–numeric
display and provide sequence status and flame failure mode information.
The combustion safeguard control shall have a fixed operating sequence
incapable of being manually altered. The sequence shall include start, pre–
purge, pilot and main fuel ignition run, and post–purge cycles.
MST/235233/9(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
The controller shall be the non–recycle type for maximum safety that will
shut down the burner and indicate as a minimum the following trip functions:
pilot failure, main flame failure, high and low fire proving switch faults,
running interlocks open, false flame signal, and fuel valve open (when proof
of closure switch is furnished).
The controller shall have a test/run switch. It will allow interruptions to
sequence just after pre–purge, during pilot ignition trial, and during run
cycles, for adjustments to firing rate motor, damper linkages, and pilot flame
for turndown tests.
The controller shall also have the following functions: display history of
operating hours and totals of completed on–off cycles; provide a constant
flame signal strength read–out; and have provisions for remote display
capability.
MST/235233/10(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.0 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

The pressure vessel shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with ASME
requirements.
The boiler shall be test fired by the manufactured, prior to shipment, to verify
proper and safe operation.
The test shall simulate full- and part-load conditions to check performance
(capacity and energy consumption), noise, vibration and operating/safety
controls. The Engineer and Employer's Representative shall be notified to
review the installation and witness the factory test. The Employer will witness
testing only during normal working hours. All expenses for this test shall be
covered by contractor and no further claims to Employer shall be entertained.
The vendor shall submit for approval before scheduling the testing procedures
including the following;
 Data sheets showing the acceptable maximum/ minimum points as well

as the anticipated values.
 The test load points with guaranteed performance
 Test equipment
 Overall schedule
 Test stand layout
 Activity schedule
 Vibration, high pressure cutoff and safety device testing methods
Unless the test results are in complete conformance with the requirements
stated herein, the Employer will not accept the boilers or authorize the boilers to
be shipped from the factory.
If the equipment fails to perform within allowable specified tolerances, the

manufacturer/ contractor may make necessary revisions to the equipment and
retest as required. If necessary to extend the testing period by additional
day(s), and/or make return trip(s) to the test site, the manufacturer/ contractor
shall cover all expenses incurred by the Employer and/or his representative to
witness the retest. No further claims to Employer shall be entertained for retest.
3.1 Final Testing Report

Provide to the Employer's representative and the Consulting Engineer a
factory-certified test report, certifying that the proposed boiler sets perform as
specified.
11
DIVISION23: HVAC
3.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING
Handle hot water boilers, heat exchangers and components carefully to

prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not ship damaged hot
water boilers or components, replace with new prior to shipping.
3.2.1 Preparation
All boiler openings shall be plugged/ covered prior to shipment. The boiler
shall be skid mounted and protected with a weather resistant covering.
All shipped loose components shall be wrapped in protective material and
packaged in a separate container(s).
3.3 PAINTING
The entire boiler, base frame, and other components shall be factory
painted, before shipment, using hard finish enamel.
The boiler surface shall be cleaned/ prepared for painting using
manufacturer's specifications and standard industrial painting practices.
3.4 INSTALLATION
3.4.1 Supervision
Inspect the boiler sets for “as-arrived” condition and confirm suitable condition
for installation. Supervise unloading of the boilers, heat exchanger and
accessories components. The entire installation and testing and commissioning
of boiler set shall be carried out by the qualified personnel who has obtained
certificate to install high pressure equipments from applicable Local authorities.
The certificates shall be submitted to Employer prior to site installation.
3.4.2 Coordination
The contractor’s vendor shall have a service technician present when the
boilers components are rigged into the mechanical plant room. The contractor
shall have a representative present when the boiler is disassemble and
reassembled by vendor, when required for ingress.
3.4.3 Start–Up
The boiler start–up shall be performed by a factory trained representative
and will be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
procedures.
The boiler start–up shall include boiler operator training and shall cover
boiler operation, water treatment, and maintenance of the unit.
MST/235233/12(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
3.5 DEMONSTRATION FOR OWNER
Provide two separate sessions with the factory engineer to demonstrate and
train Employer's maintenance personnel as specified below;
 Start boiler system and verify performance. Demonstrate operation to

Employer’s personnel.
 Train Employer's personnel on procedures and schedules for startup,
shutdown, and trouble shooting, servicing, and preventive
maintenance.
 Review data in operating and maintenance manuals.
Schedule training with the Employer through the Engineer with at least 7 days'
notice in advanced.
3.6 WARRANTY
Warranty services for the boilers and associated equipments including

automatic control system, as specified herein, are to be performed directly for
the Employer. The installing contractor is only responsible for warranty items
that are directly associated with the installation (i.e. not the boiler and heat
exchanger’s performance).
The complete boiler packages including control system, associated

equipments, pumps and heat exchangers shall be warranted from defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of not less than 12 months from
obtaining substantial completion of project.
The warranty shall commence upon substantial completion for each boiler and
associated equipments. The manufacturer's representative will have a service
engineer available to service any breakdown within 24 hours after notification,
and the number of trips will not be limited during the warranty.
MST/235233/13(C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
SECTION 235719 HEAT EXCHANGER
SECTION 23 57 19 – SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions issued are applicable to this Section, and this
Section is applicable to them.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install, testing and commissioning of shell and
tube type heat exchangers, accessories and trim indicated in the drawing with
supplementary items necessary for proper installation and operation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be
applicable to this Project.
C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable
requirements and standards addressed within all references.
A. Conform to ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section VIII, Division 1 for
design and fabrication of pressure vessels for manufacture of tubular heat exchangers
and heat exchanger shells.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Record Documents:
1. Submit Shop Drawings and product data, including, rated capacity, dimensions,
piping arrangement, and supports, inlet & outlet temperature set to meet this project
requirements and achievable system performance and efficiency. Total 5 hard
copies and 2 softcopies in latest AutoCAD shall be submitted.
2. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3. Submit test reports of tube bundle pressure tests.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
Upon Substantial Completion, contractor shall submit total 5 hard copies and 2
softcopies in of as-built drawings, operation and maintenance manual which includes
Start-up and shutdown instructions, routing maintenance check list, assembly Drawings,
and spare parts lists, include detail of manufacturer, vendor, installer, local distributor &
services agent such as email address, mailing address, service hot line phone numbers,
etc.
MST/235719/1 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle the products and it components carefully, deliver to the Project Site under proper
supervision. Damaged parts shall not be delivered to site and it shall be replaced with
new prior to delivery to site. Manufacture’s delivery order forms shall be produced for
record.
B. Protect internals from entry of foreign material by temporary caps on flanged openings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and
local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.02 COUNTRY OF ORIGIN AND COUNTRY OF MANUFACTURE
A. The product shall be from approved manufacture that has minimum 5 years experience
in production. The product shall be manufactured in USA, Western Europe and Japan.
2.03 LIQUID – LIQUID HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Provide shell and tube type heat exchanger with removable U-bend or straight tube
bundle, with minimum capacity of 1410 kW each as shown on the Drawings. The
contractor shall study the drawing issued and identify the type of tube (such as straight
or U-bend) which is suitable to given space in Boiler plant room with considerations of
maximum efficiency and accessibility for maintenance works. The contractor shall
include proposed configuration and type of tube bundle offered in his tender submission.
B. Construct in conformance with ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for 300 psi
water pressure, and certify by an authorized inspector holding a National Board of Boiler
and Pressure Vessel inspectors commission.
C. Shell:
1. Steel with flanged (80mm dia and larger) pipe connections, steel mounting saddle.
2. Muntz metal or other approved corrosion resistant tube sheets and tube supports.
D. Heads: Cast iron or steel.
E. Tubes: U-tube or straight type with 25mm minimum outside diameter seamless Type K
copper, removable easily for inspection and cleaning.
F. Trim:
1. Water inlets and outlets: Thermometer wells, pressure gauge tappings.
2. Heater water outlet: Thermometer well for temperature regulator sensor, ASME
rated pressure and temperature relief valve, valved drain.
MST/235719/2 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable state and local requirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.
C. Install to permit removal of tube bundle with minimum disturbance to installed equipment
and piping.
D. Support heat exchangers on welded steel pipe and angle floor stand.
E. Pitch shell to completely drain condensate.
F. Pipe relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain.
G. Provide a minimum of two (2) steam traps and associated safety devices in parallel
regardless of whether it is shown or not on Drawings.
H. Install dielectric fittings where ferrous metal and non-ferrous metal are in contact.
END OF SECTION 23 57 19
MST/235719/3 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
SECTION 236416 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER
SECTION 236416 - CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS

The scope of work shall cover supply, deliver, install and testing & commission
of 5 numbers of 1200RT centrifugal chillers, auto tube cleaning system and
associated chiller plant management and control systems. Extent of water
chiller work is indicated by requirements of this section. Types of centrifugal
water chillers specified in this section include the following:
Centrifugal machine
Open or closed, with single compressor.
Electrical
Furnish electrical field-wiring diagrams for power wiring and starters for
water chiller, and control wiring for field-mounted controls. Wiring will be
the responsibility of the contractor. Wiring diagrams shall clearly illustrate
the interconnections required between the chiller starter and the chiller
control panel. Details shall include, but not be limited to terminal point
designations, wire sizes, etc.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Pakistan Building Code

Chiller shall comply with all relative sections of the latest edition.
ARI Compliance
Provide certified capacity ratings for water chiller in accordance with Air Conditioning
and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 550/590-latest edition (hereinafter referred
to as “ARI Standard(s)”).
Note: these specifications take certain exceptions to ARI Standards in selection and
testing requirements.
ASHRAE Compliance
Construct refrigerating system of water chiller in accordance with American Society
of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration Include all proposed
safety features and/or devices required by ASHRAE for refrigerants declared to be
toxic.
MST/236416/1 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
ASME Compliance
When required by code, construct and test water chiller in accordance with American
Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
VIII.
National Testing Approval

Chillers and accessories (where applicable) shall be approved by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. or another nationally recognized testing agency.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
Product Data
Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected model clearly indicated, weights (shipping, installed, and operating),
furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.
Submittal Drawings
Submit manufacturer drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, and
required clearances for installation, operation, maintenance and methods of
assembly of components.
Wiring Diagrams
Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required for final
installation of water chiller and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of
wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
Maintenance Data
Manufacturer shall submit maintenance/operational manuals, and parts list for
each water chiller, control, and accessory; including "trouble-shooting"
maintenance guide. Include current service/repair/overhaul manuals. Furnish to
owner any updated or newly released related materials when available during the
first five years of service.
1.3 CHILLER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Provide five (5) bound final installation, training, operation, maintenance and repair
manuals to be turned over to the Owner's Representative and approved for
content by the Engineer prior to acceptance of substantial completion.
Manuals provided must be of sufficient detail to enable maintenance staff to install,
calibrate, train, operate, maintain service and repair every system, subsystem,
and/or piece of equipment installed on or as part of this contract. Manual must
contain the followings;
 Project Title
 Project number
 Location
MST/236416/2 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
 Dates of submittals
 Names of Engineers, Contractors, and Contractor's Sub-contractors
 Phone numbers and addresses for Contractor and Sub-contractors
 An Equipment Index that includes vendor’s name, address, and telephone
number for all equipment purchased on the project.
 Emergency instructions with phone numbers and names of contact
persons on warranty items
All manuals in binders shall be original copies provided by the manufacturer. At

minimum these binders must include:
 Installation manuals
 Calibration manuals
 Training manuals
 Operation manuals
 Service Manual and Repair manuals
 Parts list, Wire list
 Reviewed and submittals records.
 Certification that owner is to receive all published service, repair and
overhaul manuals by being placed on the current mailing list. Submit
copies of all inspection forms, findings and guarantee certificates.
 Copies of all manufacturers' warranties as filed for all equipments provided
and/ or installed.
Manuals
Bound in hard cover three (3) ring (D-type) binder, 1", 1.5" or 2" maximum, white
vinyl, presentation type with clear vinyl view cover on front, back and spine and
with pockets on front and back. Contents shall be indexed in CSI format, tabbed
(4,5,8 or 16th cut), with no more than 80% binder fill. All drawing size shall be A1
and in binder shall be folded A4 size and shall be hole punched and
reinforcements added. Top of all drawings shall be at top or spine side of the
manual. Complete drawings must be viewed without opening rings. If the binder
includes manuals from any one vendor covering several different model numbers,
the model used on the project must be highlighted.
Required Submittals
The following sample chart is supplied for the benefit of the Employer, Engineer
and Contractors to assure a complete submission of required information. It is a
one reference listing of documents required by the specifications under this
section.
ITEM SHOP DWG. O&M PARTS LIST CERTIFICATION

MANUAL
Chiller* x x x x
*Provide wiring diagrams
MST/236416/3 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.0 GENERAL
Provide electric-driven, hermetic or open, centrifugal chillers as specified hereafter.

Chillers shall be provided with all parts, sensors and controllers as necessary for
automatic operation to meet summer cooling and winter heating.
Chiller shall be a complete package, factory assembled and wired. If manufacturer
does not provide unit as a complete factory package, then furnish the necessary
labor and material to complete the assembly and erection and insulation of the
machine in the field.
If an open-drive motor/compressor design is used, the chiller size must be
increased to handle the added chilled water load.
Chiller Plant management/ automation system complete with standby back up
UPS power supply complete with batteries, charger units and alarm interface
lasting for 2 Hours full operation of Entire Chiller Plant automation system shall be
provided. It shall be from same manufacturer of chiller and control system.
2.1 Acceptable Manufacturer

Trane, Carrier, McQuay and York International.
2.2 Country of Origin

USA, Western Europe and Japan with acceptable manufacturer.
2.3 Acceptable Refrigerants

Centrifugal --- R-l34a or R123. The contractor shall indicate his proposed
refrigerant type in his tender submission.
2.4 Surging
Chiller shall provide surge-free operation at l00% to 25% capacity at maximum
operating conditions specified including, but not limited to, 5.5 deg C leaving chilled
water temperature and 37.5 deg C entering condenser water temperature with
specified water flows.
2.5 Sound
The centrifugal chiller sound pressure level (SPL), in decibels (dB), with a
reference pressure of 20 MicroPascal, shall not exceed the values listed below. All
ratings shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 575-94, "Method of Measuring
Machinery Sound within Equipment Rooms".
No reduction of entering condenser water or raising of leaving chilled water

temperatures will be allowed in the sound levels. Making such a temperature
adjustment does not represent the loudest operating condition the chiller will
experience while on the job, and could mask sound problems that would otherwise
MST/236416/4 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
occur. A minimum of 75% of the sound data points along the length of the machine
shall be taken, and established as the minimum percentage of total possible points
used to determine sound levels. Water chiller shall be complete with compressor(s)
and motor(s), evaporator, condenser, lubrication system(s), capacity control and
controller(s), motor starter(s), instrument and control panel mounted and factory
wired on the machine, purge system, mounting isolation and other items as herein
specified.
2.6 Centrifugal Compressors

Compressors shall be single or multi-stage centrifugal types. Impellers must be
high strength aluminum alloy, balanced both statically and dynamically. Impellers
shall be proof tested at least 15 percent above design operating speed. Automatic
capacity control shall modulate performance from 15 to 100 percent of rated unit
capacity at design conditions. Compressor shall always start unloaded.
Compressors shall be field serviceable.
Forced-fed lubrication systems with a hermetic motor-driven oil pump shall be

furnished as part of the water chiller. System shall be complete with oil pump, oil
cooler, pressure regulator, oil filters, thermostatically controller oil heater and
necessary motor control. Oil pumps shall be energized prior to chiller motor is
energized. Oil pump starter shall be factory supplied and mounted on the chiller
and factory wired with only field power leads required.
Evaporator and condenser shall be fabricated with high performance integrally

finned copper tubing rolled into the tube sheets in both the evaporator and
condenser as well as expanded into the tube support sheets in the evaporator.
Tubing shall be finned except in the area adjacent to and in contact with the tube
and tube support sheets. Tube support sheet shall be spaced at intervals to
maintain proper tube spacing and to minimize tube vibration and wear.
Tubes shall be removable from either end of the heat exchanger. Minimum tube
wall thickness shall be 0.508 mm. Construction and materials for the heat
exchangers shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994 Safety Code for mechanical
refrigeration (which in turn requires conformance to the ASME Code for Unfired
Pressure Vessels where applicable). Provide true marine water boxes on both
ends of condenser and evaporator (hinged heads; removable without
disconnection of piping). Provide factory-mounted pivoting gantries at both ends of
condenser and evaporator to allow removal of marine water box covers without the
need for auxiliary hoists. Hinged, davited marine water box covers that will allow
the cover to be opened and hinged out of the way without disturbing or removing
the piping are an acceptable alternative to the pivoting gantries.
Regardless of refrigerant type, unit shall be equipped with a factory-mounted,

spring-loaded reseating relief valve designed for exterior venting.
Provide purge system, factory installed, wired and piped; system shall be self-
contained. Provide any necessary devices for separating and returning refrigerant
MST/236416/5 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
to the system.
Units operating with refrigerants having positive pressure (R-134a) at 23.9 Deg.C
shall have isolation valves so that chiller has the capability of storing the refrigerant
charge in the condenser. Provide the isolating valves at the chiller compressor
discharge and the refrigerant liquid line, so that the refrigerant charge can be
isolated in the condenser.
Demand limiter -- Demand limiter device shall be provided within the standard
control panel so that maximum current may be manually set to any fraction
between 30% and 100% of full load amperes.
2.7 Unit Controller

The unit shall be equipped with a complete microprocessor control system. This
system shall consist of control transformer, temperature and pressure (thermistor
and transducer) sensors, Input/Output (I/O) board, power supply board, main
processor board and interface board with display and keypad. All devices and
sensors shall be factory mounted and wired. These devices shall be capable of
self-diagnostics. All sensors shall be hard-wired with quick-disconnect devices for
easy removal. The interface device shall be equipped with individual touch-
sensitive membrane key switches. Control center shall be capable of interfacing via
BACnet protocol with M&E Outhouse and Passenger Terminal Building
automation (IBMS) system. Standby back up UPS power supply complete
batteries, charger units and alarm interface lasting for 2 Hours full operation of
Entire Chiller Plant automation system shall be provided.
Required interface points shall provide for remote chiller start/stop; mode of
operation; reset of chilled water temperature; reset of current limit; and status
messages indicting chiller is ready to start, chiller is operating, chiller is shutdown
on a safety requiring reset, chiller is at full load, and chiller is shutdown on a
recycling safety.
Provide kWh reading of entire plant equipments including cooling towers, run time
meter and start counter. Provide a 4-20mA or 0-10vDc output signal for refrigerant
pressure (condenser pressure minus evaporator pressure) to interface to the
building control system, if this point cannot be passed through the standard
interface listed above. The chiller shall have the necessary controls to allow the
chiller to start with 15 deg. C condenser water temperature and 15.55 deg. C return
chilled water temperature. Starters shall be furnished for all auxiliary motors, such
as oil pump, purge and transfer unit. All wiring shall meet or exceed the National
Electrical Code (latest edition) and electrical specification for this project.
2.8 Field-Installed Insulation

The manufacturer shall provide the necessary labor and material to field-insulate
each chiller at the project with 19.05 mm fire retardant flexible closed cell plastic
type painted insulation, including heads on evaporator. Insulation shall be field-
painted (under this contract) to match the factory chiller color.
MST/236416/6 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
2.9 Vibration Isolation

Provide spring vibration isolators for each chiller according to isolator
manufacturer’s recommendations and selection detail.
Motors shall be single-speed, non-reversing squirrel-cage induction type, and shall
be suitable for voltage indicated herein. Compressor motor(s) shall be built for
connection to Star-Delta/closed transition starters. Motor stator shall be arranged
for service or removal without complete compressor disassembly or breaking of
main refrigerant piping connections. Full load operation of the motor shall not
exceed nameplate rating.
2.10 Unit-Mounted Starter

Unit-mounted starter for chiller compressor motor shall be closed transition, Wye-
Delta (Star-Delta) or solid state type starter in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Starter shall be
capable of handling the maximum locked rotor and maximum full load running
currents for the size chiller motor. Chiller starter continuous amperage rating shall
not exceed the maximum full load amperage rating of the motor provided by the
chiller manufacturer.
Provide an overload in each phase set at 104%-107% (per manufacturer’s

recommendation) of the rated load amps of the connected motor. Overloads shall
be manual reset and shall de- energize the main contactor when over current
occurs. The overload shall be adjustable and selected for mid-range. The overload
relays herein before mentioned shall be ambient temperature compensated
manual re-setting bi-metallic type overload relays. Overloads may be electronic for
solid-state starters. Provide inherent low voltage protection and inherent motor
protection against single phasing and phase reversal on all three legs.
The Wye-Delta starter shall provide 58% starting voltage and shall limit amperage
inrush to 33% of locked rotor. Provide starter with the control features (current
transformers for load limiter, transformer for chiller controls, relays and interlocks)
required by the chiller manufacturer. Starters shall be braced for 65,000
symmetrical amps and shall be UL listed and labeled. Provide inherent low voltage
protection and inherent motor protection against single phasing.
Provide an ammeter and voltage meter mounted in chiller starter (or as a part of
chiller control panel). Each ammeter shall have a full-scale reading of 1000
amperes with a 5 ampere load. Provide ammeters with selector switch for each
phase. In conjunction with each ammeter, provide a current transformer on one leg
of each starter. This current transformer is for use by the load limiter.
All bussing, conductors, control wiring, interlock wiring and connectors utilized in
the chiller starters shall be 98% conductivity copper. Provide circuit-
breaker/disconnect in each chiller starter. Chillers shall operate with a minimum
power factor of 95 percent. If power factor correction devices are required to meet
95 percent, the manufacturer shall provide the necessary labor and material to
install power factor correction equipment for each chiller. Correction equipment
may be factory or field-installed.
MST/236416/7 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
2.11 Factory-mount chiller starter on the unit

Chiller starter shall be as manufactured by Square D, Westinghouse, General
Electric, Cutler-Hammer or the chiller vendor.
2.12 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES/ VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Chiller using adjustable-frequency drives (AFD’s) or variable speed drives (VSD)

are acceptable, and may be proposed at the contractor/vendor’s option. If
adjustable frequency drives are proposed, the drive electrical losses must be listed
in the appropriate space on the Form of Proposal. Such drives shall confirm to the
following:
2.12.1 Basic Description

The adjustable frequency controller (AFC) shall be solid state, with a Pulse Width
(PMW) output waveform. The AFD/VSD package as specified herein shall be
enclosed in a single NEMA 1 enclosure, completely assembled and tested by the
manufacturer. The AFD/VSD shall employ a full wave rectifier (to prevent input line
notching), DC Line Reactor, capacitors, and Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors
(IGBT’s) as the output switching device (SCR’s, GTO’s and Darlington transistors
are not acceptable). The drive efficiency shall be 97% or better at full speed and full
load. Fundamental power factor shall be 0.95 at all speeds and loads.
All programmable settings shall be held in non-volatile memory and shall not be
affected by power outages, brownouts, power dips, etc.
2.12.2 Codes/Standards
AFC and options shall be UL listed. The controller and options shall comply with
the applicable requirement of the latest standards of ANSI; NEMA ICS-6 for
controls and systems; National Electric Code NEC; IEC 801-2, 801-4, 256-4. Unit
shall be braced for 65,000 symmetrical amps and shall be UL listed and labeled.
2.12.3 Experience
The manufacturer of the AFC controller described in this specification shall have
minimum of 10 years experience in the design, construction and application of
adjustable frequency controls and motors.
2.12.4 Quality Assurance

The AFC controller shall be subject, but not limited, to the following quality
assurance controls, procedures and tests. If other than the chiller manufacturer, the
drive manufacturer shall have been actively and continuously engaged in the
production of adjustable frequency controllers for a period of at least 10 years and
have experience of at least 8 years in commercial applications.
2.12.5 Adjustable Frequency Controller

The AFC manufacturer shall provide at minimum, the electromechanical
construction, basic features, adjustments, general options and modifications and
MST/236416/8 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
special options as outlined in this specification.
2.12.6 Basic Features

The AFC shall have the following basic features;
The AFC shall incorporate a full alpha/numeric customer interface panel showing
settings, parameters, operating screens, operating data, supervision information
and faults in plain English. Display may be incorporated with the chiller control
panel. The optional main input disconnect shall provide a positive disconnect
between the controller and all phases of the incoming AC line. This disconnect
shall be mounted inside the controller enclosure and have through-the-door
interlocking toggle with provisions for padlocking.
2.12.7 Harmonic Distortion

IEEE-519 certified harmonic distortion is required for all AFD/VSD. Contractor/
vendor shall submit the certificate indicating the compliance of IEEE-519.
2.12.8 Protective Circuits and Features

The AFC shall include the following protective circuits and features;
Fast acting semiconductor fuses specifically sized for protection of the AFC.
Instantaneous Electronic Trip for the following faults;
 Output phase-to-phase circuit condition

 Total ground fault under any operating condition
 High input line voltage
 Low input line voltage
2.12.9 Service Conditions

The AFC shall be designed and constructed to operate within the following service
conditions:
Suitable for continuous operation at an ambient temperature of 0 degree C to 60
degree C Elevation up to 1005 meter altitude with a relative humidity to 95%, non-
condensing.
AC line variation of 414 VDC -10% to 508VAC +10% +2% frequencies.
2.13 REFRIGERANT VAPOR DETECTION SYSTEM

The refrigerant leak monitoring and alarm system complying with ASHRAE 15 –
1994 requirement shall be provided, installed and tested by contractor. The
Employer will advise on the location of alarm lights and sounders to be installed.
2.13.1 Self-Contained Breathing Equipment

Additional safety and breathing equipment required by ASHRAE 15 – (latest
edition) and located outside the limits of the plant room will be furnished and
installed by the Employer.
MST/236416/9 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
2.14 MACHINE-SPECIFIC CHILLER PARAMETERS
Chillers shall be sized, rated and tested in accordance with ARI Standard (except
as specified herein) for water chillers and shall have the following minimum
capacities:
Project specific equipment requirements;
Nominal Capacity;
Cooling capacity at minimum (full load) 1200 Refrigeration Tons.
Evaporator;
Chilled water flow 202 l/s (indicative)

Pressure drop (maximum) 6.70 M.
Entering water temperature 12.0 deg. C.
Leaving water temperature 6.7 deg. C.
Maximum tube velocity 3.66 MPS
Water side working pressure 150 PSIG
Fouling factor 0.00010
Condenser
Condenser water flow 240 l/s(indicative)

Pressure drop (maximum) 6.70 M.
Entering water temperature 32.0 deg. C.
Leaving water temperature 37. deg. C.
Maximum tube velocity 3.66 MPS
Water side working pressure 150 PSIG
Fouling factor 0.00025
Electrical Characteristics Chiller Starter

400V/ 3ph/ 50Hz 400 volt
Sound Table
%Load dB, A Weighted

100 90
25 92
MST/236416/10 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
PART 3 EXECUTION
Each chiller shall be run-tested in accordance with ARI Standards using an ARI-
approved test stand in the manufacturer's factory or laboratory. The test shall
simulate full- and part-load conditions to check performance (capacity and energy
consumption), noise, vibration and operating/safety controls. The Engineer and
Employer's Representative shall be notified to review the installation and witness
the factory test. The Employer will witness testing only during normal working
hours. All expenses for this test shall be covered by contractor and no further
claims to Employer shall be entertained.
 Data sheets showing the acceptable maximum/ minimum points as well as

the anticipated values.
 The test load points with guaranteed KW/ton (include corrections for open-
drive motors and/or variable-speed drives as well as fouling factors).
 Test equipment.
 Overall schedule
 Test stand layout.
 Activity schedule
 Vibration testing methods
Unless the test results are in complete conformance with the requirements stated
herein, the Employer will not accept the chillers or authorize the chillers to be
shipped from the factory.

retest as required. If necessary to extend the testing period by additional day(s),
and/or make return trip(s) to the test site, the manufacturer/ contractor shall cover
all expenses incurred by the Employer and/or his representative to witness the
retest. No further claims to Employer shall be entertained for retest.
3.1 Full Load Capacity Test

Chiller shall be tested at full load to verify the tonnage produced and the KW/Ton
consumed. The chiller shall meet or exceed 100% of the specified minimum
cooling tons required. No ARI tolerances will be acceptable for the specified
minimum cooling tons.
3.2 Full Load Efficiency Test

The chiller shall meet 100% of the maximum KW-per-ton value that manufacturer
submitted on the life cycle cost bid form. No ARI tolerances will be acceptable for
the full load KW-per-ton value.
MST/236416/11 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
3.3 Partial-Load Efficiency Tests

Chiller shall be tested at three additional partial-load points, chosen in advance by
the Employer from the points listed in the Form of Proposal. No ARI tolerances will
be acceptable for the partial-load KW/ton values.
Maintain constant leaving chilled water temperature and entering condensing

water temperature as listed in the energy cost analysis chart of the Form of
Proposal.
3.4 BEARING VIBRATION TEST
The vendor shall test, monitor, record, and analyze the vibration levels of each
chiller bearing on the following occasions;
 As part of factory acceptance testing

 After initial installation/start-up
 At least two (2) months prior to the end of the chiller warranty period.
3.5 Vibration Test Methods

The vendor shall monitor and record the vibration levels of the horizontal and
vertical axes of all chiller bearings. Additionally, the vendor shall monitor and record
the axial vibration levels of outboard chiller bearings. The vendor shall permanently
locate all transducer attachment points on the chiller during the factory acceptance
tests. These transducer attachment points are to be used during subsequent
vibration monitoring tests performed in the field. The vibration test shall be a
narrowband test. The results shall be reported in peak velocity (m./sec.) vs.
frequency.
3.6 Vibration Test Procedures

All vibration tests shall be performed in accordance with approved vibration test
procedures. The vendor shall submit both factory acceptance test and field test
procedures to the owner for review/concurrence with the equipment submittals.
The vibration test procedures shall identify the test equipment setup and test
methods to be utilized.
3.7 Documentation and Analysis

The vendor shall summarize the results of each vibration test in a vibration test
report. The final test report shall compare the results of field tests with the test
results obtained from factory acceptance testing. The vendor shall provide the
owner with a written assessment of the acceptability of the test results and
recommend how often future vibration tests should be performed in order to
monitor chiller performance in a cost effective manner. The vendor shall also
identify vibration levels that are considered by the vendor to warrant specific
corrective actions.
MST/236416/12 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
3.8 Sound Pressure Test

Each chiller shall have sound tests conducted at the factory prior to shipment to
confirm the Sound Pressure as listed herein. All data must be measured and
presented in strict accordance with ARI Standard 575-94. The sound data points
shall be measured simultaneously during the factory verification of capacity and
efficiency. Sound tests will be run at 100% and 25% load points. If the 25% load
point is not one selected by the owner for acceptance, an additional test at 25%/85
deg. EWT will be performed for sound testing only. The chiller must not surge
during this test condition.
In the event that a chiller does not meet the submitted dBA sound pressure level,
the manufacturer must, at his expense, provide sufficient attenuation to the
machine to meet the submitted value. This attenuation shall be applied in such a
manner that it does not hinder the operation or routine maintenance procedures of
the chiller. If the unit cannot be modified to meet the submitted sound levels, unit
will be rejected.
3.9 Final Testing Report

Provide to the Employer's representative and the Consulting Engineer a factory-
certified test report, certifying that the proposed chillers perform as specified.
3.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING
Handle water chiller and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking,

denting and scoring. Do not ship damaged water chiller or components, replace
with new. Ship the entire refrigerant charge in separate containers.
3.11 INSTALLATION
3.11.1 Supervision
Inspect the chillers for “as-arrived” condition and confirm suitable condition for
installation. Supervise unloading of the chillers.
3.11.2 Coordination
The contractor’s vendor shall have a service technician present when the chiller
components are rigged into the mechanical plant room. The contractor shall have
a representative present when the chiller is disassemble and reassembled by
vendor, when required for ingress.
3.11.3 Start-Up
Chiller and accessories shall be installed, tested, evacuated, dehydrated and
charged under the direct supervision of a manufacturer-trained service engineer
(“factory engineer”). The factory engineer shall be present at all progress meetings
and be present during all erection, calibration, evacuation/charging and the initial
operation of each water chiller.
Furnish and install the initial charge of refrigerant and oil. Test and adjust chiller
controls and safeties. Lubricate rotating parts. Verify that motor amperage
MST/236416/13 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
conforms to manufacturer's data.
After the chiller has been thoroughly tested and is running, the factory engineer will
provide 336 hours operation based on 14 days 24-hou per day for each chiller. The
factory service engineer shall log all operating conditions each hour during the 336
hours of operation and submit the logs to the Employer and Engineer for his review
and approval.
The 336 hours will include instructing the Employer's representative and
familiarizing the Owner in the correct means of logging all pressures and
temperatures in connection with the chiller. The manufacturer's service engineer
shall visit the job three (3) times per year during the Warranty period: summer,
spring, or fall and winter after acceptance for any adjustments necessary for proper
operation.
3.11.4 Demonstration for Owner

Provide two separate sessions with the factory engineer to demonstrate and train
Employer's maintenance personnel as specified below;
 Start chiller and verify performance. Demonstrate operation to Employer’s

personnel.
 Train Employer's personnel on procedures and schedules for startup,
shutdown, and trouble shooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
 Review data in operating and maintenance manuals.
Schedule training with the Employer through the Engineer with at least 7 days'
notice in advanced.
3.12 WARRANTY
Warranty services for the chiller equipment, as specified herein, are to be

performed directly for the Employer. The installing contractor is only responsible for
warranty items that are directly associated with the installation (i.e. not the chiller
performance).
The manufacturer shall provide a five-year parts and labor warranty for the entire
chiller assembly, including starter and controls. The warranty shall commence
upon substantial completion for each chiller. The manufacturer's representative will
have a service engineer available to service any breakdown within 24 hours after
notification, and the number of trips will not be limited during the warranty.
3.12.1 Shared-Refrigeration Circuits with Dual Compressors

For dual compressor chiller designs where two compressors share a single
(common) refrigeration circuit, the entire refrigerant and oil charges and both
compressor/motor assemblies shall be replaced in the event of a failure of either
compressor/motor assembly.
MST/236416/14 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
3.12.2 Refrigerant Loss

The manufacturer shall replace at no expense to the Employer any loss of
refrigerant and oil (unless due to negligence of the Employer) during a five-year
period from the date of substantial completion.
3.13 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
The chiller manufacturer shall include one year maintenance agreement for each
of the chiller(s). The maintenance agreement shall include a minimum of twelve
(12) eight-hour inspections for a year of operation for each of the chiller(s). The
costs for all materials, parts, oil, oil filters, refrigerant, gaskets, shaft seals, O-rings,
couplings, sensors, controllers, software etc., for one year maintenance agreement
shall be included. Each inspection shall include a written standardized service and
maintenance report indicating all items checked and serviced. Signed reports shall
be submitted to the Employer for review and approval at the end of each
inspection.
Reports shall note any irregularities in operation of each system and tracked over
time in an attempt to predict component replacement and/or downtime.
The maintenance Service shall include the following;
3.13.1 Electrical System Check

Operational verification of relays, overload dashpot fluid level, starter contacts,
tightening of power wiring, and meg-ohm meter test of compressor motor(s), and
overload calibration.
3.13.2 Machine Safety Control Check

Calibration of all unit safety control devices.
3.13.3 Lubrication System Service

All oil filter changes, inspection of oil heater, oil cooler, pressure regulator, and
heater controls, to be performed at end of first cooling .
3.13.4 Purge Service

Provide service as recommended by the purge unit manufacturer’s written
recommendations, including replacement of dryers and cores.
3.13.5 Refrigerant Charge Service

The chiller shall be checked for proper refrigerant charge at each of the specified
inspections. Refrigerant shall be added as required at no charge to the Employer.
MST/236416/15 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
3.13.6 Shaft Seal Service

The compressor motor shaft seal(s) of open motor driven chillers shall be tested for
refrigerant and excessive oil leakage in the presence of the Employer at each of
the specified inspections. “Excessive” is defined as exceeding 8 oz. of
oil/refrigerant per 1000 hours of operation.
3.13.7 Drive Alignment Service

The alignment of open-drive chillers and couplings shall be checked at each of the
specified inspections.
3.13.8 Speed-Increasing Gear Set Service

The speed-increasing gear set shall be checked at each of the specified
inspections.
3.13.9 Condenser Tube Service

Condenser heads shall be removed at both ends of the chiller. Tubes and tube
sheets shall be inspected for fouling.
3.13.10Additional Training
Provide follow-up personnel training during service period Operator’s Log - A
review of the operator’s logs and the operator’s experience with recent operation
shall be done at each of the specified inspections to address any concerns.
Unit Log - A log of all temperatures, pressures, amperage, and voltage shall be
done at each of the specified inspections.
The following items shall be done at each of the specified inspections while the
chiller is operational. Adjust operating and safety controls as required and record
settings. Complete operating log of temperatures, pressures, voltages, and
amperages to determine unit-operating efficiency.
 Check operation of purge system.

 Check operation of control circuit.
 Check operation of lubrication system including oil pump and oil pressure
regulator. The chiller manufacturer’s field supervisor shall submit a written
report.
 Check operation of motor and motor starter.
 Check customer’s log with operator and discuss operation of the chiller(s)
in general.
An ASHRAE Guideline 3 Report shall be reviewed with the Employer at each of

the specified inspections by the manufacturer’s field supervisor. The report shall be
signed by the chiller manufacturer’s field supervisor and given to the Employer for
his records.
MST/236416/16 (C&A-3)
DIVISION23: HVAC
3.13.11Oil Analysis Service

After the first cooling season, and annually thereafter, oil analysis shall be
performed, measuring acid, moisture, and wear metals content. The manufacturer
shall review the laboratory results and submit a written report.
3.13.12Refrigerant Analysis Service

An analysis of the refrigerant shall be performed annually measuring acid, moisture
content, and check for system contamination. The manufacturer’s field supervisor
shall make a review of the laboratory results and a written report shall be
submitted.
3.13.13Vibration Analysis Service

After the first cooling season, a vibration test/analysis shall be performed per the
above referenced Bearing Vibration Testing procedures. The manufacturer shall
review the results and submit a written report to Employer’s maintenance
personnel.
END OF SECTION 236416
MST/236416/17 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 236500 COOLING TOWERS
CROSS-FLOW TYPE
SECTION 236513 - COOLING TOWERS (CROSS-FLOW TYPE)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works shall cover the supply, design, delivery, installation,
testing and commissioning of all the necessary equipments of the Cooling
Tower, variable speed drive units complete with control system and sensors,
galvanized steel maintenance platforms and ladders shown in the drawings ,
automation system interfaced with IBMS system, complete set of condenser
water filtration system and drainage system. The cooling towers selected
shall meet the space constraints as shown in the drawings.
1.1 STANDARDS
The cooling towers shall be designed, manufactured, tested and

commissioned generally in accordance with the latest version of approved
standards issued from the world recognized Cooling Tower Institute or
standard approved by the Local Authority in Islamabad.
1.2 FEATURES
The design of the cooling towers shall incorporate features including:
i) Ease of cleaning and visual inspection
ii) Ease of dismantling/removal/replacement of in-fills and drift eliminators
iii) Use of non-corrosive materials on wetted parts
iv) Use of high-efficiency drift eliminators to minimize drip loss/carry over
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CASING
The casing of the cooling tower shall be made from FRP (Fibreglass
Reinforced Polyester) or rigid PVC or other approved material.
2.2 IN-FILLS AND DRIFT ELIMINATORS
The in-fills shall be made from rigid PVC of high heat exchange performance.
The in-fills shall be removable from the side without dismantling the tower.
Drift eliminators shall be PVC film type and efficient enough to effectively limit
drift loss to not more than 1% of the total water flow rate specified.
MTS/236513/1(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
CROSS-FLOW TYPE
2.3 FAN
The fan shall be of low noise multi-blade axial flow type and made of corrosion
resistant aluminum alloy. The fan vanes shall be of variable pitch type. The
fan shall be balanced both statically and dynamically. The fan shall be direct
driven type. The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) and
weather proof type. Fan and drive protections shall be provided. The
emergency stop switches shall be provided and installed at near to the fans.
2.4 COMPONENTS
The cooling tower shall also be equipped with float valve, drain and overflow,
ladder, water basin, air inlet screen and inspection opening. Ladder shall be
made of aluminum alloy. The water basin shall be made of FRP and the basin
bottom sloped at a gradient eliminating sedimentation build-up and ensuring
complete drain-down during periodic maintenance. Air inlet screen shall be of
PVC type.
All steel members and supports inside the cooling tower shall be in stainless
steel construction. External metal parts shall be in hot dip galvanized steel.
All bolts, nuts, nails, screws and fasteners shall be of stainless steel.
2.5 CROSS FLOW TOWER
In cross-flow tower, air flows horizontally across the downward fall of water.
Hot water which to be cooled is delivered to water inlet basins through nozzles
located at top of the in-fill areas, and shall be distributed to the in-fills by
gravity through openings and nozzles in the floor of inlet basins. Nozzles used
in tower shall ensure effective water distribution over the in-fills at various flow
rates.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 The contractor shall supply and install ultra low noise cooling towers with low
noise fans and low noise motors.
Complete set Condenser water filtration system and automation interfaced
with chiller plant management system.
3.2 CERTIFICATE OF PERFORMANCE
The cooling tower must be guaranteed to perform in accordance with the

conditions specified. The contractor shall provide performance curves with
appropriate correction factor charts to substantiate the tower's duty. As only
certified towers will be considered, the contractor shall furnish the name of a
recognized cooling tower institute with which the tower manufacturer is
associated. The contractor shall also state the amount of water make-up
required to off-set against evaporation loss, carry-over volume and bleed
under the conditions specified.
MTS/236513/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
CROSS-FLOW TYPE
All cooling towers shall be factory tested. The contractor shall submit the
factory test certificates before the shipment.
The cooling tower shall be supplied, erected, protected, tested and

commissioned by the cooling tower manufacturer or their approved
representatives. All test records and results including recommendation shall
be submitted to Employer for the records. It shall be included in final O&M
submission.
The contractor shall have in his possession all the necessary testing
equipment to carry out the complete testing and commissioning of the
installation. The minimum testing equipment contractor is expected to have
are set out below and one complete set shall be handover to Employer during
testing and commissioning of the system for verification of test results:
Unit(s) Equipment
1 - Combined mounted maximum and minimum thermometer
1 - Velometer with accessories and case
1 - Complete set of Vane anemometer with case
1 - Digital recorder for temperature and humidity
1 - Mounted ºC DB thermometer
1 - Mounted ºC WB sling psychrometer
1 - Sling thermometer for both Dry Bulb and Wet Bulb
1 - Sound level meter with octave-band frequency analyser
2 - Water Pressure Gauge
The contractor should not include the full cost of these testing equipments in
the Total Tender Price, as these testing equipments will remain his property.
All testing apparatus as well as measuring instruments, gauges, recorders, etc

which are specified and installed under this Contract, shall be calibrated to an
accuracy of 5% within the range of the equipment. Calibration certificates
shall be submitted to the Employer. All testing apparatus shall be stamped
with approved stickers showing the validity of calibration.
MTS/236513/3(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
CROSS-FLOW TYPE
ii) Pipe work
All water pipe work shall be hydrostatically tested to 150% of the working
pressure or 1400 kPa whichever is greater and this test pressure maintained
for 24 hours and all results shall be submitted to Employer. The test pressure
shall not drop by more than 2½% over the 24 hours period.
All water for hydrostatic pressure testing of pipe work systems shall be
chemically treated with a suitable corrosion inhibitor.
The corrosion inhibitor shall be properly mixed with the water either by batch
mixing in an external tank or by recirculation within the pipe system.
The chemically treated water shall remain and totally filled each section of the
system until all sections of the system is ready for the pre-commissioning
cleaning operation.
Immediately after the hydrostatic pressure testing water has been released
from both the open and closed re-circulating water systems, the systems shall
be filled with a mildly acid phosphate/detergent solution to remove all foreign
matter. The chemical solution shall be circulated continuously for a minimum
of 24 hours, during which time all strainers shall be removed and cleaned of
accumulated debris at least three times and all air release points shall be
adequately purged.
The systems shall then be drained of cleaning solution as rapidly as possible

and recharged with fresh water and re-circulate for two hours. The systems
shall again be completely drained and recharged with fresh water to be
circulated for two hours. After draining each system shall immediately be filled
with fresh water and the initial dose of corrosion inhibitor added. This mixture
shall then be circulated continuously for at least eight hours.
The cooling tower fans shall not run while the cleaning and flushing is being
carried out.
iii) Electrical Commissioning Tests
The complete electrical installation shall be tested to Local Authority

requirements both before and after being connected up to the satisfaction of
the Employer.
The installation and testing works shall be supervised by a Licensed Electrical

Worker during the whole of the period required for the tests. He shall be
responsible for all electrical tests on site and he or she shall endorse on all
electrical drawings and calculations including test results. The endorsed set
shall be submitted to Employer.
MTS/236513/4(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
CROSS-FLOW TYPE
All materials and equipment supplied or erected under this Contract which fails
the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by the contractor without cost to
the Employer and the tests shall be repeated.
All tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the
Employer. The contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus,
required for the tests to the satisfaction of the Employer, the cost of so doing
shall be included in the Contract price and no further claims will be entertained.
The contractor shall make accurate records of all tests and shall furnish test
certificate and a schedule of the results in an approved form. Five copies of
such schedules and of each test certificate shall be submitted to Employer.
Any circuit or section of the installation failing to reach the required standard
for acceptance shall be made good by the contractor without cost to Employer.
The minimum of site tests to be carried out on each completed section of the
electrical installation shall be as follows:
a. Earthing tests.
b. Insulation resistance tests.
c. Rotation direction
d. Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and closing

circuits, indications, etc.
e. Vector group, phasing and synchronising tests.
f. Operation of all protective gear circuits by primary injection and system

fault tests to check sensitivity and stability.
g. Protective gear timing tests.
h. Test operation of alarm devices and protection devices.
i. Rotational tests on all motors.
iv) Electrical Reliability Tests
When the commissioning tests have been concluded successfully and the
contractor has notified the Employer, the installation shall be required to
operate within the specified limits of its rating either continuously or
intermittently as may be convenient without failure of any kind or for a period
of 30 days before the official handover inspection can be arranged.
Should any failure occur due to, or arising from faulty configuration, installation,
used of inappropriate materials or poor workmanship, the reliability test period
of 30 days shall be commenced after the contractor has remedied the cause
MTS/236513/5(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
CROSS-FLOW TYPE
of failure to the satisfaction of the Employer. The onus of proving that any
failure is due to any other cause shall rest with the contractor.
v) Water Balancing
Water balancing for all chillers, pumps, cooling towers etc shall be carried out
by regulating the approved balancing valves and taking flow measurements
with a flow meter until the design water quantities have been achieved.
Water balancing shall be carried out at all main branches of the pipe work
where balancing valves and flow sensors are provided.
All water balancing carried out shall be recorded and the results shall be
submitted to Employer for retention. All full set of testing and commissioning
data sheets, results shall be included in O&M submission.
MTS/236513/6(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 23 7313
INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Section includes:
1. Modular factory fabricated indoor central station air-handling units and

accessories.
2. Scope of Works
testing and commissioning of the Central Air Handling Units as per
equipment schedule inclusive of air relief valve, isolation valves, modulating
motorized valves, strainers, controllers, sensors, gauges, electrical control
panels, VSD units, VAV box power supply panels, cable support, cabling
and others specified in this specification section and associated
specification sections issued.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Supplier-provided control systems, including instruments, signal transmissions,

panels, cabinets, and other control and instrumentation requirements shall be
coordinated with the Control and Instrumentation trades and in accordance with
Article [2.15], Controls. Some equipment controls are specified in other portions
of the contract documents. As part of the work of this section, coordinate with
these other suppliers and trades to provide a complete and working equipment
controls.
B. It is the responsibility of the bidder to read and conform to all sections of the
specifications, review all contract drawings of all divisions, and coordinate with all
equipment suppliers of material specified under other sections of the
specifications.
C. Air handling units and associated motors shall perform satisfactorily in the
following service conditions:
1. Elevation: 600 meter above sea level.
MTS/237313/1(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
2. Maximum ambient temperature: 50 degrees C.
3. Minimum ambient temperature: -5 degrees C.
D. Seismic Protection and Performance: The seismic protection and performance

of air-handling units shall be in accordance with Section 22 0548, Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
E. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details,

including comprehensive engineering analysis by a professional engineer using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
1. ABMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. ABMA 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE)
1. ASHRAE 33 – Method of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air

Heating Coils
2. ASHRAE 62.1 – Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
3. ASHRAE 52.2 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning

Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
4. ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings
5. ANSI/ASHRAE/USGBC/IES Standard 189.1 – Standard for the Design of

High Performance Green Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings
C. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA):
1. AMCA 99 – Standards Handbook.
2. AMCA 210 – Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic

Performance Rating.
3. AMCA 300 – Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
MTS/237313/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
4. AMCA 301 – Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory
Test Data.
5. AMCA 500 – Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
D. Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI):
1. AHRI 260 – Standard for Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and
Conditioning Equipment
2. AHRI 410 – Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
3. AHRI 430 – Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
4. ANSI/AHRI 610 – Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA MG 1 – Motors and Generators.
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code.
2. NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems.
3. NFPA 90B – Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-
Conditioning Systems.
G. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA):
1. SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. UL 900 – Air Filter Units.
1.4 SUBMITTAL
Provide five (5) hard copies and three (3) softcopies of the following;
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, coil and frame configurations, unit

dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field
connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
MTS/237313/3(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
B. Product Data, Submit the following:
1. Published Literature: Indicate capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of

materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and
filter frames.
3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point plotted,
power, RPM.
4. Coils: Certified -performance ratings with system operating conditions

indicated.
5. Dampers: Include leakage, pressure drop, and sample calibration curves.

Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details.
6. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity.
7. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for

interlock and control wiring. Indicate factory installed and field-installed
wiring.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, filter

replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring
diagrams, trouble shooting, etc.
E. As-built drawings prepared in latest version of AutoCAD upon substantial

completion.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic restraints

indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including
analysis data signed and sealed by licensed professional engineer responsible
for their preparation.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Installation details including anchorages

and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary
motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration

isolators and seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.
MTS/237313/4(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
A. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
B. AHRI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory

tested according to AHRI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be
listed and labeled by AHRI.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and
installation of air-handling units and components.
D. Provide fans bearing with AMCA-certified rating seal.
E. Provide filter media with UL 900 rating or comparable standard and rating by any
nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) recognized in 29 CFR 1910.7.
F. Filters shall be the product of one manufacturer; assemble filter components to

form filter banks from the products of one manufacturer.
G. Certify coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance

with AHRI 410.
H. Coils shall be the product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of

coils with minimum 5 years' documented experience who issues complete
catalog data on such products.
I. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by any NRTL as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and

transporting units.
B. Units shall be shipped fully assembled up to practical shipping and rigging

limitations. Units not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows
on each section to indicate location and orientation in direction of airflow. All
openings shall be protected from the weather with materials suitable to withstand
shipping and storage. Shipping splits shall be clearly defined on submittal
drawings. Cost associated with non conformance to shop drawings shall be the
responsibility of the contractor and manufacturer. Each section shall have lifting
lugs or shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement of section.
MTS/237313/5(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
C. Deliver units to jobsite with fan motors, sheaves, and belts completely assembled
and mounted in units.
D. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory
shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
E. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost, a standard parts

warranty that covers a period of one year from substantial completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one extra set of fan belts, one extra set of filters for each air handling
unit, and one extra set of gaskets for each access door.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable Manufacturer
Carrier, Trane, York International, McQuay and Daikin
2.2 Country of Manufacture
USA, Western Europe and Japan with acceptable manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and

Specifications. Any deviations in layout or arrangement shall be submitted prior
to bid date. Acceptance of deviations from specifications shall be in the form of
written approval from Employer. Contractor is responsible for expenses that
occur due to exceptions made.
MTS/237313/6(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
2.3 GENERAL
A. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and AHRI 430.
B. Provide factory-fabricated external support kit on the base of the unit. Unit
mounting devices not constructed of galvanized steel shall be chemically cleaned
and coated with both a rust-inhibiting primer and finished coat of rust-inhibiting
enamel.
2.4 CONFIGURATION
A. Unit shall be Draw-through type air-handling unit of unitary design suitable for
medium and high pressure operation plus accessories, including as applicable:
1. Fan section
2. Cooling coil section
3. Filter section
4. Mixing box section complete with volume control dampers and factory
mount modulating dampers for return air and outside air control.
2.5 UNIT CASING
A. Panels shall be formed to produce solid 50mm double walled thermal break
design of modular dimensions. There shall be a thermal break between the
exterior and internal panels. Exterior panels shall be fabricated from 1.2 mm
thickness pre-painted steel. The coating shall be minimum 70 micron thick heat
treated synthetic resin finish resistance to Salt Spray test at 750 hours. Interior
panels shall be fabricated from solid 1.00mm galvanized sheet steel. Both
exterior and interior panels shall be formed and reinforced to provide rigid
construction.
B. The unit shall be internally insulated with 50mm thick, 32 kg/m3 density fibre glass
or rockwool of thermal conductivity not more than 0.0350 W/m°K at a mean
temperature of 24°C. The external casing shall form a perfect vapour barrier. In
order to prevent cold tracking Panels shall be of one-piece design to facilitate
removal. Panels shall be assembled with mechanical fasteners such that each
panel is individually removable. The fasteners shall be zinc-chromate plated.
Panels shall have no exterior exposed raw edges that could lead to rust
formation. The side perimeter of external panel shall include a built-in PVC
gasket acting as air seal. Panels shall come with removable polyethylene
protective sheet to protect external surfaces from scratches and allow for
removal at job site.
MTS/237313/7(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
C. Casing construction shall be Non-Thermal-Bridge (NTB) with no direct metal-to-

metal contact between the internal and external surfaces. The unit frame
construction shall consist of nylon glass-fiber reinforced corner-joints that
connect extruded aluminium thermal break profiles. The extruded aluminium
thermal break profiles shall consist of a complete structure fabricated from high
strength engineering thermoplastic bars that separates the aluminium outer and
inner profiles. The aluminium frames shall be gasketed along the perimeter with
closed cell heavy duty neoprene rubber gasket located in between panels and
the aluminium frames. The frame shall be constructed to permit removal of the
panels without affecting the structural integrity of the unit.
Corner pieces (Tri-leg) molded of composite material forms the final integral part
of the casing instruction. The nonmetallic construction of the corner pieces
enhances the Non-Thermal-Bridge feature of the AHU casing.
D. Unit casing construction shall be tested to conform to the following standard:
BS EN 1886: latest edition or DIN EN 1886: latest edition Ventilation for buildings
– Air Handling Units – Mechanical performance
The construction shall satisfy the minimum requirements according to the

classification in BS EN 1886: latest edition or DIN EN 1886: latest edition as
shown below:
Mechanical Characteristics Class
Casing strength 2
Casing air leakage under –400 Pa B
Casing air leakage under +700 Pa B
Filter bypass leakage F9
Thermal transmittance T2
Thermal bridging factor TB2
E. Access doors shall be constructed from double walled thermal break panels
insulated with the same material as the casing panels. The four sides of the
access door shall be covered permanently with extruded PVC to ensure non-
metallic thermal break.
Door frames shall be constructed of a single-piece fiberglass construction for

Non-Thermal-Bridging (NTB). The internal flange of the door frame shall be
MTS/237313/8(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
sealed along the perimeter with replaceable closed cell neoprene gasket of
minimum 5.0mm thickness for air tightness and thermal performance.
The door latch shall consist of a single-piece construction consisting of a handle

with opening and closing mechanism fabricated from nylon glass fiber reinforced
thermoplastic with thermal break design. The locking of the access door shall be
achieved via a single-piece gradiated cam-lock with stopper for air-tightness.
Door hinges shall be fabricated from nylon glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic
and installed with no direct contact with the internal surface of the air handling
unit. The hinges shall permit a complete 180 degree door swing.
F. Drain Pans: Single wall stainless steel sheet with welded corners. Cross break
and pitch to drain connection.
1. Furnish drain pans with asphalt base coating under cooling coil section
(including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends).
2. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect
condensate from top coil.
3. Drain connection shall be located at lowest point of pan and sized to

prevent overflow. An insulation of 25mm thickness, 32 kg/m3 external
thermal insulation shall be applied to the drain pan to prevent condensation
forming on the outside and to isolate the pan from the unit casing. Provision
shall be made to prevent carry-over of water from the drain pan by the air
stream.
4. Terminate with threaded nipple on both ends of pan.
G. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or

structural channel supports, designed for low deflection (1/360 of span between
supports), welded with integral lifting lugs.
1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and
attachment to air-handling unit sections, accessories, and components with
reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section
22 0548, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
2.6 FANS
A. Type: Centrifugal fan backward inclined or Air foil blade to suit the pressure and
operating characteristic specified. Fans capacity of 10,000 M3/hr or below may be
forward curved type.
MTS/237313/9(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
B. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and label with AMCA Certified
Rating Seal.
C. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and label with AMCA Certified
Sound Rating Seal.
D. Bearings: Self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings L-10,100,000

hrs life with lubrication fittings extended to exterior of casing with aluminum tube
and grease fitting rigidly attached to casing.
E. Mounting: Locate fan and motor internally on welded steel base coated with
corrosion resistant paint. Factory mounts motor on slide rails. Furnish access to
motor, drive, and bearings through removable casing panels or hinged access
doors. Furnish built-in inertia base of welded steel with bottom sheet and
reinforcing grid for concrete ballast. Mount base on vibration isolators.
F. Fan Modulation: Variable frequency drives.
G. Flexible Connection: Separate unit from connecting ductwork. Refer to Section

23 3101, “HVAC Ducts” for flexibility requirements.
2.7 MOTORS
A. Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type, 3 Phase, 400V, 50Hz, with class
‘F’ insulation and IP-55 protection.
2.8 BEARINGS AND DRIVES
A. Bearings:
Pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated roller bearings, with a minimum

rated life of 400,000 hours according to ABMA 11, cast-iron housing with zerk
fittings and grease lines extended to outside unit.
B. Shafts: Solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and
protectively coated with lubricating oil. Designed for continuous operation at
maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable
alignment.
C. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit
shafts, and keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and
under selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position;
fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as
recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor.
MTS/237313/10(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
D. Belt Guard: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate to

SMACNA Standard; 3mm thick, 20mm diamond mesh wire screen welded to
steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports
without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt
tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
2.9 INTERNAL VIBRATION ISOLATION [AND SEISMIC CONTROL]
A. Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's standard restrained vibration

isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 25 mm.
1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate fan section, internal

mounting frame and attachment to fans, fan housings, motors, casings,
accessories, and other fan section components with reinforcement strong
enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 22 0548, "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”
2.10 COOLING/ HEATING COILS
A. General
1. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in

accordance with AHRI 410.
2. Casing with access to both sides of coils. Enclose coils with headers and
return bends fully contained within casing.
3. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for

maintenance and to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of
coil(s).
4. All coils shall be completely cleaned prior to installation into the air handling
unit. Complete fin bundle in direction of airflow (upstream) shall be
degreased and steam cleaned to remove any lubricants used in the
manufacturing of the fins, or dirt that may have accumulated.
5. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate coil section, internal

mounting frame and attachment to coils, and other coil section components
with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 22 0548, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment.
MTS/237313/11(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
B. Fabrication
1. Tubes: 16mm OD seamless copper arranged in parallel or staggered

pattern, expanded into fins, brazed joints. Provide tube supports for coils
longer than 900 mm length.
2. Fins: Aluminum.
3. Casing: Die formed channel frame of 16 gauge thick galvanized steel.
C. Water Cooling Coils
1. Headers: seamless copper tube.
2. Design for minimum working pressure of 210 psi and 105°C.
3. Configuration: Drainable, with threaded plugs for drain and vent;

serpentine type with return bends on smaller sizes and return headers on
larger sizes.
2.11 FILTERS
A. General:
1. Comply with NFPA 90A.
2. Filter Media: UL 900 listed.
3. Each filter module shall be constructed to house the filter type specified
below and noted on the drawings. Modules shall have side service access
doors for replacement of filter media.
4. Filter Box: Section with filter guides, access doors from both sides, for face
loading with gaskets and blank-off plates.
5. Provide minimum arrestance and minimum efficiency reporting value

(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
6. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with
access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one
side or lifted out from access plenum.
B. Washable Permanent Panel Filters:
1. Media: 14-mesh aluminum, alternate layers of flat and herringbone crimp,

four layers per 25 mm; rod reinforced; enclosed in 20 gauge stainless steel
frame; nominal size 600 mm X 600 mm X 50 mm thick.
MTS/237313/12(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
2. Rating: 2.5 m/s face velocity, 2.54mm wg initial resistance, 12.7mm wg

recommended final resistance.
C. Disposable Panel Filters:
1. Media: Fiber blanket, factory sprayed with flameproof, nondrip, nonvolatile

adhesive, nominal size 600 mm X 600 mm X 50 mm thick
2. Rating: 2.5 m/s face velocity, 2.54mm wg initial resistance, 12.7mm wg

recommended final resistance.
3. Holding Frames: 20 gauge or heavier galvanized steel frame with

expanded-metal grid on outlet side and steel-rod grid on inlet side, hinged
with pull and retaining handles.
D. Filter Gauges: Minimum 90 mm diaphragm actuated dial in metal case, vent

valves, black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment, range
0-50 mm wg, 2 % of full-scale accuracy. Provide static-pressure tips with integral
compression fittings, 6.5 mm aluminum tubing, and two-way or three-way vent
valves.
2.12 ECONOMIZER
A. Economizer: Factory installed fully modulating motorized outside air and return
air dampers controlled by dry bulb temperature controller with minimum position
setting. Furnish barometric relief damper capable of closing by gravity.
2.13 DAMPERS
A. Mixing Boxes: Section with factory mounted outside and return air dampers of
galvanized steel with vinyl bulb edging and edge seals in galvanized frame, with
galvanized steel axles in self-lubricating brass bearings, in opposed blade
arrangement with damper blades positioned across short air opening dimension.
B. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Maximum air leakage for outside air damper shall
be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1.
C. Other Damper Leakage: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory

Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating", shall not exceed 2 percent of air
quantity at 10 m/s face velocity through damper and 100 mm wg differential
pressure.
MTS/237313/13(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
D. Damper Actuators: Furnish factory installed electronic damper actuators for

outside air and return air.
2.14 CONTROLS
A. See Paragraph 1.2.A for Control Requirements.
B. Refer to Section 25 5000, “Integrated Automated Facility Controls”. All

necessary controls shall be provided. The sample control sequence for AHU is
included in the last page of this section. The contractor shall prepare control
program inclusive of sample of graphic configuration and submit to Employer for
approval.
2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according
to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans
shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure,
power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance
Rating."
C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with AHRI 430.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air handling units for
service and maintenance.
C. Install flexible connections between unit and inlet and discharge ductwork. Install
metal bands of connectors parallel with minimum 25 mm flex between ductwork
and fan while running. Refer to Section 23 3101, “HVAC Ducts”.
MTS/237313/14(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
D. Install filter pressure gauges, and static pressure taps upstream and downstream
of filters. Mount filter gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in
accessible position.
E. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using

elastomeric pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.
Comply with requirements for concrete bases and vibration isolation devices
specified in Section 22 0548, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment.
1. Minimum Deflection: 15 mm
2. Install galvanized steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric

pad.
3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless

otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full
perimeter of concrete base.
4. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to

supported equipment.
F. Insulate coil headers located outside airflow as specified for piping.
G. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to nearest floor
drain. Refer to Section 23 2113, “Hydronic Piping.”
3.2 INSTALLATION - CHILLED WATER COOLING/ HEATING COIL
A. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.
B. Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement).
C. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at
top.
D. Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points.
E. Install the following piping accessories on chilled water piping connections. Refer
to Section 23 2113, “Hydronic Piping.”
MTS/237313/15(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
1. On supply:
a. Thermometer well and thermometer.
b. Well for control system, temperature sensor.
c. Shutoff valve.
d. Strainer.
e. Control valve.
f. Pressure gage.
2. On return:
c. Pressure gage.
d. Shutoff valve.
e. Balancing valve
f. Flow control valve
g. Accessories shown in installation detail drawings
F. Install automatic air vents at high points complete with shutoff valve. Refer to
Section 23 2113, “Hydronic Piping.”
3.3 INSTALLATION - HOT WATER HEATING COIL
A. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.
B. Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement).
C. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at
top.
D. Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points.
MTS/237313/16(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
E. Install the following piping accessories on hot water piping connections. Refer to
and Section 23 2113, “Hydronic Piping.”
1. On supply:
c. Shutoff valve.
d. Strainer.
e. Control valve.
f. Pressure gage.
2. On return:
c. Pressure gage.
d. Shutoff valve.
e. Balancing valve
f. Flow control valve
g. Accessories shown in installation detail drawings
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including
routine servicing and checkout.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion. Include maintenance items as shown in manufacturer's
operating and maintenance data, including filter replacements, fan belt
replacement and alignment of fan-motor sheaves, and controls checkout and
adjustments.
MTS/237313/17(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
C. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of one day to leak
test, refrigerant pressure test, evacuate, dehydrate, charge, start-up, calibrate
controls, and instruct Employer representatives on operation and maintenance.
D. Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions for this

maintenance period.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.
B. Remove temporary filters installed during construction period and replace with
permanent filters at Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance.
B. Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one - 8 hour day

to instruct Employer representatives’ personnel in operation and maintenance of
units. Schedule training with Employer representatives, provide at least 7 days
notice to Employer Representative of training date.
3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings
lubricated, fan and motor sheave alignment, and fan has been test run under
observation.
3.8 SCHEDULE
Provide Equipment Schedule on the Drawings including;
A. Manufacturer
B. Model Number
C. Supply Fan Performance:
1. Air Flow, CMH
2. Outside Air Flow [Minimum], CMH
3. External Static Pressure, Pa.
MTS/237313/18(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
4. Motor Size, HP or kW
D. Return Fan (if any) Performance:
1. Air Flow, CMH
2. External Static Pressure, Pa.
3. Motor Size, HP or kW
E. Coils Performance:
1. Capacity, Btuh
2. Face Velocity, fpm
3. Entering Air Temperature: Dry Bulb, degrees C, Wet Bulb, degrees C
4. Leaving Air Temperature: Dry Bulb, degrees C, Wet Bulb, degrees C
F. Filter Performance:
1. Filter Type
2. Filter Size
G. Electrical Characteristics And Components
1. Electrical Characteristics:
a. HP, kW, rated load amperes
b. Volts, single or three phase, 50 Hz.
c. Maximum amperes
d. Minimum circuit ampacity.
e. Type of signal and voltage to VSD
MTS/237313/19(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 237313
Control Sequence for Air Handling Unit
Event Condition
Start AHU If all conditions are met:
The AHU Start Command is on by BMS
The Smoke Alarm is off
The BAS mode is on
The Trip Alarm is off
Chilled water Valve Modulating of chilled water valve is based on following:

Control The set point temperature shall be based on analogue
software input from BMS workstation and enable to
unlimited overwrite.
The correction factor shall be based on comparing the off
coil temperature with set point temperature using PID
function.
The Correction factor values shall be sent to modulate valve.
The Correction factor values range shall be from 0% to
100%
Static pressure Modulating of variable speed drive for AHU fan shall be
Control based on following:
The set point static air pressure shall be based on analogue
software input from BMS workstation and it enable to
unlimited overwrite.
The correction factor shall be based on comparing the static
pressure with set point using PID function.
The Correction factor values shall be sending to modulate
variable speed drive.
The Correction factor values range shall be from 0% to
100%
Stop AHU If one of condition is met:

The AHU Start Command is off by BMS
The Smoke Alarm is on
The BAS mode is off
The Trip Alarm is on
END OF SECTION
MTS/237313/20(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
SECTION 238123 COMPUTER-ROOM
AIR CONDITIONERS (DIRECT EXPANSION TYPE)
SECTION 23 81 23 - COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS (DIRECT EXPANSION

TYPE)
Part 1 – GENERAL
1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works shall cover the design, supply, delivery, installation, testing
and commissioning of computer room air-conditioning units operating with R410a
refrigerant type detail to this specification, plan drawings and installation detail
drawings.
The units shall be self-contained, designed and factory assembled and factory
tested. Unit shall be listed in UL Elec Equip Dir or ETL DLP for computer room
application. Equipment shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - SI ASHRAE
90.1 - IP, at a minimum Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) of 12.0. Unit
shall include room cabinet and frame, floor stand, fan section, filter section,
cooling coil, reheat coil, dehumidifier, compressors, condensers, microprocessor
controllers, controls provisions and room temperature interlocking and
interconnecting piping internal to the CRAC.
The condensate water pumps shall be provided at no additional cost to Employer
where the gravity drain is not possible. The rooms may or may not be provided
with raised floor finish and it is contractor’s responsibility to check and provide
the right configuration.
1.1 STANDARDS
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic
designation only.
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

AHRI 410 latest edition for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-

CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 (latest edition) Safety Standard for Refrigeration

Systems and
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34(latest edition) Designation and Safety Classification

of Refrigerants
ASHRAE 52.2 latest edition Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning

Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
ASHRAE 55 (latest edition) Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human

Occupancy
MTS/238123/1(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
ASHRAE 62.1 (latest edition) Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
ASHRAE 90.1 - SI (latest edition) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-
Rise Residential Buildings
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy
Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.26 (latest edition) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared
Copper Tubes
ASME B31.1 (latest edition) Power Piping
ASME B31.5 (latest edition) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
ASME BPVC (latest edition) Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 280 (latest edition) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service
ASTM D 5864 (latest edition) Standard Test Method for Determining Aerobic
Aquatic Biodegradation of Lubricants or Their Components
ASTM D 6081 (latest edition) Aquatic Toxicity Testing of Lubricants: Sample

Preparation and Results Interpretation
ASTM E 2129 (latest edition) Standard Practice for Data Collection for
Sustainability Assessment of Building Products
ETL TESTING LABORATORIES (ETL)

ETL DLP (updated continuously) Directory of ETL Listed Products
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (latest edition) National Electrical Code
NFPA 90A (latest edition) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
MTS/238123/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
Part 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINET
The cabinet shall be of double skin, self supporting welded construction in 1.0 mm
sheet steel with base section supports in 2mm sheet steel for maximum structural
strength with low self weight. The type of construction shall permit separation of
upper and lower sections if this should be required for greater case of handling or
transportation. Contour panels manufactured from 1mm sheet steel shall be
mounted on the front and sides of the unit and shall be removable without affecting
the normal air path through the unit.
Cabinet and panels shall be primed and high temperature baked with textured
paint and shall be lined with a 20mm thick layer (in between outside casing and
inside casing) of special thermal and acoustic non-flammable insulation which shall
be dust and fibre-free. The contour panels shall be painted with a suitable colour to
match the computer and shall be fitted to the unit by invisible fasteners. Service
access to the rear of the unit shall not be required.
2.2 EVAPORATOR COIL
The evaporator coils shall be mounted on the suction side of the fans to provide a
very uniform air distribution with low pressure drop and low noise.
The evaporator coils shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminium fins and
shall be 4 rows deep, with a maximum face velocity of the air of 2.25 m/s to
provide a sensible heat ratio higher than 98% under normal conditions. An
adjustable air bypass flap shall be mounted at the top of the coils and extend along
their entire length, to provide control of air discharge conditions. A stainless steel
condensate tray with insulation shall be fitted under the coil.
2.3 HERMETIC COMPRESSORS
The direct expansion refrigeration system shall have a minimum of two (2) fully
hermetic compressors suitably sized for the specified cooling and dehumidification.
The compressors shall be fitted with suction gas cooled motors to provide
maximum reliability, without recourse to pump down cycle, and vibration-free
operation. They shall be dynamically balanced, mounted on vibration isolators and
shall be fitted with high and low pressure switches, motor protection, crankcase
heaters and rotalock service valves.
Each refrigeration circuit shall include also a liquid line filter- dryer, sight glass,
solenoid valve and externally equalized thermostatic expansion valve factory
connected with refrigeration copper piping.
MTS/238123/3(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
2.4 FAN SECTION
The fans shall be of the double width, double inlet centrifugal type with statically
and dynamically balanced impellers mounted in lifetime lubricated bearings for
quiet, vibration-free operation. Each fan shall have its own direct coupled drive
motor to provide standby dependability.
Dehumidification shall be achieved by increasing the cooling capacity to cause a

lowering in temperature of the cooling coil to that below the dew point of the air
passing over the coil. Stopping one fan to achieve the dehumidification effect will
not be accepted.
2.5 FILTER SECTION
Two-stage filtration of the re-circulated air shall be incorporated in the unit to obtain
the required degree of cleanliness of the air in the computer room. Pre-filters shall
be of the re-generable type and second stage filters shall be of the deep pleated
fabric type mounted in galvanized frames (or equivalent material which can resist
corrosion) to permit rapid disposal and replacement without the danger of dust
dispersal. Filtration efficiency shall be 96% measured by the ASHRAE Standard
52-76 or an approved equivalent method.
Adjustable differential pressure sensor/ switches shall be provided across the
filters to activate general alarm to IBMS when the filter is clogged or low air flow is
occurred. Same time, the “Low air flow” text or the alarm code shall be displayed at
CRAC unit’s user interface unit.
2.6 ELECTRIC REHEAT
A multi-stage electric heater shall be used for reheating during the dehumidification
cycle. The reheat coil shall be capable of maintaining the room dry bulb
temperature during the dehumidification mode. The reheat coil shall be sized to
maintain the design room temperature and humidity without the present of
equipments heat load in the room.
2.7 CONTROL SYSTEM
The control system shall be of the microprocessor type consisting of an operating

mode control section and a display and alarm section. The dry bulb temperature
control system shall be able to provide an adjustable, finite time interval between
all cooling and heating stages so as to ensure a smooth response to room
temperature fluctuations. Wet bulb temperature control shall be provided by top
quality humidistats operating the dehumidification modes of the system.
The operating mode control section shall include the following:
a Supply voltage LED Indicator
b Start button
MTS/238123/4(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
c Stop button
d Audible alarm
e Audible alarm silencer button
f LED indicators for system on (fans operating), cooling stages, reheat

stages and dehumidifications.
g Provide alarm for:

Loss of airflow
Electrical reheat failure
Compressor high head pressure
Compressor low suction pressure
Clogged filters
High room temperature
Low room temperature
High room humidity
Low room humidity
Moisture detection (for water under floor) with Line type
water detector and interlock to switch off the unit upon
detection of the presence of water in the room.
h Provide hardwire interfacing between duty and standby units for automatic
switching over of the unit whenever any one unit is in faulty condition.
I Provide room Temperature Sensors or Thermostats and hard wire

interfacing provision to both units (standby & duty) to run both units (after
preset-able time delay) when the room temperature is higher than pre-set
temperature sensed by provided room temperature sensors or Thermostats.
2.8 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
The condensers shall be fitted with coils constructed from copper tubes with
aluminium fins. For indoor installation, condenser fans shall be of the centrifugal
type with vertical ducted discharge for low power consumption and quiet operation.
For outdoor installation, fans shall be of the propeller type with vertical or horizontal
discharge for low power consumption and quiet operation.
The condenser shall be fitted with its own electrical compartment complete with all
necessary electrical components and controls. The air cooled condensers shall
operate on a 400V, 3 phase, 50 Hz power supply.
MTS/238123/5(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
2.9 PIPINGS
The refrigerant pipes shall be copper pipes. The suction line shall be insulated
with 25 mm polyethylene foam or approved equivalent insulation. A sight glass
and a refrigerant dryer shall be provided for each condensing unit.
The condensate drain pipe shall be copper pipe and properly insulated with 25mm
polyethylene foam or approved equivalent insulation.
All pipes to be laid in GI trunkings. If pre-insulated pipes with GI jacketing are used,
the GI trunking is not required.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Floor Stand
All down-flow discharge units shall be mounted on an adjustable floor stand to

which elbow or discharge plenum is integrated. The floor stand shall be made of
hot dipped galvanized. The floor stand shall isolate the air-conditioning units from
the raised floor and shall be constructed of a heliarc welded tubular steel frame
with corner gussets. The floor stand shall have adjustable legs connected to
vibration isolator pads. The floor stand shall be used to install the air-conditioning
equipment and to allow all piping and wiring works to be completed before the
raised floor is installed. The floor stand height shall be matched with room raised
floor level and allowed for 50 mm up and down adjustments.
B. Water Detection System
The water detection system shall consist of a sensor tape with solid state switch
that closes when water is detected with provision to interlock the air-con unit. The
sensor tape shall be of good quality that shall not be affected by dust and vibration.
Solid stage water sensors tape under the raised floor all around the wall shall be
provided for rooms with raised floor finishing. The solid stage water sensors tapes
shall be provided under the CRAC units and Telecom or other communication
equipments whichever installed in the rooms without raised floor finishing. The field
installed sensor tape shall be complete with control panel and interfacing provision
to IBMS system for activation of alarm. The sensor shall activate a red colour
'water under floor' display light and an audible alarm at control panel when water is
detected. The reset function shall be provided.
The general alarm provision shall be provided at control panel. Power failure to
water detection panel, any lose contact at electrical wire to detection tape and
MTS/238123/6(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
discontinuity of detection tape shall activate the general alarm and water detector
fault alarm.
C. Floor Diffusers
The floor diffusers shall be provided for the proper air distribution inside the
equipment rooms which furnished with raised floor panels under Architecture
scope. The floor diffusers shall be able to withstand the human loads and
proposed equipment loads. It shall be from same manufacturer of the raised floor
panels.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 The contractor shall supply and install air-cooled under floor computer room air
conditioning system as shown in the accompanying drawings.
3.2 The total system shall be designed for energy conservation and shall be supplied
as a complete self-contained factory assembled package incorporating all the
components including IBMS interfacing modules and connection ports.
3.3 Air discharge shall be from the bottom of the unit for the room with raised floor
panels and bottom side throw for rooms without raised floor panels. The air
return path shall be through the top. The unit shall be mounted on the structural
floor with adjustable hot dipped galvanized floor stand.
A) Testing Apparatus:
The contractor shall have in his possession all the necessary testing instruments
and equipment to carry out the complete testing and commissioning. The
minimum testing equipment he is expected to have are set out below and the
another set shall be handover to client:
Unit(s) Equipment
1 - Combined mounted maximum and minimum thermometer
1 - Velometer with accessories and case
1 - Vane anemometer with case
1 - Recorder (with daily/weekly charts) for temperature and humidity
MTS/238123/7(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
1 - Mounted ºC db thermometer
1 - Mounted ºC wb sling psychrometer
1 - Sound level meter with octave-band frequency analyser
2 - Water Pressure Gauge
The contractor should not include the full cost of these testing equipments in the
Total Tender Price, as these testing equipments will remain his property.
All testing apparatus as well as measuring instruments, gauges, recorders, etc

which are specified and installed under this Contract, shall be calibrated to an
accuracy of 5% within the range of the equipment. Calibration certificates shall
be submitted to the Employer. All testing apparatus shall be stamped with
approved stickers showing the validity of calibration.
B) Regulation and Performance Test
i) All balancing, testing and commissioning shall comply with all rules
and requirements of the Local Authorities. After completion of each and every
section of the works, the contractor shall submit to the Employer two (2) copies
of the test results with the method of testing stated clearly.
ii) It shall be the contractor's responsibility to seek approval from the SO

for the method of testing. The contractor shall then give a minimum of seven (7)
days notice to the Employer to verify the test results on site and the contractor is
to demonstrate to the Employer that the installation is adjusted and regulated
correctly to fulfil the function for which it has been designed, e.g. room
temperature and relative humidity to be maintained, air quantity to be handled,
etc, and the contractor shall adjust, balance and regulate the section concerned
as necessary until the required conditions are obtained.
iii) Should the Employer find discrepancies between the recorded test
results and the measurements demonstrated to him on site, the contractor shall
be required to repeat the tests. Tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the
Employer at no extra cost.
iv) Room temperature and humidity shall be measured by recording

instruments located 1.5m above floor level at points away from the influence of
draughts or direct radiation from hot or cold surfaces, whilst air quantities shall be
measured by the Velometer or Anemometer. Room temperatures shall be
maintained within + 1°C of the design indoor dry bulb temperature.
v) No demonstration of room temperature shall be carried out when

weather conditions are abnormal as to wind, rain or at times when the external
air temperature is changing at a rate exceeding 1°C per hour.
MTS/238123/8(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
vi) The duration of the tests will be at the discretion of the Employer and
all recording charts shall be submitted to him for approval.
vii) After the completion of the testing, the contractor shall submit two
copies of the test records to users for retention.
C) Pipe work
All water pipe work, heat exchangers, coils and other fittings shall be
hydrostatically tested to two times the working pressure or 1400 kPa whichever
is greater and this test pressure maintained for 24 hours. The pressure recorder
shall be used for pressure test record. The test pressure shall not drop by more
than 2½% over the 24 hours period.
All refrigerant pipe work shall be tested to pressure as recommended by the

manufacturers using anhydrous carbon dioxide or nitrogen. After charging with
refrigerant, the system shall be thoroughly checked for leaks, using the Halide
Torch principle.
All pressure tests of pipe works shall be to the approval of the Employer before
any insulation of pipe works may commence.
All water for hydrostatic pressure testing of pipe work systems shall be
chemically treated with a suitable corrosion inhibitor.
The corrosion inhibitor shall be properly mixed with the water either by batch
mixing in an external tank or by recirculation within the pipe system.
The chemically treated water shall remain and totally filled each section of the
system until all sections of the system are ready for the pre-commissioning
cleaning operation.
Immediately after the hydrostatic pressure testing water has been released from
both the open and closed re-circulating water systems, the systems shall be filled
with a mildly acid phosphate/detergent solution to remove all foreign matter. The
chemical solution shall be circulated continuously for a minimum of 24 hours,
during this process all strainers shall be removed and cleaned of accumulated
debris at least three times and all air release points shall be adequately purged.
The systems shall then be drained of cleaning solution as rapidly as possible and
recharged with fresh water and re-circulated for two hours. The systems shall
again be completely drained and recharged with fresh water to be circulated for
two hours. After draining each system shall immediately be filled with fresh
water and the initial dose of corrosion inhibitor added. This mixture shall then be
circulated continuously for at least eight hours.
MTS/238123/9(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
D) Coils
All coils and automatic control valves shall be checked for water flow
characteristics, pressure drops using the ratings given by the manufacturers.
Final assessment shall be done by checking the air volumes, and
entering/leaving conditions of the air.
Any possibility of partial blocking shall be fully investigated. Should any coil fail
to meet the capacity requirements as guaranteed, the contractor must install all
necessary equipment to enable all accurate heat balance to be carried out. If the
coils are at fault, they shall be replaced with new coils of the correct capacity.
Any cost incurred shall be borne by the contractor. Test readings and a copy of
the calculation for such a test shall be submitted to the Employer.
E) Fans and Supply Plenum Works
All fans shall be checked over to ensure filters are clean and all in position, and
that no air is being 'by-passed'. All duct connections shall be checked for air
tightness before balancing is commenced.
Air quantities shall be set to within designed figures plus 10% tolerance as given
on the drawing for air quantity less than 17000 CMH and a reduction of 1% for
each increment of 17000 CMH. Air quantity above 170,000 CMH shall be set to
within 1% of the figures given on the drawings and final testing being done by
checking of temperature throughout the room.
The air flow measurement shall be taken from supply air plenum outlet and
individual raised floor diffuser panels.
Each fan shall be checked for RPM, air volume, pressure, bearing noise, full load
operating current, starting current and lock rotor current. These figures shall be
recorded and submitted in duplicate to the Employer.
After balancing is completed, each damper quadrant and adjusting arm shall be
painted in red with matching indicating marks and firmly locked in position.
F) Control Equipment
Contractor shall calibrate all thermostats and humidistats, set the modulating
range and set points on all automatic valves and dampers as required ensuring
that operating directions are correct. The time and control sequence shall also
be tested and verified.
G) Refrigeration Equipment
Each refrigeration compressor shall be tested in accordance with the

manufacturers’ instructions. The pressure control settings shall be adjusted and
MTS/238123/10(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
set. The capacity control mechanisms shall be verified and the lead/trailing and
stage loading operation and sequencing shall be checked and confirmed.
Each water chilling unit shall be checked, tested and recorded under design
conditions; performance tests shall comply with latest appropriate ARI Standards
as approved equivalent standard.
H) Electrical Commissioning Tests
The complete electrical installation shall be tested to Local Authority

requirements both before and after being connected up to the satisfaction of the
Employer.
The contractor shall provide qualified electrician during the whole of the period
required for the tests. The qualified electrician shall be responsible for all
electrical tests at the site.
All materials and equipment supplied or erected under this Contract which fail the
tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by the contractor without cost to the
owner and the tests shall be repeated.
All tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the
Employer. The contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus,
required for the tests to the satisfaction of the Employer, the cost of so doing
shall be included in the Contract price.
The contractor shall make accurate records of all tests and shall furnish test
certificate and a schedule of the results in an approved form. Four (4) copies of
such schedules and of each test certificate will be required.
Any circuit or section of the installation failing to reach the required standard for
acceptance shall be made good by the contractor without cost to client.
The minimum of site tests to be carried out on each completed section of the
electrical installation shall be as follows:
a. Operation of all protective gear circuits by primary injection and system

fault tests to check sensitivity and stability.
b. Insulation resistance test.
c. Continuity test.
d. Test to prove correct operation of interlocking, tripping, alarm and closing
circuits, indication, etc.
e. Protective gear timing tests as may be necessary.
f. Test operation of alarm devices.
g. Rotational tests on all motors.
MTS/238123/11(C&A-3)
DIVISION 23: HVAC
h. Polarity tests to verify that single pole switches are installed in the
phase or live conductor of each circuit, and not in the neutral conductor.
i. A test to verify the continuity of all conductors in every ring circuit,

correct connections to terminals or all socket.
j. Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors before

and after accessories. The standard of acceptance for electrical insulation
tests shall be as recommended in the Approved Standard.
k. Insulation resistance tests on any electrical apparatus supplied
and/or erected under this or other contracts before and after connecting
such apparatus to the supply.
l. Earth continuity tests for each final sub-circuit and the completed
installation to ensure that the impedance of the earth fault loop is such as
to permit compliance with the requirements of Approved Standard “Wiring
of Electrical Equipment of Buildings”. A suitable instrument is the Ferranti
Phase Earth Loop Impedance Tester (Model 2) or approved equivalent and
the contractor shall employ such an instrument or other approved
equivalent type.
I) Electrical Reliability Tests
When the commissioning tests have been concluded successfully and the
contractor has notified the Employer, the installation shall be required to operate
within the specified limits of its rating either continuously or intermittently as may
be convenient without failure of any kind or for a period of one 20 days before the
official handover inspection can be arranged.
Should any failure occur due to, or arising from faulty design, materials or
workmanship sufficient to prevent the commercial use of the installation, the
reliability test period of 20 days shall be commenced after the contractor has
remedied the cause of failure to the satisfaction of the Employer. The onus of
proving that any failure is due to any other cause shall rest with the contractor.
MTS/238123/12(C&A-3)
PACKAGE 3 - PTB
VOL III D
AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(C & A - 3, December 2010)
ELECTRICAL WORKS
THE CONSTRUCTION OF BENAZIR BHUTTO INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
PROJECT
Content Page
Scope of Works
Technical Specifications
Section 018926 Site Electrical Utilities Performance Requirements ETS/018926/1 -

ETS/018926/28
(C&A-3)
Section 260513 12KV Underground Power Cables, Auxiliary Cables and ETS/260513/1 -
Accessories ETS/260513/28
(C&A-3)
Section 260519 Low Tension Main Cables, Sub-main and Final ETS/260519/1 -
Distribution Cables ETS/260519/6
(C&A-3)
Section 260533 Cables Trunkings and Conduits ETS/260533/1 -

ETS/260533/10
Section 260536 Cable Tray and Cable Ladder ETS/260536/1 -

ETS/260536/5
Section 260539 Under floor Trunking System ETS/260539/1 -

ETS/260539/4
Section 261213 Silicon Oil-Filled Medium Voltage Transformer ETS/261213/1 -

ETS/261213/23
(C&A-3)
Section 261313 12KV Medium Voltage Switchgear and Accessories ETS/261313/1 -

ETS/261313/30
(C&A-3)
Section 262400 Low Tension Switchboard and Distribution Board ETS/262400/1 -

ETS/262400/42
(C&A-3)
Section 262700 Low Voltage Distribution equipment ETS/262700/1 -

ETS/262700/15
(C&A-2)
Section 263323 Central Battery Equipment ETS/263323/1 -

ETS/263323/4
(C&A-3)
Section 263353 Static Uni-interruptible Power Supply (UPS) System ETS/263353/1 -

ETS/263353/14
Section 264613 Lightning Protection System ETS/264613/1 -

ETS/264613/12
Content Page/1(C&A-3)
Section 265100 Interior Lighting ETS/265100/1 -
ETS/265100/16
(C&A-3)
Section 271000 Structured Cable Network ETS/271000/1 -

ETS/271000/77
(C&A-3)
Section 273226 Two-Way Emergency Voice Communication System ETS/273226/1 -

ETS/273226/3
Section 283100 Addressable Fire Detection and alarm system ETS/283100/1 -

ETS/283100/48
Section 337983 Site Grounding Conductors ETS/337983/1 -

ETS/337983/4
(C&A-3)
Section 481126 Standby Diesel Generating Set ETS/481126/1 -

ETS/481126/36
(C&A-3)
Content Page/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 018926 SITE ELECTRICAL UTILITIES
PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS
SECTION 018926 – SITE ELECTRICAL UTILITIES PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
i) Provide all materials, equipment, labor and services to complete the installation,
wiring, testing and commissioning of the complete and functioning electrical
system including, but not limited to, the following:
a) Fire Alarm
b) Telephone System
c) CCTV System (To coordinate with Package 4 Contractors)
d) Music & Public Address System (To coordinate with Package 4
Contractors)
e) Lightning Protection
f) MATV System (To coordinate with Package 4 Contractors)
g) Earthing System
h) Data Communication System
i) Power Installation
j) Lightings
k) Master Clock System (To coordinate with Package 4 Contractors)
l) Flight Information Display System (To coordinate with Package 4
Contractors)
m) 2-Way Radio System (To coordinate with Package 4 Contractors)
n) Security Access and Screening System (To coordinate with Package 4
Contractors)
o) Gate Management System (To coordinate with Package 4 Contractors)
1.2 SOURCE OF POWER AND UTILIZATION VOLTAGE
i) Electrical power shall be supplied at 11 kV/400V three phase 50Hz by

Islamabad Electricity supply corporation (IESCO).
ii) The nominal distribution voltage shall be 400 V, 50 Hz, 3 phase and neutral, 4
wire.
iii) Motors, electric heating controls and distribution devices and equipment shall
operate satisfactorily at 50 Hz and within the operation limits established by the
codes without damage to equipment.
iv) All electrical equipment shall be designed for operation in 43°C ambient
temperature and relative humidity at 100%, unless stated otherwise. Copies of
test certificates shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval prior to
ordering equipment.
1.3 UTILITY SERVICE CONNECTIONS
i) The HV Switch gear and transformers shall be supplied by the Contractor.
ii) The Contractor shall include within the Contract all costs associated with
attendance on site, liaison and co-ordination with IESCO.
iii) The Contractor shall include for all IESCO charges.
ETS/018926/1(C&A-3)
3.8 ACCESS DOORS
i) Wherever any item of electrical equipment requiring accessibility, maintenance

or adjustments is concealed, ensure adequate access, or provide an access
door and arrange for its installation by the Division in whose work it occurs.
ii) Access panels shall be by an approved manufacturer, with 12 U.S. gal.

Stainless steel panel, rust resistant, concealed hinges and positive locking and
self-opening screwdriver operated lock. Frame shall be suitable for the wall in
which it is being installed and shall have integral keys for plaster walls. Panels in
tiled walls shall suit the tile pattern. Minimum size of panels shall be 300 x 450
mm. Where equipment is quite large, the access panel shall be sized to suit.
iii) Submit for review by the Employer, floor plans and shop drawings showing the
size, type and exact location of all access doors.
iv) Each access panel shall be installed to provide complete access to equipment
for maintenance and servicing.
v) All access doors shall be shown on the record drawings. Notations, adjacent to
each access door shown on the drawings, shall indicate frequency of
maintenance required for item or items above or behind the door.
3.9 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
i) The drawings for electrical work are diagrammatic performance drawings only,
intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement and
approximate location of apparatus and fixtures, and the approximate sizes and
locations of equipment and outlets. The drawings do not intend to show
architectural, mechanical or structural details.
ii) Do not scale or measure drawings, but obtain information regarding accurate
dimensions from dimensions shown on the architectural drawings or by site
measurements. Follow the electrical drawings for laying out the work.
iii) Refer to the co-ordination drawings of other Divisions to become familiar with all
conditions affecting the work, and verify suitable spaces exist in which the
equipment is to be installed.
3.10 COMPLETION OF CONTRACT
i) All equipment must be cleaned and tested before final acceptance by the
Employer.
ii) From the date of issuance of the 'Completion Certificate' all equipment,
materials and workmanship, must be unconditionally warranted for not less than
one: (1) year.
iii) Replace, at no cost to the Employer, all lamps (1) one year after date of
issuance of 'Completion Certificate' for the Contract for the building.
iv) Defects and deficiencies which originate or become evident during the warranty
ETS/018926/11(C&A-3)
ten percent (10%) of the cost of the system shall be paid to the Contractor.
Payment of this ten percent (10%) of the cost of the system shall not be made until
and after commissioning and testing of the system and/or equipment to the entire
satisfaction of the Employer. The contractor shall allow for any expenses incurred
as a result of compliance to this Clause.
3.25 RETENTION FUND FOR OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL AND AS-INSTALLED DRAWINGS
i) The Contractor shall be required to submit the approved Operation Instructions and
Maintenance Manual (O&M Manual) and the as-installed drawings to the Employer
immediately after the date of completion of the works or the date(s) of phase
completion, if the Works are to be completed in phases. Failing which, a sum equal
to 5% of the contract sum, or the value of work completed in phases where
applicable, shall be retained from the Contract Sum or any sum which may become
payable to the Contractor. The retention fund shall become payable and be paid to
the Contractor only after the approved O & M Manuals and as-installed drawings
are submitted to the Employer. The Employer shall give his comments on the draft
O & M Manual and as-installed drawings within 30 days from the date of each
submission.
3.26 ENGAGEMENT OF DEDICATED M&E COORDINATOR

i) Contractor shall engage a dedicated M&E coordinator of the appropriate grade
to be in charge of all aspects of the design, installation, testing, commissioning,
operation and submission etc. and also certifying of works, drawings, test
reports etc as and when required by the Regulations, Authorities, or the
Employer All necessary drawings in prints/linens required shall also be prepared
and submitted by Contractor for necessary submissions to relevant authorities
etc. All cost incurred in complying with the above shall be fully borne by the
Contractor.

The Engineer and Employer's Representative shall be notified to review the
installation and witness the factory test of Medium Voltage Switchboards, Low
Voltage Switchboards, Medium Voltage Transformers and Standby Generators.
Random/ sampling test shall be carried on the test equipment. The Employer will
witness testing only during normal working hours. All expenses for this test shall
be covered by contractor and no further claims to Employer shall be entertained.
- Data sheets and test records
- Test procedure
- Overall schedule
Unless the test results are in complete conformance with the requirements stated
herein, the Employer will not accept the equipment or authorize the equipment to
be shipped from the factory.

retest as required. If necessary to extend the testing period by additional day(s),
and/or make return trip(s) to the test site, the manufacturer/ contractor shall cover
all expenses incurred by the Employer and/or his representative to witness the
retest. No further claims to Employer shall be entertained for retest.
ETS/018926/20(C&A-3)
DIVISION 26 : ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260513 12KV UNDERGROUND POWER
CABLES, AUXILLARY CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
Where deviation from the above standards is minor, the approval of the
Employer may be given to the use of other national or international standard
prevalent in the Country of manufacture. No departure from the standards
specified will be considered after the contract has been awarded unless
specific authorization in writing has been granted by the Employer.
1.4 Cable Network
The 12KV power system network for which the cables are required is shown
in the drawings. Cables sizes for all feeders and switchgears to transformer
connections are indicated.
1.5 System Earthing
One neutral point of the three-phase 12KV power system is normally

connected to earth through a 6.5 ohm resistor which limits single phase to
earth fault currents to 2000 amperes.
1.6 Auxiliary Supply Voltages
The auxiliary supply voltages shall be 230/400 volt ac and

30 volt dc.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Power Cable and Accessory Ratings
The 12KV power cables and straight through joints shall be rated in
accordance with the relevant standards in 1.3 of this Technical
Specification and as follows:
a Rated frequency : 50Hz
b Rated insulation level :
i Rated voltage : 12KV
ii Five-minutes single
phase AC voltage : 30.5KV
iii Impulse withstand voltage : 95KV peak
2.2 Basis for calculation of Rated Current
The cables shall be laid directly in the ground and the calculation of rated
current shall be based on the following conditions:
a Ground thermal resistivity : 1.2 0 CM/W
ETS/260513/3(C&A-3)
SECTION 260513 12KV UNDERGROUND POWER
CABLES, AUXILLARY CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
The cable sample shall be heated by passing

current through the conductors until the conductor
temperature is 5 C in excess of the rated
temperature.
Test No 10 : High Voltage Test After Impulse Test:
Immediately after the impulse test, the cable sample

shall be subjected to a high voltage test at power
frequency for 15 minutes (on each core) at a voltage
of 32KV r.m.s.
Test No 11 : Pilot cables, supervisory control, telephone cables

and their accessories shall be type tested to their
relevant British Standards or technically equivalent
standards of the country of origin.
3.40.3 Routine Tests
The following routine tests shall be made on the power cables, auxiliary
cables and their accessories:
Test No 1 : Measurement of Conductor Resistance:
Each completed length of cable shall be maintained

at a constant room temperature for at least 12 hours
and if necessary for as long as 24 hours. The d.c.
resistance per kilometre shall be corrected to a
0
temperature of 20 C and this shall not exceed the
appropriate values in IEC 228.
Test No 2 : High Voltage Test:
Each core of each completed length of cables shall

be subjected to a power frequency voltage applied
between conductor and core screen for 5 minutes at
a voltage of 32KV rms. The test shall be made at
room temperature.
Test No 3 : Partial Discharge Test:
Each completed cable length shall be subjected to a

partial discharge test. The test voltage shall be
raised to and held at 2Uo for 10 sec and then slowly
reduced to 1.73Uo, and the sensitivity shall be 10pC
or better.
Test No 4 : Insulation Resistance Test:
ETS/260513/26(C&A-3)
SECTION 260519 LOW TENSION MAIN CABLES
SUBMAINS AND FINAL DISTRIBUTION CABLES
surface wiring and wiring in conduit or duct. The cable shall be fire
resisting, oil resistant and flame retardant to IEC 331, BS 6387 Cat C, W,
Z and IEC 332-3 Cat A. The fire resistant cable shall have low smoke
and halogen content complying to IEC 1034 and IEC 754-2. It shall be
approved by the local authority for use as fire resistant cables in
emergency circuit applications. Test Certificates to substantiate the
compliance to IEC standards shall be submitted with the tender.
ii. The conductor shall be made of stranded, soft annealed copper wires to
IEC 228 Class 2. The outer jacket shall be made of fire retardant
halogen free PVC. Core identification of the cable shall be by colour of
the insulation according to IEE Wring Regulation 17th Edition. The
maximum resistance of the conductors at 20C shall not exceed that
specified in BS 6360.
iii. The cable and accessories shall be designed for operation up to a

conductor temperature of 90C.
iv. The cable shall be suitable for installation by conventional methods

without requiring expensive special tools, seals or terminations. They
shall be non-hygroscopic, maintenance free and insensitive to vibrations.
2.4 Multipair Control Cables
50 pairs Control Cables
The 50 pairs control cable shall conform to BS 3573, BS 6346 suitable

for operation on 110V DC. The control cables shall be PVC insulated
with lead alloy sheath, copper tape shielding, and PVC outersheath.
The conductors shall be high conductivity tinned annealed copper wire of

0.9 mm² and shall comply to BS 6360 and tested for solderability to BS
2011: Part 2. The conductors shall be individually insulated with colour
coded PVC to BS 6746 and BS 6346, twisted into pairs, right hand laid to
form a compact, symmetrical multipair cable.
3. BUSDUCTS
3.1 IP54 Weatherproof Busducts System
3.1.1 i At locations as indicated in Drawings, rising mains comprising busducts

of indicated ampere rating shall be supplied and installed. The busbars
of hard drawn high conductivity aluminium shall be of the totally enclosed
type suitable for a 3 Phase 4 wire 400 volts system with full neutral and
continuous internal earthing facility of 50% cross-sectional area.
ii The design of the busduct system shall be fully type tested and comply
with UL 857 or BS 5486 and the 17th Edition of IEE Regulations for the
Electrical Equipment of Buildings. Certified test reports shall be
submitted at the time of tender submission. The system shall be
complete with all necessary fittings and accessories. The current ratings
of the busducts shall be as indicated in the drawings.
ETS/260519/3(C&A-3)
3.1.2 Housing
The housing shall be of fabricated galvanised sheet steel to provide maximum

protection against water and other contaminants normally encountered during
construction and in service. All hardware shall be cadmium plated or otherwise
suitably protected to prevent corrosion. High quality welds closely spaced along
both sides of the full length of the busbar shall be provided to ensure that the
conductor insulation is held in continuous contact with the housing. The housing
shall withstand, without damage or permanent distortion, short-circuit currents of
36 KA at a service voltage of 400 Volts at 50 Hz for a duration of 1 second. The
housing shall have weatherproof rating of IP54.
External floor flanges which close the opening in the floor around the busducts
shall be installed at each floor to approved fire-rating standard. Housing shall be
finished in grey enamel. Busbars shall be appropriately colour coded.
3.1.3 Temperature Rise
The maximum hot-spot temperature rise at any point in the busduct at

continuous rated load shall not exceed 55 degrees C above a maximum ambient
temperature of 40C in any position. Busbars conductors shall be insulated
along their entire length. Each busbar shall be insulated by two layers of
polyester impregnated fibre glass cloth and busbars shall be separated from
each other and the housing by two layers of suitable insulating material to allow
for movement due to differential expansion between busbars and housing.
3.1.4 Vertical Runs
Vertical riser runs of busways shall be supported with rigid and/or spring
hangers in positions as recommended by the manufacturer. Expansion units
shall be provided where necessary or when directed by the Employer.
3.1.5 Joints
Joints of all ratings shall be of the one bolt type with through bolts which can be
checked for tightness without de-energising the system. There should be
devices on the bolting design to indicate the right amount of torque is achieved.
It shall be possible to make up a joint from one side in the event the busduct is
installed against a wall or ceiling. The joints shall be so designed as to allow
removal of any length without disturbing adjacent lengths. Two suitable springs
shall be provided per bolt to give positive pressure over complete contact area.
3.1.6 Short Circuit Rating
The bus duct, feeder and plug-in shall be braced to withstand the maximum
short-circuit currents of 36 KA at 400 V, 50 Hz for 1 second.
3.1.7 Bus bars
All busbars shall be fabricated from Aluminium and suitably plated at all
electrical contact surfaces. Busbars shall be insulated over the entire length,
ETS/260519/4(C&A-3)
except at joints and contact surfaces, with approved standard insulating

material.
3.1.8 Expansion Joint
Expansion joints shall be provided to accommodate the expansion and

contraction of busbars with respect to the housing. They shall be able to
compensate for the difference in coefficient of expansion of steel housing and
copper busbars. Expansion joint shall be installed in the centre of long runs of
bus duct (at not more than 50 metres interval) and wherever a run of bus duct
crosses an expansion joint in a building.
3.1.9 Plug-in Units
Plug-in units of the types and ratings indicated on the drawings shall be
supplied. Plug-in units shall be to approved standards. Plug-in units shall be
mechanically interlocked with the busduct housing to prevent their installation or
removal while the switch is in the ON position. The enclosure of any pug-in unit
shall make positive ground connection to the duct housing before the stabs
make contact with the busbars. A ground stab shall be provided, where
required, to engage the bus duct internal ground bar. All plug-in units shall be
equipped with a interlock to prevent the cover from being opened while the
switch is in the ON position and to prevent accidental closing of the switch while
cover is open. The plug-in must be provided with a means for padlocking with
the cover closed and the disconnect device in the OFF position. Plug-in units
must be provided with a means for padlocking with the cover closed and the
disconnect device in the OFF position. Plug-in units shall be equipped with a
means for direct positioning or hanging, so that the weight is born by the
busduct housing before the stabs make contact with the busbars. For safety
reasons, no projections shall extend into the busduct housing other than the
plug-in stabs. The plug-in units shall be inter-changeable without alteration or
modification on all ratings of plug-in busduct.
Circuit-breaker type plugs shall have short circuit rating of not less than 36 KA at
400 V 50 Hz for 1 sec.
3.1.10 Accessories
All accessories such as wall flanges, firestops, hangers for wall mounting and
vertical mounting etc, shall be standard manufacturer's accessories.
PART 3 EXECUTION
4. DIRECT TERMINATION
Direct termination points are points providing supply to equipment which are
included in this Contract.
Excess lengths of cables emanating from the cable tray or trunking shall be
coiled up and secured above/on the tray or trunking. The excess lengths of
cable shall be long enough to-reach the equipment's control panel or incoming
ETS/260519/5(C&A-3)
panel which shall be coordinated amongst all the contractors employed in this
Contract. The minimum length shall be 10m.
The termination of the cables to the starter panels or incoming panel shall be
done by the Contractor in this volume. Any discrepancies arising from
differences in location, etc shall not be claimed by the Contractor.
ETS/260519/6(C&A-3)
SECTION 261213 SILICON OIL-FILLED
MEDIUM TRNASFORMER
SECTION 261213 SILICON OIL-FILLED MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Description
a. The scope of works shall include the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of 11,000/415-240 volt silicon oil-immersed distribution
transformer including accessories suitable for indoor installation.
b. The works shall comprise the design, manufacture, routine testing at

manufacturer’s premises, supply, delivery at site and installation,
testing and commissioning at site of silicon oil-immersed distribution
transformer specified herein. The bund wall around each transformer
for oil leakage containment shall form part of the Contractor Scope of
Works.
c. All items of accessories, fittings, sundries, apparatus or labour

whether specified in detail or not but which in the opinion of the
Employer are usual or necessary for the satisfactory completion of the
project shall form part of the work.
1.2 Particular Requirements on Quality Assurance
a. All plant items shall be designed, manufactured and type tested

generally in accordance with the latest revision of the following
standards except where specifically directed otherwise :
Item Standard
(i) Transformers IEC 60076/

BS 171
(ii) High Voltage Testing Technique IEC 60/BS 923
(iii) Measurement of Transformer IEC 60551

and Reactor Sound Levels
(iv) Partial Discharge Measurements IEC 60270
(v) Thermal Evaluation and Classification IEC85/BS2757

of Electrical Insulation
(vi) Classification of Degrees of Protection IEC 60529

Provided by Enclosures
(vii) Cable Boxes for Transformers and Reactors BS 2562
ETS/261213/1(C&A-3)
MEDIUM TRNASFORMER
b. Rated Power
The rated power of the transformer is shown on the Specification

Drawings. This being related to the continuous maximum rating
(CMR) under the climatic condition specified in this section for silicon
liquid natural air natural (KNAN) operation.
c. Rated Voltage Ratio and Tapping Range
(i) The transformer shall be of 3-phase units design for

indoor/outdoor installation and shall be provided with off-load
tap changing equipment.
(ii) The rated voltage ratio of the transformer at no load shall be as

shown on the Specification Drawings, this being related to the
principal tapping of the transformer. Tappings shall be
provided on the high voltage winding to provide variation of
transformer ratio by +5.0%, +2.5%, 0%, -2.5%, -5.0% and -
7.5%. The off circuit method of tap changing shall be
employed.
d. Insulation Level
The insulation levels of the transformer windings shall be rated as

follows :
(i) Highest voltages
HV system voltage 11kV

HV winding 12kV
LV winding 1.1kV
(ii) One-minute power frequency withstand voltages :

HV winding 38kV corresponding to 95kV BIL
LV winding 3kV
(iii) Impulse withstand voltages :

HV winding 95kV
e. Impedance Voltage
The impedance voltage at 75°C at rated voltage, rated frequency,

rated power and on principal tapping shall be as follows :
HV system voltage 11Kv

1MVA 6.00%
ETS/261213/4(C&A-3)
MEDIUM TRNASFORMER
1.6MVA 6.00%
2 MVA 6.00%
2.5 MVA 6.00%
f. Limit of Temperature Rise
The transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at their

rated power without exceeding the winding temperature rise limit as
follows :
In top oil : 60°C

In winding : 65°C
g. Winding Connection and Vector Group
(i) The transformers shall have a high voltage winding and a low
voltage winding.
(ii) The high voltage winding shall be connected in delta and the
low voltage winding in star with the neutral point brought out.
(iii) The vector group symbol shall be Dyn 11 in accordance with

IEC 60076.
h. Efficiency and Losses
The transformer losses shall not exceed the follow :
Capacity No-Load Loss Load Losses (750 C)
1MVA 1.1KW 9.5KW

1.6MVA 1.7KW 14.0KW
2MVA 2.1KW 18.0KW
2.5MVA 2.9KW 26.0KW
i. Ability to Withstand Short Circuit
(i) The transformers shall be capable of withstanding the thermal

and dynamic effects of short circuit currents in accordance with
the requirements of IEC 60076 when operating on any tapping
position including that corresponding to minimum effective
impedance.
(ii) The following information shall be used :
The short circuit apparent power of 11kV system is 1,000MVA

and for 3 seconds.
j. Harmonic Voltages
ETS/261213/5(C&A-3)
SECTION 261313 12KV MEDIUM
VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR & ACCESSORIES
SECTION 261313 – 12KV MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
The intent of this Specification is to define the technical requirements for 12KV
kilo-volt indoor switchgear and accessories.
The switchgear shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the most
up-to-date experience for a system of this voltage level, and shall incorporate the
latest improvements of design and manufacture for the type of switchgear required
as currently employed in the industry.
1.2 Scope of Work
The work shall comprise the design, manufacture, type and routine testing at
manufacturer's premises, supply, delivery to site and installation, testing and
commissioning at site of 12 kilo-volt switchgear equipment listed and described in
the Schedule of Works and Prices and the training of the Authority personnel in the
operation and maintenance of the switchgear.
All items of accessories, fittings, sundries, apparatus or labour whether specified in

detail or not but which in the opinion of the Superintending Officer are usual or
necessary for the satisfactory completion of the switchgear shall form part of the
scope of the works.
1.3 Standards
All plant items shall be designed, manufactured and tested generally in accordance
with the latest revision of the following standards except where specifically directed
otherwise:
Item Standard
Circuit breakers IEC-60056-1 to 56-6

IEC-60298 IEC-60267
BS5311, BS5227
Isolating devices IEC-60129
Earthing devices IEC-60129

IEC-60298
Busbars BS 159
Current transformers BS-3938
Voltage transformers BS-3941
ETS/261313/1(C&A-3)
been awarded unless specific authorization in writing has been granted by the
Employer.
Where the number of the IEC or BS standard is not specifically stated above, the
IEC or BS standard used shall be the one most appropriate to the class of
equipment, material or work done specified by the Contractor.
1.4 Single Line Diagram and System Earthing
The single line diagrams of the substation switchboards included in the Contract are
shown in the drawings.
The 11KV system on which the switchgear is used in normally earthed at one point
through a 6.5 ohm resistor limiting single phase to earth fault currents to a
maximum of 2000 amperes.
1.5 Auxiliary Supply Voltages
The auxiliary supply voltages shall be 230/400V AC and 30 volts DC.
2 PRODUCT: ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PRIMARY COMPONENTS
2.1 Ratings of Primary Components
All primary components of the switchgear comprising of circuit breakers, isolating

devices, earthing devices, busbars, current transformers, voltage transformers and
cable boxes, sealing ends or cable termination shall be rated in accordance with the
relevant standards in Clause 1.3 of this Technical Specification and as follows:
a. Rated Voltage : 12 KV rms
b. Rated frequency : 50Hz
c. Rated insulation level : 12KV
d. One-minute power
frequency withstand voltage : 50KV rms
e. Impulse withstand voltage : 95KV peak
f. Rated short time current : 25 KA rms
e. Rated duration of short circuit : 3 seconds
f. Rated fifteen minutes DC withstand

voltage of parts directly connected
to power cables : 50KV DC
g. Visible or audible corona with

switchgear energised at 17KV phase
ETS/261313/3(C&A-3)
All values in 3.1d shall be in accordance with Table VA of Clause 73, IEC 56-2,
representation by 2-parameters, first pole-to-clear factor= 1.5. Representation of
rated TRV to be in accordance with Clause 7.2, IEC 56-2.
TRV requirements for short-circuit test duties shall be in accordance with IEC 56-4,
and as specified in this Technical Specification.
a Rated power frequency

recovery voltage : 12KV rms
b Rated normal current
Feeder : 1250 amp
11/.415KV transformer : 630 amp
Bus section : 1250 amp
3.2 Switching requirements
The circuit breakers shall comply with the following switching requirements:
The circuit breakers shall be designed to accommodate the TRV

peaks which occur during the breaking of small inductive currents or
cable-charging current normally encountered in a 12KV system.
3.3 Evidence of short circuit type tests
To support the short circuit ratings assigned to the circuit breakers offered, the
Contractor shall submit with his tender a Certificate of Short Circuit Rating or a
Complete Short Circuit Test Report (including oscillographic and photographic
records) issued by a National or International Short-Circuit Testing Authority. The
Certificate or Report shall cover the No-Load Operations and Basic Short Circuit
Test Duties (including Critical Current Tests where necessary) and Short Time
Current Tests as specified in IEC 56.4 and in this Technical Specification.
THE SUBMISSION OF THE CERTIFICATE OR TEST

REPORT WITH THE TENDER IS COMPULSORY
4 ISOLATLATING DEVICES
4.1 Ratings
In addition to the ratings specified in 2.1 of this Technical Specification, the Isolating
Devices shall be rated in accordance with IEC 129 and as follows:
a. Rated peak short-circuit current : 2.5 x 25 peak
b. Rated normal current
ETS/261313/5(C&A-3)
Unless otherwise approved motors shall be of the squirrel cage screen protected
type. The motors shall be suitable for a three-phase 400 volts 50Hz supply. They
shall be suitable for direct starting at full voltage without the use of stardelta
switches, auto-transformer starters, or starting resistances. The motors shall
comply with BS 2613 and shall be continuously rated unless otherwise specified.
The motors shall be supplied by an approved manufacturer.
The starting current at full voltage shall not exceed six times full load current. The
starting current shall be determined by a locked rotor test and if this is carried out at
reduced voltage it shall be made with not less than full load stator current and the
starting current at full voltage shall be taken as the current measured at reduced
voltage increased in the ratio of the full voltage to the reduced voltage. No
tolerance shall be applied when tested in this manner.
14 EXECUTION
14.1 Testing Equipment
The Contractor shall supply at his own expense all testing equipment and
instruments for the testing and commissioning of the switchgears including 50 KV
power frequency test set, 2000 Amp primary injection test set and secondary
current injection test set.
14.2 Tools and Spare Parts
The switchboard shall be delivered to site complete with a full set of tools
operating handles, and special equipment necessary for the maintenance and
operation of the equipment installed.
The recommended list of spare parts shall include itemised prices for each part.
The itemised prices shall apply whether the quantities of recommended spares
are in total or only in part.
14.3 Switch Testing
The Contractor shall only offer switchgear which has an ASTA final proving test
certificate issued by an approved testing station of the Associated of Short Circuit
Testing Authorities (United Kingdom). Test Certificate issued by other
internationally recognised testing Authorities, recognised by PowerGrid is also
acceptable.
14.4 Site Testing and Commissioning
All sites tests whether required by the Superintending Officer shall be carried out
by and at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be represented by
ETS/261313/26(C&A-3)
his competent professional engineer during the whole of the period required for
the tests. All fees connected with the testing and commissioning of equipment
payable by the Contractor to any of the relevant Government Authority or his
authorised Engineer shall be deemed to have been included in the Lump Sum
Tender Price.
All labour, materials, equipment, apparatus and instruments necessary for testing
shall be supplied at no extra cost. All materials and equipment supplied or
erected which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by the
Contractor at his own costs.
The following tests shall be made on Site during erection of the switchgear:-
a) Site Stage Tests:
The following tests shall be made on Site during and on the completion of
erection of the switchgear:
i) Test on Current Carrying and Earthing Connections
All primary conductors and conductors used for the earthing system
shall be tested to ensure full clamping pressure is applied to all
contact surfaces and that all bolted connections are tightly secured
with lock washers. Flexible connections shall be tested to ensure that
sufficient slack is available for expansion.
ii) Tests on Secondary Wiring Circuits
All wiring shall be checked against wiring diagrams provided by the

Contractor and approved by the Superintending Officer. Tests shall be
made to ensure the continuity of each wire.
iii) Operation Tests
The operation of trip and closing devices, mechanism motors, etc.

shall be checked.
iv) Oil Tests
Oil samples shall be taken and their dielectric strength tested for
compliance with BS-148
v) Battery Tests
Battery Units shall be checked and tested for correct output voltage
and proper functioning of charging equipment.
vi) AC Control Panel Tests
ETS/261313/27(C&A-3)
The AC Control Panel for meters, lighting etc. shall be checked for
proper operation.
b) Commissioning Tests
After the erection of the switchgear and its auxiliary items have been
completed, the following commissioning tests shall be made:
i) Operation Tests
The circuit breakers, isolating devices and earthing switches shall be

operated electrically and manually where appropriate.
ii) Power Frequency Voltage Withstand Tests
The completed switchgear shall be subjected to a power frequency

voltage withstand test of 46kV for one minute in accordance with the
Test method specified in IEC 56, IEC 129 and IEC 60.
iii) Primary Current Injection Tests on Protective System
All protective systems shall be tested for correct current transformer

ratio, polarity and relay operation by the primary current injection
method.
iv) Secondary Current Injection Tests on Relays
Relays shall be tested for accuracy and compliance with BS 142

requirements by the secondary current injection method.
v) Secondary Wiring Tests
The insulation of the secondary wires and circuits shall checked with
an insulation tested.
vi) Relay Operation and Tripping Tests
All relays shall be operated to assure the correct tripping of circuit

breakers.
vii) Test On Interlocks
The correct operation of the interlocks shall be checked.
The Contractor’s authorised Professional Engineer shall attend and

perform the turn-on of electricity supplied to the completed works.
ETS/261313/28(C&A-3)
14.5 Test Reports and Certificates
Upon completion of all tests, the Contractor shall submit accurate records of all
tests and test certificates to the Superintending Officer.
14.6 Danger Sign
Permanent DANGER signs shall be supplied and installed at the HV switchroom

in accordance with the Code’s requirements.
14.7 Rubber Mat
A rubber mat of 900mm wide x 6mm thick, which complies with the requirements
of SS 298, shall be supplied and laid in front of the high voltage switchboard.
14.8 Operation/ Maintenance Manual
Five (5) complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals for the HT
switchgears including Drawings shall be provided at no extra cost and shall form
part of the operation and maintenance manual to be provided by the Contractor.
The details of the O&M maunal requirement shall be referred to Particular
Requirement of the Specification.
14.9 Identification and labeling
All parts of the works shall be properly labelled and identified.
Machine engraved traffolyte nameplates shall be provided to identify each major

item of equipment. Similar labels will indicate the function of ancillary equipment.
Lettering shall be black on white background. Name plates for major items of
equipment shall be engraved in lettering of 5mm minimum height.
14.10 Remote Switching and Monitoring
The HT switchgears supplied in this contract shall be SCADA ready. All

necessary sensors, transducers and accessories shall be provided and wired
from the HT equipment to the remote switching panels. The remote switching
panels for the 22kV switchgears shall be supplied and installed in the 22kV
switchgear room. The remote panel shall be proposed and designed by the
switchgear manufacturer and incorporate all safety features to ensure safety
operation of the system.
ETS/261313/29(C&A-3)
When the SCADA system for the Airport is not ready for connection, the
Contractor shall ensure that the requirement for Basys monitoring points are met.
This however does not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility to provide a
complete SCADA ready switchgears complete with the necessary accessories
and wiring.
ETS/261313/30(C&A-3)
SECTION 262400 LOW TENSION SWITCHBOARD
AND DISTRIBUTION BOARD
i. Cubicle Structure
a. The sections and subsections of the switchboard and panel

cubicles shall be modular in design in accordance to IEC 439-
1(99) and shall stand rigidly on top of the floor opening. The
cubicle shall be installed on a framework of channel steel 50mm x
50mm x 2.5mm with flushed cover and panels made of 2mm thick
mild steel plate flanged for added strength and shall be
constructed without any sag, deformation or warping and be able
to withstand the load likely to be experienced during normal
operation, maintenance or under a fault condition of not less than
the calculated fault current. The switchboard shall be constructed
to Form 3 of BS EN 60439-1:1994 (IEC439-1).
b. Each module of section and subsection of the switchboard and

panel cubicles shall be type tested to withstand a fault level. The
cubicle shall have pressure relieving roof and rear panels.
c. Full access shall be provided to the control equipment inside the

cubicles by means of suitable door, secured in closed position by
means of recessed key operated catches, which shall be
mechanically interlocked with the controlling switch, to prevent the
door from being opened with the switch in the 'ON' position. The
doors shall be fitted with strengthening strips to give the
necessary rigidity. Rear panel door for every detachable module
shall be full height, hinged detachable and fitted with recessed key
operated catches.
d. The cubicles shall be constructed with degree of protection IP42

and shall also meet the special requirement for use in local
climates.
e. All the doors shall be fitted with neoprene gasket affixed to the
frame.
ii. Surface Finish
a. The finish of the switchboard and panel enclosure shall be epoxy

power coated to a thickness of 100 microns and shall withstand
impact resistance of 220 lbs in accordance to BS 3900. The
surface shall be of semi-gloss finish and colour to RAL 7032 or as
directed by the Employer The surface hardness shall be to 2H
pencil and shall be highly resistant to acids, alkalis and oil.
b. The surface shall be pre-treated by zinc and iron phosphating.

The epoxy powder coating shall then be applied by a electrostatic
spray system to the specified thickness. The finish is then to be
oven baked at a temperature of 190C for 10 minutes.
iii. Labelling
ETS/262400/4(C&A-3)
SECTION 262400 LOW TENSION SWITCHBOARD
AND DISTRIBUTION BOARD
i. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements on BMS monitoring

and control as laid down in this Specification.
ii. For floor standing low tension electrical switchboard and panel at all the
low tension electrical switch rooms and load centre shall come with a
separate BMS interface compartment. For panel having top access for
BMS cables, the Contractor shall provide a separate vertical cable
compartment at the side of the panel. For each switchboard panel
housing air circuit breakers, MCCB, automatic transfer switches and
contactors and for each starter panel for air-conditioning and mechanical
equipment, the Contractor shall provide a separate BMS interfacing
compartment containing interfacing terminal blocks.
iii. The BMS interfacing compartment shall be front access. The Contractor
shall connect the designated BMS monitoring and control points of the
individual switching/starting equipment to the interfacing terminal block by
approved control cables.
iv. Control Cables (twisted pair) of 1.5mm² shall also be laid from the BMS
interfacing compartment to a Distributed Digital Controller for interfacing
with the BMS. These control cables shall be installed in orange coloured
trunking. Contractor shall also liase closely the BMS contractor during the
configuration of software for the BMS system, including providing all
necessary graphics, transducers and etc.
6. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
6.1 General
i. All air circuit breakers (ACBs) to be 4 poles and shall comply fully with
IEC60947-2:1995 (including all the latest amendments, if any). The
incoming air circuit breakers shall have a rated short-time withstand
current (Icw) of not less than 70kA for 1 seconds at 400V 50Hz. This
compliance shall be certified by ASEFA, ASTA or other internationally
recognised testing authority.
ii. The continuous rated current of all the air circuit breakers, at an
ambient temperature stated in ambient conditions of General
Requirement Section 018926, shall be as shown in the single-line
drawings. To ensure uninterrupted optimum performance of circuit
breakers inside the switchboards, there shall be no temperature related
de-rating imposed on circuit breakers when operating at an ambient
temperature of up to 70°C.
6.2 Construction
i. All air circuit breakers shall be of draw-out type encased in metal clad
housings. It shall have an IP rating of not less than IP42.The design of
the breaker shall be such that there is no compulsory safety clearance
imposed around the breakers, in order to optimise the switchboard
designs.
ii. The ACBs shall comprise of fixed and moving main and arcing contacts
ETS/262400/10(C&A-3)
SECTION 263323 CENTRAL BATTERY
EQUIPMENT
20% spare capacity and shall be designed for operation in an ambient

temperature stated in ambient conditions of General Requirement
Section 018926.
e A 10A 30V DC supervisory relay shall be provided and wired to the

terminal block which shall be provided in this contract for linking up to
the Building Automation System supplied and installed by others.
2.2 Automatic Charger
a Battery charger shall be automatic constant voltage type using

thyristor control rectifier to provide continuous float charging of the
battery bank under normal condition.
b The charger shall incorporate two-rate charging with automatic

adjustment of the output in direct relation with the condition of battery
to ensure minimum battery water losses and maintenance.
c Output ripple of the charger shall be minimised and shall not exceed
the safe permissible level recommended by the battery manufacturer.
2.3 Protection
a The system shall incorporate all protective devices necessary for the
safe and satisfactory operation of the system. All protective devices
shall be mounted on printed circuit board and shall be arranged in a
neat manner to facilitate easy maintenance.
b The protective devices and the charger shall be installed in an cubicle

unit fabricated from sheet steel, properly strength rust inhibited and
finished with glossy grey paint over two under coat.
c The protective devices shall include but not limited to the following:
. Circuit breakers with thermal and magnetic trip;
. Surge suppression protection against transient mains voltage;
. High speed fuses for thyristor diode, transformer secondaries

and all auxiliary circuits;
. Earth fault protection;
. Adjustable current limiting device for battery protection;
. Charger over-voltage protection to shut off the charger when

output voltage exceed 15% of the nominal voltage;
. Diode voltage regulator to regulate output voltage to load within

the specified +5% limit during boost charging;
ETS/263323/2(C&A-3)
EQUIPMENT
. Radio interference suppression devices to limit the interference

in accordance to BS 800/72.
2.4 Standard
The equipment and material used and the method of construction as

applicable shall conform to the following latest international standards.
These standards shall be the minimum requirement of equipment.
i) VDE 0510 - Specifications for Electric Storage Batteries and Battery

Plants
ii) IEC 60146 - Specifications for semi-conductor converters
2.5 Monitoring and Control
a The monitoring and control devices as specified hereunder shall also

be provided and installed on the charger cubicle front panel:
. Indication lamp
. AUTO
. MAINS ON
. MAINS OFF
. BOOST CHARGING
. Instrumentation
. One (1) AC ammeter and voltmeter with selector switch
. One (1) DC ammeter each for rectifier and battery current
. One (1) DC voltmeter
. DC high and low voltage monitoring device
. DC earth fault protective device
. Rectifier output voltage monitoring device
. Battery low electrolyte level indication
. Fused outgoing to DC loads
. Indication lamps for alarm signals
ETS/263323/3(C&A-3)
EQUIPMENT
. Control Switches
. AUTO/MANUAL charging selector switch
. Manual FLOAT/BOOST charging selector switch
. Mains ON/OFF switch
b The contractor shall provide all interfacing devices for remote

supervisory monitoring of the DC system by BASYS:
. Main supply to charger on/off
. Charger failure alarm
. Low DC output alarm of battery bank.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 The Central Battery Equipment shall be installed in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. It shall also in
compliance with regulations imposed by the Local Power Authority.
3.2 The entire Central Battery Equipment shall be properly leveled and sealed
with steel plates, grounting or screens.
3.3 SITE TESTS AND COMMISSIONING
All sites tests whether required by the Employer shall be carried out by and at
the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be represented by his
competent professional engineer during the whole of the period required for
the tests. All fees connected with the testing and commissioning of
equipment payable by the Contractor to any of the relevant Government
Authority or his authorised Engineer shall be deemed to have been included
in the Tendered Price.
All labour, materials, equipment, apparatus and instruments necessary for

testing shall be supplied at no extra cost. All materials and equipment
supplied or erected which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once
by the Contractor at his own costs.
ETS/263323/4(C&A-3)
SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
i) Read and conform to all electrical Sections of these specifications. The

general instructions for electrical Division, Section 018926, apply to and form
part of all electrical Sections.
1.2 COORDINATION WITH CEILING SERVICES
Contractor shall coordinate and provide the following :
i) Rectangular openings for recessed lighting fixtures in gypsum board ceilings

will be framed by the gypsum board. Supply dimensions for openings to the
gypsum board division, and ensure that the openings are correctly located.
Similarly, circular openings for recessed downlights on ceiling panels shall
be provided.
ii) Supply rings for other recessed fixtures, and install in conjunction with the
ceiling gird, gypsum board, ceiling panels.
iii) Coordinate with other Divisions to ensure the correct location and installation
of the plaster frames and rings.
1.3 SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS
i) Submit shop drawings as specified in Section 018926.
ii) Submit schedules and samples of each fixture specified, to the Engineer for
approval. If, applicable no additional fixtures shall be manufactured until
samples has been duly approved.
iii) Approved samples shall be retained on the Job site until project completion.
Fixtures which do not match quality and workmanship standards of the
sample will be rejected.
iv) Provide photometric data with each fixture sample.
1.4 SCOPE OF WORKS
i) The scope of work shall cover the supply, design, manufacture, testing in the
factory, packing, insurance, delivery to site, unloading, installation, testing
and commissioning of all components with all the necessary accessories in
accordance with this technical specification.
ii) Contractor is required to provide individual suspension frame, necessary

brackets and additional supporting C channels, strusses, wire for individual
luminaires from the secondary grid or sofit. The details of the suspension
works and material shall be submitted to Employer for approval.
ETS/265100/1 (C&A-3)
iii) Junction box with quick male & female connection shall be provided for each
luminaire for ease of removal for testing or maintenance.
iv) The Contractor is required to provide Tee-off cable support such as metal
trunking / galvanized steel conduit to all components and devices from the
main tray and trunking routing.
v) The associated building works such as wiring, hacking, coring of openings,

chiseling of channels on wall and columns and reinstatement to required
finishes, sealing with fire stop material are deemed to be included in the
Contract.
1.5 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
1.5.1 Lightings for general passenger and common area shall be controlled by
Lighting DB via Building Management System.
1.5.2 Lighting for Departure Hall at Level 3.
i) Contractor shall design, supply, deliver, install, commission, test and maintain a
fully operational and reliable lighting control system for the main departure hall
at level 3 using distributed digital controllers interfacing with Building
Management System. Contractor shall submit proposal to the client for approval
prior to actual implementation. Contractor is required to carry out lighting mock
up and make necessary adjustment to the mock up to meet client approval.
Please refer to ‘ Lighting Control Schematic for Lighting Below Main Roof ’ for
reference.
ii) Each controller shall monitor 2 numbers of photo cell sensors to measure the
lighting level outside the building. Power supply to each controller shall be
backup by individual UPS system for one hour.
iii) The departure hall shall have three stage lightings depending on external light
condition. Signal from photo sensors together with digital controller shall be used
to control the departure hall lights.
External Lighting Level Status of Normal Status of Status of UPS

Board Lights Emergency Board Lights
Board Lights
< 22,000 lux ON ON ON
22,000 < x < 40,000 lux OFF ON ON
>40,000 lux OFF OFF ON
Contractor is required to carry out necessary programming, calibration and

adjustment of the above settings and programming of Building Management
System during testing and commissioning. The control algorithm shall take into
account of transition between one stage to another stage to avoid intermittent
switching.
iv) The controller shall have flexibility in setting the timer control of lightings
depending on the season of the year.
ETS/265100/2 (C&A-3)
v) Photocell sensors that have a wide range dynamic shall be used. Typical range
shall be 4000 lux to 50,000 lux level. Output of the sensor shall be 4-20mA.
vi) The distributed controller shall receive inputs from the photocell sensors. It shall
interface with building management system to allow remote monitoring and
control of the lightings system.
vii) Contractor is required to include a means to by pass the lighting control system
in case of failure.
viii) Mock up for the lighting control system and calibration input signal from
photocell to control the lights shall be carried out on site to demonstrate the
operational and functional of the system. Contractor is required to modify and
make changes to the mock up to meet client satisfaction. The cost of the mock
up shall be inclusive in the final tender price. The control of lighting circuits shall
take in consideration of the external lighting conditions and in-building ambient
lighting condition Upn successful demonstration of the mock up test, contractor
shall implement the scheme on the departure hall lights system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i) Lighting fixtures shall be as listed in the lighting fixture schedule and as

detailed in this specification.
ii) Before placing orders for any recessed lighting fixtures check the room
finishes to ensure that fixtures are coordinated with the ceiling and
compatible with the ceiling support grid. The colour of the light fixtures shall
match the colour of the ceiling or wall.
iii) Fixtures shall be delivered completely assembled and in their original

cartons. No fixtures shall be delivered to or stored within the building or on
the site until dry and protected space is available.
iv) Steel fixture bodies and components shall be painted after all forming,
cutting and fabrication are complete. Pre-painted steel will not be accepted.
v) Luminaries shall be complete with integral high power factor correction

control gear to give a power factor between 0.9 and unit 1.
vi) Ensure dimmable electronic control gear is provided where light fixture are to
be dimmed.
vii) Fluorescent or metal halide lamps to be troposphere color temp 3000 K for
passenger or public areas. For offices and M&E plant rooms, the colour
temperature for the lamp shall be 4000K.
viii) All control gear shall be high frequency.
ETS/265100/3 (C&A-3)
ix) Light fixtures shall be manufactured in Europe and will bear certificates
ensuring compliance with all European Norms. Light fixtures manufactured in
alternate countries may be considered based on performance, reliability,
durability and at the discretion of the Employer. Once the decision is made,
Contractor shall proceed with the procurement based on project and
Employer will not entertain any claim of expenses or losses thereafter.
2.2 LUMINAIRE TYPE L1
2.2.1 Luminaire L1 is a 2W LED emergency EXIT sign used along escape route,
is a ceiling recessed fitting or wall type. The mode of operation shall be
maintained type.
2.2.2 The battery shall be made from nickel cadmium with controlled dual rate
charging mode. Safety feature such as low voltage cut off to prevent
battery over discharge shall be incorporated in the luminaire.
2.2.3 Micro switch shall be provided to facilitate testing of battery discharge.
2.2.2 This luminaire required to be approved by Local Fire Authority and

complied with BS5499 Part 2.
2.2.3 This illuminated exit sign required to provide 1 years warranty with effect
from the date of practical completion of this project.
2.2.4 The housing of the luminaire shall be of electro galvanized steel with
epoxy power coating. The diffuser faceplate shall be of fire retardant
moulded acrylic. The faceplate of this luminaire shall consist of the
following types:
i) Single sided EXIT sign with no arrow;
ii) Single sided EXIT sign with right directional arrow;
iii) Single sided EXIT sign with left directional arrow;
iv) Single sided EXIT sign with right and left directional arrow;
v) Double sided EXIT sign with right directional arrow;
vi) Double sided EXIT sign with left directional arrow;
vii) Double sided EXIT sign with right and left directional arrow.
2.2.5 The Contractor shall require provide two illuminated exit sign back-to-
back for double face exit sign as shown in the specification drawings.
2.2.6 The luminaire shall comply with ENEC/CE.
2.3.1 Luminaire L2 is a batten fluorescent fitting equipped with 2 x 36 watt tri-

phosphor fluorescent lamps, electronic ballast and white sheet steel
reflector.
2.3.2 The fitting shall equipped with a full angle symmetrical reflector for
pendant mounted and asymmetrical reflector for wall mounted.
ETS/265100/4 (C&A-3)
2.3.3 The lamps shall have colour temperature of 4000°K with a minimum
colour rendering index of 85.
2.4.2 Luminaire L3 is a IP66 weatherproof, dust proof fluorescent fitting

equipped with 2 x 36 watt tri-phosphor fluorescent lamps, electronic
ballast and white sheet steel reflector.
2.4.2 The housing of the luminaire shall be made of fiber glass reinforced
polyester with acrylic pearled cover. The fixation of the cover shall be
using integrated fixation points.
2.4.3 The lamps shall have colour temperature of 4000°K with a minimum
2.5.1 Luminaire L4 is a surface mounted fluorescent luminaire. This luminaire

shall be equipped with 2 x 36 Watt fluorescent Lamps, electronic ballast
and high efficient mirror optics.
2.5.2 The lamps to be of 4000 deg K colour temperature and with a minimum
2.5.3 The size and colour of the exposed luminaire housing to match with the
ceiling paintwork. The size and colour of the exposed luminaire housing is
subject to Employer's approval.
2.5.4 The Mirror optics shall be of optimised reflector geometry and three-
dimensional curved lamella. It shall comply with CIBSE LG3 and DIN
5035/7, with the average luminance of less than 200 cd/sq m at 65
degrees and the patch luminance of less than 500 cd/sq m in all
direction. It shall be constructed with high quality, pre-anodised high
gloss aluminium material of purity not less than 99.95, giving absolute
100% iridescence-free reflection. The thickness of the anodising film
shall be at least 4 micron.
ETS/265100/5 (C&A-3)
2.6.2 Luminaire L5 is a recessed mounted fluorescent luminaire. This luminaire

shall be equipped with 4 x 14 Watt T5 flourescent Lamps, electronic
ballast and high efficient directional Luminance Control mirror optics.
ceiling grid size and paintwork. The size and colour of the exposed
luminaire housing is subject to Employer's approval.
2.7.1 Luminaire L6 is a fully recessed circular shape technical downlight

equipped with 2 x 18 Watts PLC compact fluorescent lamp horizontally
mounted complete with electronic ballast. This luminaire to have highly
efficient internal high-gloss optic with vertical facets and shall fully comply
with glare recommendations of DIN 5035/7 BAP60 and CIBSE LG3 cat2.
The fitting to have no stray light emitted into the ceiling void. The lamp
socket shall be G24d3.
2.7.2 The lamps shall have colour temperature of 3000K and the colour
rendering index shall be not less than 85.
2.7.3 This luminaire shall come with a decorative ring made of polycarbonate
with bayonet to be clicked on the technical ring of the downlight. The
colour of the decorative ring to match the ceiling colour or other colour as
decided by the Employer. A decorative glass diffuser shall be fixed in the
inner part of the decorative downlight ring. The fitting should have no stray
lights into the ceiling void.
2.7.4 The reflector shall be of high quality aluminium with silver finish. The
luminance intensity should not exceed 200 cd/m2 at 60 angle, achieving
a light output ratio of more than 0.57.
2.7.5 The lamps shall be accessed from below the luminaire for maintenance
purposes.
ETS/265100/6 (C&A-3)
2.8.1 Luminaire L7 shall be similar to type L6 luminaire except it come with

2 x 26 Watts PLC compact fluorescent lamp horizontally mounted and
complete with electronic ballast.
2.9. LUMINAIRE TYPE L8
2.9.1 Luminaire L8 shall be similar to type L6 luminaire except it come with

1 x 70 watts Mastercolour ceramic discharge (CDM) metal halide lamp and
complete with integral electronic control gear box. The control gear shall
be integral mounted with the luminaire and shall be easily retrieve for
maintenance.
2.19.1 Luminaires L9 is a decorative surface mounted up and down wall washer

with super lighting distribution for 1 X 150W CDM metal haldie lamp.
These luminaires shall be equipped with necessary mounting brackets.
2.10.2 These luminaires comprise of integral electronic control gear and they
shall be constructed from corrosion resistant die-cast aluminium. The
luminaire shall consist of a concealed tampered glass lens. Internal
reflector shall made of anodised purity aluminium for superb lighting
distribution.
2.10.3 These luminaires shall have polyester power coated finished with high
resistance to U.V. rays. They shall be dust proof and jet proof to IP 55.
2.10.4 These luminaires shall be mounted to the wall. The exposed luminaires
housing shall have the matching paintwork as the wall or colour as
approved by the Employer.
ETS/265100/7 (C&A-3)
2.11.1 Luminaire L10 is a fully recessed circular shape downlight equipped with
cardanic swivel system on two axis to adjust 40 degree in all direction.
The lamp shall 1 x 70 Watts CDM metal halide lamp complete with
electronic ballast. Square cut out with aluminium trimming shall be
provided.
2.11.2 This luminaire to have highly efficient internal high-gloss optic with vertical
facets and shall fully comply with glare recommendations of DIN 5035/7
BAP60 and CIBSE LG3 cat2. The fitting to have no stray light emitted
into the ceiling void.
purposes.
2.11.5 The luminaire shall comply to ENEC/CE.
2.12.1 Luminaire L11 is a adjustable projector floodlight with wide beam optics
and integral gear. This luminaire shall be equipped with 1 X 150W CDM-
T lamp of 3000 deg K colour temperature and a minimum colour
rendering index of 85. The control gear shall be remotely mounted. The
luminaire size shall be approximately 270 mm (L) X 260 mm (W) X 280
mm (H).
2.12.2 A barndoor shutter shall be provided for glare control if required. The
cost of the shutter is deemed to be included in the tendered price.
2.12.3 The luminaire shall be provided with customized supporting U bracket

and locking devices for locking the position of the luminaire. The
luminiare shall be securing to the ceiling support and equipped with
handle fixture so as to facilitate lifting when maintaining the luminaire
from above the ceiling. Contractor is required to propose and provide
the necessary supporting and mounting of the luminaire for Employer’s
approval. All associated cost is deemed to be included in the tendered
price.
2.12.4 This luminaire shall be made from non-corrosive, die-cast aluminium

housing, injection-moulded polycarbonate/polyamide gear box, high-
grade anodised aluminium reflector, UV filter.
2.12.5 The luiminaire shall be accessed from above ceiling catwalk for
maintenance purposes.
ETS/265100/8 (C&A-3)
2.13.1 Luminaire L12 shall be a high efficiency asymmetric floodlight with integral
gear and for down throw low-glare lighting. This luminaire shall house
1 x 150 Watts high pressure metal halide with colour temperature of
4200K and with full spectrum colour rendering index of at least 80.
2.13.2 This luminaire shall be of non corrosive, high-pressure diecast aluminium

housing, painted black, injection-moulded polycarbonate/polyamide gear
box, high-grade anodised aluminium reflector, 5mm-thick toughened glass,
silicone rubber seals, stainless steel mounting bracket.
2.13.3 Contractor shall be required to design and fabricate additional mounting

galvanized steel brackets where necessary to secure the luminaire in a
sturdy position. The associated cost is deemed to be included in the
tendered price.
2.13.4 This luminaire to be of dustproof and jetproof to IP55 or better.
2.14.1 Luminaire L13 shall be a high efficiency symmetrical decorative uplighting

floodlight with integral gear and for up throw low-glare lighting. This
luminaire shall house 1 x 150 Watts high pressure metal halide with colour
temperature of 3000K and with full spectrum colour rendering index of at
least 80.

housing, powder coated to white color, with matching colour gear box,
high-grade anodised aluminium reflector, 5mm-thick toughened glass,

tendered price.
2.15.1 Luminaire L14 shall be a high efficiency symmetrical decorative floodlight

with integral gear and for down throw low-glare lighting. This luminaire
shall house 1 x 250 Watts high pressure metal halide with colour
temperature of 3000K and with full spectrum colour rendering index of at
ETS/265100/9 (C&A-3)
least 80.

housing, powder coated to light grey tone, with matching colour gear box,

tendered price.
2.15.4 This luminaire to be of dustproof and jetproof to IP55.

housing, painted black, injection-moulded polycarbonate/polyamide gear
box, high-grade anodised aluminium reflector, 5mm-thick toughened glass,

tendered price.

housing in metallic finish, die-cast aluminium gear box in metallic finish,

galvanized steel brackets for securing the luminaire in a sturdy position on
ETS/265100/10 (C&A-3)
the roof. The associated cost is deemed to be included in the tendered

price. Contractor is required to take precaution not to damage the roof
membrane when bolting down the luminaire. Contractor may engage
specialist to provide solution and install the luminaire according to
recommendation. All associate cost is deemed to be included in the
tendered price.
2.18.1 Luminaire L17 is a fully recessed circular shape downlight equipped with
adjustable tilting system. The lamp shall 1 x 150 Watts CDM metal halide
lamp complete with electronic ballast. Round cut out with aluminium
trimming shall be provided.
2.18.2 This luminaire to have highly efficient internal high-gloss optic with vertical
facets and shall fully comply with glare recommendations of DIN 5035/7
BAP60 and CIBSE LG3 cat2. The fitting to have no stray light emitted
into the ceiling void.
purposes.
2.18.5 The luminaire shall comply to ENEC/CE.
2.19.1 Luminaire L18 is a adjustable projector light with wide beam optics and
integral gear. This luminaire shall be equipped with 1 X 150W CDM-T
lamp of 3000 deg K colour temperature and a minimum colour rendering
index of 85. The control gear shall be remotely mounted.The luminaire
size shall be approximately 200 mm (Radius) X 260 mm (W) .
2.19.2 The luminaire shall be provided with customized supporting U bracket

and locking devices for locking the position of the luminaire. The
luminiare shall be securing to the ceiling support. Contractor is required
to propose and provide the necessary supporting and mounting of the
luminaire for Employer’s approval. All associated cost is deemed to be
included in the tendered price.
2.19.3 This luminaire shall be made from non-corrosive, die-cast aluminium

housing, injection-moulded polycarbonate/polyamide gear box, high-
grade anodised aluminium reflector, UV filter.
ETS/265100/11 (C&A-3)
2.19.4 The luiminaire shall be accessed from below ceiling for maintenance
purposes.
2.20.1 Luminaire L19 is a self-contained high intensity emergency floodlight

equipped 2 X 20W high intensity Tungsten Halogen lamp.
2.20.2 The fitting shall come with maintenance free batteries. It should be sealed
lead acid type and shall be able to provide emergency lighting up to 3
hours.
2.20.3 The luminaire shall be design with powder coated finishes aluminium steel
enclosure with hingeless front access. The lamp housing shall be circular
polycarbonate housing come with white clear polycarbonate lens.
2.20.4 The discharging circuitry of the luminaire shall incorporate low voltage cut
out to prevent battery damage at the end of the emergency duration.
2.21.1 Luminaire L20 shall be wall mounted security light fitting come with high
performance aluminium reflector and polycarbonate reflector bowl
producing excellence light distribution for low level lighting of wall and
surrounding. This luminaire shall house with 1 x 70 Watts SON lamp with
colour temperature of 2300K.
2.21.2 The housing of the luminaire shall be of non corrosive diecast aluminium.
The colour of the housing is subject to S.O.'s selection. The screw and
mounting bracket of the shall be of non corrosive stainless steel.
2.21.3 The IP rating for this luminaire to be IP54.

shall be equipped with 2 x 18 Watt fluorescent lamps, electronic ballast
ETS/265100/12 (C&A-3)

shall be equipped with 1 x 36 Watt fluorescent lamps, electronic ballast
2.24.1 Luminaire L23 is a surface mounted linear frame downlights equipped

with 1x39 Wattt fluorescent lamp, horizontally mounted complete with
integrated electronic ballast/ control gear and asymmetric reflector.
2.24.2 The lamp shall be of 3000K deg K colour temperature and with colour
rendering index not less than 85.
2.24.3 It shall be in non corrosive die cast and extruded aluminium housing
complete with highly polished reflector in silver aluminium finished. The
UV-stabilized clear polycarbonate diffuser is vandal proof and shock
resistance. The lamp housing can be accessed by removing the diffuser.
ETS/265100/13 (C&A-3)
2.24.4 The adjustable arm mechanism allows the lamp housing to swivel along a
horizontal axis of +/- 90 deg. Two graduated ferrules lock the lamp
housing through an allen screw once the right inclination is set.
2.24.5 The terminal block is situated on the back of the fitting. Through wiring is
possible with M20 cable glands.
2.25.1 Luminaire L24 is an twin LED fixed obstacle light each with intensity not
less than 10 candelas of aviation red light. The LED light nominal operating
voltage shall be 230V. The LED light is separated in 4 groups and supply
by a stabilised constant current generator. The LED light output
degradation should not more than 30% after 100,000 hours of operation.
2.25.2 The LED shall be enclosed in clear glass cover come with cast aluminium
base. All metal part shall be corrosion resistance.
2.25.3 The IP rating of this luminaire shall be IP65.
2.25.4 The luminaire shall comply with ICAO requirements.
ETS/265100/14 (C&A-3)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
i) Install rows of lighting fixtures accurately, in line and level. Any fixtures which
in the opinion of the Engineer are not installed properly in the opinion of the
Engineer shall be taken down and reinstalled to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at no change to the contract sum.
ii) Install surface mounted fixtures light to the ceiling without showing a space
or light leak between the frame and the ceiling, except where fixtures have
an upward indirect light component.
iii) Support suspended fixtures of mild steel threaded rod as recommended by

the manufacturer with a minimum number of two supports per fixture.
iv) Where fixtures are chain hung, the chain shall be No. 10T single jack chain,
galvanized with 20kg working load limit. Run fire resistant cable down chains
to fixtures and attach to chains with cable clips. Additional stainless steel
safety wire shall be provided to secure the light fixtures.
v) Attach fixtures, boxes or supports to concrete slabs with minimum 6mm dia.
Bolts and metal expansion anchors. Submit samples of anchors to Engineer
for approval before installation.
vi) Locate fixture hangers on the tile centers or intersections. Mount recessed
incandescent, troffers and surface-mounted fixtures in or on full tiles.
vii) Do not mount fixtures pipes, ducts or ceiling mounted equipment. In the
event of unavoidably tight locations, provide hangers to clear the
obstructions. Check layouts of other trades on the job and plan
cooperatively. Hang fixtures in any room at one height unless indicated
otherwise. Support fixtures independently of mechanical ducts.
viii) Support all lighting fixtures independently of suspended ceiling.
ix) Obtain the Employer’s approval before making any changes to fixtures
layouts.
x) Install louvers after other construction work has been completed and are is
made ready for occupancy. Handle louvers with clean gloves, never with
bare hands. Replace or clean nay louvers, which are finger printed or
otherwise marked to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
xi) Drilling of structural steel beams is no permitted. Fixing to steel work shall
utilize proprietary steel clamps.
xii) Connections to luminaries were ceiling tile is accessible shall be via a plug-in
ceiling rose wired in heat resistant double insulated cable. Ceiling rose to be
mounted within 1000mm of fight fixture.
xiii) Connections to luminaries where the ceiling is not accessible such as dry
wall and the like shall be via OHLS flexible conduit with no terminations
above the ceiling.
ETS/265100/15 (C&A-3)
xiv) Fluorescent fixtures shall be aligned parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
area they serve.
ETS/265100/16 (C&A-3)
DIVISION 27 : COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 271000 STRUCTURED CABLE, VOICE & DATA
SECTION 27I000 – STRUCTURED CABLE NETWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
CABLING REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 The scope of works shall include the design, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of structure cable network complete with racks, core switches,
distribution switches, edge switches, power supply units, patch cords, patch panels and
all necessary accessories for fiber optic cables and CAT6 cables.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the fixing of trunking, conduits, internal
distribution wires. Telephone sockets, distribution frames and the provision for entry of
external cables into the buildings and as indicated on the drawings or as detailed in the
specification shall also be installed and provided by the Contractor.
1.1.3 All work shall be as per PTCL regulations and approval.
1.1.4 The contractor shall also ensure the getting of all relevant NOC’s etc from PTCL.
1.1.5 The Contractor is required to provide Tee-off cable support such as metal trunking /
galvanized steel conduit to all components and devices from the main tray and trunking
routing.
1.1.6 The associated building works such as wiring, hacking, coring of openings, chiseling of
channels on wall and columns and reinstatement to required finishes, sealing with
approved fire stop material are deemed to be included in the Contract.
1.1.7 The associated suspension for equipment, components, detection devices, necessary
brackets and additional supporting C channels or strusses were deemed to include on
the Contract.
1.1.8 Contractor shall propose, design and co-ordinate all installations of the systems with
architectural finishes, structural elements and services from other packages such as
MATV, Security Access System, CCTV, Radio Communications System, Master Clock
system, PA System, FIDS System, Gate Management System, etc. There shall be no
additional cost to the client.
1.1.9 DEFINITION
Cables are divided into two main categories:
a) Copper cables; and
b) Optical fibre cables
1.1.10 Copper cables typically are made up of one or more cable elements in an overall
insulated jacket. A cable element consists of an insulated solid or stranded copper core.
The mode of transport is by electrical signals. Twisted pair cable is a typical balanced
cable with one or more pairs of cable elements twisted together, each pair of elements
ETS/27I000/1(C&A-3)
transmitting a differential signal.
1.1.11 Optical fibre cables typically are made up of one or more insulated glass fibre strands,
covered with an overall insulation jacket. The number of strands is the core rating of
the cable, typically, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 36, 48, 72, 96 and 144. The mode of transport is
by light. The glass fibre consists of two layers of material with different optical
densities (i.e. core and cladding). The difference in optical densities between the core
and cladding is needed to refract the light transmitted close to the central axis to maintain
transmission continuity. Two types of optical fibre cables are required in this project,
namely, single mode and multimode fibres – differentiated by their core diameters and
material quality.
1.1.12 Cable Runs versus Cables
(a) There is a need to distinguish between cable runs and cables. A cable run is a
pre-installed cable into the premise, while a cable is the material used for a cable run, as
well as for station cords/patch cords/jumpers.
(b) A cable run shall consist of straight-through cable elements, i.e. the ordering of
the cable elements attached to the connectors at both ends of cable is the same. This is
opposed to cross cables, in which the order of attachment of some cable elements is
swopped.
1.1.13 Relevant Standards
(a) This Technical Specification is based on the recommendations of international

cabling standards, and provides additional guidelines and recommendations
suitable for the Structured Cabling System in areas where the standards left
unspecified, deficient or ambiguous.
(b) However, this document is not intended as a replacement or summary for the
actual documents of the international cabling standards. It does not spell out all
details of the standards; reference to the standards will be given instead. Please
refer to the actual standards for complete reference.
(c) The following table lists the applicable standards referenced. The latest edition of
each standard shall be referred.
Applicable Standards I Description

Cabling Standards
ANSI/EIA/TIA 526-14A Optical Power Loss Measurement of
Installed Multimode Fibre Cable Plant
ANSI/EIA/TIA 526-7 Optical Power Loss Measurement of
Installed Single mode Fibre Cable Plant
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.I
Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard, General Requirements
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.2-1 Performance Specification for 4-Pair IO0 Ohm
Category 6 Cabling
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.3-1 Additional Transmission Perf ormance
Specifications for 50/125m Optical Fibre
Cables
ETS/27I000/2(C&A-3)
ISO/IEC 11801 (2nd

Information Technology – Generic Cabling for
Edition)
Customer Premises (International Standards)
EN 50173 Information Technology – Generic Cabling
Systems (CENELEC Standards)
Building and Installation Standards
ANSI/EIA/TIA 569-B
Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Space
BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service
International TDM Manual
EIA-570 Residential and Light Commercial
Telecommunications Wiring standard
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications
Wiring Standard
Component Specification
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.2 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling
Components Standard
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.3
TIA/EIA-568-1 Optical Fibre Cabling Components
Standard
TIA/EIA-568-2
IEC 60603-7 Modular Connector Physical
Dimensions, Mechanical and Electrical
Characteristics
Applicable Standards Description
Grounding and bonding
EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

EN 50081-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility – Generic Emission
Standard – Part 1: Residential, Commercial
and Light Industry
EN 50082-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility – Generic
Immunity Standard – Part 1:
Residential, Commercial and Light
Industry
EN 55022/CISPR 22 Limits and Methods of Measurement of
Radio Interference Characteristics of
Information Technology
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) - 70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
ICEA
ETS/27I000/3(C&A-3)
Administration and labelling

ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for Commercial
Telecommunications Infrastructure – May
2002
(d) The ISO/IEC 11801 standard shall be the normative reference of this Technical
Specifications. However, not all the items specified in ISO/IEC 11801 shall be adopted.
This Technical Specifications shall specify differences, plus additional guidelines when
necessary.
(e) If this document and any of the applicable standards listed above are in conflict,
then the most stringent requirement shall apply. All the applicable standards listed are
believed to be the most current releases of the documents; the Contractor is
responsible to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the
proposal for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCT
1.2 TWISTED PAIR CABLES
1.2.1 The typical cable shall be a 4-pair CAT6, unshielded twisted pair (balanced) cable
and conform to the latest ISO/IEC 11801 standards. Each cable shall consist of 4 pairs of
cable elements per jacket.
1.2.2 Each connection shall use a dedicated 4-pair cable, even though some of our
applications might use less than 4 pairs in a connection. The reasons for using dedicated
4-pair cables per connection are:
(a) Uniformity
This ensures that each connection is housed in its own separate cable, easing
troubleshooting. Having a single cable to each connection also reduces crosstalk between
different connections.
(b) Flexibility
It is difficult to ensure that an application that only uses 1-pair today will not require a
4-pair connection in the future. By placing a dedicated 4-pair configuration allows
maximum flexibility to cater for current and future applications and allows the cable to be
reconfigured between applications that require different pairs.
(c) Standard and Cost
Because of the economies of scale, the standardized 4-pair cables and connectors are
common, and not more expensive than lower pair configurations.
1.2.3 Cable parameters
(a) Cable Diameters
A 4-pair unshielded twisted pair cable diameter, including insulation jacket, shall not
exceed 6.5mm.
ETS/27I000/4(C&A-3)
(b) Cable Core
In this Technical Specification, where a reference is made to "twisted pair", or

"unshielded balanced cable", it shall be taken to mean UTP.
The copper conductor core shall be of size 24 AWG, 0.5mm diameter. For pre-installed
cable run, the copper core shall be solid conductor. For flexible patch/station cords,
stranded copper conductor core shall be used.
(c) Cable Insulation
(i) The diameter per cable element over insulation shall be 1.22 mm
(or 0.05 inch) maximum. All the cable elements shall use the same insulation
material for minimized delay slew (See section on EMI and EMC).
(ii) The insulation jacket shall be of Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) material.
(d) Cable Structure
The cable shall come with a cross-separator and preferably with rip cord to aid in
stripping of insulation jacket.
(e) Rating and Recognition
(i) The CAT 6 cables shall conform to ISO/IEC 11801 and EIA/TIA 568 CAT 6 /
Class D UTP specifications and shall be independently tested, verified and
approved by Under-writer' Laboratories (UL) and/or any accredited test laboratory.
1.2.5 Cable Category
(a) CAT 6 that is recognised by the standards as approved cable shall be used for
the horizontal cabling. The CAT 6 cables shall meet a transmission bandwidth
requirement of 250 MHz and capable of supporting all applicable standard network
platforms.
1.2.6 Cable Shielding
Shielding is to put a metal cover the cable elements, under the insulation jacket of the
cable. Shielding is a common way of reducing EMI. Twisted pair cables can be
shielded or non-shielded. In this project, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) shall be
provided.
1.3 IP VOICE / DATA / FAX BACKBONE
1.3.1 Definition
a) The fiber backbone consist of both single mode and multimode fibre optical fibre
cables. A choice of fibre unit configuration in the following counts (i.e. 2, 4, 8, 12) shall be
made available by the manufacturer to Employer so as to accommodate different users
demand.
1.3.2 There are two main types of optical fibre cables:
a) Multimode fibre
This is step index or graded index fibre. 50um/125um fibre strand 50 um is the diameter
ETS/27I000/5(C&A-3)
of the core, and 125um is the diameter of the cladding) of grade 0M2 and conforming
to the latest ISO/IEC 11801 and IEC 60794 standards shall be provided for this project.
The operating wavelengths are 850nm and I 300nm. The cable shall be
independently tested & verified by Under-writer' Laboratories (UL) and/or any
accredited laboratories.
b) Single mode fibre
Singlemode fibre has a very small core, typically 5-IO um. In this project, single mode
fibre of 9um/125um fibre strand of grade 0S1 and conforming to the latest ISO/IEC
11801 and ITU-G.652 standards shall be provided. The operating wavelengths are 1300
nm and 1550 nm. The cable shall be independently tested & verified by
Under-writer' Laboratories (UL) and/or other accredited laboratories.
1.3.3 Fibre Loss Values and Power Budget
(a) In evaluating optical fibre connections, the following criteria shall be

applied:
(I) Fibre Cable Loss Values
This value is dependent on temperature, can be 3.5dB/km at 850 nm and

1.5dB/km at 1300 nm for multimode fibre and 1.0dB/km at 13I0 nm and 1550 nm
for singlemode fibre.
(ii) Fibre Connector Loss Values
TIAJEIA specifies a maximum connector pair loss of 0.75 dB.
(iii) Fibre Splice Loss Values
TIA/EIA specifies a maximum splice loss of 0.3 dB.
(ii) Fibre Power Budget
The actual margin (difference between fibre link loss and the fibre signal loss
measured) must be greater than the given system performance margin in order
for the connection to operate. In addition, the resultant value must allow for a
repair margin in the case that the cable is damaged and repair splices are
needed to reattach the cable. Loss margin for at least 2 repair splices shall be
allowed. The above can be summarized in the following equations:
Actual Margin > System Performance Margin (Equipment Fibre Power Budget)
Actual Margin = Fibre Link Loss – Fibre Signal Loss measured
Fibre Link Loss=(Fibre Cable Loss Value x Distance) +
(Fibre Splice Loss Value x Number of splices) + (Fibre Connector Loss Value x
Number of connectors)
Note: Fibre Signal Loss measured shall be < Fibre Link Loss (Calculated
value)
1.3.4 Optical Fibre Cable
ETS/27I000/6(C&A-3)
The construction of the optical fibre cables shall conform to IEC 60794.
The optical fibre cables shall be suitable for direct termination with epoxy, SC connectors
and splicing (both fusion and Corelink mechanical).
(a) The optical fibre shall be ultra-pure silica glass with a diameter of 125pm surrounded
with an acrylate coating to a diameter of 250gm. The optical fibre dimensions and
tolerances shall comply with the following:
Geometrical 0M1 0M2 0M3 0S1

Characteristics (62.5/125) (50/125) (50/125) (9/125)
Core Diameter (pm) 62.5 ±3 50 ±3 50 ± 3 9.2 ± 0.4
Cladding Diameter (p.m) 125 ± 2 125 ± 2 125 ± 2 125 ± 1
Coating Diameter (pm) 245 ± 10 245 ±10 245 ± 10 245 ± 5
(b) The optical fibre shall comply with the performance requirements listed in the
Performance Characteristics table below.
Optical Fibre Characteristics 0M1 0M2 0M3

(62.5/125) (50/125) (50/125)
Max. Attenuation @ 850 nm <2.8 <2.4 <2.7
(dB/km) @ 1300 nm <0.1 < 0.6 <0.7
Overfilled Launch @ 850 nm 200 500 1500
Bandwidth @ 1300 nm 600 500 500
(MHz•km)
Laser @ 850 nm N/A N/A 2000
Bandwidth
(MHz•km)
Max. Link Length. 300 550 900
1000BASE- SX
(m) supporting
550 550 550
1000BASE- LX
Max. Link 33 82 300
I0GBASE- SR
Length (m)
supporting 300 300 300
I0GBASE- LX4
Numerical Aperture 0.2 ± 0.2 ± 0.2 ±
0.015 0.015 0.015
Optical Fibre Characteristics OS1

Single-mode
Max. Attenuation (dB/km) @ 13I0nm 0.38
@ 1550nm 0.24
Mode-field Diameter (gm) @ 13I0nm 9.2 ± 0.4
@ 1550nm 10.4 ± 0.8
Chromatic Dispersion @ 13I0nm 5 3.5
ps/(nm/km) @ 1550nm 0.18
Cut-off Wavelength (nm) 1260
Max. Link Length (m) 1000BASE-LX 5000
supporting
Max. Link Length (m) 10GBASE-LX 10000
ETS/27I000/7(C&A-3)
supporting 10000
10GBASE- LX4
Environmental Specifications 0M1 0M2 0M3 OS1

62.5/125 50/125 50/125 Single-
mode
Temperature Dependence 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1
(dB/Km)
(-60 to +85°C)
Temperature & Humidity 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
Cycling (dB/Km)
(-10 to 85°C, 4 to 90% RH)
Mechanical 0M1 0M2 0M3 0S1

Characteristics 62.5/125 50/125 50/125 Single-
mode
Minimum Proof Test 100 100 100 100
(kpsi) Induced
Bending 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Attenuation (dB)
(I00 turns, 75mm
diameter)
(c) The optical fibre cables shall comply with the following mechanical
properties:
Fibre Nominal Nominal Installation Crush Min. Bend

Count Cable Weight Tension Resistance Radius (mm)
OD (mm) (kg/km) (N) (N)
Installation Static
4 6.4 48 1250 2000 140 130
6 6.4 48 1250 2000 140 130
8 6.4 48 1250 2000 140 130
12 6.4 48 1250 2000 140 130
24 7.5 64 1250 2000 150 140
Cable operation temperature range: -40 to 70°C.

Tensile Strength (IEC 60811-1-1) 10.5 Mpa
Elongation @ break (IEC 60811-1-1) 155 %
Tear strength (BS 6469:99.1) 8 N/mm
Aged tensile strength (IEC 14 Mpa (7 days @ 110°C) Retention
60811-1-2) 131 %
Aged Elongation @ break (IEC 140 % (7 days @ 110°C) Retention
60811-1-2) 89 %
(d)The optical fibre cables shall comply with the following physical
properties:
ETS/27I000/8(C&A-3)
Hot pressure @ 90°C (IEC 60811-3-1) 25 %

Hot deformation test @ 90°C (BS6469:99.1) 8%
Hardness, Shore D (ASTM D-2240) 55
Specific Gravity(ASTM-792) 1.50 g/cm3
(e) The cable sheathing material shall comply with UL 1581 and UL 1666 and made from VO
rated thermoplastic flame retardant halogen free material based on EVA and other polymer
groups.
(f) The optical fibre cables shall comply with the following fire performance:
Oxygen index (ISO 4589-2) 36 %
Flammability Temperature Index (ISO 4589-3) 290°C
Halogen acid evolution Zero
Toxicity Index (NES 713) 0.8
Smoke density flaming Ds max, 53,
7 minutes to max.
Smoke density non-flaming Ds max, 210,
3 minutes to max.
Fire Propagation Pass
(IEC 60332-1 & IEC 60332-3)
Acid gas (IEC 60754-1) Pass
Smoke emission (IEC 61034) Pass
(g)The cable sheathing material shall have enhanced water barrier properties
for indoor/outdoor single sheath applications and comply with the following water barrier
properties:
(h) The following identifications shall be printed on the optical fibre cables:
(i) Manufacturer's name
(ii) Cable type.
(iii) Number of fibre strand
(iv) Date of manufacturer
(v) Length in metre
(vi) Product number marking
(vii) Ports Labeling
(i) Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the termination panel. Cables labeled
within the bundle shall not be acceptable.
(j) The Fibre shall be colour-coded for easy identification. The Contractor shall provide
information on the identification of the Fibre colours.
ETS/27I000/9(C&A-3)
(k)The Fibre shall also be distinctly coloured differently for MM Fibre and SM Fibre. The
Contractor shall provide information for distinguishing between MM Fibre and SM Fibre.
1.3.5 The optical fibre cables used shall meet or exceed all of the performance requirements in
order to support all current and future computer network applications such as FE, FDDI,
ATM, GE (IO00BaseSX, IO00BaseLX) and lOGE, etc.
1.3.6 The proposed optical fibre cable shall be designed and tested in accordance with
ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568-C.3, ISO 11801(2nd edition), and ICEA 596, Telecordia (Bellcore)
GR-409-CORE and UL 1666/901.
1.3.7 The performance specifications shall be measured in accordance with the Fibre Optic
Test Procedures (EIA/TIA 455 documents) and the test procedures of IEC 60793 and IEC
60794.
1.3.8 The manufacturer of optical fibre cables shall provide at least a 25-year unconditional
guarantee for the performance of the cable.
1.3.9 The Contractor shall supply all actual cable parameters including any pertinent
information from the manufacturer in their tender proposal for the Employer's
evaluation. The submitted parameters must be verified by an independent and
accredited test laboratory. Copies of the official test results and certifications must also
be enclosed.
1.4 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLING REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 The horizontal distribution cable proposed shall be CAT 6 UTP Copper Cable.
1.4.2 The length of individual horizontal links from the Comms Riser Room to the outlets shall
not exceed 90m.
1.4.3 Individual cable link between the Comms Riser Room and the outlets shall be continuous
without any joints, splices or bridge taps.
1.4.4 The horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or
consolidation Point (CP) between the Comms Riser Room and Outlets.
1.4.5 The horizontal cables shall have decreasing numbering sequential printing on the cable
jacket, indicating remaining cabling length.
1.4.6 The horizontal distribution cables shall not be exposed in the work area or other locations
with public access.
1.4.7 It shall meet all the requirements that are stated in Section 1.2 for twisted pair copper
cables.
1.4.8 It shall meet or exceed the Transmission Performance Specification for 4-pair I00 ohms
(+/- 15%) Category 6 Cabling of TIA/EIA-568-C.2-1 standards.
1.4.9 Exhibit a Propagation Delay of 536 ns/I00m max @ 250 MHz.
1.4.I0 Exhibit a Propagation Delay Skew of 45 ns/I00m max @ 1, I0, I00 & 250 MHz.
1.4.11 Cable shall meet the performance requirements listed in the table below in addition to all
other standard CAT 6 cable performance requirements.
ETS/27I000/10(C&A-3)
Frequency M a x Min Min Min PS Max Min PS Min RL

(MHz) Attenuation NEXT P S A C R ELFEXT ELFEXT
(dB) NEXT (dB/I00m) (dB/I00m) (dB/I00m) (d/B/I00m:
(dB/I00m) (dB)
0.772 1.8 76.0 74 72.0 70.0 67 -
1 2.0 74.3 72.3 70.0 67.8 64.8 20.7
4 3.8 65.3 63.3 59.0 55.8 52.8 20.7
8 5.3 60.8 58.8 53.0 49.7 46.7 20.7
I0 6.0 59.3 57.3 51.0 47.8 44.8 25.0
16 7.6 56.3 54.3 46.0 43.7 40.7 25.0
20 8.5 54.8 52.8 44.0 41.8 38.8 25.0
25 _ 9.5 53.3 51.3 42.0 39.8 36.8 24.2
31.25 I0.7 51.9 49.9 39.0 37.9 34.9 24.2
62.5 15.4 47.4 45.4 30.0 31.9 28.9 24.2
I00 19.8 44.3 42.3 25.0 27.8 24.8 24.2
200 29.0 39.8 37.8 I0.0 21.8 18.8 24.2
_ 250 32.8 38.3 36.3 3 .0 19.8 16.8 24.2
1.4.12 Delay Skew

Delay Delay @ Capacitance DCR @ 20°C DCR
Skew I00 MHz Unbalance (Ohms/I00m) Unbalance
(ns/I00m) (ns/I00m) (pF/I00m) (%)
Maximum 18 5I0 49.2 9.0 3.0
Typical I0 480 20.0 7.4 0.8
1.4.13 All CAT 6 cable shall have a high grade Polyetheylene central crosstalk cancellation
spiral in a form of a cross that maintains constant distance between all the 4 pairs.
This will ensure that even under torsion during installation, the crosstalk should be
constant over the whole cable.
1.4.14 The cable shall be independently tested & verified by UL and/or other accredited
laboratories. A copy of the test certificate from the test lab shall be submitted.
1.4.15 The manufacturer of UTP cables shall provide at least a 25-year unconditional guarantee
for the performance of the cable.
1.4.16 The Contractor shall supply all actual cable parameters including any pertinent
information from the manufacturer in their tender proposal for the
Employer's evaluation. The submitted parameters must be verified by an
independent and accredited test laboratory. Copies of the official test results and
certifications must also be enclosed.
1.4.17 The UTP cable shall support the following applications: IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T
(Ethernet), 100BASE-T (Faster Ethernet), and 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet),
ANSI.X3.263 FDDI TP-PMD, IEEE 802.54 and 16 Mbps Token Ring, ATM up to 155
Mbps.
1.5 CABLE INSULATION RATINGS
1.5.1 Generally, the insulation of all copper and optical fibre cables provided under this
contract shall meet the latest NEC (National Electrical Code) and ICEA (Insulated
Cable Engineers Association) specifications. As a general guide, all cables shall
be fire-retardant, low-smoke, halogen-free and toxic free (e.g. of type HFFR).
This requirement is especially important for areas where the cables pass through a
ETS/27I000/11(C&A-3)
ventilation or air-conditioning duct.
1.6 CABLE/ FIBRE INSTALLATION PRACTICES
1.6.1 Continuous Run
All cables must be continuous end-to-end; splices, extensions and re-terminations are
not allowed.
1.6.2 Tension and Bending Radius
The Contractor shall make sure that the maximum tensile rating and bending radius as
specified by the manufacturer are not exceeded when installing the cables.
(a) The standards specified for the bending radius for twisted pair cables are:
(i) Minimum for pulling during installation = 8 x outer cable diameter
(ii) Minimum installed radius for riser cable = 6 x outer cable diameter
(iii) Minimum installed radius for horizontal cable = 4 x outer cable

diameter
(b) The standards specified for the bending radius for optical fibre cables are:
(i) Minimum if cable is not in tension = 10 x outer cable diameter
(ii) Minimum if cable is in tension = 20 x outer cable diameter
(iii) Minimum bend radii (over above conditions) = 3.0 cm 1.7.3 Installation
Requirements
Cable
(a) All cable runs shall be either from the ceiling or the floor. The cable run
shall not make more than one transition from floor to ceiling and vice versa.
(i.e. a cable cannot run from ceiling to floor and then back to ceiling again)
(b) All installed cables must be fixed and supported in an appropriate manner
to a surface. No loose or trailing cables shall be permitted. All cable runs must
be supported by rigid pathways along their entire length and tied in bundles at 3
m intervals with nylon tie wraps. All cables must be supported within a 250
mm radius of their final termination. All cables shall be installed as flat as
possible to prevent kinks. Attention shall be given to the order in which
cables are laid to minimise the number of crosses and to maintain a neat and
orderly arrangement of cables.
(c) The available conduit space shall be sectionalized so that additional cable
pulls will not entangle an operating cable. Make continuous pull by backfeeding
or centre pulling. No more than 2 x 90° changes of directions can occur in any
single cable pull.
(d) In vertical runs, no residual tension can remain on the cable after
installation except what is due to the cable's weight in the vertical rise. The
maximum vertical rise is the vertical distance that the cable runs without
immediate support points. In this project, vertical runs shall be supported in every
ETS/27I000/12(C&A-3)
comms riser room at all levels.
(e) Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the

recommendations made in the TIA/EIA-568-C.1 document, manufacturer's
recommendations and/or best industry practices.
(g) The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination
point.
(h) UTP cables must not be bundled too close to one another to reduce the
possibility of crosstalk between different cables.
(i) Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or
blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and
dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame.
(j) Slack for UTP cables shall be maintained for possible re-termination and
relocation. The minimum requirements shall be 3 m at the Data Riser Rooms, 0.3
m within the Information Outlets (IO) and 3 m from the rigid pathway to the IOs.
Since no parts of the cable shall be exposed, flexible conduits shall enclose the
slack portion of the cables before they are laid from the rigid pathway to the IO.
Flexible conduit shall be of the same length as the slack (about 3m).
(k) Slack for optical fibre cables shall be maintained for possible re-
termination/adjustment and relocation. The minimum requirements shall be 3 m
at the Data Riser Rooms and I0 m at the Main Comms Equipment Rooms.
This slack must be neatly managed on trays or other support types.
1.6.3 Colour coding and Labelling
(a) Fibre /Cable runs must be properly colour-coded and labeled

according to TIA/EIA-606 A. In addition, individual fibre ducts/cables shall be labeled
at every I0 m along the pathway for easier identification in future maintenance work.
(b) A permanent label using the same alphanumeric identifier shall be tagged at each
end of a fibre /cable run. The identifier shall indicate the origin and destination of the
fibre duct/cable.
(c) Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch
panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties.
Cables labeled within the bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall not be
acceptable.
2 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
2.1 Twisted Pair Connectors
2.1.1 The EIA/TIA 568 C.2 specifies an RJ45 connector for 4-pair twisted pair cables.
This connector is also known as the 8-position/8-conductor/8-pin modular connector.
The plug is a "male" connector crimped to the end of the cable, while the socket is the
"female" connector connected on an information outlet (IO) or a patch panel. For the
purpose of this Technical Specification, the term RJ45 connector shall refer to both
plug and socket, while RJ45 plug and RJ45 socket will refer to the individual
ETS/27I000/13(C&A-3)
component. In this project, the Contractor shall provide the CAT 6 UTP RJ45 connector.
2.1.2 All RJ45 connectors shall be 8-position/8-conductor/8-pin standard type and shall
be capable of receiving conventional 4, 6 and 8 pin socket/plug of 24 AWG solid wire.
The insulation displacement connectors of the connector shall accept 22 AWG to 26
AWG insulated wires.
2.1.3 The RJ45 connectors shall exceed the connector requirements of ISO/IEC 11801
and EIA/TIA 568C standards.
2.1.4 The RJ45 connectors shall be universal in design to provide universal

application/multi-vendor support, including complying with the intermateability standard
IEC 60603-7 for backward compatibility.
2.1.5 The RJ45 connectors shall be independently tested and verified by UL and/or any
accredited laboratory for conforming to ISO/IEC11801 CAT6 standard and/or TIA/EIA
568C.2-1 CAT6 performance standard.
2.1.6 The connectors shall preferably be available in different colours for colour coding
purposes.
2.1.7 Wiring Assignments
(a) The 4-pair of cable elements are colour-coded and connected to the RJ45 connector
in the order for straight-through cables. Each cable element will be crimped to one of
the 8 pins.
(b) There are two wiring assignments, namely, T568A and T568B. T568A is also called
the ISDN or EIA standard, while T568B is also called the AT&T specification or 258A.
They differ by the positions of pair 2 and 3's wiring positions on the pins
(c) In this project, T568B wiring assignments shall be used.
2.1.8 Different transmission scheme uses different pairs of cable elements in the 4-pair cable.
To ensure that the cable will be compatible for all current and future applications, the
following points must be noted:
(a) Each cable run must be installed with full 4 pairs of cable elements. Do
not install a cable with lower pair count just because the application does not use it
today.
(b) All cable elements must be insulated with the same material, and
terminated the same way to ensure minimum delay skew between different pairs.
2.1.9 Electrical and Mechanical characteristics
(a) The contact surface for the RJ45 connector must be gold-plated and at
least 1.27 gm thickness (be plated with a minimum of 1.27 gm thick of gold in the
contact (localized area) and a minimum of 3.81 gm thick of tin-lead in the solder area
over a 1.27gm minimum thick nickel under-plate), and have good contact and
electrical characteristics. The Contractor shall provide a warranty from the
manufacturer showing compliance to this condition.
(b) The connectors must be durable to sustain at least 200 re-terminations

("conductor terminations"). In addition, the socket and plug ("plug interface") must be
able to sustain at least 1000 mating cycles (i.e., the connection and disconnection cycles)
ETS/27I000/14(C&A-3)
without performance impairment bearing which the manufacturer shall replace

one-for-one at no cost to Employer.
2.1.I0 Additional Requirements
(a) The CAT 6 (or higher) connectors must be downward compatible. The cables,
connectors and their installation must be certified by the manufacturer to meet CAT 6
UTP channel (as defined in ISO/IEC 11801) specifications for the entire end-to end
channel.
(b) A RJ45 socket must be able to accommodate a RJ11/RJ12 phone plug to

provide connection to a conventional phone line. This connection must provide good
electrical and mechanical connectivity. Furthermore, the RJ45 socket must be
designed to allow for repeated insertions of the phone plug into the socket, without any
damage to the pins in the socket.
(c) Individual RJ45 socket shall utilize a secondary PC board, separate from the signal
path, for crosstalk compensation.
(d) Reduce the untwisting of cable elements by stripping back only as much
cable jacket as is required to perform connecting hardware terminations. The untwisted
length in a cable element as a result of termination to connecting hardware shall be as
short as possible. This is because large amount of crosstalk can be generated as a
result of excessive untwisting. For CAT 6 components, the pair twisting shall be
maintained to within 1/8" (3.18mm) of the termination.
2.1.11 The manufacturer shall supply all actual connector parameters including any pertinent
information in their tender proposal for the Employer's evaluation. The submitted
parameters must be verified by an independent and accredited test laboratory. Copies of
the official test results and certifications must also be enclosed.
2.1.12 All components must be certified to work together as a system, to avoid component
mismatch.
2.2 Optical Fibre Connectors
2.2.1 SC connectors with ceramic ferrule shall be used in this project. Different color
type of SC connectors shall be used to distinguish between a multimode and a single
mode fibre.
2.2.2 The fibre stud shall be pre-installed in the ferrules of the SC connectors, thus
liminating epoxy and polish operations in the field.
2.2.3 The SC connector shall be factory polished to minimise detrimental effects of

reflections and hence better return loss characteristics.
2.2.4 The SC connector shall not use any epoxy for site termination.
2.2.5 A splice by means of fusion shall be used on both multimode and single mode SC pigtail
connectors. This is to ensure low-loss connection between the optical fibre to be
assembled and the pre-installed fibre stub.
2.2.6 The SC connector shall be re-terminable.
ETS/27I000/15(C&A-3)
2.2.7 SC connectors with matching fibre stub shall be used with respective fibre type
- e.g. in this project, 50/125 um for multimode and 9/125 um for single mode.
2.2.8 The terminated connectors shall exhibit: Multimode fibre cable
 A maximum mated pair insertion loss of 0.75 dB with an average of 0.40 dB when
tested at either 850 nm or 1300 nm wavelengths for 50/125 um.
 A minimum return loss of 20 dB (25 dB typical) at both 850 nm & 1300 nm.
Singlemode fibre cable
 A maximum mated pair insertion loss of 0.4 dB with an average of 0.25 dB when
tested at either 1310 nm or 1550 nm wavelengths for 50/125 um.
 A minimum return loss of 50 dB (53 dB typical) at both 850 nm & 1300 nm.
2.2.9 The SC connector shall meet the performance of the following standards.
(a) ISO/IEC 11801
(b) TIA/EIA-568-C.3
2.2.IO The connector shall comply to the Connector Machanical and Optical Characteristics as
follow:
Cable Characteristics Units Requirement Test Method
Physical dimensions only IEC 60874-12, IEC 60874-14
at I0 interface Mating dimensions (SC-D)
and gauging
Nominal cladding diameter um 125 5 (Ala, Alb) and
32.2 (B.1) of IEC
60793-2
Nominal buffer diameter mm - 6.1 of IEC 60794-2
Cable outer diameter mm - 6.1 of IEC 60794-2
4.5.32 of IEC
Plug interface cycles 500
60874-1
Maximum other dB 0.5 27.1 of IEC
attenuation 60874-1
(Method 7)
splice 0.3 IEC 61073-1
Minimum Multimode dB 20 27.4 of IEC 60874-1
return loss Singlemode 26
2.2.11 Additional Requirements
(a) Both the coupler and the connector must be matched for the same optical
fibre cable type (i.e., a singlemode connector must be connected to a singlemode
coupler,.etc). A mismatch will result in high signal loss (through the mismatch of the
core and cladding diameters)
(b) When the connector and coupler are no connected, they must be covered with
dust cover to protect the termination from dust. Dust will cause high signal loss in the
ETS/27I000/16(C&A-3)
connection.
2.2.13 All components must be certified to work together as a system, to avoid component
mismatch.
2.3 Station Cords/Patch Cords/Jumpers
2.3.1 Definition
(a) A station cord/patch cord is a short piece of cable, terminated on both ends with "male"
connectors (RJ45 for twisted pair cable and SC connector for optical fibre cable).
(b) Technically, a station cord and a patch cord are the same thing — it shall be
a factory-fabricated/terminated flexible cable terminated with connectors (plugs) at both
ends. The difference in terminology is used to describe their length and purpose. A
station cord typically connects a terminal station to an Information Outlet ( IO) in the
work area, and it is usually limited to 5 m in length. A patch cord is used to connect
between two cross connects, or between a cross connect to a network equipment or
server. It usually has a longer length, typically up to 30 m in length.
(c) A jumper is defined as a piece of cable that is not terminated at both ends.
It is used to patch between two CAT 6 distribution blocks and between distribution blocks
and RJ45 patch panels. The jumper is punched down directly onto the distribution block;
hence there is no need for connectors at either ends.
(d) The insulation of all station cords/patch cords/jumpers regardless of UTP

or fibre cables provided under this contract shall meet the latest NEC (National
Electrical Code) and IECA (Insulated Cable Engineers Association) specifications and
verified by UL.
2.3.2 General Requirements for Station Cords/Patch Cords
The following specifications are applicable for both twisted pair cabling and optical
fibre cabling. The station cord/patch cord must be factory terminated (i.e., the cable is
terminated with the connectors at the factory). Field crimp is not acceptable.
(a) Distance Limits
In this project, the station cord/patch cord provided shall be of standard length of 3 m.
Different colour patch cord shall be supplied for colour coding purposes.
(b) Labeling for station cord/patch cord
Each station cord/patch cord must be labeled on both ends. Each label shall reflect the
name of the equipment it connects.
(c) The station cord/patch cord shall be made by an ISO 9001 and 14001
Certified Manufacturer.
2.3.3 Station Cords/Patch Cords for Twisted Pair Cables
ETS/27I000/17(C&A-3)
(a) The station cord/patch cord shall meet and exceed ISO/IEC 11801 and TIA/EIA 568B
standards for data and voice services.
(b) The station cord/patch cord shall be independently tested, verified and
approved by UL and/or any accredited laboratories for conforming to ISO/IEC 11801
CAT 6 standard and/or TIA/EIA 568C.2-1 CAT 6 standard.
(c) The station cord/patch cord shall be backwards compatible with lower performing
categories components.
(d) The station cord/patch cord shall be constructed from round cable and
consist of 8 stranded copper conductors (4 pairs) of size 24 AWG each terminated with
RJ45 plugs at both ends. The stranded copper conductors which are arranged in four
colour-coded twisted pairs within a single jacket are used as opposed to the solid
conductors (used in the cable runs). This is to provide additional flexibility in the
station cord/patch cord/jumper.
(e) Only individually insulated 4-pair twisted pair cables are to be used for
station cord/patch cord/jumper.
(f) The RJ45 plugs used in the station cord/patch cord must be from the same
manufacturer as,the RJ45 sockets they will be connected to. This is to minimise the
mismatch between the two connectors.
(g) The plugs used in the station cord/patch cord shall be equipped to contain a clear
plastic internal wire guide that offer optimum pair balance to the point of termination
(h) The station cord/patch cord shall use modular plugs that exceed FCC CFR 47 part
68 subpart F and IEC 60603-7 specifications.
(i) The station cord/patch cord shall be resistant to corrosion from humidity, extreme
temperatures and airborne contaminants.
(j) The length of the station cord/patch cord/jumper shall be limited to that
specified in Section 2.3.2. However, the total distance of the channel (end- to-end
cable run plus the station cords/patch cords) shall be limited to 100m in length (i.e.
the combined length of jumpers, or patch cords and equipment cables in the
telecommunications room/closet and the work area should not exceed 10m (33 ft)
unless used in conjunction with a multi-user telecommunications outlet).
it
(k) The station cord/patch cord shall be I00% transmission tested with
laboratory grade network analyzers for proper performance up to 250 MHz.
The station cord/patch cord shall exhibit the following Electrical specifications:
- DC resistance per lead: 9 ohms / 100 m maximum.
- Input impedance without averaging: 100 ohms + 15% from 1 to 250 MHz
(m) The plug contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for improved
durability.
2.3.4 Jumper for Twisted Pair Cables
(a) A jumper is used in the MDF and Main Comms Equipment Room to patch
between Employer and PTL distribution blocks and in the Data Riser Rooms
ETS/27I000/18(C&A-3)
to patch between two distribution blocks. In this project, no jumper between Empolyer
Comms Equipment Room and PTL distribution board are used.
(b) For easy identification, the 110 distribution blocks shall be labeled.
2.3.5 Station Cords/Patch Cords for Optical Fibre Cables
(a) The station cord/patch cord shall be duplex cables terminated with SC connector on
each end.
(b) The singlemode patch cord shall used 9/125 um 0S1 grade fibre and the multimode
patch cord shall used 50/125 um 0M2 grade fibre.
(c) Only individually insulated duplex cables are to be used for station cord/patch cord.
(d) Tight buffered cables shall be used for station cord/patch cord for greater flexibility.
(e) Different colour patch cord shall be used to distinguish between a

multimode (e.g. orange colour cable shealth) and singlemode (e.g. yellow colour cable
shealth) fibre.
2.3.6 The manufacturer shall supply all actual cable and connector parameters including
any pertinent information in their tender proposal for the Employer's evaluation. The
submitted parameters must be verified by an independent and accredited test
laboratory. Copies of the official test results and certifications must also be
enclosed.
2.3.7 All components must be certified to work together as a system, to avoid

component mismatch.
2.4 Information Outlets
2.4.1 Definition
(a) An information outlet (IO) consists of one or more plastic mounting (the "outlets" for
securing connectors, plus a plastic/metallic faceplate for housing the outlets. An IO can
either be wall-mounted or mounted in a floor box, and used in the work area. The IO
houses one or more connectors between the horizontal cable runs and the station
cords.
(b) The outlet houses either a RJ45 socket for twisted pair cables, or a SC coupler for
optical fibre cables.
2.4.2 General Requirements for IO
The following specifications are applicable for both twisted pair cabling and optical fibre
cabling:
(a) The IO shall be made from high-impact, flame retardant, UL-rated thermoplastic.
(b) The IO shall have angled 45° outlets for housing the connectors. The
angled outlet shall face downwards for wall-mounted IOs and facing the lid opening
ETS/27I000/19(C&A-3)
for a floorbox-mounted IO. The reasons for having angled 45° outlets are as follows:
(i) For wall-mounted IOs, the angle will prevent dust from entering and collecting in
the connector.
(ii) For floorbox-mounted IOs, the angle will reduce the bend of the station cord from
the connector out to the floorbox opening. If an IO is mounted directly facing upwards
on the floorbox, then the station cord shall have a sharp 90° bend in order to get out of
the floorbox. On the other hand, an angled 45° connector allows the station cord to
have a swallower 135° bend out of the floorbox.
(c) For floorbox-mounted IOs, it is important that the placement of other components
within, e.g., power points, does not interfere or obstruct with the attachment of the
station cords to the outlets. A common point to check is the obstruction of the power
cords on the station cords in the floor box.
(d) It is possible to have both twisted pair and optical fibre outlets in the same IO. The
size and placement of each outlet within the faceplate of the IO shall be based on the
opening on the wall, or the space available in the floorbox.
2.4.3 Outlets for Twisted Pair Cables
(a) The IO shall preferably have openings for a minimum of two (2) RJ45 twisted pair
socket outlets on the faceplate. More socket outlets can be added as required by
users' specifications. If less than 2 outlets are used initially, the excess outlet(s) shall be
covered with a screwed-down plate or stoppers. The unused openings on the IO
shall allow for the easy addition of additional outlets in future.
(b) The twisted pair outlets shall have spring-loaded dust shutters over the connectors to
prevent dust collection. The spring-loaded shutters will ensure that the covering will be
on when no station cords are attached. The shuttle shall be made from the same
high-impact, flame-retardant, UL-rated thermoplastic as the IO. The design of the
shutter shall allow for the opening of the shutter and insertion of the station cord into
the connector to be performed with one hand. The spring-loaded shutter must be able
to sustain at least I000 shutter openings without loss of the spring action or other
mechanical impairments bearing which the manufacturer shall replace one-for-one at no
cost to Employer.
2.4.4 Outlets for Optical Fibre Cables
(a) The IO shall have openings for a minimum of two (2) SC coupler outlets
on the faceplate, or more as required by users' specifications. If less than two (2) outlets
are used initially, the excess outlet(s) shall be covered with a screwed-down plate or
stoppers. The unused openings on the IO shall allow for the easy addition of additional
outlets in the future.
(b) The SC coupler outlets shall have rubber dust cover to prevent dust collection.
2.4.5 Labeling for Information Outlets
(a) All IOs must be labeled with unique identifiers, which must be shown on
the corresponding connectors on the cross connect. The labels and their markings must
be durable and legible and must not degrade within the lifetime of the cabling system. The
label marking must be indelible and waterproof.
ETS/27I000/20(C&A-3)
(b) Each outlet shall also be equipped with plastic snap-in icon of either phone
or data image depending on the type of usage of outlet. To further distinguish the
difference between a phone and a data outlet, the colour of the plastic snap-in shall be
different. The plastic snap-in shall be replaced easily without the use of special tools.
2.5 Cross Connect
2.5.1 Definition
(a) While the lOs are used to house the connectors in the work area, the cross
connects are used to house the connectors in the Main Comms Equipment Rooms and
Data Riser Rooms. A cross connect houses a large number of connectors in a compact
area, provides organization of connectors and allows for easy termination of the cable
runs.
(b) The cross connect is referred to as a patch panel for twisted pair cables, or a fibre
distribution unit (FDU)/fibre termination unit for optical fibre cables. Another type of
cross connect is the CAT 6 distribution block used in the MDF room, Main Comms
Equipments room and Data Riser room for data / voice patching.
2.5.2 General Requirements for Patch Panels and FDU
The following specifications are applicable for both the patch panels for twisted pair
cabling and FDU for optical fibre cabling:
(a) The width of the cross connect shall be standard 19" wide (480 mm), and
able to fit into standard 19" wide equipment mountings. All cross connect must be
rack-mountable, and all mounting accessories (e.g., brackets, screws, etc) must be
provided.
(b) The depth of the cross connect (inclusive of the protrusions of the wire
management and patching in front and the cable terminations at the back) shall not
exceed the depth of an equipment cabinet of 800 mm. The mounting of the cross
connect shall be recessed (i.e., the wire management and patching in front do not
protrude out of the equipment mounting).
(c) The height of the cross connect shall be specified in terms of standard rack
units (RUs) (1 RU 1.75"). The cross connect shall be of high density to conserve space.
Typically, 1 RU cross connect shall accommodate at least 24 connectors for twisted
pair cables and 12 duplex SC connectors for optical fibre cables.
(d) The cross connect shall have hinges which allow the cross connect to be
tilted, while mounted on the equipment mounting, for easy access and termination of
the cable runs. Sufficiently slack must be maintained for terminated cable runs for
subsequent tile for termination of additional runs or re-termination.
(e) The cross connect shall have wire/cable management facilities to allow for the
organization of the patch cables.
(f) The cross connect shall have ample space next to each connector for
labeling purposes.
(g) The cross connect shall have space designated for panel identification
ETS/27I000/21(C&A-3)
labels.
(h) For the purpose of management and to prevent EMI, each cross connect
shall be dedicated to its purpose. Hybrid cross connects (i.e., a single cross connect for
use for both twisted pair and optical fibre pair) are not recommended.
(i) The cross connect shall be able to retrofit with sensor for intelligent cable
management in future.
2.5.3 Patch Panel for Twisted Pair Cables
(a) A patch panel is used in the termination of twisted pair cable runs in Main
Equipment Rooms and Data Riser Rooms.
(b) The patch panel shall have RJ45 sockets in front for patch cords and
punch-down blocks at the back of the terminations of the cable runs. All 4 pairs of cable
elements in each twisted pair cable run must be presented to the back of the patch
panel and terminated.
(c) Shielded cross connects are not to be used for unshielded connectors / cables.
(d) The horizontal data connecting hardware shall use CAT 6 UTP patch panel and
strictly comply with the following:
(i) Exceed TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and IEC 60603-7-4 requirements for Category 6

component performance.
(ii) Support the appropriate Category 6 applications and facilitate cross-connection

and inter-connection using modular patch cords. Such applications are IEEE 802.3
10BASE-T (Ethernet), 100BASE-T (Faster Ethernet), and 1000BASE-T (Gigabit
Ethernet), ANSI.X3.263 FDDI TP-PMD, IEEE 802.54 and 16 Mbps Token Ring, ATM
up to 155 Mbps.
(iii)Be backwards compatible to allow lower performing categories of

cables or connecting hardware to operate to their full capacity.
(iv) Be sized to fit an EIA standard, 19-inch relay rack, or be capable of mounting to a
wall.
(v) Accommodate at least 24 ports for each rack mount space (1 U = 44.5 mm or 1.75
in.).
(vi) Be constructed from polyphenylene oxide, 94V-0 rated.
(vii) Have the front capable of accepting 9mm to 12mm labels.
(viii) Have the front capable of accepting an icon to indicate its function.
(ix) Have PoE rated to four times the standard.
(x) Includes a universal wiring insert, clear plastic label holders, and hardware.
(xi) Uses 14-gauge steel rolled-edge construction provides superior panel rigidity.
(xii) Uses Beryllium copper nose contacts have 50-microinch gold plating.
ETS/27I000/22(C&A-3)
(xiii) Uses make fast, one-punch terminations.
(xiv) Have sealed adapter protects circuit board from damage.
(xv) Supports 350-MHz applications.
(xvi) ETL tested and verified CAT6 channel performance.
(xvii) Provide significant headroom over CAT6 specifications.
(xviii) Supports universal wiring—panels are supplied with labeling for both T568A and
T568B wiring.
(xix) Have wide spacing between IDCs means increased room for cable.
(xx) Have rear IDCs feature in-line paired punch down sequence.
(xxi) Have IDC 110 block features peaks to make lacing cable easier.
(xxii) Have stuffer caps hold cable securely.
(xxiii) Include cable ties and mounting hardware.
(xxiv) Made by an ISO 9001 and 14001 Certified Manufacturer.
2.5.4 CAT 3 Distribution Block (Not used in this project)
(a) A distribution block is a compact multi-pair (100 pairs) block for wiring twisted pairs.
This is commonly used for voice wiring because of its high density. The jumpers are
punched down onto the block directly with the use of a 110 connector block.
(b) The 110 XC system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 and 14001 certified
manufacturer.
(c) The distribution block must meet the minimum CAT 6 specifications for
data and voice services.
2.5.5 Fibre Distribution Unit (FDU)/Fibre Termination Unit
(a) This is a cross connect for holding optical fibre cables, the splice and the
connectors/couplers. In this Technical Specification, the fibre distribution unit and fibre
termination unit shall be treated as the same item, and referred to as FDU.
(b) Splicing is required when a cable run needs to be split into individual
strands and terminated. The FDU shall provide cross connect and splicing capabilities by
housing both the splice trays and the connectors/couplers. In this project, fusion
splicing is recommended.
(c) All fibre terminations shall be SC connectors. The FDU shall provide housing for
these SC connectors, as well as the SC coupler in-between (between the cable run and
the patch cord).
(d) The FDU shall consist of a modular enclosure with front and back swing open or
hinged panels. The front swing open or hinged panel shall be a clear (transparent)
window.
ETS/27I000/23(C&A-3)
(e) The FDU shall have retainer rings for securing the cable runs, patch cord and
individual fibre strands. The FDU shall have means of securing the cable runs to the
FDU. For armored cable runs, the armor shall extend into the FDU, or there shall be
armored flexible conduits that extend from the termination of armor of the cable run into
the FDU.
(f) The FDU shall also have a slack storage section of sufficient size to accommodate
the recommended bending radius of fibres.
(g) The FDU shall be designed with a sliding drawer mechanism enabling front side
installation and maintenance work to be carried out without having to remove the entire
panel.
(h) The FDU shall be made of galvanized steel metal & be grounded during installation.
2.5.6 Classifications of Cross Connect
(a) The cross connects can be classified into the following functionality:
(i) Backbone cross connect
To terminate the backbone cables, part of the Campus/Building Backbone

Subsystem. In this case, campus backbone subsystem refers to backbone
cabling between Passenger Terminal Buildings.
(ii) Horizontal cross connect
To terminate the horizontal cables, part of the Horizontal Subsystem.
(iii) Equipment cross connect
To terminate the cables to the equipment, part of the Main Comms Equipment
Room/Comms Riser Room Subsystem.
(b) For Voice and data, patching is done between the backbone cross connect to
the equipment cross connect, and between the horizontal cross connect and
the equipment cross connect. The network equipment is connected to both the
backbone and the horizontal distributions. Hence the network equipment is
the distribution "bridge" between the Backbone and the Horizontal Subsystems.
2.5.7 Placement of Cross Connectors
(a) All cross connects shall be placed in close proximity and organized in such a way as to
reduce the effect of untidy cross-over patch leads.
(b) All cross connects shall be installed within a 3 m area so that patch cord lengths can
be kept to a minimum.
2.5.8 Labeling for Cross Connect
The following labeling scheme shall be applied to all cross-connect system:
(a)The first level shall identify the termination field, for example, an identifier for a
particular rack/enclosure.
(b) The second level shall identify the patch panel within given rack/enclosure.
ETS/27I000/24(C&A-3)
(c) The third level shall identify the individual position within a patch panel.
2.5.10 All components must be certified to work together as a system, to avoid

component mismatch.
2.6 Consolidation Point (CP)
2.6.1 The CP is an interconnection point within the horizontal cabling.
2.6.2 No more than one CP shall be used within the same horizontal cable run.
2.6.3 The CP shall be a hard-wired connection using insulation displacement connecting

hardware.
2.6.4 The CP shall be limited to serving a maximum of 12 Information Outlets (IOs).
2.6.5 The CP shall be located in fully accessible but away from the public's view and
permanent locations such as building columns, concealed walls, above false ceiling
boards, etc.
2.6.6 The Cable length from the CP to the Data Riser Rooms should be at least 15 meters.
2.6.7 4-pair CAT 6 UTP cables shall be used for the cable run between the Comms Riser
Room and each CP.
2.7 Equipment Mounting
2.7.1 Definition
(a) Equipment mounting is either a rack or cabinet for mounting the cross connects and
network equipment. They are used in the Main Comms Equipment Rooms and Data
Riser Rooms.
(b) There are 3 common types of equipment mountings:
(i) Wall mount
A wall mounted cabinet/frame for small enclosures
(ii) Floor-standing frame (Open rack)
This is a floor-standing frame with trays, but has no sidewalls, or front/back

doors.
(iii) Floor-standing equipment cabinet (Closed rack)
This movable frame with trays is fully enclosed with panels —sidewalls, top and
bottom coverings, front/back doors.
ETS/27I000/25(C&A-3)
2.7.2 General Requirements for Equipment Mounting
These specifications shall apply to all types of equipment mountings.
(a) The equipment mounting shall be used for all equipment and cross connects in the
Main Comms Equipment Rooms and Data Riser Rooms.
(b) The equipment mounting must accommodate standard 19"-wide equipment,

cross connects and wire/cable management bars. It must have holes for securing the
cross connects, equipment and wire/cable management bars with standard mounting
screws. The design of the holes must be flexible enough to adapt to different types of
mounting brackets and slots on cross connects, equipment and wire/cable management
bars.
(c) The design of equipment mounting must be sturdy enough to suppor t all
the components mounted on it.
(d) The equipment mounting shall have an attached power bar with at least
four (4) 230 V, 13A power distribution outlets. The quantity specified for the power
distribution outlets must be evenly distributed on each sides. Each power
distribution outlet shall be equipped with a surge protector / suppressor.
(e) The Supplier shall propose the appropriate ratings on the maximum number of
equipment that can be housed in a rack. The surge protector / suppressor shall be
mounted in the rack.
(f) Every outlet shall come with an integrated ELCB (Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker).
(g) The equipment mounting shall have metallic bar straps for grounding purpose.
(h) The equipment mounting shall be painted in black.
(i) The index of protection against solid bodies and liquids shall be in accordance
with standards IEC 62262 and EN 60529: IP 20.
(j) The index of protection against mechanical impact shall be in accordance with
standards IEC 62262.
(k) The equipment shall allow adjustable front vertical mounting rail with square holes,
adjustable mounting depth for cable access with deep form factor (42"/1070mm) and
wide form factor (29.5"/750mm). It shall be tool-less mounting. There shall be RMU
markings on all rails for easy equipment installation.
(l) The equipment door ventilation shall exceeds, 830 in2 (5355 cm2) with scalable
cooling options. It shall have small cell mesh front and split rear doors allow for
maximum airflow. The doors shall be reversible.
(m) It shall have expanded cable management
(n) The equipment shall facilitates overhead cable management and power distribution;
the rear/vertical cable management shall guaranteed compatibility with other equipment/
components
(o) The equipment shall have leveling feet, lockable doors and side panels
(p) The equipment shall able to mounts two metered PDUs in one rear channel and
ETS/27I000/26(C&A-3)
provides mounting option for PDUs
(q) The equipment shall be multi-vendor equipment compatible
(r) The equipment shall have numbered U positions, optimized depth and protective
grounding provisions
(s) The equipment shall provide security between enclosures when bayed together
(t) It shall equip with quick release doors, quick release side panels, removable doors
and side panels. reversible doors, split rear doors, , tool-less mounting
(u) The equipment shall be structurally stability and strength-tested to hold up to 2,200
lbs.
2.7.3 Other Requirements for Floor-standing Frames (Open Racks)
(a) These racks are floor-standing metal frames. They do not have sidewalls,
tops, bottoms, or front/back doors, unlike a closed rack. They must be securely
bolted to the floor to prevent the fully loaded rack from topping over.
(b) The vertical member of an open rack shall be at least 150 mm deep and of
the heavy duty steel type.
(c) Because there is no wall/door enclosure, the mounted equipment relies on

natural circulation for ventilation and is prone to dust and other hostile
environmental elements. As such, the Contractor shall propose a suitable
maintenance program to ensure that the equipment on these racks are not
damaged by these elements.
(d) The height of the rack shall be at least 42RUs (standard rack units). The rack shall be
able to accommodate equipment of depth of 800 mm.
(e) The top section of an open rack shall be equipped with integral bend radius control.
Vertical cable management shall be integrated into the vertical members which shall have
removable plastic cable "D" rings spaced adequately, front cover doors and pass through
holes.
(g) The rack shall also come with at least three (3) sturdy equipment trays, each
capable of holding at least 50 kg of free-resting equipment on the tray.
2.7.4 Other Requirements for Floor-standing equipment cabinet (Closed rack)
a) The equipment cabinet shall have movable frames with six (6) detachable panels: 2
sidewalls, top and bottom coverings, and front and back doors and adjustable inner
frames that can accommodate at least three (3) different sizes of equipment trays.
b) The height of the equipment cabinet shall be at least 42RUs (standard rack
units). The cabinet shall be able to accommodate equipment of depth of 800 mm. For
areas where the 42RUs equipment cabinets are not allowed due to site constraints, the
Contractor shall proposed suitable type of equipment cabinet, e.g. 22U (800mm x
800mm) subjected to the approval of the Employer
c) Vertical cable management shall be integrated into the vertical members which shall
have removable plastic cable "D" rings spaced adequately, front cover doors and pass
ETS/27I000/27(C&A-3)
through holes.
d) The cabinet shall come with at least three (3) sturdy equipment trays, each capable of
holding at least 50 kg of free-resting equipment on the tray.
e) The equipment cabinet shall also comply with ANSI/EIA/3IO-D-92

standard.
f) The equipment cabinet shall have the type of coating with a specific coating
thickness to protect against corrosion, rusting and blistering. In addition, the coating shall
be resistance to fire.
g) The cabinet shall be made from materials that provide electrostatic protection to
the equipment mounted within. The sidewalls and back door shall be metallic (stainless
steel type). The front door shall be made of transparent tempered glass that will not break
into shards when shattered. The front and back doors must be able to open fully.
h) A key lock shall be provided for the front and back door of the equipment cabinet.
Each cabinet's lock shall be unique from any other cabinet.
i) The top covering must contain a removable fan tray with at least three (3) AC fans
for ventilation. The fans must be individually replaced. The bottom covering must
have an opening to allow cables to come up from the bottom. The overall design of
the cabinet must allow for good ventilation enough to cool all equipment installed
within. The Contractor shall ensure that the temperature difference within the
equipment rack and that of the surrounding environment shall not exceed 2 °C.
j) For equipment cabinet that is to be installed in the Data Riser Room, the top and
bottom coverings shall also have opening to allow cables to route into the cabinet from
the top and bottom.
k) All panels must be individually removable when unlocked. However, they must have
locking mechanisms to prevent unauthorised removal. Each panel shall be
replaceable.
l) The cabinet shall have at least 4 lockable wheels for moving the cabinet. The
wheel mechanism must be sturdy enough to allow movement under a full load in the
cabinet, as well as lockable when movement is not desired.
m) The cabinet shall have cable trays under each equipment tray to enable excess
cables to be coiled.
n) The cabinet shall have Perspex holder for displaying configuration charts, etc.
2.7.5 Design and Placement of Equipment Mountings
(a) Allow for plenty of access area around the equipment mounting, especially in
the front and back of the mounting. This is to allow personnel to get to the cable
terminations on the cross connect, and for the insertion and removal of equipment on
the mountings. In general, at least 600 mm of unobstructed access area must be
present in front and at the back of the mounting.
(b) Equipment mounting can be placed side-by-side in a row. However, not more than
three.(3) units can be placed in a row. All rows must be surrounded by access area of at
least 600 mm in width in between these rows; adjacent rows can share the same access
ETS/27I000/28(C&A-3)
area.
(c) In general, the equipment mountings shall be placed in close proximity

with one another, in a rectangular formation.
2.7.6 Design and Placement of Equipment on the Mountings
(a) Each component (cross connect or equipment) shall be mounted in groups of 2 or

less, depending on the density of connections. Each group shall serve fewer than 50
connections.
(b) Reserve at least 1 RU between groups for wire/cable management bar.
(c) Reserve at least 1 RU between each piece of active (power consuming and
heat dissipating) equipment for ventilation. (This is for the Contra ctor's information.
Active equipment are not required under this project)
(d) During the initial installation, the facility shall reserve an additional 100%
spare capacity on the mounting for future expansion. For example, if the mounted cross
connects take up a total of 20RUs, then an additional 20RUs of space shall be
reserved for future growth. The calculation of the space is based on installed space, and
shall take into account all the space reserved for ventilation and wire management.
(e) The extra space to be catered is highly dependent on the capacity for
expansion at the facility. If the facility is sparsely cabled, then reserve more space
for future expansion. However, if the facility densely cabled or there is no future growth
planned, then it is sufficient to cater for less than 100% spare capacity. As much
emphasis has been placed on IT development, the Contractor shall ensure a spare
capacity of 100%.
All incoming cables, irregardless of twisted pair cables, multi-pair cables or optical fibre
cables shall be grouped in one mounting. Outgoing cables irregardless for data or voice
purpose shall be grouped in another. The Contractor can propose otherwise provided
that the design allows for patches between components across different equipment
mountings to be minimized.
2.7.7 Patches Across Equipment Mountings
(a) Do not patch across directly in free space between the mountings (i.e.,
"flying" across mounting). Not only direct patch is unsightly, but it also poses as a
hazard for personnel who can trip over the wires/cables. As a rule, all patches shall run
in wire/cable management bars, or within the mountings. If there is a workspace between
mountings, then horizontal ventilated cable trays should be installed overhead between
the mountings. The cables shall then run vertically along source mounting up and
across the horizontal cable tray, and then down the destination mounting.
(b) No telecommunications cross-connects shall be physically located within

6 m (20 ft) of electrical distribution panels, step down devices, or transformers, which
carry voltages in excess of 400 Vrms.
2.8 Wire/Cable Management
2.8.1 Definition
(a) Wire/cable management bars are support structures typically attached to equipment
ETS/27I000/29(C&A-3)
mountings. They are used to organise the patch cords in the front and distribution cables
at the rear and also to hide the slack of the patch cords.
(b) There are vertical and horizontal wire/cable management bars. Vertical bars are
mounted on the side of the equipment mountings for vertical runs of the patch cord up
and down the mountings. Horizontal bars are mounted across the mounting to
organize patch cords between the mounted cross connects and equipment. The
vertical and horizontal wire/cable management bars shall be designed to ensure that the
minimum bend radius requirements are maintained.
(c) All equipment mounting must be installed with both vertical and horizontal wire/cable
management bars. Every mounting must have complete vertical bars on both sides.
(d) The size and spacing of the horizontal bars will depend on the spacing of the cross
connect and the equipment. In general, every group of cross connect and equipment
must be equipped with a horizontal bar.
(e) Velcro tape wraps shall be used to secure the cable bundles in the vertical wire/cable
management bars. The velcro tape wraps used shall be of the easy-to-release type and
shall be reusable.
(f) Hinged cover shall be provided for the wire/cable management bar.
2.8.2 The cable management shall be of 1U height, black in color and mounted in a 19-inch
wide rack.
2.8.3 Slotted cable management panel shall be used for managing and organizing patch
cables at the patch panels to the network equipment within the same or adjacent racks.
2.8.4 The front cover of the cable management panel shall be removable. It shall include
pass through holes allow front to rear cabling, with rigid fingers with flexible retention tabs
allow easy moves, adds and changes of patch cords.
2.8.5 The patch cords shall be neatly managed and excess length routed from the front to
the back of the rack via the slots of the cable management panel.
2.9 Pathways and Support Structures
2.9.1 Definition
(a) Pathways are support structures for the containment of the cables. Pathway must
be installed in accordance with the applicable electrical and building codes.
(b) The following are common types of pathways:
(i) External conduit
The external conduits are used for outdoor underground purposes, and are typically
made of steel, concrete or PVC.
(ii) Rectangular trunking
This is a prefabricated indoor structure consisting of a 16-gauge metal trough

equipped with a hinged cover. The sizes are typically 50 x 50 mm, 64 x 64 mm,
100 x 100 mm or 150 x 150 mm.
ETS/27I000/30(C&A-3)
(iii) Conduit
This is prefabricated circular tubing similar in purpose as rectangular trunking.
(iv) Flexible conduit
This is usually a short flexible tubing used to connect between a pathway to other
structures, e.g., cross-connect, IO or floorbox.
(v) Cable tray
This is a prefabricated indoor structure with a one-piece ventilated bottom or solid

bottom with two longitudinal side rails.
(vi) J-hooks
This is a hook mounted on the ceiling for hanging /stringing cables
(vii) Cable ladder
This is a prefabricated indoor structure shaped like a ladder. This is typically used for
securing cables up a vertical riser.
(c) An external conduit, rectangular trunking and conduits are underground /

underfloor structures, a cable tray and J-hook are ceiling mounted structures, and a
cable ladder is mounted vertically, typically in the Data Riser Rooms. These are all
rigid structures. In this project, the Contractor shall propose the type of pathway based
on the use of area in which the cables run through.
2.9.2 General Requirements for Pathways
(a) All cables running above the suspended false ceiling, embedded in walls and
columns, or on surface shall be supported by cables trays, ladders, trunking and conduits
system. No free cable is allowed.
(b) Prior to installation, the Contractor shall verify on site and produce coordinated route
drawings showing all details to ensure no clashing of M&E installations. The layout
drawings shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. All necessary dimensions of
cable trays, ladders, trunking and conduits shall be shall be clearly indicated in the
proposed drawings.
(c) The under raised floor cable supporting system shall be flexible, versatile and
permit clip on range. The computer designed cable arms shall provide a rigid support
with smooth edges.
(d) There shall be only two (2) sizes of rung spacing of 120mm, 240mm or any
combination of 40mm for the under raised floor cable support system. It is either single
or double rung of 70mm wide minimum and shall be fire resistance and low smoke
halogen free material. The system shall able to accommodate straight, vertical and
horizontal jointers including nuts and bolts.
(e) The Contractor shall be responsible for handling over a clean and dry
data and voice cable supporting system. The material use for the centre support bracket
spine and threaded rods shall be galvanized steel. The Employer shall reject any incorrect
or poorly installed cable supporting system and it shall be rectified at the Contractor own
cost and time.
ETS/27I000/31(C&A-3)
(f) All cable trays, ladders, trunking and conduits shall be run neatly on the surface of
the building and truly vertical, horizontal or parallel to the features of the building.
(g) The Contractor shall ensure that the cable support system and other M&E
installations are positioned in such a manner as to provide ample space for maintenance
of all services.
(h) The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of any cable trays, ladders,
trunking and conduits which are found uncoordinated and not easily accessible after all
other M&E services are installed, at his own costs and time.
(i) The Contractor shall seek the approval of the Employer if any of the cable trays,
ladders, trunking and conduits routes as shown in the layout drawing need to be off-set or
deviated.
(j) All metallic cable trays, ladders, trunking and conduits shall be earthed in accordance
with Standard BS 7671, 17th Edition.
(k) For all concealed installation (i.e. embedded in concrete) involving conduits and
trunking PVC conduits and OVC trunking shall be used. For all other installation, steel
conduits and trunking shall be used.
(I) Contractor shall clearly understand and follow the installation

instructions of the manufactures of PVC trunking conduits. The correct accessories for
sealing and fastening shall be used. The Employer shall reject any incorrect or poorly
installed cable supporting system.
(m) For cable tray and trunking system, only factor fabricated Tees (T), cross), reduction,
expansions, joints etc. shall be used. No site fabricated pieces are allowed.
(n) Unless disallowed by the relevant electrical and building codes, metallic
pathways shall be installed for lower crosstalk and EMI between cables. The cables
will radiate some amount of EMI. EM fields between the cables will be "distributed" to
the metallic pathway, reducing the crosstalk and EMI.
(o) For EM shielding, the pathways must be grounded (to the common clean
ground) at both ends. Grounding provides a drain for EM induction on the pathways and
prevents the pathways from becoming a "floating" ground and hence a radiating
antenna. Connecting both ends to the same clean ground ensures that the potential
difference on various parts of the pathways is kept to a minimum.
(p) In areas of high magnetic flux, ferromagnetic metallic pathways shall be installed.
Ferromagnetic pathways provide shielding for magnetic interference as well as electrical
interference.
(q) Continuous pathways must be installed for all Structured Cabling System cabling.
(r) Pathways shall not be located in elevator shafts.
(s) In open ceiling cabling, cable supports shall be provided by means that is
structurally independent of the suspended ceiling, its framework, or supports. These
supports shall be spaced no more than 1.5 m (5 ft) apart.
(t) Velcro tape wraps shall be used at appropriate intervals to secure cable and to
provide strain relief at termination points. These wraps shall not be over tightened to the
ETS/27I000/32(C&A-3)
point of deforming or crimping the cable sheath.
(u) For external conduits, they must be corrosion-resistant and able to

withstand the weight and pressure of the soil and other structure on top of them. They
must also be grounded to protect against EMI and lightning strikes.
(v) As majority of the cables will be laid above the ceiling in this project,
cable trays shall be used. In areas where cable trays are not appropriate due to ease
of access or adverse environmental condition or for other technical reasons, the
Contractor shall use the appropriate types of pathway subject to the approval of the
Employer. All costs associated with the provision of different types of pathway shall be
deemed to be included in the tender price.
(w)For areas where the Contractor is required to terminate the cables all
the way from the Data Riser Room to the IO (e.g.. public phone points, Internet access
points for passengers, LAN and PABX) and raised floor or underfloor trunking is not
provided, circular conduits coming down from the ceiling shall be used. As these
conduits will be embedded, the Contractor is expected to liaise closely with the Main
Contractor for the period to install the conduits. All costs associated with the provision of,
circular conduits shall be deemed to be included in the tender price.
2.9.3 Design Guidelines
(a) The design and installation of pathways shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA 569-B.
(b) The routing of the pathways must be planned in conjunction with all other
access services (e.g., air-conditioning ducts, fire sprinker system, etc) in the building,
and not afterwards. A minimum of 30 cm access headroom shall be provided and
maintained above a cable tray. Care shall be taken to ensure that other access services
do not restrict access to the pathways. Pathways shall not be re-routed around other
access services as this will increase the length of the cable runs and the number of
bends on the run. The Contractor is expected to liaise closely with the M&E
coordinator from the Main Contractor to achieve the above desirable results. No claim
or whatsoever arising from additional cable length due to pathway being re-routed shall
be entertained by the Employer.
(c) As a general rule, 6.5 cm2 of cross-sectional area of pathway is required for every 3
twisted pair cables.
(d) Backbone multi-strand optical fibre cables and multi-pair cables have different
cross-sectional diameters, and hence will have difference requirements for the pathways
which they are carried.
(e) The placement of the pathways shall be in parallel strips along the longest side of
the building, with the main distribution pathway coming out from the Data Riser Room
perpendicular to these strips.
(f) The general rule for spacing adjacent pathways is at 1.5 m intervals for maximum
flexibility. Beyond 1.8 m spacing will severely limits the system flexibility.
(g) The size of the pathways at each stage of the branching hierarchy must take into
account the path of the cable runs. The main distribution pathway should be much larger
than its sub-branches. The fill percentage must take into account the bends and
distribution requirements when the cable run from the main distribution pathway into its
sub-branch.
ETS/27I000/33(C&A-3)
(h) In a dense cabling area, more than one main distribution pathway to the various
sub-branches shall be installed to reduce the size of the main distribution pathWay as
well as the bending radius of the cable runs.
All metal parts of the pathways / cable supporting system shall be earthed to the
requirement of IEEE regulations or local Code of Practice.
All steel parts and surface shall be hot dipped galvanized to withstand corrosive
atmosphere according to BS EN ISO 1461. The Contractor shall provide test report for the
cable bracket support and tray selected. The Contractor shall also provide design
calculations to justify on the adequacy of the support system with details of all equipment
and cables total weight in the worst case.
2.9.4 Pathway Capacity and Installation
(a) In general, the pathway capacity is limited by the following:
(i) The size of the pathway versus the diameter of cable and the fill
percentages (i.e., how full the pathway can be filled). Fill • percentages shall be less
than 100% for the following reasons:
 Future addition/expansion
 Space needed to pull the cables across the pathways
 Easy of maintenance
 Cater for the bending radius of the cable through bends in the pathway and junction
boxes
(ii) The weight of the cable. No residual tension can remain on the
cable after installation except what is due to the cable's weight in a vertical rise. The
loading of the pathways shall comply with the appropriate the electrical code.
(iii) The design capacities of the pathways are typically based on a 28%
fill factor. This figure is obtained by derating the pathway by 15% for each of the
two 90° bends allowable. The resulting 70% is multiplied by the ANSI/NFPA70
requirement of 40% for conduits with more than cables (70 x 40% = 28%)
(b) Circular Conduits & Accessories
(i) The use of circular conduits shall comply with the latest ANSI/EIA/TIA 569-A
recommended guidelines on cable capacity.
(ii) Steel conduit fill percentages are subjected to the requirements of the
ANSI/NFPA 70. In general, the fill capacity of a conduit shall be less than 50%,
where fill = d2/D2 (where d = cable diameter, D = inner duct diameter).
(iii) Steel conduits shall conform to BS 31: Class B and shall be of heavy gauge
screw threaded at both ends, solid drawn or seamed by welding, showing no
appreciable unevenness and free from internal burns, fins and the like which may
cause damage to cables. The internal and external surface of the conduit shall be
hot-dipped galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461. All conduits used shall be of minimum
25mm diameter.
ETS/27I000/34(C&A-3)
(iv) Steel conduits mounting outside buildings or underground which will subject to
continual dampness shall have protection against corrosion complying with Class B
as specified in BS 31.
(v) The protective coating on associated steel conduit fittings shall be identical. Steel
conduit used for fire alarm system shall be painted with a coat of red enamel paint over
the entire length. For other services, except electrical conduits shall be painted over
50mm lengths spaced every 2 meters of straight runs with the colors recommended
in Clause 2.9.5(q). Conduits at all bends shall also be painted.
(vi) Steel conduits mounted outside building where it will expose to direct sunlight, a
protective coat of enamel paint shall be painted all around on conduit to match the
architectural paint work.
(vii) PVC conduits shall conform to BS 4607: Part 5 and BS EN 50086-1: Part 1
and shall be heavy gauge of wall thickness of 1.9 mm rigid tubes which are unscrewed
without coupling and with plain ends. All conduits used not be less than 25 mm in
diameter.
(viii) All PVC conduits used shall be of standard black color, not unless stated
otherwise by Employer.
(ix) Accessories used for steel conduit installation shall be of an approved type
complying to BS 31 with Class B corrosion resistance.
(x) Steel conduit fittings shall have internal fixture lugs and shall be
malleable cast iron and be hot-dip galvanized. Adaptable boxes and covers shall
be grey cast iron with external fitting lugs. Fittings, boxes with covers shall have a
machined surface around the perimeter mating with a similar machined surface on
the cover. The cover fixing screws shall be of brass.
(xi) The protective coatings on boxes, covers, metal partitions and

associated steel conduit shall be identical.
(xii)Internally screwed flanged couplers shall be of malleable cast iron complying with
BS 309, and shall have dimensions associated with the diameter To' of the conduit
as follows:
(a) Overall length – `D'+12 mm nominal
(b) Diameter of flange – `130' + 12.7 mm nominal (c) Thickness of flange –

3.175 mm nominal
(xiii) Steel coupler shall be provided with a neoprene washer and a steel washer.
(xiv) Standard circular pattern boxes are to be used with conduits. For the
drawing-in of cables, standard pattern through boxes are to be used. All steel conduit
boxes are to be galvanized finish.
(xv) All steel conduit boxes shall be provided with gaskets and lids. Adaptable
boxes are to be of mild steel of not less than 12 SWG with galvanized finish.
Boxes are to be not more than 50 mm deep and of such dimensions as will enable
the largest size cable, for which the conduit run is suitable, to be drawn in without
excessive bending of the cables. Lids of the same gauge with brass fixing screws
are to be provided. All such boxes shall be provided with knock-out holes according
ETS/27I000/35(C&A-3)
to the conduit entries required. Extension rings of suitable thickness shall be

provided so that the lid will flush to the final plastering.
(xvi) All steel conduit entries to adaptable boxes, outlet boxes and switchgears
are to be made with coupling and hexagon male brass bush. Sample of accessories
shall be forwarded to the Employer for approval prior to installation.
(xviii) All steel conduit outlet boxes and junction boxes are to be malleable iron
and of standard circular pattern with spout to BS 31.
(xix) Accessories used for PVC conduit wiring shall be of an approval type
complying to BS 4607.
(xx) All accessories used shall be of standard black color, identical to PVC conduit
used, not unless stated otherwise by Employer.
(xxi) Plain PVC conduits should be jointed by slip type of couplers with
manufacturer's standard sealing cement.
(xxi) All PVC conduits entries to outlet boxes, trunking and switchgear are to be
made with adaptors female thread and male bushes screwed.
(xxii) Standard PVC circular junction boxes are to be used with conduits for
intersection, TEE-junction, angle-junction and terminal. For the drawing-in of cables,
standard circular through boxes are to be used.
(xxiii) Samples of accessories shall be forwarded to Employer for approval prior to

installation.
(c) Cable Trays and Cable Ladders
(i) Cable trays shall be perforated type, heavy duty and fabricated from 1.6 mm
thick hot-dipped galvanized steel. The load rating shall be 150kg/m or better over
a span of 1.5m. The deflection shall not be more than 1/200 of the span at the
mid point of the span of a 3m continuous span. Contractor can propose
alternatives which meet the loading/deflection performance using other methods of
installation which shall be approved by the Employer
(ii) There shall only be four (4) sizes of cable trays, 1500mm, 200mm, 300mm and
600mm cable trays. When tray capacity greater than 600mm is required, a
combination of the two standard tray sizes shall be used to meet the requirement.
(iii) Manufacturer's standard fittings shall be used. Where special fittings or sections
of trays are fabricated, they shall be manufactured and finished to the same
standard as manufacturer's standard items.
(iv) Accessories used shall be of manufacturer's standard items and shall be of

the same material, thickness and finish as the cable tray. The bends shall have an
inner radius of 50mm and a straight length of at least I00mm after each bend. The
length of the tees measured between a point of intersection and the end of the fitting
shall be at least I00mm.
(v) Mushroom-head zinc plated steel roofing bolts and nuts comply to
BS 1494 Part 1 shall be used to fix together adjacent section of cable tray and/or
accessories.
ETS/27I000/36(C&A-3)
(vi) The cross-sectional area is defined as the size of the base

multiplied by the height of the side rail.
(vii) The capacity of the pathway shall be such that the cables do not stack over
the side rails.
(vi) Weight which the cable trays and ladders can support limit the number of
cables on these structures further. Since these structures are mounted on the
ceiling and along the side of the walls, the Contractor shall not attempt to overload
the structures beyond their safety limits. The Contractor is responsible for
finding out these safety limits from the Main Contractor and submit
calculations with endorsement from a locally recognized Structure Professional
Engineer as proof of compliance to this clause.
(vii) Cables ladders shall be manufactured from galvanized steel with minimum
thickness of 2.0 mm and the coupling manufactured from galvanized steel with
minimum thickness of 3.0mm.
(viii) The ladder side channels shall be strengthened by reinforcing

inserts to increase the torsional rigidity.
(ix) The ladder shall be completed with rung slots of 50mm width spaced at
maximum 300mm at the straight run.
(d) J-hooks
Since the J-hook is a hanging structure, attention must be paid to what is the
maximum weight the hook can support. The spacing between the J-hooks will
depend on the weight and tension of the cables. Similarly, the Contractor is
responsible for finding out the safety limits of the structures from the Main Contractor
and shall submit calculations with endorsement from a locally recognised Structure
Professional Engineer as proof of compliance to this clause.
2.9.5 Installation Guidelines
(a) The pathways shall be run in the most direct route possible to reduce the
number of bends and the length of cables between two end points. There
shall be no more than two 90° bends between pull points or pull boxes.
(b) The pathways shall contain no continuous sections longer than 30m. For
longer runs, insert pull points or pull boxes at 30m interval.
(c) The inside of the pathways shall be free from sharp edges or projections that can
damage insulation. When a pathway passes through a partition or wall, it must be of
an unbroken length.
(d) Cable runs can run from one type of pathway to another (e.g. from the
cable tray down to rectangular trunk or circular conduits). However, the support
must be continuous throughout the run. At the junction of the different pathways,
appropriate interconnects, e.g. flexible conduits, must be installed.
(e) The pathways for Structured Cabling System and other services such as
power, must be kept separate to prevent EMI between different types of cabling.
The pathways for Structured Cabling System shall be installed with a minimum
clearance of 50 mm (2 in) when run parallel with electric power or lighting, which is
ETS/27I000/37(C&A-3)
less than or equal to 400 Vrms. For high voltage single core and multi-core
cables (exceeding 400 volts), a minimum clearance of 460mm shall be
maintained.
(f) Cable trays shall not be used as personnel walkways. If the Contractor is caught
standing or stepping on cable trays, he will be asked to replace the entire length
of cable trays at his own cost.
(g) All cable trays shall be supported at not more than 1 meters intervals on custom
made C channels supporting system fixed onto walls and floor slabs as indicated
on typical installation drawings or the secondary ceiling grid as specified. All
hangers shall be painted with a coat of primer and two coats of semi glossy grey.
200mm or smaller trays are allowed to sit and secure to the secondary grid and it
can only be implemented with the approval of Employer Trays which are 300mm
wide or wider than 300mm shall be suspended from floor slabs or walls. All C
channels supporting system shall have height adjustment features. The Contractor
shall submit the supporting system, calculation to ascertain the integrity of the
cable supporting system.
(h) Fixings for cable tray shall be secured at regular intervals not exceeding 1
m and at 50 mm from bends and intersections. Fixings shall be fabricated from
aluminum flat bars complying with BS 4360 and shall be painted with a primer
and two coats of semi glossy grey.
(i) All wall mounted brackets to support cable trays shall be secured with metal
threaded studs complete with washer, two lock nuts using `Tornads' cartridge
hammer or approved equivalent.
(j) Where the tray is suspended, the installation shall not be subject to any vertical
and horizontal distortion. Suspension parts are to be purpose made of suitable
length with facilities incorporated for allowing adjustments to be made to the height
of the suspended tray.
(k) Where two tiers cable trays are used, custom made common C channel supporting
system shall be used to support all trays and trunkings. It shall space the two trays
at different heights of no less than 30mm apart. These C channels supporting
system shall incorporate the facilities for easy adjustments of heights.
(l) All cable trays shall be mechanically and electrically continuous

throughout.
(m) Cable tray shall only be cut along a line of plain metal and not through the
perforations. The Contractor will be held responsible to replace any lengths of
cable trays which show any signs of corrosion during the defects liability
period.
(n) Holes cut in cable tray for the passage of cable shall be provided with grommets
complying with BS 1767. Alternatively they shall be bushed or lined.
(o) Conduit entry to cable tray shall be by means of a coupling and a hexagonal male
brass bush.
(p) All cable tray shall be run at least 300mm clear of air-conditioning ducts,
pipes and mechanical installation.
ETS/27I000/38(C&A-3)
(q) Before delivery to site, the cable trays or trunking shall be embossed with
letters of 50mm height on the underside of the tray at intervals of 2 meters. All
cable trunking and trays shall be painted green/grey. The Contractor shall
submit trunking and tray sample to the Employer for approval.
(r) Cable tray shall be completely erected and thoroughly cleaned of debris before any
installation of cables is carried out.
(s) Proposed conduit routes shall be of the layout drawings to be submitted to the
Employer for approval at least three (3) month prior to installation.
(t) The conduit of sufficiently large section throughout and shall be so arranged
with draw-in boxes to allow for easy draw-in and draw-out of any one or all the
cables. The cables in each conduit must not exceed the number set in local Authority
code and standard IEEE 17th Edition and the whole conduit system shall comply with
the above regulation.
(u) Conduits buried in concrete shall be securely fixed in between the upper and lower
layers of*reinforcing steel to prevent displacement and shall have 40 mm depth of
cover over their entire length. Conduit buried in plaster shall be securely fixed half
saddles and shall have 20 mm depth of cover over its entire length. The outlet
boxes shall be such that it will be flushed with the final plastering, packing ring or
extension ring shall be installed where necessary.
(v) Where conduit is buried in the carcass of a building or in ground or before pouring
of concrete all open end and outlet shall be temporarily plugged to prevent ingress
of foreign matter, moisture or water, and coated with petroleum jelly. All outlet
and junction boxes shall be fitted with protective pate and counter-sunk screws
prior to concreting and plastering. No rethreading shall be allowed without the prior
approval of the Employer.
(w) Where conduit buried in concrete crosses an expansion joint in the concrete
structure it shall be wrapped with waterproof building paper or half lapped PVC
self adhesive tape for a distance of 300 mm on each side of the joint.
(x) Conduits buried in the ground shall be of the PVC type with all the joints properly
sealed.
(y) Conduits shall be run truly vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the
building. Conduit shall run electrically and mechanically continuous between
outlets with not more than two 90° bends. Where PVC conduits are bent, they
must be bend cold without altering their sections with an approved type of
bending spring. The conduit shall be run so as to be self draining incorporating as
necessary approved means of drainage.
(z) Conduits shall be supported at regular intervals not exceeding 1.2m for
conduit sixes up to and including 25mm and 1.8m for sizes 32mm and above. For
surface installation PVC spacer bar saddles shall be used for securing conduits on
surface other than on structural steel members for which an approved type or
clamp shall be devised. In additional, conduit fixing shall be located not more than
300mm from each surface box or switch and shall be one per conduit to each box
or switch.
(aa) The thread of the steel conduits shall be coated with an approved jointing
compound and Teflon tape (pipe joint sealer) during assembly and joints shall be
ETS/27I000/39(C&A-3)
treated with a rust inhibiting paint after jointing. All conduits shall be threaded for a
correct length such that the ends of the conduits will butt close together in the
sockets. When terminating in conduit boxes and other fittings provided with tapped
spouts, the conduits shall be threaded for the correct length to ensure a tight full
length connection to the spout.
(bb) The length of thread on the ends of steel conduit shall suit the length of
internal thread in the end of the fitting or accessory. Excess length of thread will not
be permitted. Threads shall be thoroughly cleaned before screwing in conduits.
Loose and floppy threads shall not be allowed. Where conduits are set in column
or beams, each end shall be terminated into a coupling and a threaded metal plug,
to permit subsequent jointing.
(cc) Conduit terminations at boxes, trunking or accessories shall consist of a

screwed socket and smooth brass/PVC bush. The Contractor shall remove all burrs
from the ends by means of a reamer; filing is not considered sufficient. No
exposed, surplus threads shall be visible after erection, other than at running joints
and where such joints are used, they shall be thoroughly coated after erection with
good quality red lead paint. Lock nuts shall be provided at running joints.
(dd) Where conduits is in contact with any structural steel work, an effective and
permanent method of fixing the conduit on to the steelwork shall be provided. No part
of the conduit shall be under mechanical stress.
(ee) All conduit boxes shall be fixed directly to the building structure and shall
not use the conduit as a means of support. The outlet boxes for fitting etc shall be
used as draw-in boxes. Draw-in boxes shall also be provided at intervals of 12m of
conduit or where there are more than two right-angle bends.
(ff) All steel conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous

throughout and is to be effectively earthed with heavy copper wire or tape and screw
on clips. No conduit shall be less than 25 mm outside diameter. Conduits shall not
come into contact with each other and with other pipes and shall in all cases be at
least 150mm from gas pipes.
(gg) Conduits shall be thoroughly swabbed out after fixing and immediately
prior to the drawing in of cables. Cables shall only be drawn into the conduit after
the conduit installation has been completed. Pull wired shall be provided for all
conduits.
(hh) In no case shall conduits from different distribution boards be connected by

junction box and likewise cables from different boards or phases shall not be
housed in the same conduit. The lead and return conductors of the same circuit
shall in all cases be drawn into the same conduit.
(ii) Conduit runs shall be perpendicular to floor except when these are within
300mm of floor or ceiling, where they may run parallel to the floor.
(jj) Conduits embedded in concrete slabs, unless shown otherwise, shall be spaced not
less than 150mm centers and as widely spaced as possible when these conduits
converge at panels or junction boxes. Conduit run near the outlet box shall be
secured tot he wooden former by means of galvanized saddles to prevent
dislocation of outlet box during concrete pouring. Adaptor ring or suitable thickness
shall be used where necessary.
ETS/27I000/40(C&A-3)
(kk) Conduits running parallel to slab supports, such as beams, columns and
structural walls, shall be installed not less than 300mm from such supporting
elements. The outlet box shall be such that it is flush to the final plastering.
(ll) The ladder shall be supported not more than 2m interval by approved
hangers or brackets.
(mm) All couplers, bends, riser, interconnection clamps and other fittings shall
be of manufacturer's standard products and shall be supported such that it will
carry the designed load.
(nn) Hook and loop cable managers should be used in the closet where reconfiguration
of -cables and terminations may be frequent.
(oo) All grounding / earthing and bonding shall be done to applicable codes and
regulations.
(pp) Properly installed fire-stop systems shall be installed to prevent or retard the
spread of fire, smoke, water, and gases through the building. This requirement
applies to openings designed for telecommunications use that mayor may not be
penetrated by cables, wires, or raceways.
(qq) Fire stops shall be done to applicable codes.
2.9.6 Labeling for Pathway
(a) Labeling shall be provided at each end of a pathway. In addition, pathway shall be
labeled at every 2 meters. At locations where it penetrates wall, floor and/or ceiling, labels
shall be provided on both sides of the crossing.
(b) An unique alphanumeric identifier shall be assigned for each pathway.
3 EMI AND EMC
3.1 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS OF BALANCED CABLES
3.1.1 The following sections discuss issues pertaining to copper twisted pair cables and the
electrical signals transmitted through them. Electrical signal emit, and are susceptible to
electromagnetic interference (EMI).
3.1.2 Within a twisted pair, a differential mode signal is transmitted by the two cable elements in
a balanced twisted pair. In a perfect balance, the net current is zero, and the
electromagnetic fields generated by each of the two currents cancel each other, and the net
radiation is zero.
3.13 Hence a pair of perfectly balanced transmission lines does not radiate or absorb any
EMI. Unfortunately, due to imperfections in the materials and the manufacturing
processes, perfect balance is not achievable for current twisted pair technology.
3.1.4 Any unbalance causes a net current flow down to the cable elements, creating a
ETS/27I000/41(C&A-3)
longitudinal signal that produces electromagnetic radiation or EMI. This EMI can be
induced in adjacent twisted pairs to produce crosstalk between the two pairs. Other
external EMI sources also induce noise in the twisted pair that affect the balance of the
pair.
3.1.5 There are two ways to achieve resistance against EMI for copper cables:
(a) Balancing
EMI resistance is achieved by "canceling" out the noise by sending perfectly balanced
signals down the twisted pair. The amount of balance is dependent on how balanced are
the signals in each cable element, the symmetry of the cable elements (core and
insulation), and the number of twists per unit length of the twisted cables.
(b) Shielding
A shield acts as a barrier between the cable elements and the outside world. Both
the external EMI and the EMI emitted-by the cable elements are induced onto the
shield, and-with proper grounding, these-effect are drained to the ground. The
effectiveness of the shielding depends on the ' quality of the shielding material, the
termination of the shielding and the grounding.
3.1.6 Because of imperfections and mismatch of materials, it is almost impossible to - achieve

perfect balance without the addition of special filters. A single 4-pair twisted pair cable is
designed to minimise crosstalk between the 4 pairs by special placement and twisting of
individual pairs. However, crosstalk appears not just between pairs within the same cable,
but across adjacent pairs on different cables in a bundle of cables. Hence, for UTP
cables, they must not be bundled too close to one another to reduce the possibility of
crosstalk between different cables.
3.2 EMI / EMC
3.2.1 Definition
(a) EMC stands for "Electromagnetic Compatibility". This means that the electronic device
shall be able to work in close vicinity to each other, without disturbing each other (in the
electromagnetic sense).
(b) EMI stands for "Electromagnetic Interference". EMI is the electromagnetic emissions
generated by a device which can interfere with the operation of another device. The main
propagation paths for EMI are:
(i) Radiation to free air (magnetic and/or electric fields), and
(ii) Conduction (through cables)
(c) Equipment is "EMC" if it is within standard limits in generating EMI an

withstanding EMI from other equipment.
3.2.2 Importance of EMC
(a) The signals carried by the cables are very susceptible to external EMI. EMI can cause
significant bit errors to occur, causing frequent retransmissions and even the shutdown
of network.
(b) EMI emitted by the signals traveling through the cables can affect other equipment and
ETS/27I000/42(C&A-3)
poses also a security risk from the eavesdropping on the radiated signals.
(c) Henceforth, to ensure that all equipment will work together satisfactorily,
the Structured Cabling System must conform to the following standards.
(i) European EMC Directive
Equipment and systems bearing the marking "CE" or "CE approved"
(ii) FCC Class B emissions limits
Equipment and systems bearing the marking "FCC Class B"
(d) The manufacturer of the cabling system (i.e., comprises cables and passive
components of a Structured Cabling System) shall provide at least a 25 -year
unconditional guarantee against EMI.
3.2.3 European EMC Directive
(a) The EEC issued an EMC Directive (2004/108/EC(89/336/EEC))
(b) The EMC Directive specifies two essential requirements:
(I) The device cannot interfere with radio or telecommunications

equipment operation
(ii)The device itself must be immune from electromagnetic

disturbances due to sources such as RF transmitters and other equipment
(c) All equipment that conforms to the European Union's EMC Directive (and all
application Directives) is labeled with the "CE" mark.
(d) The European EMC Directive applies to electronic system as a whole, and not to
any specific component. In general, a cabling system is considered as a "passive-EM"
equipment, and is excluded from the scope of the EMC Directive.
(e) However, a cabling system is susceptible to EMI, and may radiate EMI
from the signals generated by the equipment connected. Hence, the proposed cable
type must be capable of keeping interference at a level below the limits specified.
3.2.4 FCC Requirements
(a) The emission limit for Class B represents a level believed by the FCC to
be low enough to avoid interference to radio and television reception when there is more
than one wall and 30 feet separating the computing device and the receiver.
(b) Class A is IO times more interference than Class B. Class B is a stricter standard for
both conductive and radiated emissions than the industrial and commercial equipment
designated as Class A.
ETS/27I000/43(C&A-3)
(c) Again, these standards apply to electronic systems as a whole, not to any specific
component. The Contractor shall submit document to support their claim that the
proposed cable are capable of keeping interference at a level below the FCC limits.
3.2.5 Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
(a) To avoid electromagnetic interference, all pathways shall provide

clearance of at least:
(i) Distance of 1.2 m from large motors or transformers.
(ii) Distance of 0.3 m from conduit and cables used for electric power distribution.
(iii) Distance of 0.12 m from fluorescent lighting.
(b) Pathways shall cross perpendicular to fluorescent lighting and electrical

power cables or conduits. Electric power distribution shall run in separate conduits with
electromagnetic isolation from Structured Cabling System or telecommunications
cables. The latest EIA/TIA-569 standards on separation of the telecommunications
pathways and power wiring of 400 Volts or less shall be complied with.
(c) The Contractor is responsible for liaising with the M&E coordinator
of the Main Contractor to install the pathways meeting the requirements stated in this
Specifications. Where pathways are found to be not complying with the above
requirements, the pathways shall be removed or relocated at the Contractor's expense.
4.0 EDGE SWITCHES, IP PHONES and CORE SWITCHES
Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the proposed core switches, edge switches and
IP phones are compatible with the core and distribution switches used for the entire airport
IP telephony and data system. Contactor is required to interface the edge switches and IP
phones with the core/ distribution switches installed by infrastructure contractor to ensure
workability and compatibility. Contractor shall submit proposed type and model of edge
switches and IP phones together with catalogue to Employer for approval.
4.1 Edge Switches Specifications
(i) The proposed edge switches shall be PoE, intelligent, managed switches which are
mounted on a 19’ rack.
(ii) The propose switch shall have the following PoE configurations with full 15.4W for up
to 24 ports or 48 ports.
(iii) There shall be Intelligent features at the network edge, such as sophisticated access
control lists (ACLs) and enhanced security
(iv) It shall have 2 x Dual-purpose uplinks for Gigabit Ethernet uplink flexibility, allowing
use of either a copper or a fiber uplink; each dual-purpose uplink port has one or more
10/100/1000 Ethernet port and one or more Small Form-Factor Pluggable
(SFP)-based Gigabit Ethernet port, with one port active at a time
(v) It shall include Network control and bandwidth optimization using advanced QoS,
granular rate limiting, ACLs, and multicast services
ETS/27I000/44(C&A-3)
(vi) It shall support Network security through a wide range of authentication methods, data
encryption technologies, and NAC based on users, ports, and MAC addresses
(vii) It shall support easy network configuration, upgrades, and troubleshooting using Cisco
Network Assistant software
(viii) It shall supports auto configuration for specialized applications using Smartports
(ix) It shall come with Limited lifetime hardware warranty
(x) It shall support Software updates at no additional charge
(xi) Combination of the following specs
a. 8 Ethernet 10/100 PoE ports, 2 10/100/1000 PoE input port and 2 dual-purpose
uplink ports
b. 12 Ethernet 10/100 PoE ports, 2 10/100/1000 PoE input port and 2 dual-purpose
uplink ports
c. 24 Ethernet 10/100 PoE ports, 2 10/100/1000 PoE input port and 2 dual-purpose
uplink ports
d. 48 Ethernet 10/100 PoE ports, 2 10/100/1000 PoE input port and 2 dual-purpose
uplink ports
(xii) Support Flex Stack Module with 40 Gbps of throughput, allowing ease of operation
with single configuration and simplified switch upgrade.
4.1.1 Power over Ethernet
(a) The Switch Series shall provide PoE to allow easy connectivity to Ethernet-powered
devices including IP phones and wireless access points. The switch must comply with
pre-standard PoE and IEEE 802.3af. PoE shall remove the need for wall power to each
PoE-enabled device and eliminates the cost for additional electrical cable and circuits
that would otherwise be necessary in IP phone and WLAN deployments. It shall
eliminate the need for power injectors and PoE mid-spans for powering IP devices. The
propose 24 port switch must support 24 simultaneous full-powered PoE port at 15.4W .
The switch need in configuration of 8 and 24 10/100 with 8 simultaneous full-powered
PoE ports at 15.4W .
(b) The switch shall receive power over the uplink from an upstream PoE device and does
not require a separate power supply. This will allow flexibility and availability in
deployment. It shall also be ideal for tight wiring and space-constraint applications. The
power adaptor (PWR-A=) and power cord are to be provided.
(c) Optional PoE+ with up to 30W per port that allows latest PoE+ capable devices. Power
options with 740W or 370W fixed power supplies for PoE+ switches.
4.1.2 Redundant Power System
The Switches must support the Redundant Power System (RPS) 2300, which increases
availability in a converged data, voice, and video network by providing transparent power
backup to two of six attached switches at the same time.
ETS/27I000/45(C&A-3)
4.1.3 Intelligence in the Network
The requirements in PTB Networks need to evolve to address four new developments at
the network edge:
(a) Increase in desktop computing power
(b) Introduction of bandwidth-intensive applications
(c) Expansion of highly sensitive data on the network

(d) Presence of multiple device types, such as IP phones, WLAN access points, and IP
video cameras
Function requires new demands contend for resources with existing mission-critical
applications. As a result, for future IT professionals to view the edge of the network as
critical to effectively manage the delivery of information and applications.
4.1.4 Enhanced Security
(a) The require range of security features should offers helps to protect important information,
keep unauthorized people off the network, guard privacy, and maintain uninterrupted
operation.
(b) The Identity-Based Networking Services (IBNS) solution shall provide authentication,
access control, and security policy administration to secure network connectivity and
resources.
(c) IBNS is require to prevents unauthorized access and helps ensure that users get only
their designated privileges. It shall provide the ability to dynamically administer granular
levels of network access. Using the 802.1x standard and the Control Server (ACS), users
can be assigned a VLAN upon authentication, regardless of where they connect to the
network. This setup should allow IT departments to enable strong security policies without
compromising user mobility and with minimal administrative overhead.
(d) The requirements shall guard against denial-of-service (DoS) and other attacks. ACLs
can be used to restrict access to sensitive portions of the network by denying packets
based on source and destination MAC addresses, IP addresses, or TCP/User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) ports. The ACL lookups shall be done in hardware, and forwarding
performance shall not be compromised when ACL-based security is implemented.
4.1.5 Availability and Scalability
(a) The switch shall be equipped with a large set of features that allow for network scalability
and higher availability through multicast filtering as well as a complete suite of Spanning
Tree Protocol enhancements aimed to maximize availability in a Layer 2 network.
(b) It shall include Voice-aware 802.1x port security features to configure the switch to disable
the offending data VLAN when a violation is detected without affecting Voice VLAN on the
same switch port.
(c) It shall include enhancements to the standard Spanning Tree Protocol, such as Per-VLAN
Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+), UplinkFast, and PortFast which help to maximize network
uptime. The PVST+ allows for Layer 2 load sharing on redundant links to efficiently use
the extra capacity inherent in a redundant design. UplinkFast, PortFast, and
ETS/27I000/46(C&A-3)
BackboneFast shall reduce the standard 30- to 60-second Spanning Tree Protocol
convergence time.
4.1.6 Advanced QoS
(a) The switch shall offer superior multilayer QoS features to ensure that the network traffic is
classified and prioritized to avoid congestion in any possible manner. Configuration of
QoS shall be greatly simplified through automatic QoS (Auto QoS). It is a feature that
detects IP phones and automatically configures the switch for the appropriate
classification and egress queuing. This shall optimizes traffic prioritization and network
availability without the need for a complex configuration.
(b) The QoS features should allow network administrators to prioritize mission-critical and
bandwidth-intensive traffic, such as enterprise resource planning (ERP), voice (IP
telephony traffic), and computer-aided design and manufacturing (CAD/CAM), over
applications such as FTP or e-mail.
(c) For example, it would be undesirable to have a large file download designate to one port
on a switch which increase latency in voice traffic on another port on this switch. This
condition is avoided by making sure that voice traffic is properly classified and prioritized
throughout the network. Other applications, such as Web browsing, can be handled on a
lower-priority basis.
4.1.7 Management
(a) The switch shall include features that simplify its initial configuration. The network
administrator shall be able to set up the switch through a Web browser; Thus eliminating
the need for terminal-emulation programs and the command-line interface (CLI).
(b) The switch management module shall include the following functionalities such as:
Network discovery, topology views, end-station tracking, and VLAN management,
Real-time network fault analysis with easy-to-deploy device-specific best-practice
templates, hardware and software inventory management, centralized configuration tools,
Syslog monitoring, network response time and availability monitoring and tracking.
4.2 IP Phones Specifications
The IP Phones shall include dynamic soft keys to guide users through core business
features and functions, while a pixel-based display combines intuitive features, calling
information, and eXtensible Markup Language (XML) services into a rich user experience.
It shall offers numerous important security features plus the choice of IEEE 802.3af Power
over Ethernet (PoE), inline power, or local power through an optional power adaptor.
Contractor shall ensure that the proposed IP phones are compatible with the core and
distribution switches used for the entire airport IP telephony and data system. Contractor
shall submit proposed type and model of IP phones together with catalogue to Employer
for approval.
4.2.1 General Features
a. Lighted Hold Key

Lights when pressed to put a call on hold and stays lit until the held call has been
resumed, or flashes if one call is held while another is engaged; is dark when no calls
are on hold.
ETS/27I000/47(C&A-3)
b. Lighted Menu Key

Lights when pressed to access voicemail messages, call logs, network settings, user
preferences, corporate directories, and XML services; stays lit while menu items are
active.
c. Lighted Message Waiting Indicator

Lights when there is new voicemail and is visible on both the phone chassis and the
handset; stays lit until new voicemail has been processed by the user.
d. Graphical Display
Graphical monochrome display with scrollable lines intuitive access to calling features
and text-based XML applications; It shall also supports audio-based XML
applications.
e. Soft-Key Buttons (min 4no.) and a Scroll Toggle Bar

Dynamically presents calling options to the user; the scroll toggle bar allows easy
movement through the displayed information.
f. Network Features
It shall offer IEEE 802.1 p/q tagging and switching .
g. Volume Control
A volume-control toggle provides easy decibel-level adjustments of the handset,
speaker, and ringer.
h. Single-Position Foot Stand

Provides optimum display viewing and comfortable use of buttons and keys; the foot
stand can be removed for wall mounting with mounting holes located on the base of
the phone.
i. Multiple Ring Tones

It shall offers more than 24 user-adjustable ring tones
j. Hearing Aid Compatibility Features

Hearing-aid-compatible (HAC) handset meets the requirements set by the American
Disability Act (ADA); it also meets ADA HAC requirements for a magnetic coupling to
approved hearing aids; the phone dialing pad also complies with the ADA.
k. Signaling Protocol Support

Supported in Unified Call Manager Versions 3.3(5)SR2, 4.1(3)SR3a, 4.2(1)SR1, and
higher using Skinny Client Control Protocol (SCCP); supports both SCCP and
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) with Unified Call Manager Version 5.0(2) and higher.
l. Codec Support
Provides G.711a, G.711μ, G.729a, and G.729ab audio-compression codecs.
m. Configuration Options
Provides provisioning of network parameters through Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP).
n. Voice Quality
Offers comfort-noise generation and voice-activity-detection (VAD) programming on a
system basis.
4.2.2 Security Features
ETS/27I000/48(C&A-3)
a. Certificates
Phones are shipped with factory-installed X.509v3 certificates. There is also an option
of installing and removing certificates at the customer’s site.
b. Device Authentication and Signaling Encryption

Transport layer security (TLS) with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)-128
encryption is offered when using Cisco Call Manager Version 4.1 or later.
c. Media Encryption
Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) with AES-128 encryption is offered
when using Call Manager Version 4.1 or later.
4.2.3 Software Specifications
a. Firmware Upgrades
Supports firmware changes download via internet.
b. Software Upgrades
Software upgrade supported using a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server.
4.2.4 Power Options
a. Inline Power
Works with inline power from any inline power-capable switch.
b. IEEE 802.3af PoE

Works with IEEE 802.3af PoE-compliant blades.
c. Local Power
Can also be powered locally with a power adapter.
4.2.5 Temperature Ratings
a. Operating Temperature
32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)
b. Relative Humidity
10 to 95% (noncondensing)
c. Storage Temperature
14 to 140°F (–10 to 60°C)
4.2.6 Certifications and Standards

a. Regulatory Compliance
• CE Marking
b. Safety
• Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 60950
• Canadian Standards Association (CSA) C22.2 No. 60950
• EN 60950
• IEC 60950
• AS/NZS60950
c. Electromagnetic Compatibility
ETS/27I000/49(C&A-3)
• Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 (CFR 47) Class B

• ICES-003 Class B
• EN55022 Class B
• CISPR22 Class B
• AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class B
• CISPR 24
• VCCI Class B
• EN55024
• EN 50082-1
• EN 61000-3-2
• EN 61000-3-3
• EN 61000-6-1
d. Telecom
• FCC Part 68 (CFR47) HAC
e. Industry Standards
• TIA 810A
4.3 Core Switch
4.3.1 Core Switch Overview

The core switch shall deliver secure, converged, end-to-end services, from the wiring closet to
the core network, the data center, and the WAN edge. The virtual switching capacity of the
switching System shall be able to scale to 1.4 Terabits per second.
The core switch delivers scalable performance and port density across several chassis
configurations and LAN, WAN, and metropolitan-area network (MAN) interfaces. It should be
available in 3-, 6-, 9-, and 13-slot chassis, offering range of integrated services modules,
including multi gigabit network security, content switching, telephony, and network analysis
modules.
From 48-port to 576-port 10/1 00/1 000 or from 1152-port 10/1 00 Ethernet wiring closets to 400
million packets per second (mpps) network cores supporting up to 192 1-Gbps or 130 10-Gbps
trunks, the core switch provides an optimal platform that maximizes network uptime with
failover capability between redundant routing and forwarding engines.
4.3.2 Features and Benefits

The core switch shall provide performance, port densities, and availability with investment
protection for enterprise and service provider markets, including:
a) Maximum Network Uptime: With Software Modularity and platform, power supply,
supervisor engine, switch fabric, and integrated network services redundancy
provides one- to three-second failover and delivers application and services
continuity in a converged network, minimizing disruption of mission-critical data
and services
b) Comprehensive Network Security: Integrates proven, multi-gigabit security
ETS/27I000/50(C&A-3)
solutions, including intrusion detection, firewall, VPN, and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
into existing networks
c) Scalable Performance: Provides up to 400-mpps performance with distributed
forwarding architecture
d) Forward-Thinking Architecture with Investment Protection: Supports three
generations of interchangeable, hot-swappable modules in the same chassis,
optimizing IT infrastructure usage
e) Operational Consistency: Features 3-, 6-, 9-, and 13-slot chassis configurations
sharing a common set of modules, Software, Catalyst Operating System Software,
and network management tools that can be deployed anywhere in the network
f) Unparalleled Services Integration and Flexibility: Integrates advanced services
such as security, wireless LAN services, and content with converged networks;
provides the widest range of interfaces and densities, from 10/1 00 and 10/1 00/1 000
Ethernet to 10 Gigabit, and from DS-0 to OC-48; and performs in any deployment from
end to end
4.3.3 Operational Consistency in End-to-End Switches Deployments

a) Features 3-, 6-, 9-, and 13-slot chassis configurations that share a common set of modules,
software, and network management tools
b) Deploys anywhere in the network-from the wiring closet to the core network, to the data
center, to the WAN edge
c) Shares WAN port adapters with compatible routers for reduced sparing and training costs
4.3.4 Maximum Network Uptime and Network Resiliency

a) Provides packet-loss protection and the fastest recovery from network disruption
b) Features fast, one- to three-second failover between redundant supervisor engines
c)Offers optional, redundant, high-performance supervisor engines, passive backplane,
multi module technology, IEEE 802.3ad link aggregation, IEEE 802.1s only, and Hot
Standby Router Protocol/Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (HSRP/VRRP)
high-availability features
d) The core switch with Software Modularity boosts operational efficiency and minimizes
downtime through evolutionary software infrastructure advancements.
e) Minimizes unplanned downtime through self-healing processes
f) Simplifies software changes through subsystem In-Service Software Upgrades (ISSU)
g) Enables process-level, automated policy control by integrating Embedded Event Manager
(EEM).
4.3.5 Integrated High-Performance Network Security and Management

Integrated gigabit-per-second services modules, deployed where external devices would not be
feasible, simplify network management. These include:
ETS/27I000/51(C&A-3)
a) Gigabit Firewall: Provides access protection

b) High-Performance Intrusion Detection System (IDS): Provides intrusion detection
protection
c) Gigabit Network Analysis Module: Provides a more manageable infrastructure and full
Remote Monitoring (RMON) support
d) High-Performance SSL: Provides high-performance, secure e-commerce traffic
termination
e) Gigabit VPN and Standards-Based IP Security (IPSec): Support lower-cost Internet and
intra-campus connections
4.3.6 Content- and Application-Aware Layers 2 Through 7 Services

a) An integrated content switching module (CSM) brings high-performance, feature-rich server
and firewall load balancing, helping to ensure a safer and more manageable infrastructure
with unprecedented control
b) Integrated multi-gigabit SSL acceleration, combined with a CSM, provides a
high-performance e-commerce solution
c)Integrated multi-gigabit firewall and CSMs provide a secure, high-performance, data center
solution
d) Software features such as Network-Based Application Recognition (NBAR) enhance
network management and control of bandwidth utilization
4.3.7 Scalable Performance
Delivers up to 400 mpps switching per chassis, using the distributed Express Forwarding platform
a) Scales to 1.4 terabits per second with the Virtual Switching System.
b) Supports a mix of Express Forwarding implementations and switch-fabric speeds for
optimal wiring closet, core network, data center, and WAN edge deployments, as well as
service provider networks
4.3.8 Rich Layer 3 Services

a) Multiprotocol Layer 3 routing supports traditional network requirements and provides a
smooth transition mechanism in the enterprise
b) Provides hardware support for enterprise-class and service-provider-scale routing tables
c)Provides IPv6 support in hardware
d) Provides hardware support for large enterprise-class and service-provider-scale routing
tables
e) Provides Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) support in hardware to enable VPN
services within the enterprise and facilitate smooth integration with new high-speed service
provider core infrastructures and Metro Ethernet deployments
4.3.9 Enhanced Data, Voice, and Video Services
ETS/27I000/52(C&A-3)
a) Provides integrated IP Communications

b) Provides 10/1 00 and 10/1 00/1 000 line cards, which are field-upgradable with inline
power using a daughter card
c)Supports Inline Power as well as standards-based IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE)
d) Provides dense T1/E1 and foreign exchange station (FXS) voice over IP (VoIP) gateway
interfaces for public switched telephone network (PSTN) access and traditional phone, fax,
and private branch exchange (PBX) connections
e) Supports high-performance IP Multicast video and audio applications
f) Provides the integrated management necessary to effectively deploy a scalable,
enterprise-converged network
4.3.10 Highest Level of Interface Flexibility, Scalability, and Density

a) Provides the port densities and interface choices that large, mission-critical wiring closets,
core enterprise networks, and distribution networks require
b) Supports up to 576 10/100/1000 gigabit-over-copper ports or 1152 10/100 Ethernet ports
c)Features the industry's first 96-port 10/100 RJ-45 module, with optional, field-upgradable
support for 802.3af PoE
d) Provides up to 192 Gigabit Ethernet ports
e) Provides up to 13010 Gigabit Ethernet ports.
4.3.11 High-Speed WAN Interfaces

a) Provides high-speed WAN, ATM, and SONET interfaces that are compatible with other
core-network routers
b) Provides single-device management for WAN aggregation and for campus and metro
connectivity
c)Delivers maximum investment protection
d) Highly flexible modular architecture supports multiple generations of modules that are fully
interoperable with each other in the same chassis
e) Field-upgradable inline power for 10/100 Mbps and 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet modules
offers scalable IP telephony and wireless computing
f) A steady stream of new services modules adds to the deployment options
g) Includes network security, content switching, and voice capabilities
h) Future modules will increase performance, increase port density, and include additional
services
4.3.12 Ideal for Metro Ethernet WAN Services

a) 802.1Q and 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ), providing point-to-point and multipoint Ethernet
services
b) Ethernet over MPLS in MPLS backbone networks for superior network scaling, providing
VLAN translation capability
ETS/27I000/53(C&A-3)
c)Layer 2 and Layer 3 quality of service (QoS), facilitating tiered Ethernet service offerings
through rate limiting and traffic shaping
d) Superior high-availability features, including enhanced Spanning Tree Protocol, IEEE
802.1s, IEEE 802.1w, and IEEE 802.3ad link aggregation
4.3.13 Power
The core switch shall hold up to two load-sharing, fault-tolerant, hot-swappable AC or DC
power supplies. Only one supply is required to operate a fully loaded chassis. If a second
supply is installed, it operates in a load-sharing capacity. The power supplies are hot-swappable-a
failed power supply can be removed without powering off the system.
4.3.14 Environmental Conditions

The environmental conditions shall meet the following conditions.
Environmental Conditions
Parameter Performance Range
Operating Temperature 32 to 1 04°F (0 to 40°C)
Storage Temperature -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C)
Relative Humidity 10 to 90%, non condensing
Operating Altitude 3000 meters
Mean Time Between 7 years for system configuration
Failure (MTBF)
4.3.15 The standards compliance specifications
Compliance Specifications
Specification Number Description
Regulatory Compliance
Safety  UL 1950
 EN 60950
 CSA-C22.2 no. 950
 IEC 60950
 AS/NZA 3260
 21 CFR 1040
 EN 60825-1
 IEC 60825-1
 TS 001
EMC  FCC (CFR 47, Part 15) Class A
 VCCI
 CE Marking
 EN 55022
ETS/27I000/54(C&A-3)
 EN 55024
 CISPR 22
 AS/NZS 3548
 NEBS Level 3 (GR-1 089-CORE,
GR-63-CORE)
 ETSI ETS-300386-2
IEEE Compliance
802.1 802.1d  Bridging
 VLAN tagging
802.1p, q
 Per-VLAN Group Spanning Tree Protocol
802.1s  Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
802.1w  Identity-Based Networking Services (IBNS)
802.1x

802.3 802.3 10BASE-T, 10BASE-FL
802.3ad ● Link aggregation
802.3ab ● 1000BASE-T
● 10 Gigabit Ethernet
802.3ae
● PoE
802.3af 802.3u ● 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX
802.3x Flow control
802.3z 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX
RFC Compliance
ATM Protocol encapsulation over ATM Adaptation
1483, 2584 Level 5 (AAL-5)
ATM permanent virtual circuit (PVC) to 802.1q
tagging
Border Gateway Definitions of managed objects for BGP Version
1269
Protocol (BGP) 3 (BGP3)
BGP/Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
1745 interactions
1771 BGP4
1965 BGP4 autonomous system confederations
1966 BGP4 route reflection
1997 Communities attribute
2385 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Message
Digest Algorithm 5 (MD5) authentication for
BGP
2439 Route flap dampening
2796 Route reflection
2842 Capabilities advertisement
General Routing
Protocols 768 User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
783 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
791 IP
792 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
ETS/27I000/55(C&A-3)
793 TCP
826 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
854 Telnet
894 IP over Ethernet
903 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP)
906 TFTP Bootstrap
951, 1542 BOOTP, BOOTP extensions
1027 Proxy ARP
1122 Host requirements
ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP) IPv4
1256
router discovery
1519 Classless interdomain routing (CIDR)
1541 Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)
1591 Domain Name System (DNS) client
1619 PPP over SONET
1662 PPP HDLC-like framing
1812 IPv4
2131 BOOTP/DHCP
2338 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
1552 Internetwork Packet Exchange Routing
Information Protocol/Service Advertising
Protocol (IPX RIP/SAP)

IP Multicast 1112 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
1122 Host extensions, Distance Vector Multicast
2236 Routing Protocol (DVMRP) IGMP v1, v2, v3
IGMP v1, v2, v3 snooping
2283 Multicast Border Gateway Protocol (MBGP)
Protocol Independent Multicast sparse mode
2362 (PIM SX)
1075 DVMRP v3-07
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)
Draft PIM dense mode (PIM DX)
Draft Bidirectional PIM
Intermediate
System-to-Interme 1195 TCP
diate System
(IS-IS)
1377 PPP
2763 Dynamic host name exchange
2966 Domainwide prefixes
Label Switched
2211 Controlled load network element service
Path Tunnels
2702 Traffic engineering over MPLS
MPLS 2547 MPLS VPN
2961 Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) refresh
3031 MPLS architecture
3032 MPLS label stack encoding
3036 Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
ETS/27I000/56(C&A-3)
OSPF 1583 OSPFv2

1587 OSPF NSSA
1745 OSPF interactions
1765 OSPF database overflow
1850 OSPFv2 MIB, traps
1997 Communities and attributes
2154 OSPF digital signatures, MD5
2178 OSPFv2
2328 OSPF v2
OSPF opaque link-state advertisement (LSA)
2370 option
2385 TCP M5
2439 Route flap damping
2842 Capabilities advertisement
2918 Route refresh capability
RIP 1058 RIPv1
1723 RIPv2
2453 RIPv2
Miscellaneous
1866 HTML
Protocols
2030 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version
4 for IPv4, IPv6, and Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI)
2068 HTTP
Denial-of-Service
2267 Network ingress filtering
(DoS) Protection
ACLs: wire-speed
ICMP and IP-option control

IP broadcast forwarding control
Rate limiting using ACLs
Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF)
Server load balancing with Layer 3 and Layer 4
protection
SYN attack protection
Session control
Network
Management 782 VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP)
783 TFTP
854 Telnet
951 BOOTP
1155 Structure of Management Information (SMIv1)
1156 TCP/IP MIB
Simple Network Management Protocol Version
1157 1 (SNMPv1)
1212 MIB definitions
1213 SNMP MIB II
1215 SNMP traps
1256 ICMP router discovery
1285 Station management (SMT) 7.3
ETS/27I000/57(C&A-3)
1354 IP forwarding table MIB

1493 Bridge MIB
1516 Ethernet repeater MIB
1573 Interface table MIB
1643 Ethernet MIB
1650 Ether-like MIB
1657 BGPv4 MIB
1724 RIPv2 MIB
1757 Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB
1850 OSPFv2 MIB
1901, SNMPv2c
1907
1908 SNMPv1/v2 coexistence
2021 RMON2 probes
2037 ENTITY-MIB
2096 IP forwarding
2233 Interface MIB
RMON extension for switched networks
2613
(SMON) MIB
2668 802.3 media attachment unit (MAU) MIB
2787 VRRP MIB
2925 Ping/Traceroute/NS Lookup MIB
Sampled NetFlow
999 local messages
BSD Syslog with multiple servers
Configuration logging

Discovery Protocol
ENTITY-FRU-CONTROL-MIB
PAGP-MIB
STACK-MIB
STP-Extensions-MIB
Traffic Director Software
UDLDP-MIB
View
VLAN-Bridge-MIB
VLAN Director Software
VLAN-Membership-MIB
VTP-MIB
Workgroup MIB
SPAN and Remote SPAN (RSPAN)
HSRP
HC-RMON
HTML/HTTP management
NetFlow v1 export
RMON HP Open View
SMON-MIB
Standard Software security capabilities:
passwords and TACACS+
ETS/27I000/58(C&A-3)
Telnet client
Telnet management
Text-based CLI
Web-based GUI management tools
Security 1492 TACACS+
2138 RADIUS authentication
ACLs for Layers 2, 3, 4, and 7
Access profiles on all routing protocols
Access profiles on all management methods
Media Access Control (MAC) address
security/lockdown
Network Address Translation (NAT)
Network login (including DHCP/RADIUS
integration)
RADIUS accounting
RADIUS per-command authentication
Secure Copy Protocol (secure file transfer)
ETS/27I000/59(C&A-3)
PART 3 EXECUTION
5 TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION
5.1 TESTING
5.1.1 Introduction
(a) Testing is an essential part of the Structured Cabling System certification. All
cables (i.e. multi-pair, twisted pair, optical fibres cables) and termination hardware
shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cable performance under
installed conditions.
(b) The Contractor prior to system acceptance shall verify all conductors of each
installed cable good.
(c) Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable,
connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be
repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed.
(d) All cables shall be tested in accordance with this document and best industry
practices. If any of these are in conflict, the Contractor shall be responsible to bring any
discrepancies to the attention of the Employer for clarification and/or resolution.
(e) All tests shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the
Employer and to his satisfaction. The Contractor shall supply all necessary test
instrument, spares, consumables, connections and skilled labour required for the
installation and acceptance testing to be carried out.
5.1.2 Calibration Prior to Testing
(a) Calibration is needed to ensure that the test results are valid. A lot of parameters,
e.g., the Nominal Velocity Propagation (NVP), needed to be keyed-in to produce the
Pass/Fail limits. If the cable parameters are not the default values, wrong results may be
obtained without calibration.
(b) The cable tester must be supplied with an appropriate calibration certificate. The
calibration certificate must be from an accredited independent test laboratory not
affiliated with the tester's manufacturer. The calibration certificate shall clearly state the
standards and reference for calibration. The calibration certificate of all cable testers shall
be submitted before the commencement of test.
5.1.3 CAT 6 Twisted Pair Cabling Testing
(a) The Contractor must test all cables individually, according to the
specifications of the ISO/IEC 11801 CAT6/Class D UTP Channel specifications. The
Contractor shall note that testing up to the Basic Link specifications is not sufficient.
(b) The testing methodology shall be based on EIA/TIA 568 C.1

(Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of Twisted-Pair Cabling)
using a Level III cable tester. It shall be able to test all pair combinations up to the
frequency of at least 100 MHz.
(c) A pass/fail summary for all connections must be provided and referenced
ETS/27I000/60(C&A-3)
to the appropriate cable identification number and circuit or pair number. Any faults in the
wiring shall be corrected and the cable re-tested prior to final acceptance. In addition, a full
functional analysis report must be provided for each connection (i.e. include all tests
parameters performed, the expected test result and the actual test result achieved).
(d) Each installed cable shall be tested for installed length using a Time Domain
Reflectometry (TDR) type device.
(e) The cables shall be tested from patch panel to patch panel, block to block, patch
panel to outlet, block to outlet, patch panel to consolidation point or consolidation point to
outlet as appropriate.
(f) The cable length shall conform to the maximum distances set forth in the
TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Standard. Cable lengths shall be recorded, referencing the cable
identification number and circuit or pair number.
(g) For multi-pair cables, the longest pair length shall be recorded as the length for the
cable.
(h) Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP)
(i) The NVP defines the speed of propagation of the signals through
the conductor core. It is highly dependent on the insulation material covering the
conductor core. Because the cable tester works on Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR),
parameters such as length, delay slews, etc., is calculated from the time taken for the
signal to propagate through the cable and the NVP. Hence a wrong NVP input into the
cable tester will generate a wrong result for the cable tested.
(j) Test Suites
The Contractor must test each end-to-end connection for:
(i) Wiremap
Determines open circuit and short circuits, cabling polarity and straight, crossed, split,
reversed cable pairs
(ii) Length
Resolution within 0.1 m, with range accuracy of ±3m.
(iii) DC loop resistance
Accuracy of ±0.5 ohm
(iv) Attenuation
(v) Near-End CrossTalk (NEXT)
 From I00 kHz to I05 Mhz, with resolution of 0.1 dB
 Measurements shall be made between the six combinations of the four

conductor pairs
(vi) Attenuation to CrossTalk ratio (ACR)
ETS/27I000/61(C&A-3)
(vii) Combination of Attenuation and NEXT
(viii) Far-End CrossTalk (FEXT)
Measurements shall be made on twelve permutations of four conductor pairs
(ix) Equal Level Far-End CrossTalk (ELFEXT)
(x) Power Sum Near-End Cross Talk (PSNEXT)
(xi) Power Sum Equal Level Far-End CrossTalk (PSELFEXT)
(xii) Power Sum ACR
(xiii) Propagation Delay
(xiv) Delay slew
(xv) Return Loss: Return loss shall be measured on all four conductor pairs.
(xvi) Longitudinal Conversion Loss (LCL)
(xvii) Longitudinal Conversion Transfer Loss (LCTL) 4.1.4 CAT 5e Twisted Pair
Cabling Testing
The Contractor shall test to ensure that all CAT 5e UTP individual connections are
in compliance to the requirements of ISO/IEC DIS 11801 for CAT 5e/Class D
applications. All items as stated in the test suites for CAT 6 testing in Section 5.13
must be tested to the CAT 5e channel specifications.
5.1.5 Optical Fibre Cabling Testing
(a) The optical fibres shall be tested to the following latest standards:
(i) ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-171 (Attenuation by Substitution Measurement Short-length

Multimode Graded Index and Singlemode Fibre Cable Assemblies)
(ii) ANSI/TIA/EIA 455-50B (Light Launch Condition for Long Length Graded Index
Optical Fibre Spectral Attenuation Measurements)
(iii) ANSI/TIA/EIA 526-14A (Multimode Optical Fibre Cables)
(iv) ANSI/TIA/EIA 526-7 (Single Optical Fibre Cables)
(v) ANSI/TIA/EIA 204 (Restricted Modal Launch Bandwidth for Multimode Fibre)
(vi) ANSI/TIA/EIA IO7 (Return Loss for Fibre Optic Components)
(b ) All fibre terminations shall be visually inspected with a minimum 200 X

microscope to ensure that no surface imperfections exist after final polishing. In
addition, each fibre strand shall be tested for attenuation with an optical power meter
and light source (transmitted light measuring method). Cable length and splice
attenuation shall be carried out on all fibres and verified using an OTDR. The OTDR
measurements for length shall be performed in accordance with EIA/TIA-455-60. All
documented copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Employer at the end of
these tests. The spectrum to which tests shall be carried out shall be between 850
ETS/27I000/62(C&A-3)
nm and 1550 nm w/o changing connectors.
(c) To cut testing time, preference is given to tester that can simultaneously test and
store dual wavelength attenuation measurement.
(d) For multimode fibre optic testing, attenuation testing shall be performed with a
stable launch condition using a 2-meter multimode fibre patch cord that is wrapped 5
times around a mandrel. Test set-up and performance shall be conducted in
accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14 Standard, Method B.
(e) This mandrel wrapped fibre patch cord shall then be attached between the
Power Meter and Light Source for equipment calibration or referencing. The jumper
shall remain connected to the light source after this while the power meter is moved to
the far end, using a second fibre patch cord, to take measurements.
(f) Horizontal distribution multimode optical fibre attenuation shall be measured at

either 850 nanometers (nm) or 1300 nm using an LED light source and power meter.
(g) Backbone multimode fibre attenuation shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm in
one direction using an LED light source and power meter.
(h) Backbone singlemode fibre attenuation shall be measured at 13I0 nm and 1550 nm
in one direction using a laser light source and power meter. Test set-up and
performance shall be performed in accordance with
EIA/TIA-526-7 Standard, Method 1A. One 2- meter patch cords shall be used as test
references and two 2-meter patch cords for the actual test.
(i) Test evaluation for the panel to panel (backbone) shall be based on the values set
forth in the EIA/T1A-568-C.1 Annex H, Optical Fibre Link Performance Testing.
(j) Where concatenated links are installed to complete a circuit between

devices, the Contractor shall test each link from end to end to ensure the performance of
the system. After the link performance test has been successfully completed, each link
shall be concatenated and tested. The test method shall be the same used for the
test described above. The evaluation criteria shall be established between the
Employer. and the Contractor prior to the start of the test.
(k) Maximum attenuation for installed cables shall be evaluated based on the
following formula: manufacturer's maximum attenuation per kilometer, divided by I000
and then multiplied by the installed cable length in meters*. The adjusted cable
attenuation value shall be added to the manufacturers mean loss per mated pair of
connectors multiplied by the number of mated pairs under test**.
(I) The expected results for each cable (or group of cables of the same
nominal length) shall be calculated before the start of testing and recorded in a space
provided on the Contractor's test matrix. Each strand of fibre in the respective cable
shall be evaluated against this target number. Any fibres that exceed this value shall be
repaired or replaced at no cost to Employer.
(m) The OTDR used shall be able to provide the following readings:
i) Start pulse
ii) Dead zone
ETS/27I000/63(C&A-3)
iii) Connector pair
iv) Connector loss
v) Cable loss
vi) Fusion splice or bend loss
vii) Mechanical splice
viii) End of f ibre Termination point
ix) Fibre break
x) Fibre bend
xi) Cursor
xii) Distance
xiii) Continuity testing
(n) The Contractor shall provide both printed and electronic copies of
OTDR traces providing proof of a system's integrity and performance to the
Employer. A trace of the entire length of fibre, commonly known as a "signature
trace" shall be provided.
(o) For multimode fibre, the Contractor shall perform bandwidth testing to ensure all
fibres meet the ISO 11801 specifications for 0M2 fibre type: 500 MHz.km at 850
nm and 500 MHz.km at 1300 nm.
(p) All fibre optic cables shall be tested by power source and light meter prior
to installation and again after installation.
5.1.6 Other Component Testing
(a) Thorough operational tests shall be carried out on all data and voice circuits.
(b) All the floorbox connections, i.e. CAT 5e UTP cables and optical fibre
cables shall be individually tested by the Contractor after installation of the cables, on a
point-to-point basis. All patch cords, station cords and accessories, etc., must also be
tested.
5.1.7 Verification of Tests
(a) The Contractor shall make accurate records of all tests and shall
furnish test certificates and a schedule of the test results in an approved form. One copy of
such record and of each test certificate shall be submitted to the Employer for review.
(b) After the submission of full test reports, the Employer shall perform random
testing of at least I0% of the outlets for verification using its own cable tester. If the test
result differs, then the Contractor must perform retest of the connection. Depending on the
severity of the difference, the various levels of retests are needed:
(i) If the result differs by 1% of the test points, retest the connections
in question, plus random I0% of all connections.
ETS/27I000/64(C&A-3)
(i) If the result differs by 5% of the test points, retest the connections in question,
plus random 50% of all connections.
(ii)If the result differs by I0% of the test points, retest all connections.
If subsequent retest yields more differences, then a complete retest shall be initiated,
with extensive checks on the NVP and the calibration of the cable testers involved.
5.1.8 Rectification of Test Failures
(a) All materials, devices and equipment supplied or erected that fail the test(s) shall
be replaced or rectified at once by the Contractor without additional cost to the facility. The
tests shall be repeated for the replaced equipment.
(b) However, the decision whether to replace or rectify the defective part or parts or the
whole of the equipment/system shall rest with the Employer.
5.2 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CABLE TESTER
5.2.1 Introduction
(a) The following sections specify the requirements for the cable tester that shall be used
by the Contractor.
(b) The Contractor shall provide two types of tester: one for testing and certification of
twisted pair cabling and another for optical fibre cables.
(c) The cable tester for twisted pair cabling shall be able to test UTP cable to
standards as well as to identify and isolate cable faults. It shall also provide simple test
(such as function as power and loss meter, carry out loss budget certification) for optical
fibre cables (but not the full functionality of the OTDR)
5.2.2 Physical
(a) The cable tester shall be a single portable unit. Remote and/or module
attachments are allowed. The unit must be ruggedized for outdoor usage and offer
protection from shock damage. A rugged carrying case must be included.
(b) The cable tester shall have a rechargeable power supply (battery) that must
provide a minimum of I0 hours of continuous usage before recharging. Recharging time
shall not exceed 25% of total usage time. The cable tester must also have a spare
rechargeable battery pack.
5.2.3 Precision
a) The cable tester for twisted pair cabling shall employ the Time Domain
Reflectometry (TDR) method for measurement. The TDR shall have no "dead zone" in
testing. It shall be able to test up to 0 m (at the cable interface). The cable tester shall meet
and exceed the Level III specification as specified by ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.1. It shall have a
±1.5 dB margin in overall accuracy, traceable to a recognizable calibration standards such
as National Institute of Standards and Technology (NISI).
b) The OTDR tester shall have the following accuracies:
ETS/27I000/65(C&A-3)
(i) ±0.2 dB at reference conditions (-20 dBm), traceable to a recognizable

calibration standards such as National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
(ii) ±0.2 dB + MT-RJ connector accuracy (± 0.75 dB)
5.2.4 Modules
(a) The cable tester for twisted pair cabling shall support testing the full functionality (see
4.2.5) for 100 Ohms balanced cable, UTP, RJ45 – CAT 5e and 6 cables. In addition,
the cable tester shall be able to determine the length and attenuation of the single
and multimode fibres with SC connectors.
(b) The cable tester for optical fibre cabling shall support testing the full functionality (see
4.2.5) for both singlemode (1310 and 1550 nm) and multimode cables (850 and 1300
nm).
5.2.5 Functionality
(a) The cable tester shall be able to support the following functions:
i) Autotest
ii) Conformance Testing
iii) Wiremap
iv) Basic and Channel Link Testing
(b) The cable tester shall be able to support future feature upgrade via software
downloads. The cable tester shall come with all accessories needed to perform the
software feature upgrades.
5.2.6 Test Standards
(a) The cable tester for twisted pair cabling shall comply fully with the testing standards
as specified in ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.1.
(b) The same cable tester for twisted pair cabling must also be able to do conformance
testing to the following network standards:
(i) EIA/TIA/ANSI 568C: CAT 5e and 6
(ii) ISO/IEC/DIS 11801: Classes D and E – Permanent link or Channel Tests
(iii) IEEE 802.3: 10Base5, 10Base2, 10BaseT
(iv) IEEE 8023u: 100Base-TX, 100Base-T4
(v) IEEE 802.5: Token Ring 4 Mbps and 16Mbps
(vi) ANSI TP-PMD, FDDI and CDDI interface
(vii) IEEE 802.3z: 1000BaseT, 1000BaseLX, 1000Base SX
ETS/27I000/66(C&A-3)
(viii) IEEE 802.3ae: 10Gigabit Ethernet
(ix) ATM: All UTP and fibre PMD interface
(c) The cable tester for optical fibre cabling shall meet the requirements of EIA/TIA
526-14A for multimode cables and EIA/TIA 526-7 for single mode cables. The light
source shall meet the requirements of EIA/TIA455-50B.
5.2.7 Test Suites
(a) The cable tester for twisted pair cabling shall be able to perform the
following singular tests:
(i) Wiremap
Determines open circuit and short circuits, cabling polarity and straight, crossed,
split, reversed cable pairs
(ii)Length
Resolution within 0.1m, with range accuracy of ±3m.
(iii) DC loop resistance
Accuracy of ±0.5
(iv) Attenuation
From I00 kHz to 105 MHz, step sizes not greater than 100 kHz and accuracy of
±0.3 dB.
(v) Near-End CrossTalk (NEXT)
From 100 kHz to 105 Mhz, with resolution of 0.1 dB
(vi) Attenuation to CrossTalk ratio (ACR)
Combination of Attenuation and NEXT
(vii) Far-End CrossTalk (FEXT)
(viii) Equal Level Far-End CrossTalk (ELFEXT)
(ix) Power Sum Near-End Cross Talk (PSNEXT)
(x) Power Sum Equal Level Far-End CrossTalk (PSELFEXT)
(xi) Power Sum ACR
(xii) Propagation Delay
(xiii) Delay slew
(xiv) Return Loss
(xv) Time Domain Reflection and Analysis
ETS/27I000/67(C&A-3)
Location of fault
(b) The cable tester must support autotest of the above single tests, and
support auto conformance testing to the test standards. The speed of per autotest for a
cable shall not exceed 30 seconds.
(c) The cable tester shall have diagnostics features to pinpoint the location of
cable faults:
(i) Poor/broken connection
(ii)Mixed/different category wires/connectors
5.2.8 Capture and Analysis
(a) The cable tester shall provide the ability to generate various reports on
circuit usage and activity based on station addresses, protocols, bad packets, etc.
(b) The captured statistics shall be able to be displayed on the console in both
numerical and graphical formats. The cable tester shall also allow the statistics to be
captured to disk in a format suitable for later import into database and spreadsheet
programs for analysis.
(c) The cable tester shall have the option of summary Pass/Fail reporting and full analysis
reporting.
(d) The cable tester must support the capture and storage of at least 800 sets of
results before a download is necessary. The cable tester shall also support the printing
of customized statistics reports to the print and disk file.
5.2.9 Self Test and Diagnostics
The cable tester must be able to self test the functionality of each of its module and
component.
5.2.10 Adjustment and Calibration
(a) The cable tester shall allow adjustments in the Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP)
parameter for cable measurements. This value shall default to the standard value for
regular cables.
(b) The cable tester must be supplied with an appropriate calibration

certificate. The calibration certificate must be from an accredited independent test
laboratory, e.g. ETL, not affiliated with the tester's manufacturer. The calibration certificate
shall clearly state the standards and reference for calibration.
(c) The cable tester must be re-calibrated every one (1) year.
5.3 D O C U M E N T ATI O N
5.3.1 Introduction
(a) This section describes the types and content of documentation required for the
network cabling infrastructure.
(b) Both hardcopy and soficopy format shall be submitted and maintained. The current
ETS/27I000/68(C&A-3)
standard formats for softcopy submission shall be:
(i) Test files in latest Microsoft Word format.
(ii) Technical drawings in latest AutoCAD format.
(iii) Project schedules in latest Microsoft Project format. Databases in latest Microsoft
Access format.
(iv) Tables in latest Microsoft Excel format.
(v) CAD drawings in latest AutoCAD format.
5.3.2 Pre-installation Documentation
The Contractor must submit these documents before the installation begins.
(a) Design Document
The detailed design document shall include:
(i) CAD drawings of all layout of the building infrastructure and Structured Cabling
System subsystems, including the assignment and placements of work area outlet,
connectors, cross connect, equipment mounting in each Main Comms Equipment Room
and Comms Riser Room, cable runs and pathways across the floor/ceiling/risers.
(ii)The dimensions of all devices and equipment proposed.
(iii) Details of accommodation requirements including space allocation with allowance

for access for maintenance, floor loading, limitations on the siting of individual
components in relation to each other, and engineering storage/work areas.
(iv) All other structural and electrical requirement shall also be indicated.
(b) Implementation Schedule
The implementation schedule shall contain the timetable for the various installation activities.
These include:
i) Site preparation
ii) Material supplies' arrival dates
iii) Installation times for various materials/work phases
iv) System testing and commissioning
The schedule shall clearly indicate the lead times and duration for various processes, and
identify the critical processes and inter-dependencies of the various tasks.
(c) Quality Assurance (QA) Plan
The Contractor shall prepare an overall Quality Assurance (QA) plan for approval by the
Employer. The QA plan shall include:
(i) Procedures to assure and verify the materials delivered are up to the specifications.
ETS/27I000/69(C&A-3)
(ii)The installation process is according to standards and specifications.
(iii) Procedures to assure and verify the tests are conducted in

accordance with the relevant standards.
5.3.3 Installation In-progress Documentation
These documents must be submitted by the Contractor to the Employer during the regular
meetings in the installation period. These documents are used to track the progress of the
installation. The documents include:
(a) Status of installation to date, and time surplus/lags based on the Implementation
Schedule.
(b) Estimated completion date based on the actual progress of installation.
(c) Any deviation(s) from the plans in the Design Document.
(d) Status of materials delivered and installed, and outstanding items.
(e) List of installation issues currently faced.
5.3.4 Installation Completion Documentation
These documents must be submitted by the Contractor upon completion of the

installation, as part of the requirements for commissioning of the network cabling
infrastructure. The documents include:
(a) Test results of all connections, in both a summary table tabulating

Pass/Fail results and full detail reports of each connection.
(b) A certified set of CAD drawings of the actual installation.
(c) Wiring and inter-connections diagrams.
(d) Labelling cross-reference tables.
(e) An updated version of the design document to provide details of the actual
installed infrastructure.
(f) Operating manuals for any hardware components supplied by the Sub-
Contractor.
(g) An electronic copy of all cable labeling information in a standard format

that can be incorporated into any Cable Management Subsystem in future.
5.3.5 Post-installation Maintenance Documentation
These documents are to be carried out and maintained by the Contractor (during the
Post-installation Full Warranty period and if he is awarded the maintenance option). The
documents include:
(a) Updates of the moves, adds and changes to the end user
configuration/patching.
ETS/27I000/70(C&A-3)
(b) Updates of the moves, adds and changes to the components and cable
runs.
6 CERTIFICATION, WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
6.1 Structured Cabling System Warranty and Certification
6.1.1 Certification
There are two types of certifications required:
(a) Material certification before tender award
(i) All material and equipment to be supplied shall come with a

certification within the Tender Proposal. This is especially important for cables
and connectors. The purpose of the certification is to verify that the minimum
requirements specified in Section 1 and 2 are met.
(ii) A Tender Proposal will not be considered if the cable and

connector specifications are not submitted or incomplete.
(b) Installation certification after installation completion
After the completion of the installation, the Contractor shall supply the manufacturer's
certificate that the installation is done according to this specifications for Structured
Cabling System, and that it will honor all warranties specified in Section 6.1.2 for the
installation.
6.1.2 Warranty
The Contractor shall provide the following types of warranty:
(a) Post-installation full warranty
(i) The Contractor shall also provide a full warranty period of at least sixteen (16)
calendar months effective from the date of commissioning of the entire Structured
Cabling System. The warranty shall cover all parts and services without any extra
charge to the Employer.
(ii) During this warranty period, all defective components shall be replaced within
two (2) hours from the time of fault notification for critical faults affecting operation of
network and within three (3) hours for less critical faults.
(b)25 year Warranty
In addition, the Contractor and its suppliers shall provide the following warranties
unconditionally for 25 years:
(I) Passive Warranty
The Contractor shall provide a 25-year unconditional passive product war ranty on
all the components, backed by the manufacturer. This warranty shall cover the
free replacement of all defective parts (and labour associated with the replacement),
with the manufacturer's original parts, during the 25 year period.
ETS/27I000/71(C&A-3)
(ii)Performance Warranty
The Contractor shall provide a 25-year unconditional warranty on the performance of

the Structured Cabling System up to the component level, backed by the
manufacturer. The Structured Cabling System shall be able to support all
applications defined, currently or in the future, for that particular type of cabling, and
the performance for the application must be consistent throughout the 25 year
period. This warranty shall cover the free replacement of all parts and labour, if the
performance guarantee is violated.
(iii) EMI/EMC Warranty
The Contractor shall provide a 25-year unconditional warranty on the

electromagnetic interface and compatibility (EMI/EMC) of the Structured Cabling
System up to the component level, backed by the manufacturer. The Structured
Cabling System shall not be susceptible to external EMI, and will not emit EMI to affect
other equipment, currently or in future, as specified in Section 3. This warranty shall
cover the free replacement of all parts and labour, if. this EMI/EMC guarantee is
violated.
6.2 Maintenance Support
6.2.1 Type of Maintenance Support
A 5-year maintenance option has been included in this tender for the Contractors to price.
The maintenance contract shall cover:
(a) General Maintenance Support
General maintenance support includes:
i) Routine re-patching and the tying up of the patch cords at the cross connect.
ii) Troubleshooting of faulty cable connections.
iii) Troubleshooting of faulty cables.
iv) Responding to a request to carry out add, move and delete request.
(b) Equipment Maintenance Support
(i) The Contractor shall provide preventive maintenance for the Structured Cabling
System proposed.
(ii) All defective components shall be replaced / repaired within two

(2) hours from the time of fault notification for critical faults affecting operation of
network and within three (3) hours for less critical faults.
6.2.2 Maintenance Requirements
(a) The Contractor shall develop the maintenance checklist according to the
recommendation of the manufacturer, propose the frequency and the thime taken to
perform each preventive maintenance work. The maintenance hours shall be subject to
the approval of the Employer. As a guard guideline, maintenance work tat would affect
the operation of a network would normally have to carry out during the off peak hours
which could be between 12 midnight to 6 am.
ETS/27I000/72(C&A-3)
(b) The Contractor's local support team shall respond to queries and maintenance call
within the specified time limits during the maintenance hours. There shall be a single point
of contact for all maintenance calls.
(c) The Contractor shall have the facility to record all maintenance call(s)
made outside the maintenance hours and respond within the specified time limits.
(d) The Contractor shall provide the maintenance organization structure clearly
identifying the responsibility of various parties involved. The Contractor shall state the number,
qualification and experience of all maintenance personnel (s).
7.1 Phases of Installation
The following sections describe the installation phases and their processes in chronological order.
The tender and evaluation processes are not described.
7.1.1 Appointment of Key Personnel
(a) At the time of award, the Contractor shall appoint the following key personnel:
(i) Project Manager
(ii)Site Supervisor
(b) The Employer has the right to review and reject the appointment of any key
personnel.
7.1.2 Submission of Pre-installation Documentation
All documentation described in Section 5.3.2 shall be provided by the Contractor to the
Employer at the following times:
(a) The Design and Coordination Document including the CAD drawings
shall be submitted within two (2) weeks after the date of award or at a date agreed mutually
with the Main Contractor.
(b) The QA plan shall be submitted within four (4) weeks after the date of award.
(c) The Implementation Schedule shall be submitted within six (6) weeks
after the date of award.
7.1.3 Installation
(a) The Contractor shall install all materials according to the installation procedures as
specified by the manufacturer and the relevant standards. The installation shall take
place according to the Implementation Schedule.
(b) The Employer shall hold regular meetings with the Contractor's Project Manager and
Site Supervisor to review the installation progress. Documentation as described in
Section 5.3.3 shall be submitted by the Contractor before each review meeting.
7.1.4 Testing
(a) After the installation, the Contractor shall perform testing as specified in Section 5.1.
ETS/27I000/73(C&A-3)
The Contractor shall prepare the acceptance test documents and submit them in
advance to the Employer for approval prior to the acceptance tests. The Employer
reserves the right to modify the acceptance test specifications where necessary.
(b) The Employer shall arrange to verify the test results as specified in Section
4.1.7. After testing, the Contractor shall prepare all acceptance test reports and submit
them to the Employer as part of the documentation requirements.
(c) In the event of the component units and/or cable failures in such test
and/or system proposed cannot meet the Technical Specifications due to the usage of
inconsistent component units or cables, the Contractor shall re-design the system or
replace with proper component units or cables and re-submit to the Employer for final
approval before the installation is commenced. Any extra costs incurred by such re-design
or replacement of component units and cables shall be borne by the Contractor.
7.1.5 Walkthrough and Acceptance
(a) At the conclusion of the installation, the Employer shall conduct a walkthrough
with the Contractor to check for installation quality, accurate performance of the work,
and to verify engineering diagrams. Any modifications to the documentation or the
installation that may be required shall be accomplished within a two-week period.
(b) If the installation is approved by the Employer as according to plans, and the
test results are positive, then a customer acceptance certificate shall be issued. Please
note that a customer acceptance certificate does not relieve the Contractor from
repairing any cabling errors or improperly labeled circuits, caused by the Contractor, that
may be discovered at a later date.
7.1.6 Commissioning
(a) Commissioning shall start after all users have shifted in and used the new
network cabling infrastructure for a period of at least one (1) month without any
problems. The Employer reserves the right to delay the commissioning if any
problem occurs, till the Contractor has rectified all problems, and the system is proven
stable and problem-free for a period of one month'.
(b) After the Employer has approved to commission the installation, the Sub-
Contractor shall submit to the Employer:
(i) The Installation Completion Documentation (Section 5.3.4)
(ii) Certification and warranty documents for Structured Cabling System
The infrastructure shall be commissioned and the Defects Liability Period started
after all the above documents have been submitted and reviewed.
7.1.7 Warranty and Maintenance
(a) Warranty as specified in Section 6.1.2 shall start after the commissioning.
(b) During the Post-installation Full Warranty period, the Contractor

shall maintain the Structured Cabling System infrastructure and update the Installation
Completion Documentation as and when there are changes to the documentations. The
Contractor shall also keep and maintain the Post-installation Maintenance Documentation
during the Post-installation Full Warranty period.
ETS/27I000/74(C&A-3)
DIVISION 33 : UTILITIES
SECTION 337983 SITE
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
SECTION 337983 – SITE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE
i) Read and conform to all electrical Sections of these specifications. The

general instructions for electrical Division, Section 018926, apply to and
form part of all electrical Sections.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS
i) The scope of work shall cover the supply, design, manufacture, testing in
the factory, packing, insurance, delivery to site, unloading, installation,
testing and commissioning of all site grounding conductors with all the
necessary accessories in accordance with this technical specification.
ii) Supply, deliver, installation of 36 numbers 150 x 150 x 31.5 mm steel H-

pile at 6m length acting as M&E earth electrodes and pile to 5.5m depth
from the lowest floor level in various M&E plant rooms. The H-pile shall
protrude 0.5m above the lowest level floor level for the purpose of cad
welding to copper tapes installed in ring circuits. After cad welding, the
exposed H-pile shall be cut down to appropriate length and painted to
prevent corrosion.
iii) Upon completion of the site earth electrodes, Contractor is required to

engage Professional Engineer (PE) to carry out earth resistance tests of
each earth electrodes and in ring circuits using appropriate earth resistance
tester. A report of the recorded earth resistance value and layout plan
showing each earth electrode shall be endorsed by the PE and submitted to
the Employer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i) The grounding system shall include, without being limited to, the following:
a. Frames of main supply transformers, neutral grounding of transformers.
b. Main 230/400V low voltage switchboards and distribution boards.
c. Main 11KV medium voltage switchgears
d. Frames of all motors with separate ground wire to nearest MCC ground
bus.
e. Motor control centres, starters and control panels.
f. Building steel.
g. Emergency generators, elevators and escalators.
h. Air-conditioning systems.
i. Water pipes including sprinkler pipes.
j. Exposed Metallic Parts of the Building.
k. Steel cable trunking, tray and ladder
l. Steel underfloor trunking and junction boxes
ii) All equipment earth conductors outside the electrical rooms or closets, except
ETS/337983/1(C&A-3)
DIVISION 33 : UTILITIES
SECTION 337983 SITE
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
bare conductors which are part of a cable assembly, shall have the insulation
coloured green/yellow and shall be installed in the same conduit as the circuit
wiring.
iii) Earth conductors shall be copper, not smaller than 10mm2, except as
indicated. For general grounding of exposed metallic parts or pipes, the size
of the grounding conductor shall not be smaller than 35 mm2.
iv) Earth bar shall be 6mm x 30mm x 450mm by length as indicated on

drawings. Each earth bar shall be tagged with an engraved plastic tag
indicating the measured earth resistance value of the grounding ring circuit.
v) 150 x 150 x 31.5 mm steel H-pile at 6m length acting as M&E earth electrodes
and pile to 5.5m depth from the lowest floor level in various M&E plant rooms
vi) Connections to steel H-piles shall be made by cad welding and painted over
to prevent corrosion.
vii) Provide Transient Earth Clamp for equipotential bonding to eliminate earth
loops and earth differential in transient condition only. It shall be automatic
reset after operation and shall be in robust housing for extended outdoor use.
- 100kA 8/20us surge rating
- 500V, 350V or 230V ‘breakdown’ voltage
viii) Earth bars in various M&E plant room shall be linked by means of earth
conductor as indicated in the drawings.
2.2 STANDARDS
The equipment and material used and the method of construction as applicable shall
conform to the following latest British Standards (BS). These standards shall be
minimum requirement of the equipment.
i) BS 7430 Code of Practice for Earthing.
ii) BS 951 Electrical earthing clamps and Bonding specification.
ETS/337983/2(C&A-3)
DIVISION 48 : ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION
SECTION 481126 STANDBY DIESEL
GENERATING SET
SECTION 481126 - STANDBY DIESEL GENERATING SET
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1 The scope of works shall include the design, supply, delivery, installation, testing
and commissioning of the automatic mains failure standby diesel generator set c/w
underground diesel storage tanks, underground concrete pits with inspection
manholes, day tanks, AMF control panel, battery banks, fuel pump systems,
pipeworks air intake and outlet attenuation, engine exhaust system, suspension
brackets, hangers with dampers, associated power and control cables.
1.2 The generating set shall be designed for fully automatic operation on mains failure
and shall be specialist engineered, factory-tested and assembled. The generating
set shall comply fully with BS7698, ISO 8528 : Reciprocating internal combustion
engine driven alternating current generating sets.
1.3 The generating set shall be rated for 12 hrs continuous operation and for 10%
overload for 1 hour in every 12 hours operation as defined in BS 5000 : Part 3
(Prime rating). The set shall be capable for starting and operation at the rated
output at 0oC and an altitude of 540 meters above mean sea level.
1.4 The generator’s engine and alternator shall be sized to handle at least 60% of the
step load based on the full rating of the generator set.
1.5 Under normal conditions, the generating set shall be de-energised and shall be
stationary. Upon failure of any phase of the main supply or when voltage fall below
85% of nominal, a signal shall be transmitted from the mains failure sensing relay
which is monitoring the mains supply upon which the genset shall start
automatically. The generating set shall be switched over to load when the set has
run up to its operating point. The total time taken for the load to switch from mains
failure to the standby generating set shall not exceed 10 seconds. The generating
set shall continue to supply the load until the mains supply is restored; all the
equipment shall then automatically reset and shall be ready to accept a further
mains failure signal and the generating set shall continue to run at no load for ten
minutes for cooling down before shutdown.
1.6 Together with the tender submission, the Contractor shall submit complete list of
tools, spares and test equipment and generating set expendables required during
the defects liability period. A detailed maintenance programme as recommended
by the manufacturer for the genset during the defects liability period shall be
submitted. This maintenance programme shall meet the requirements of the
above Standards.
1.7 Contractor shall also submit full details on operation and performance of the
engine, alternator, control and all necessary equipment. Proposed layout of all the
equipment including the fuel tanks, battery bank, exhaust piping, pumps, fan,
generator room supply and exhaust silencer and the control panels shall also be
submitted.
1.8 Noise level curves and data of the standby generating set shall be submitted.
1.9 The generating set shall also comply with the following:
ETS/481126/1(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
i. balance quality not less than the recommendations of the International

Organisation of Standardisation (ISO) 1973
ii. vibration severity shall be Grade B in accordance with ISO 2372 : 1983 (for
this purpose the classification shall be taken as Class IV).
2. BASIC CONSTRUCTION
2.1 The generating set shall be complete with all necessary equipment and
accessories to enable it to function in good order whether such be directly
mentioned herein or otherwise, including diesel engine, alternator, engine control
panel, starting system, fuel system, engine exhaust system and generator room
fresh air intake and exhaust system.
2.2 The generating set shall comprise a direct injection, cold starting, water cooled,
pressure lubricated and compression ignition diesel engine coupled to a brushless
alternator of rating specified at 400V 3 phase, 4 wire 50Hz AC, 0.8 power factor.
All equipment associated with a particular machine shall be mounted on a common
bed-plate which shall be robustly constructed using rolled steel sections and
capable of withstanding stresses due to being unevenly supported during transport
and shall be suitable for mounting on a plain foundation slab. All equipment shall
be fully tropicalised and suitable for use in a hot humid atmosphere having an
ambient temperature stated in ambient conditions of General Requirement
Section 018926.
PART 2 PRODUCT
3. DIESEL ENGINE
3.1 The prime mover shall be a 4 stroke cycle engine suitable for prime duty, water
cooled, designed to run at a speed of 1500 rpm with Class A diesel fuel and shall
be manufactured in accordance with BS 5514.
3.2 The engine shall be of standard design but shall embody any additional features
that may be considered necessary to ensure instant availability at all times after
long periods of disuse and to enable the set to carry full load at the shortest
possible time of starting under those conditions.
Accessories mounted on the engine shall include but not be limited to the
following:
i. Speed Governor
ii. Overspeed trip mechanism
iii. Hours run counter
iv. Tachometer
v. Lubricating oil pump
vi. Exhaust outlet, oil and water thermometer
ETS/481126/2(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
h. diode voltage regulator.
v. Charger control and protection
The charger shall be provided with the following:
1 automatic/manual charging selector switches;
2 manual float/boost charge selector switches;
3 reset button for battery overvoltage protection;
4 mains on/off input circuit breaker.
vi. Radio Interference Suppression
Charger equipment cubicle shall be adequately earthed and equipped with

radio frequency suppressors to limit interference in accordance to BS 800.
vii Battery Monitoring System
a. The system will runs a battery load test every time the engine is
required to start.
b. The system will continually monitors the charging system for low
and high voltage and provide visual and audible indication of the
battery conditions stated as follows:
Low DC voltage - battery voltage less than 25V DC, except

during engine cranking
High DC voltage - battery voltage greater than 32V DC
Weak Battery - battery voltage less than 14.4V DC for

more than 2 seconds during engine ranking
c. This system will provide warning messages for battery to be

serviced before experiencing a failure to start.
3.7 Lubrication
Lubrication shall be by pressure lubricating oil system with engine driven oil pump
in conjunction with the built-in oil-to-coolant heat exchanger. Easily accessible
multiple full flow filters with renewable elements shall be provided. Low lubricating
oil pressure trip with visual and audible indication and oil pressure gauge shall be
incorporated. A Crankcase pressure release valve shall be provided to operate
during excess pressure
3.8 The engine shall meet the ‘EU EMISSION REGULATIONS FOR OFF-ROAD
DIESEL ENGINES-STAGE 1’ requirements.
4. ALTERNATOR
ETS/481126/7(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
4.1 General
The alternator shall be of brushless self-excited pattern protected by a drip proof

screen manufactured and type tested to BS 4999 and in accordance with IP 23 of
IEC.
4.2 Windings Insulation
All windings shall be insulated to Class 'H' of BS 2757 specially impregnated for
tropical duty, and shall be suitable for use in humid atmosphere having an ambient
temperature stated in ambient conditions of General Requirement Section 018926.
The stator and rotor windings of the alternator and exciter shall have an oil
resistant varnish finish. For protection of winding due to overheating, thermistors
shall be embedded to stop the set in case the temperature of winding rises above
the safe valve.
4.3 Bearings
The alternator has single bearing arrangement to ensure perfect alignment under
all conditions. The bearings shall be ball or roller type that shall be pre-packed with
lubricant for life.
4.4 Output Terminal
The output terminal box shall be rigidly fixed to the frame in an accessible position
to facilitate reception of the incoming cables or busway from a floor trench. The
incoming cables shall be terminated into the alternator in such a manner as to
withstand vibrations from the alternator.
4.5 Coupling
The alternator shall be flange mounted to the engine flywheel housing, forming a
rigid arrangement for precision alignment. The coupling shall be flexible rubber
bush type bolted to the fly wheel and keyed to the alternator motor shaft and shall
be such designed that it can be easily dismantled and re-assembled by unskilled
labour without special tools or gauges. Shaft misalignment shall be within 80
microns in the four quadrants.
4.6 Automatic Voltage Regulator
A rapid response voltage regulator sensing three phase voltage shall be provided
in the engine control panel to regulate the generated voltage. The overall voltage
regulation from no load to full load, including cold to hot variations and load power
factor between 0.8 lagging to unity shall be within + 1½% of the nominal voltage.
Regulation should be maintained as specified at all load conditions to ensure stable
operation.
The grade of voltage regulation shall be VR2.23 in compliance with Part 40 of BS

4999. The voltage shall be arranged to fall off with excessive reduction of engine
speed.
The excitation system shall be designed to promote rapid voltage recovery

following sudden application or disconnection of load.
The voltage regulator shall be provided with manual adjustment to enable the
output voltage at full load to be adjusted over the range of plus or minus 5%.
ETS/481126/8(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
iii. The pumps shall be tested by actual manual operation with suction from the
storage tank. Simulated automatic start/stop test of the rotary gear pumps
by draining the daily service tank or its indicator tube shall also be made.
iv. The contractor shall allow in his tender price for the provision of all labour
and materials (including sufficient diesel fuel) and equipment required for
the above tests.
8. PROTECTION AND AUTOMATIC FEATURES
8.1 Protective Devices
Each generator set shall be complete with all necessary mechanical and/or
electrical protective devices to ensure safe operation of the generating set. The
following protection shall be incorporated complete with microprocessor-based
monitoring, metering and control system for visual (Digital LED character display)
and audible alarm indications on the generator control panels.
i. High Coolant Temperature Trip
The temperature of the jacket cooling water shall be thermostatically

controlled to remain within predetermined limits during normal operating
conditions.
A separate thermostat in the engine cooling water circuit shall shut down
the engine, ring an alarm and give visual indication if the jacket water
temperature rises above the permissible level recommended by the
manufacturer.
ii. Overspeed Trip/ Under speed Alarm & Shut down
The engine shall shutdown when speed exceed a safe figure as described
in clause 3.3.1. The device shall monitor engine underspeed. It shall trigger
an alarm and shut down the engine.
iii. Overload, Over-voltage and Earth Fault
The alternator supply shall have over-current, over-voltage and earth fault
protection which shall be arranged to switch and lock out the associated
contactors. The overcurrent and earth fault relays shall be of IDMTL type
as specified in Section 262400 of Technical Specifications.
iv. Failure to start
The control shall permit a total number of six (6) starting attempts. A cycle
of three (3) starting attempts shall be followed by another cycle of three (3)
cranks. Should the set fail to start after the sixth attempt an overriding
sequence shall automatically lock out the system.
v. Under Voltage Trip (with adjustable relay of 0-5sec)
The alternator voltage shall be continuously monitored in three phases.
ETS/481126/17(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
safe operation of the engine.
xiii. Winding Temperature High Alarm

The winding temperature shall be monitored and the temperature switch shall
trigger the engine to shut down automatically when the temperature pass a
permissible temperature recommended by the maker. It shall also give a visual
and audible alarm.
xiv. Under and Over Voltage Frequency

The alternator voltage frequency shall be continuously monitored and shall
trigger the engine to shut down if the frequency falls below or rise above the
recommended value given by the supplier. It shall also give a visual and
audible alarm.
xv. General
All equipment, relays, visual indicators and audible alarms for each of the
above safety devices shall be within the scope of the works. The visual
indications shall be grouped on the control panels.
Similarly, provision shall be made for shutting down the diesel engine
whenever the generator circuit-breaker is operated by the earth fault protection
relay.
8.2 Automatic Operation Feature

The following features shall be incorporated for a fully automatic operating system.
i. Mains Voltage Monitoring

A sensing device shall be incorporated to monitor all the three phase voltages
of the mains and shall initiate a start pulse to the generating set if any one
phase should fail or sustain a fall in voltage (below 15% of the rated voltage).
This signal shall be over-ridden if the generating set has already started
remotely. Another signal shall be sent out to trip the mains incoming breaker
when this happen. An adjustable delay (0-5 sec) shall be provided to avoid
false alarm due to transient voltage fluctuation. The Contractor shall ensure
that there is no possibility of the mains breaker tripping out without starting the
generator.
ii. Load Transfer

The operation of the standby generating set shall incorporate the following
features:
a. An adjustable time delay (0-30 sec) for mains restoration to prevent
unnecessary switch-over due to momentary mains return.
b. The generator set shall continue to run at no-load for 5-10 minutes for
cooling before coming to stationary after the generator has been
disconnected from the mains busbar.
iii. Emergency Shutdown

The generating set shall be able to disconnect at any operating conditions by
operating an emergency push button. The generator set shall immediately shut
down and the automatic system blocked when this push button is operated.
8.3 Operating Mode Selection
This part of the specifications shall be read in conjunction with the Section of the
specifications on Remote monitoring and control by the Building Automation
ETS/481126/19(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
Genset: Fail to start

Plant Receive Attention
b. Engine Status
Low lubricating oil pressure trip

High lube oil temperature trip
High coolant temperature trip
Over-speed trip
Main Storage tank low level
Fuel day tank low level
Fuel day tank high level
Main fuel pump ON/OFF status
Standby fuel pump ON/OFF status
Failure to start
Winding temperature high alarm
c. Radiator/Ventilation Fan Status
Radiator fan ON/OFF status

Radiator coolant level low
Intake Ventilation fan on status
Intake Ventilation fan failure
d. Starting Battery and Charger Status
Automatic operation
Boost charging
Battery high voltage
Battery low voltage
Earth fault
Charger failure
Fuse blown indication
Low electrolyte
e. Generator Breaker Trip Status

Under voltage trip
Over current trip
Earth fault relay trip
f. Main Incoming Breaker

Main Genset No.__
Genset: Under voltage trip
Genset: Over current trip
Genset: Earth fault relay trip
Genset: under speed and for all safeties for shut down
The indication lamp shall be of high intensity light emitting diode (LED) and
shall be of standard colour of red, green, amber, blue and yellow. The
colour of the lamp shall subject to the EMPLOYER's approval. The
indication lamp status shall be easily discernible, even in broad daylight.
The fault indication lamps shall go off after the fault is cleared unless
otherwise suppressed by a separate Reset push button for clearing of fault
ETS/481126/22(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
Heater ON/OFF selector switch

Normal/bypass control selector switch for bypassing the lifts.
v. Meters
In addition the following meters shall be mounted on each control

panel. Meters shall meet the requirements specified in Section
262400 of Technical Specifications.
a. Generating Set
Voltmeter with selector switch (6 position)
3 Nos. Ammeters (with maximum demand)
3 Nos. Kilowatt meter (single phase)
Power factor meter
Frequency meter
Tachometer
Hours-run meter for engine
kVA & kVAr meter (for total & per phase)
b. Battery and Charger

Charger output Voltmeter
Charger output Ammeter
c. Mains Incoming Supply

Ammeter with selector switch/feed
Voltmeter with selector switch/feed
Frequency meter/feed
10. PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
10.1 General
The contractor shall supply and install all necessary protection equipment whether
specified or otherwise to fulfil the operational requirements, protection and
automatic features as specified under this section.
Generally, the control and protection equipment shall also meet the requirements
specified in Section 262400 of Technical Specifications.
10.2 Generator Circuit Breaker
An air circuit breaker (ACB) shall be incorporated for generator protection. ACB
shall have a short circuit withstand capability of 50 kA of 3 secs and shall tie-up
with the protection relay associated with it to protect the generator. Other
requirements shall be as specified in Section 262400 of the Technical
Specification.
10.3 Protection, Control and Monitoring Circuits
Protection, control and monitoring circuits shall be plug-in type printed circuit board
with test terminals at a suitable location to facilitate easy testing and maintenance.
ETS/481126/24(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
15. INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF GENERATING SETS
15.1 General
The generating set shall be installed on concrete plinth.
The scope of works shall include the installation and testing of the complete
standby generating set (both new and relocated sets) including the installation of
the supporting system such as fuel system, cooling system, exhaust system,
speed governing system and electrical system, etc as specified.
All openings on the building for the installation of pipework, cables, cable
supporting system etc shall be included in this contract. The Contractor is also
responsible for the making good of all openings including fire stopping of openings
to the requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau as well as to meet the acoustic
criteria specified.
Flexible piping and joints etc shall be installed to reduce the transmission of
vibration to the building. Vibration isolators shall be provided for the generating set
to prevent transmission of vibration and structure borne transmission of sound to
the building. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight
distribution. Calculations showing the sizing of the vibration isolators shall be
submitted to the EMPLOYER
15.2 Piping
All pipework for the water, exhaust and fuel systems shall be carried out in
accordance with the best engineering practise, using purpose made joints,
supports, elbows etc and shall be tested to the required recommended pressure
specified in the relevant British Standard. All installation shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the EMPLOYER
15.3 Cabling
The works shall include the supply and installation of all control cables for control
equipment, signal, automatically starting the generator, battery system and the
mains cables between the emergency switchboards and the generator including all
jointing and termination accessories. All cables shall run on cable supporting
system and the cable installation shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the
EMPLOYER All cabling/busway used for the generator set shall be fire-resistant
cables as specified in Section 260519 of the Technical specification.
15.4 Earthing
The generating set shall be earthed to the main earthing electrodes installed
outside the generator room as specified in Technical Specification.
Earthing shall be carried out in accordance with International Codes referred in the
Contract Document and Local Codes.
ETS/481126/29(C&A-3)
GENERATING SET
suitable high speed recorder).
k. The total harmonic distortion of the alternator coupled to

the engine meets the stated value (results to be
confirmed using a suitable waveform analyser).
l. Leakage test of the fuel tank to a test pressure of 70 Kilo

Pascal. Compressed air or dry nitrogen gas will be used
for the leakage test. It is not permissible to use water for
on-site testing.
m. All other tests as deemed necessary by the EMPLOYER
TEST E Reliability Tests
i. Each installation shall operate under the normal working

conditions, either continuously or intermittently as decided by
the Superintending Officer without failure or interruption of any
kind for a period of not less than thirty (30) days. This is known
as the reliability test period.
ii. Should any failure or interruption occur during the reliability test
period, the reliability test period of thirty (30) days shall
recommence after the contractor has remedied the cause of
the failure or interruption.
15.6 Re-testing
Should the generating set or any portion thereof fail to give the performance
required, then any re-test(s) which may be considered necessary by the
EMPLOYER shall be carried out with all costs to be borne by the Contractor.
15.7 Test Certificates
Triplicate sets of all principal test records and test certificates are to be supplied for
all test carried out in accordance with the provision of this Contract. These test
records and certificates shall be supplied for all tests, whether or not they have
been witnessed by the Superintending Officer. The information given on such test
certificates shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the
certificate refers.
15.8 Rejection of Plant
If any item fails to comply with the requirements of this specification in any respect
whatsoever at any state of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site, the
Superintending Officer may reject the item or defective component thereof,
whichever is considered necessary, and after adjustment or modification as
directed by the Superintending Officer, the Contractor is to submit the item for
further inspection and/or test. In the event of the defect on any item being of such
a nature that the requirement of the specification cannot be fulfilled by adjustment
or modification, such item is to be replaced by the Contractor at his own expenses,
to the complete satisfaction of the EMPLOYER.
ETS/481126/34(C&A-3)

M and e Specification

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

M and e Specification

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PACKAGE 3

PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING

CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY, PAKISTAN

PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONSULTANT

VOL III C & D

TENDER 16 Nov 2009

Mushtaq & Bilal Consulting Engineers

S. Mehboob & Company Consulting Engineers

1. SUMMARY OF AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - MECHANICAL WORKS

3. AMENDMENTS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL WORKS

4. Amended in specification. Section 220573: Facility Drainage Manholes

5. Amended in specification. Section 213000: Fire Pump

8. Amended in specification. Section220548: Vibration and Seismic Controls For Plumbing

9. Amended in specification. SECTION 210553: Identification For Fire Suppression Piping

13. Amended in specification. SECTION 223300: Electric Domestic water heater

14. Amended in specification SECTION 233413: Axial HVAC Fans

16. Amended in specification SECTION 237313: AHU

17. Amended in specification SECTION 238123: CRAC

18. Amended in specification SECTION 143100: Escalator

19. Amended in specification SECTION 143200: Moving Walk

20. Amended in specification SECTION 236513: Cooling Tower

21. Amended in specification SECTION 235233: Hot Water Boiler

22. Amended in specification SECTION 236416: Centrifugal Water Chiller

24. Amendment in specification SECTION 231123: Facility Natural –Gas piping

25. Amendment in specification SECTION 233516: Smoke Venting System

26. Amendment in specification SECT 23 05 00 - Common Work Results For HVAC

Summary of Changes for C&A-3

 page no. ETS/261213/4 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/261213/5 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/261313/3 is replaced with

The specification for Execution  page no. ETS/261313/5 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/261313/26 is replaced with

7. Section 262400: Low Tension Switchboard And Distribution

 page no. ETS/262400/10 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/263323/3 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/263323/4 is replaced with

9. Section 265100: Interior Lighting

Amended in specification.  page no. ETS/337983/1 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/337983/2 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/481126/2 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/481126/7 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/481126/17 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/481126/19 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/481126/22 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/481126/24 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/481126/29 is replaced with

 page no. ETS/481126/34 is replaced with

C Section 260533 - Cables Trunking and Conduits

D Section 260536 - Cable Tray and Cable Ladder

E Section 260539 - Underfloor Trunking System

F Section 261313 - 12KV Medium Voltage Switch Gear and Accessories

G Section 262400 - Low Tension Switchboard and Distribution Board

H Section 264613 - Lightning Protection System

Section 018919 Site Plumbing Utilities Performance Requirements MTS/018919/1 -

Section 018923 Site HVAC Utilities Performance Requirements MTS/018923/1 -

Section 143100 Escalators MTS/143100/1 -

Section 211300 Fire-Suppression Sprinkler System MTS/211300/1 -

Section 212000 Fire Extinguishing Systems MTS/212000/1 -

Section 212200 Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems MTS/212200/1 -

Section 213000 Fire Pumps MTS/213000/1 -

Section 220553 Identification For Plumbing Piping and Equipment MTS/220553/1 -